Home

620 WinLoader, Version 5.4, User Manual

image

Contents

1. Forced Open FP Fixed Port HEX Hexadecimal IAC Industrial Automation and Controls IMS Interprocessor Messaging Service I O Input Output KEYSW Keyswitch LDR Loader LED Light Emitting Diode LP Loader Port LSB Least Significant Byte Bit L T
2. 1 1 2 620 WinLoader 2 1 3 620 WinLoader Version 4 X User Manual 6 Purpose of this section This section presents Brief overview of 620 WinLoader and Guidelines on how to use 620 WinLoader Version 5 4 User Manual 2 620 WinLoader Overview 4 05 1 2 620 WinLoader General description The 620 WinLoader is a software hardware package that gives any Windows compatible personal computer the capability to program and monitor all 620 LCs using relay ladder logic The WinLoader interfaces with the 620 LC via an external converter The WinLoader includes a powerful software program that combines menu driven procedures and on line monitoring with integrated programming and documentation This ladder logic program lets you define the discrete control functions for your control strategy through relay ladder logic using familiar logic elements such as contacts coils timers and counters Refer to Section 2 of this manual for a complete overview of and specifications for the 620 WinLoader hardware platforms to include 623 6225 WinLoader which comes with an RS232 422 Converter In both hardware configurations the WinLoader package consists of the following one RS232 422 Converter
3. Software Program Mode TSR Terminate and Stay Resident UMS User Memory Session 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions ix References Publication Title Publication Number Binder Title Binder Number 620 0048 amp 0052 Data Collection Modules User Manual 620 8980 620 LC amp S9000 Reference MAS 8990 620 11 14 1631 Logic Controller User Manual 620 8976 620 12 1633 36 Logic Controller User Manual 620 8964 620 Logic Controller MAS 8991 623 WinLoader Overview LDR001 623 WinLoader 623 8983 623 WinLoader Installation LDR002 623 WinLoader 623 8983 623 WinLoader Implementation LDR003 623 WinLoader 623 8983 623 WinLoader Programming Reference LDR004 623 WinLoader 623 8983 623 WinLoader Function Blocks LDR006 623 WinLoader 623 8983 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions LDR007 623 WinLoader 623 8983 623 WinLoader Networking Functions LDR008 623 WinLoader 623 8983 623 WinLoader Utility Functions LDR009 623 WinLoader 623 8983 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 1 Section 1 Edit amp Display Functions Overview 1 1 Overview Section contents These are the topics covered in this sectio
4. 1 1 2 623 WinLoader 2 1 3 623 WinLoader Version 5 X User Manual 6 2 1 Overview 9 2 2 WinLoader Hardware Charactristics 11 2 3 Personal Computer and Printer Hardware Characteristics 15 2 4 620 LC Networks 16 3 1 Overview 17 3 2 Software Characteristics 18 Purpose of this section This section presents Overview of 620 WinLoader software 620 WinLoader software specifications and Listings of WinLoader files and file extensions 18 620 WinLoader Overview 4 05 3 2 Software Characteristics 620 WinLoader software The software program 623 6226 is provided in a CD Refer to the following manuals for more information on the main 620 WinLoader program 620 WinLoader Implementation LDR003 620 WinLoader Programming Reference LDR004
5. MicroSoft MSB Most Significant Byte Bit NSKD Not Skip and Delete NSKR Not Skip and Retain OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer OP Option Module PC Personal Computer PRG Program RAM Random Access Memory SIOM Serial Input Output Module SLM Serial Link Module STF Self Test Failure SPM
6. 57 6 3 Loading Function Blocks 59 Purpose of this section This section presents procedures for saving Function Blocks and Function Block input parameter register values from 620 LC s memory to disk procedures for loading Function Blocks and Function Block input parameter register values from disk to 620 LC s memory 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 57 6 2 Saving Function Blocks Procedure for saving Function Blocks Perform the Table 6 1 procedure to save a specified Function Block from a designated 620 LC s memory to disk Table 6 1 Procedure for Saving Function Blocks Step Action 1 With Function Block Display FBD line displayed press F17 or SHIFT F7 to access Block Edit menu shown in Figure 6 1 below 2 Select F10 Save from Block Edit Menu Block Operations Menu appears with following selections F1 LDR F2 FB and F3 REG 3 Select F2 FB from Block Operations Menu and follow prompts as directed to save Function Block to disk If save protection level is set for either USER or OEM you are required to enter your security code to save Function Block Refer to 623 WinLoader Implementation LDR003 for description of security coding which is accessed through WinLoader Main Menu Default
7. 12 Table 3 35 Pull from System Status Table Specifications 16 Table 3 36 Integer Comparison Instructions 18 Table 3 37 Equal To Specifications 20 Table 3 38 Less Than Specifications 23 Table 3 39 Greater Than Specifications 26 Table 3 40 Test for Zero Specifications 29 Table 3 41 Math Instructions 31 Table 3 42 Addition Specifications 32 Table 3 42 Addition Specifications Continued 33 Table 3 43 Subtraction Specifications 35 Table 3 43 Subtraction Specifications Continued 36 Table 3 44 Multiplication Specifications
8. 620 Logic Controller CPM Control Processor Module CTS Clear to send DIN Deutsche Industrie Normen German Industrial Standards DTR Data Terminal Ready GND Ground I O Input Output LC Logic Controller MS MicroSoft PC Personal Computer PID Proportional Integral and Derivative RCV
9. 37 Figure 3 37 Basic Multiplication Operation 41 Figure 3 38 Scaling Unsigned Integers for Multiplication 42 Figure 3 39 Basic Division Operation 47 Figure 3 40 AND Characteristics 50 Figure 3 41 OR Characteristics 52 Figure 3 42 Exclusive OR Characteristics 54 Figure 3 43 Jump Characteristics 58 Figure 3 44 Indirect Jump Characteristics 60 Figure 3 45 Jump to Multiple EOS Characteristics 62 Figure 3 46 Jump to Subroutine JSR Characteristics 64 Figure 3 47 Subroutine Characteristics 66 Figure 3 48 Return to Subroutine Characteristics
10. Subroutine 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming ix References Publication Title Publication Number Binder Title Binder Number 623 WinLoader Overview LDR001 623 WinLoader 623 8983 623 WinLoader Installation LDR002 623 WinLoader 623 8983 623 WinLoader Implementation LDR003 623 WinLoader 623 8983 623 WinLoader Programming Reference LDR004 623 WinLoader 623 8983 623 WinLoader Edit Display Functions LDR005 623 WinLoader 623 8983 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions LDR007 623 WinLoader 623 8983 623 WinLoader Networking Functions LDR008 623 WinLoader 623 8983 623 WinLoader Utility Functions LDR009 623 WinLoader 623 8983 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 1 Section 1 Function Blocks Overview 1 1 Overview Section contents These are the topics covered in this section Topic See Page 1 1 Overview 1 1 2 Function Blocks 2 Purpose of this section This section presents an overview of the 623 WinLoader s Function Block ladder logic format Refer to subsequent sections for more detailed information on any particular Function Block topic 2 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 1 2 F
11. Floating Point FPK Floating Point Constant INT Integer ISS Input Status Scan JSR Jump to Subroutine LC Logic Controller NC Normally Closed NEG Negate NO Normally Open NOP No Operation NSKD Not Skip and Deenergize NSKR Not S
12. 3 Purpose of this section This section presents general characteristics of documentation types used in ladder logic programming with the 623 WinLoader to include descriptions of address labels and descriptions address comments line comments and line markers Continued on next page 2 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 1 1 Overview Continued General Description Each address and or line used in your ladder logic program may be documented in the following ways Labels a 7 character label may be assigned that displays above any ladder logic instructions associated with a specified address Descriptions a 3 line by 9 character description may be assigned that appears at top right of screen when specified address is used as an output or may be specifically called up on monitor screen for any other address Comments a comment of 20 lines 67 characters per line may be assigned to each address comment may be displayed and edited on screen while logic is being monitored Line Markers each line of ladder logic program may be assigned a 20 line 67 characters per line comment through a line marker line marker is a reference number through which comment is identified line comments may be displayed and edited on screen while logic is being edited or monitored Note that any or all of these documentation methods may be use
13. 39 3 2 Contact and Coil Instructions 40 3 3 Single Bit Instructions 54 3 4 Timer and Counter Instructions 62 3 5 Skip Instructions 77 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions 85 vi 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 Figures Figure 1 1 WinLoader s 9 x 5 x 1 Ladder Logic Matrix 3 Figure 1 2 Series and Parallel Lines of Logic 4 Figure 1 3 Up and Down Branches in a Parallel Line of Logic 5 Figure 2 1 Logic Group Selection Menu 14 Figure 2 2 Contact Logic Group on Main Screen Display 15 Figure 2 3 System Status I O and Register Table Configuration 21 Figure 3 1 Normally Open Closed Contact Characteristics 44 Figure 3 2 Transition ON and OFF Contact Characteristics
14. 110 viii 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 Acronyms ABC Asynchronous Byte Count Protocol ABS Absolute BCD Binary Coded Decimal BIN Binary BR Bit Read BW Bit Write CTD Count Down CTU Count Up EOS End of Skip FLT Floating Point FP
15. 44 Figure 3 4 Ladder Logic Listing Menu 46 Figure 3 5 Printer Parameters Menu 48 Figure 3 6 Serial Port Configuration Menu 51 Figure 3 7 Cross Reference Range Entry Block 52 Figure 3 8 Documentation Listing Menu 54 Figure 3 9 Edit Title Block Menu 60 Figure 3 10 Title Block Name Check 61 Table 1 1 Creating Address Labels Descriptions 3 Table 1 2 Displaying or Editing an Address Comment 6 Table 1 3 Adding Line Marker to Line of Ladder Logic 7 Table 1 4 Creating or Editing a Line Comment 8 Table 1 5 Displaying a Line Comment 9 Table 1 6 Deleting a Line Comment and Line Marker 9 T
16. Function Block End FBI Function Block Input Parameter FBO Function Block Output Parameter FBP Function Block Parameter FBU Function Block Parameter Unloading LDR Loader JSR Jump to Subroutine LC Logic Controller NOP No Operation NSKD Not Skip and Deenergize NSKR Not Skip and Retain PID Proportional Integral Derivative SUB
17. 127 Table 3 89 No Operation Specifications 129 Table 3 90 Input Status Scan Specifications 131 Table 4 2 Send Out Values for Conditional Contacts Example 144 Table A 1 620 06 LC I O and Register Capacities 148 Table A 2 620 06 LC System Status Table 149 Table A 3 620 10 15 LC I O and Register Capacities 150 Table A 4 620 10 15 LC System Status Table 152 Table A 5 620 11 14 1631 LC I O and Register Capacities 153 Table A 6 620 11 14 1631 LC System Status Table System Diagnostic Status 155 Table A 7 620 11 14 1631 LC System Status Table System Hardware Status 156 Table A 8 620 11 14 1631 LC System Status Table System Identification 156 Table A 9 620 25 35 LC System Status Table System Diagnostic Status 160 Table A 10 SLM Statuses for 620 35 LC Expanded Serial I O Diagnostics 161 6 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 6 Data Manipu
18. 5 Table 1 3 Entering Loader Monitor Mode 6 Table 1 5 Entering Stand Alone Mode 6 Table 2 1 WinLoader Main Menu Selections 3 Table 2 2 620 Selection Menu Selections 6 Table 2 3 Processor Configuration Menu Selections 9 Table 2 4 Multidrop Configuration Menu Selections 10 Table 2 5 I O Configuration Menu Selections 14 Table 2 6 620 Selection Menu Selections Stand Alone Mode F1 F5 19 Table 2 7 620 Selection Menu Selections Stand Alone Mode F5 F8 21 Table 2 8 Documentation Functions Menu Selections 24 Table 2 9 Accessing Password and Security Functions 26 Table 2 10 Changing the Password 27 Table 2 11 623 60 Software Configuration Menu Selections 31 Table 2 12 Paths and Files Menu Selections
19. 63 Table 3 55 Subroutine Specifications 65 Table 3 56 Return to Subroutine Specifications 67 Table 3 57 Return to Beginning of Program Specifications 69 Table 3 58 Data Conversion Instructions 71 Table 3 59 Binary to BCD Conversion Specifications 72 Table 3 60 BCD to Binary Conversion Specifications 75 Table 3 61 Integer to Floating Point Conversion Specifications 78 Table 3 62 Floating Point to Integer Conversion Specifications 81 Table 3 63 Absolute Specifications 85 Table 3 64 Square Root Conversion Specifications 87 Table 3 65 Negate Specifications 89 Table 3 66 NOT Specifications 91 Table 3 67 Sequencer Instructions
20. Serial Link Module STF Self Test Failure SPM Software Program Mode UMS User Memory Session viii 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 References Publication Title Publication Number Binder Title Binder Number 623 WinLoader Overview LDR001 623 WinLoader 623 8983 623 WinLoader Installation LDR002 623 WinLoader 623 8983 623 WinLoader Implementation LDR003 623 WinLoader 623 8983 623 WinLoader Programming Reference LDR004 623 WinLoader 623 8983 623 WinLoader Edit Display Functions LDR005 623 WinLoader 623 8983 623 WinLoader Function Blocks LDR006 623 WinLoader 623 8983 623 WinLoader Networking Functions LDR008 623 WinLoader 623 8983 623 WinLoader Utility Functions LDR009 623 WinLoader 623 8983 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 1 Section 1 Characteristics of Documentation Types 1 1 Overview Section contents These are the topics covered in this section Topic See Page 1 1 Overview 1 1 2 Documentation Types
21. Fixed Port HEX Hexadecimal IAC Industrial Automation and Controls IMS Interprocessor Messaging Service I O Input Output KEYSW Keyswitch LDR Loader LED Light Emitting Diode LP Loader Port LSB Least Significant Byte Bit L T Loader Terminal MAS Modular Automation System MS
22. 93 Table 3 68 Sequencer Specifications 97 Table 3 68 Sequencer Specifications Continued 98 Table 3 68 Sequencer Specifications Continued 99 Table 3 69 Load Sequencer Specifications 101 Table 3 69 Load Sequencer Specifications Continued 102 Table 3 70 Unload Sequencer Specifications 104 Table 3 70 Unload Sequencer Specifications Continued 105 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 5 Table 3 71 Edit the Control Output Address or Step Number Register Address 108 Table 3 72 Edit an Existing Step in Program Mode 109 Table 3 73 Edit an Existing Step in Run Mode 110 Table 3 74 Insert a New Step in Program Mode 111 Table 3 75 Insert a New Step While in Run Mode 112 Table 3 76 Delete an Existing Step in Program Mode
23. Request to send RTU Remote Terminal Unit SLM Serial Link Module SUB Subroutine viii 620 WinLoader Overview 4 05 References Publication Title Publication Number Binder Title Binder Number 620 0043 Communications Interface Module User Manual 620 8986 620 LC amp S9000 Reference MAS 8990 620 WinLoader Installation LDR002 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Implementation LDR003 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Programming Reference LDR004 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Edit Display Functions LDR005 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Function Blocks LDR006 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Documentation Functions LDR007 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Networking Functions LDR008 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Utility Functions LDR009 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 6041 Terminal Emulator User Manual 620 8989 4 05 620 WinLoader Overview 1 Section 1 Introduction to 620 WinLoader 1 1 Overview Section contents These are the topics covered in this section Topic See Page 1 1 Overview
24. 25 2 6 I O Configuration Utility F5 29 2 7 623 60 Software Configuration F6 30 2 8 Terminal Emulator F7 46 2 9 Utility Functions F8 47 SECTION 3 WINLOADER MAIN SCREEN DISPLAY 51 3 1 Overview 51 3 2 Main Screen Display 52 v 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 Figures Figure 2 1 623 WIN Loader Main Menu 2 Figure 2 2 620 Selection Menu 5 Figure 2 3 Accessing Processor Configuration Menu 8 Figure 2 4 Accessing Multidrop Configuration Menu 11 Figure 2 5 Accessing I O Configuration Menu 13 Figure 2 6 I O Slot Assignments for 620 3691 Processor Rack
25. 33 Table 2 13 Operational Modes Menu Selections 36 Table 2 14 System Type and File Loads Menu Selections 39 Table 2 15 Stand Alone Parameters Menu Selections 41 Table 2 16 623 60 Software Configuration Menu Selections 43 Table 3 1 Entering Main Screen Display Via F1 620 Loader Monitor 53 Table 3 2 Entering Main Screen Display Via F2 620 Stand Alone Loader 54 Table 3 3 Status Line Information 68 Table 3 4 Periodic Statuses 71 vii 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 Acronyms 620 LC 620 Logic Controller ABC Asynchronous Byte Count Protocol ANSI American National Standards Institute CAM Controller Access Module CGA
26. Loader Terminal MAS Modular Automation System MS MicroSoft MSB Most Significant Byte Bit NSKD Not Skip and Delete NSKR Not Skip and Retain OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer OP Option Module PC Personal Computer PRG Program RAM Random Access Memory SIOM Serial Input Output Module SLM
27. 49 Figure 3 1 Typical Title Page Display 55 Figure 3 2 Name Check 56 Figure 3 3 Loading Operation Messages 57 Figure 3 4 Main Screen Display 58 Figure 3 5 Main Screen Display Banner 60 Figure 3 6 Main Screen Display Program Area 61 Figure 3 7 9 x 5 x Ladder Logic Matrix 62 Figure 3 8 Logic Group Selection Menu 64 Figure 3 9 Edit and Display Functions 65 Figure 3 10 Program Area Integer Display 66 Figure 3 11 Main Screen Display Status Line 67 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation vi Tables Table 1 1 Methods for Starting WinLoader 2 Table 1 2 Specifying Loader Configuration Filename
28. 50 2 3 Upload Download Functions F2 51 2 4 Documentation Functions Menu F3 58 2 5 620 Diagnostics Menu F4 59 2 6 Program Mode Change Functions F5 66 2 7 Register Table Functions F6 70 2 8 Flag Mode Address F7 75 2 9 Data Display Functions F8 76 2 10 DOS Shell F10 81 Purpose of this section This section presents a detailed overview of the Auxiliary Function Menu which is accessible from the WinLoader s Edit and Display Functions Menu each of the nine functions accessible from this menu are described in this section Continued on next page 48 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 2 1 Overview Continued Accessing Auxiliary Function Menu Press F12 or Shift F2 AUX from the Edit and Display Functions Menu to access the Auxiliary Function Menu shown in Figure 2 1 below This menu is used to call up additional edit and display
29. 40 Table 4 8 Function Block Selection Menu Selections 41 Table 4 8 Function Block Selection Menu Selections Continued 42 Table 4 8 Function Block Selection Menu Selections Continued 43 Table 4 9 Editing Function Block Logic 44 Table 4 10 Moving a Function Block 45 Table 4 11 Copying a Function Block 46 Table 4 12 Deleting a Function Block 47 Table 5 1 Available Function Block Keystroke Commands 52 Table 5 2 Function Block Zoom In Mode Keystroke Commands 53 Table 6 1 Procedure for Saving Function Blocks 57 Table 6 2 Saving Function Block Input Parameter Register Values 58 Table 6 3 Procedure for Loading Function Blocks 59 Table 6 3 Procedure for Loading Function Blocks Continued 60 Table 6 4 Loading Function Block Input Parameter Register Values 6
30. 113 Table 3 77 Delete an Existing Step in Run Mode 114 Table 3 78 Matrix Instructions 115 Table 3 79 Set Zero Matrix Specifications 117 Table 3 80 Set One Matrix Specifications 118 Table 3 81 Move Matrix Specifications 119 Table 3 82 Invert Matrix Specifications 120 Table 3 83 OR Matrix Specifications 121 Table 3 84 Exclusive OR XOR Matrix Specifications 122 Table 3 85 AND Matrix Specifications 123 Table 3 86 Compare Specifications 124 Table 3 87 Miscellaneous Instructions 125 Table 3 88 Delay Specifications 126 Table 3 88 Delay Specifications Continued
31. 17 3 2 Software Characteristics 18 vi 620 WinLoader Overview 4 05 Tables Table 2 1 623 6020 Shipping Contents 12 Table 2 2 629 6019 Converter Specifications 14 Table 2 3 Personal Computer Specifications 15 Table 3 1 623 WinLoader Files 20 Table 3 2 623 WinLoader file extensions 21 4 05 620 WinLoader Overview vii Acronyms ABC Asynchronous Byte Count ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange CIM Communications Interface Module CPM Control Processor Module CTS Clear to send DOS Di
32. 35 4 1 Overview 35 4 2 Editing Function Block Parameters 36 4 3 Editing Function Blocks 40 SECTION 5 FUNCTION BLOCK DISPLAYS 48 5 1 Overview 48 5 2 Displaying Function Blocks 49 5 3 Online Monitoring of Function Blocks 55 SECTION 6 UPLOADING DOWNLOADING FUNCTION BLOCKS 56 6 1 Overview 56 6 2 Overview 57 6 3 Loading Function Blocks 59 SECTION 7 FUNCTION BLOCK LIBRARY 62 7 1 Overview 62 7 2 Function Block Library Control Prog
33. Self Test Failure SPM Software Program Mode UAIM Universal Analog Input Module UMS User Memory Session 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation viii References Publication Title Publication Number Binder Title Binder Number 620 0048 amp 620 0052 Data Collection Modules User Manual 620 8980 620 LC amp S9000 Reference MAS 8990 620 12 1633 36 Logic Controller User Manual 620 8964 620 Logic Controller MAS 8991 621 0020R Universal Analog Input Module and 620 0020 Configuration Utility User Manual 621 8989 620 LC amp S9000 Reference MAS 8990 621 0025R Resistance Temperature Detector Module and 620 0025 Configuration Utility Manual 621 8985 620 LC amp S9000 Reference MAS 8990 620 WinLoader Overview LDR001 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Installation LDR002 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Programming Reference LDR004 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions LDR005 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Function Blocks LDR006 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Documentation Functions LDR007 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Networking Functions LDR008 6
34. 45 Table 3 5 Transition OFF Contact Specifications 46 Table 3 6 Nonretentive Coil Specifications 48 Table 3 7 Retentive Coil Specifications 49 Table 3 8 Latch Coil Specifications 51 Table 3 9 Unlatch Coil Specifications 52 Table 3 10 Single Bit Instructions 54 Table 3 11 Bit Read Specifications 56 Table 3 12 Bit Write Specifications 58 Table 3 13 Logic Inverter Specifications 60 Table 3 14 Timer and Counter Instructions 62 Table 3 15 620 LC Address Ranges and Maximum Timers Counters 63 Table 3 16 On Delay Timer Specifications 65 Table 3 17 Off Delay Timer Specifications 67 Table 3 18 Re
35. 36 4 3 Editing Function Blocks 40 Purpose of this section This section presents procedures for Changing parameter address type and data values Inserting deleting editing parameters and parameter names Editing Function Block header and logic and Moving duplicating and deleting Function Blocks 36 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 4 2 Editing Function Block Parameters Changing parameter address or type Perform the Table 4 1 procedure to change either a parameter address or type This procedure may be performed in either Run or Program mode Table 4 1 Changing Parameter Address or Type Step Action 1 Position cursor on any previously entered parameter see Figure 4 1 next page 2 Change address or type as desired refer to subsection 3 3 for procedures on entering Function Block parameters 3 Press ENTER to make parameter change effective Changing parameter data values for Bring In parameters Perform the Table 4 2 procedure to change parameter data values for Bring In parameters This procedure may be performed in either Run or Program mode Table 4 2 Changing Parameter Data Values for Bring In Parameters Step Action 1 Position cursor on appropriate Bring In parameter see Figure 4 1 next page and press 2 Enter new data value and press ENTER
36. 24 Table 3 2 Function Block Selection Menu Selections 25 Table 3 2 Function Block Selection Menu Selections Continued 26 Table 3 2 Function Block Selection Menu Selections Continued 28 Table 3 3 Defining Function Block With Existing Logic 29 Table 3 4 Input and Output Parameter Types 31 Table 3 6 Input Parameter Functions Menu Selections 32 Table 3 8 Output Parameter Functions Menu Selections 33 Table 4 1 Changing Parameter Address or Type 36 Table 4 2 Changing Parameter Data Values for Bring In Parameters 36 Table 4 3 Inserting Parameters 37 Table 4 4 Deleting Parameters 39 Table 4 5 Inserting Parameter Names 39 Table 4 6 Editing Parameter Names 39 Table 4 7 Editing Function Block Header
37. 49 Figure 6 1 Block Edit Menu 57 Figure 6 2 Block Addressing Screen 60 Figure 7 1 Block Edit Menu 65 Figure 7 2 Block Addressing Screen 66 Figure 7 3 Single Loop PID Function Block External View 70 Figure 7 4 Cascade Control Two Loop PID Function Block External View 73 Figure 7 5 Ratio Control Single Loop PID Function Block External View 76 Figure 7 6 Split Range Time Proportioning Single Loop PID Function Block External View 79 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming vii Tables Table 2 1 Input Parameter Unloading Guidelines 18 Table 2 2 Output Parameter Unloading Guidelines 18 Table 3 1 Defining Function Block With New Logic 23 Table 3 1 Defining Function Block With New Logic Continued
38. Color Graphics Adaptor CIM Communication Interface Module CPM Control Processor Module DOS Disk Operating System EIM Ethernet Interface Module EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory IAC Industrial Automation and Controls IMS Interprocessor Messaging Service I O Input Output IRQ Interrupt Request KEYSW Keyswitch LAN Local Area Network LC
39. 15 Figure 2 7 I O Slot Assignments for Processor Racks 16 Figure 2 8 620 Selection Menu Stand Alone Mode F1 F5 18 Figure 2 9 620 Selection Menu Stand Alone Mode F5 F8 20 Figure 2 10 Documentation Functions Menu 23 Figure 2 11 Security Selection Menu 25 Figure 2 12 623 60 Software Configuration Menu 30 Figure 2 13 Paths and Files Menu 32 Figure 2 14 Operational Modes Menu 35 Figure 2 15 System Types and File Loads Menu 38 Figure 2 17 Multidrop Node Names Menu 43 Figure 2 18 Load Configuration Example 44 Figure 2 19 Save Configuration Example 45 Figure 2 20 Exit 48 Figure 2 21 Typical WinLoader Help Screen
40. 47 Figure 3 3 Nonretentive and Retentive Coil Characteristics 50 Figure 3 4 Latch and Unlatch Coil Characteristics 53 Figure 3 5 Bit Read Characteristics 57 Figure 3 6 Bit Write Characteristics 59 Figure 3 7 Logic Inverter Characteristics 61 Figure 3 8 On and Off Delay Timer Characteristics 69 Figure 3 9 Retentive Timer Characteristics 72 Figure 3 10 Counter Characteristics 76 Figure 3 11 Sample Application Using Skip Instructions 79 Figure 3 12 Nested Skip Instructions 80 Figure 3 13 Skip Characteristics 83 Figure 3 14 32 Bit Floating Point Structure 89 Figure 3 15 32 Bit Floating Point Operand 89 Fig
41. Logic Controller MAS Modular Automation System MS MicroSoft NOP No Operation OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer PRG Program RAM Random Access Memory RTDM Resistance Temperature Detector Module RTS Request to send RTU Remote Terminal Unit SIOM Serial I O Module SLM Serial Link Module STF
42. 38 Table 3 44 Multiplication Specifications Continued 39 Table 3 45 Division Specifications 43 Table 3 45 Division Specifications Continued 44 Table 3 45 Division Specifications Continued 45 Table 3 46 Logical Operator Instructions 48 Table 3 47 AND Specifications 49 Table 3 48 OR Specifications 51 Table 3 49 Exclusive OR XOR Specifications 53 Table 3 50 Data Conversion Instructions 55 Table 3 51 Jump Specifications 57 Table 3 52 Indirect Jump Specifications 59 Table 3 53 End of Jump Specifications 61 Table 3 54 Jump to Subroutine Specifications
43. Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 59 3 2 Main Screen Display Continued PROGRAM and MONITOR modes continued In PROGRAM mode you may create and edit ladder logic programs using available 620 logic elements and numeric addresses associated with real and internal I O points or registers can also refer to on line or off line programming if CPM s keyswitch is in RUN PRGM position on line editing of ladder logic program is permitted on line programming may be disabled or may include a security code as specified in software configuration refer to Subsection 2 5 Password amp Security Functions F4 in Section 2 of this manual for more information of security codes if CPM s keyswitch is in PRGM position off line editing of ladder logic program is permitted In MONITOR mode you may monitor execution of a program in a 620 LC and program the processors memory on line if CPM s keyswitch is in RUN RUN PRGM or DISABLE position a real time indication of TRUE FALSE conditioning and data handling of any executing ladder logic may be observed editing of ladder logic program is not permitted Continued on next page 60 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 3 2 Main Screen Display Continued Banner At the very top of the Main Screen Display a banner appears which includes the following information see Figure 3 5 Keystroke Functions the following t
44. 147 A 2 System Status Information for 620 06 LC 148 A 2 System Status Information for 620 06 LC Continued 149 A 3 System Status Information for 620 10 15 LCs 150 A 3 System Status Information for 620 10 15 LCs Continued 152 A 4 System Status Information for 620 11 14 1631 LCs 153 A 4 System Status Information for 620 11 14 1631 LCs Continued 155 A 4 System Status Information for 620 11 14 1631 LCs Continued 156 A 5 System Status Information for 620 25 35 LCs 158 Purpose of this appendix This appendix presents Register Memory Maps and System Status Table information for 620 06 10 11 14 15 1631 25 35 LCs 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 148 A 2 System Status Information for 620 06 LC Register Memory Map for 620 06 LC Refer to Figure A 1 below for Register Memory Map for 620 06 LCs 620 06 LC s Output Status Table contained on the CPU printed circuit board accommodates the status of 768 output locations Output status of real I O is contained in locations 0 191 Control relay status is contained in locations 192 767 Timer and counter presets and accumulated values plus other data are contained in the Register Table at addresses 4096 4351 which are 16 bit
45. 6 3 7 Integer Comparison Instructions 18 3 7 Integer Comparison Instructions Continued 30 3 8 Math Instructions 31 3 9 Logical Operator Instructions 48 3 10 Memory Reference Instructions 55 3 11 Data Conversion Instructions 71 3 12 Sequencer Instructions 93 3 13 Matrix Instructions 115 3 14 Miscellaneous Instructions 125 Section 4 Characteristics of Data Representation and the Error Status Word 133 Appendix A System Status Information for 620 06 10 11 14 15 1631 25 35 LCs 147 Glossary 163 2 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4
46. Bring in instruction reads 16 bit word from address 5000 and places this value 8 on stack Multiplication instruction multiplies last word placed on stack with next word placed there 2 by constant instruction 8 x 2 16 resulting product of 16 is placed on stack Binary to BCD conversion instruction reads last word written to stack interprets it as binary code and converts it to its BCD equivalent resulting bit pattern is then placed back on stack Send out instruction reads last word written to stack and transfers it to addresses 63 through 48 in I O Status Table since processor does not recognize BCD code directly it interprets resulting bit pattern as if it were the binary value 22 CPM s I O control function permits these on off states to be sent to discrete output module in 621 I O system Output module sends on off statuses to connected field device 4 digit 7 segment BCD display which interprets them as BCD code displays the value 16 Continued on next page 74 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 11 Data Conversion Instructions Continued Binary to BCD conversion characteristics continued Figure 3 50 Binary to BCD Conversion Characteristics Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 75 3 11 Data Conversion Instructions Continued BCD to binary conversion Refer to Table 3 60 for BCD to binary conversion
47. x OR OR x XOR XOR x Absolute ABS x Square Root SQRT x Negate NEG x NOT NOT x Jump to Subroutine JSR x x Subroutine SUB x x Return to Subroutine RTS x x Matrix Instructions x x Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 19 2 2 Valid Ladder Logic Instructions Continued Additional programming functions and features Refer to Table 2 3 for additional programming functions and features offered by the 620 WinLoader for use in manipulating ladder logic instructions Table 2 3 Additional Programming Functions and Features Function Feature Description Address Reference Number Ranges Refer to Figure 2 3 in subsection 2 3 for address reference number ranges for 620 12 1633 36 LCs Refer to Appendix A for address reference number ranges for 620 06 10 11 14 15 1631 25 and 35 LCs Documentation Detail Feature WinLoader offers a comprehensive documentation feature to create fully annotated ladder logic programs allows creating documentation that can be assigned to particular instruction addresses as well as to specific ladder logic lines all documentation may be displayed in any 620 LC mode of operation refer to 620 WinLoader Documentation Functions LDR007 for more information Search amp Exchange Function Used to search for every occurrence of a specific address and instruction and exchange
48. 63 Figure 2 8 620 Self Test Status Display 64 Figure 2 9 I O Module Status Display 65 Figure 2 10 Mode Change Functions Menu 66 Figure 2 11 Software Program Mode Pop Up 68 Figure 2 12 WinLoader Status Line and Function Codes 69 Figure 2 13 Register Table Functions Menu 70 Figure 2 14 Typical Register Table Function 74 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions vii Tables Table 1 1 Edit and Display Functions Menu Selections 3 Table 1 2 Monitoring in Subroutines or Jump type Not Skip Elements 5 Table 1 3 Performing On line Programming 7 Table 1 4 Search Menu Selections 12 Table 1 5 Entering an Address Label 13 Table 1 6 Searching for a Line Number 1
49. coil remains energized until control logic goes False de energizes immediately Accumulated value is automatically reset to zero nonretentive on delay timer when control logic goes False or power is restored after power failure Other than time delay timer coil functions like nonretentive coil 66 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 4 Timer and Counter Instructions Continued On delay timer continued Table 3 16 On Delay Timer Specifications Continued SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program an on delay timer instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F6 to select Timer Counter Logic Group 2 Press F4 to select On Delay Timer 3 Enter desired I O address and then press RETURN or ENTER 4 Enter desired accumulator register address and then press RETURN or ENTER 5 Enter desired preset value in desired resolution 6 Press RETURN to enter on delay timer Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 67 3 4 Timer and Counter Instructions Continued Off delay timer Refer to Table 3 17 for off delay timer specifications Table 3 17 Off Delay Timer Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 10 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Used as logic line terminators where it is wished to have output coil or i
50. descriptions should be written and press ENTER prompt asks if information found at Copy To address should be overwritten with new information 4 Press Y to overwrite with new information Press N or any key other than Y to cancel block copy procedure To perform a block delete Step Action 1 Press F5 BLOCK then immediately press F6 DELETE 2 Enter start and end reference numbers to define block to be deleted press ENTER after each number Continue delete prompt displays 3 Press Y to delete all labels descriptions in defined block Press N or any key other then Y to abort block delete function Table 2 5 is continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 27 2 3 Label Description Editors F2 F5 F6 Continued Accessing Function Block Parameter Name Editor continued Table 2 5 Label Description Editor Functions Continued Key Function Description F6 DELETE To delete labels descriptions presently displayed on highlighted edit line press F6 DELETE F7 CURSOR Permits you to select any position in labels descriptions edit field as start position for text entry Place cursor in desired position and press F7 CURSOR Press ENTER each time ENTER key is selected to load a label description into memory cursor returns to that position F8 MERGE A
51. from current cursor position ladder logic begins to display sequentially line by line when end of program is reached or beginning of program for reverse listing the message Reached Program Limit appears on screen Once program limit is reached Ladder Logic List Function resets to its default characteristics When Ladder Logic List Function is activated the word LIST is displayed beneath line number on Main Screen Display The following ladder logic list controls are available To change listing direction press PgUp key for forward listing direction incrementing line numbers press PgDn key for reverse listing direction decrementing line numbers To alter listing speed press Up Arrow repeatedly to increase listing speed press Down Arrow repeatedly to decrease listing speed To pause and resume listing press Spacebar to pause listing press Spacebar again to resume listing after a pause To exit Ladder Logic Listing Function press Esc key to exit 32 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 1 8 Block Operations Functions F17 Accessing Block operations functions Press F17 or Shift F7 BLK from the Edit and Display Functions Menu to access the Block Operations Functions Menu shown in Figure 1 13 below which appears at the bottom of the main screen display Block operations functions are used to
52. 1 6 Multi element Display Function F15 Accessing Multi element Display Press F15 or Shift F5 MULTI from the Edit and Display Functions Menu to access the Multi element Display shown in Figure 1 7 next page which appears at the bottom of the main screen display The Multi element Display permits you to continuously display up to eight data values or conditions on the main screen display while also monitoring a line of ladder logic in an executing program The information displayed is live in the sense that it is constantly and automatically updated by the WinLoader This function permits you to display information from the CPM Register Function s I O Status and Data Register Tables Refer to Table 1 12 next page for descriptions of the available selections from this display The Multi element Display cannot directly access System Status Table information must first be read from System Status Table and then stored to I O Status Table or Data Register Table once stored information can then be accessed by Multi element Display function may be monitored while performing other monitor functions by pressing Shift F5 a second time after Multi element Display has been edited remains on screen while you page up and down and will not disappear until cursor is positioned in multi element field by pressing Shift F5 again and then Esc key shows status of bit register at point in ladder program immed
53. 2 Press equal key 3 Enter numeric value to be forced into CPM 4 Press ENTER or RETURN key Send out skipped by NSKR stops transferring data to registers send out skipped by NSKD transfers 0 s all bits off to appropriate address on first skip then stops transferring on all subsequent skips Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a send out instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F3 to select Bring In Logic Group 2 Enter desired address 3 Press F4 to select Send Out instruction 102 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Send out characteristics Figure 3 20 Send Out Characteristics 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 103 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Indirect send out Refer to Table 3 29 for indirect send out specifications Table 3 29 Indirect Send Out Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Like direct send out transfers single 16 bit data word from CPM s stack to Register Function which can be written to Register Function s data table or I O Status Table Characteristics As illustrated in Figures 3 21 and 3 22 two addresses are associated with indirect send out Reference Address XXXX contains data which identifies second address known as E
54. 2511 MSB Receive Message Count 2510 LSB 2509 MSB Transmit Message Count 2508 LSB 2507 MSB Receive Error Count 2506 LSB 2505 MSB Invalid Message Count 2504 LSB MODBUS RTU 2507 MSB Valid Message Count 2506 LSB 2505 MSB Event Count 2504 LSB In the case of word wide registers the least significant byte is located in the System Status Table byte with lower address the most significant byte is located in the higher address 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 158 A 5 System Status Information for 620 25 35 LCs Register Memory Map for 620 25 35 LCs Refer to Figure A 4 next page for Register Memory Map for 620 25 35 LCs 620 25 35 LC Register Module contains the system s I O Data Table which is divided into three areas I O Status Table Register Tables and System Status Table I O Status Table contains either 2048 2K x 2K or 4096 4K x 4K continuous single bit storage locations which have a starting address of 0 In the 2K x 2K Register Module 2048 single bit locations are available for real I O status or internal coils In the 4K x 4K Register Module 2048 single bit locations are available for real I O status or internal coils and an additional 2048 locations are available for internal coils Timer and counter preset and accumulated values are stored in the Register Area Other numerical data may be stor
55. 620 WinLoader Version 5 4 User Manual 620 8982 Rev A 620 WinLoader 620 WinLoader Overview LDR001 4 05 ii 620 WinLoader Overview 4 05 Copyright Notices and Trademarks Printed in U S A Copyright 2005 by Honeywell Inc Revision 01 April 1 2005 While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in its written agreement with and for its customer In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect special or consequential damages The information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice This document was prepared using Information Mapping methodologies and formatting principles Compaq and Compaq Plus are registered trademarks of Compaq Computer Corp IBM AT and PS2 are registered trademarks of IBM Corp Information Mapping is a trademark of Information Mapping Inc Tandy 3000 and Tandy 4000 are registered trademarks of Tandy Corp Terminal Emulator is a registered trademark of Honeywell Inc Honeywell Industrial Automation and Control Automation College 1100 Virginia Drive Fort Washington PA 19034 4 05 620 WinLoader Overview iii About This Publication This manual presents Brief overview of 620 WinLoader Guid
56. Accessing Upload Download Functions Menu continued Table 2 3 Upload Download Functions Menu Selections Key Selection Function F1 Save From 620 to Disk Saves ladder logic programs from 620 memory to PC disk storage F2 Load From Disk to 620 Loads ladder logic program from PC disk storage into 620 LC memory F3 Verify 620 Logic amp Data Verifies 620 program logic and data all register table values by comparing 620 memory to logic and data stored on disk F4 Append From Disk to 620 Appends ladder logic program from PC disk storage to 620 memory F5 Verify 620 Logic Only Verifies 620 program logic only by comparing it to logic stored on disk F7 Enter Pathname Enables you to temporarily change current pathname where ladder logic files are to be saved to or loaded from change remains in effect until changed again or WinLoader software is exited pathname always resets to current default path when WinLoader software is first executed Current path The Current Path field which is located at the bottom of the Upload Download Functions Menu see Figure 2 3 displays the pathname where ladder logic files are to be saved to or loaded from This field normally indicates the default pathname that was set using the Paths and Files selection of the 623 60 Software Configuration Menu refer to subsection 2 7 of 623 60 WinLoader Implementation LDR003 If the current path is blank then no pa
57. Page Up Displays previous or first sixteen 16 parameters Page Down Displays next or last sixteen 16 parameters Ctrl Right Arrow In Program mode toggles between parameter ADDRess mode and project address LABEL mode on FBD line In Run mode toggles between parameter ADDRess mode project address LABEL mode and DATA value mode Ctrl PgDn Accesses Zoom In mode from anywhere on external FBD line to display interior of Function Block Ctrl PgUp Returns cursor to external FBD line that is Zooms out Delete Deletes parameter at cursor operates in Program mode only Enter Selects particular parameter for temporary monitoring Insert Inserts parameter or parameter name operates in Program mode only E Used to edit parameter name at cursor Performs data change operation on parameter at cursor Line Up Displays FBD line first then each preceding line of ladder logic which is not part of Function Block Line Down Displays FBD line first then each subsequent line of ladder logic which is not part of Function Block Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 53 5 2 Displaying Function Blocks Continued Zoom In mode Zoom In mode may be accessed from anywhere on the external FBD line of a Function Block to allow for a close inspection of the internal logic lines Press Ctrl PgDn when displaying external FBD line to acce
58. Skip While CPM is in RUN mode this is the action of scanning through a portion of the control program from one predetermined point to another without executing the enclosed logic Stack Temporary storage area used by processor function to keep track of any numeric data being processed numeric values obtained from data manipulation instructions such as bring in or Pull as well as results of math operations are written to stack other data manipulation instructions such as send out or Push read numeric values from stack and transfer them to specified Register Function address The stack itself is transparent in that it cannot be viewed or accessed directly When processor is running contents of stack may be observed as data values beneath respective symbols for each data manipulation instruction These values may also be displayed using multielement or data display functions of WinLoader To illustrate transfer of data in selected figures stack is shown as an imaginary register on ladder logic line in which data manipulation instruction is used Step Each word of data in sequencer table is a step up to 1024 steps may be programmed for each sequencer Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 165 Glossary Continued Step Number Refers to a specific data word in a sequencer table the 1024 maximum steps are numbered from 1 to 1024 there is no step zero Step Number Register Data regi
59. Usage Allows programming a 16 bit data value for use in several types of operations math provides means for establishing constant values in mathematical formulas comparisons provides means for establishing benchmark or parameters upon which process manufacturing data can be judged program logic utilization provides means for setting an instruction which uses data values like a timer counter preset to a predetermined value through ladder logic Characteristics Does not use an address numeric label or reference number Numeric value is stored in memory function as part of 24 bit word see Figure 3 24 upper eight bits are constant s opcode lower 16 bits are constant s numeric value Numeric value does not change and cannot be forced Range of numeric value is dependent upon data representation used unsigned integer 0 to 65535 signed integer 32767 to 32768 Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a constant instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F3 to select Bring In Logic Group 2 Enter desired numeric value 3 Press F5 to select constant 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 1 Note This is a continuation of L620 Winloader Programming Reference Guide Table of Contents 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued
60. if bit 15 is not asserted set to 0 an overflow condition has not occurred Handling underflow conditions Since the floating point function has a minimum value of 1 175494 x 10 38 underflow is also possible One of the following two options should be considered for handling underflow conditions Output coil program an output coil after the math operation program a floating point send out or Push of 2 on the next line if an underflow condition occurs the coil will energize if an underflow condition does not occur the coil will remain deenergized Error Status Word assign an error status word address to the math instruction test the complete word using equal to instruction or bit 14 using the bit read instruction if bit 14 is asserted set to 1 an underflow condition has occurred if bit 14 is not asserted set to 0 an underflow condition has not occurred 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 141 4 3 Error Status Word Background 620 12 1633 36 LCs can implement three different arithmetic systems unsigned integer signed integer and floating point A number of possible conditions or errors can be associated with these systems Therefore with any math based or data conversion based operation you have the option of specifying a data register in which there will be stored a 16 bit formatted word indicating any particular conditions or errors of note that
61. monitors status of ladder logic as it is executing Augmented Run Mode Programming enables adding to or deleting from control program while 620 LC is in Run Program mode Built in Terminal Emulator allows WinLoader to accurately emulate Terminal mode of 620 50 51 Loader Terminal and program configure and or transfer files to and from all Honeywell 627 MiniCOP industrially rated microprocessor based computing modules and related products Time saving Search functions locates contacts by line number element type element address and or element label Extensive Documentation features provides printout that includes additional descriptive data such as complete cross references unused addresses conflicting addresses and listings of all forms of text documentation Continued on next page 4 620 WinLoader Overview 4 05 1 2 620 WinLoader Continued How can I benefit from WIN Loader continued Ladder logic addressing feature uses 7 character label per ladder logic element in lieu of numeric address when developing ladder logic Free format editing of documentation allows you to enter up to 20 lines of documentation 67 characters each line via ladder logic line and address edit comments while editing or monitoring ladder logic Powerful Search amp Exchange function enables searching f
62. 2 To move cursor to home position Press CTRL HOME keys 3 To move cursor to end position Press CTRL END keys Entering a down branch Perform the Table 1 5 procedure to enter a down branch in a line of ladder logic Table 1 5 Entering a Down Branch in a Line of Ladder Logic Step Action 1 Place cursor in the desired position 2 Press key To move to left most branch or left hand rail and enter a down branch from anywhere in the 9 x 5 matrix press TAB key Continued on next page 8 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 1 3 General Editing Procedures Continued Programming parallel lines of logic Perform the Table 1 6 procedure to program parallel lines in a line of ladder logic Table 1 6 Programming Parallel Lines of Logic Step Action 1 Press TAB key this moves cursor from its present position to the left hand rail or left most vertical branch inserts a down branch then moves to bottom of down branch 2 To execute this function without inserting a down branch simply press SHIFT key and then the TAB key Entering a blank logic element Perform the Table 1 7 procedure to enter a blank logic element in a line of ladder logic Table 1 7 Entering a Blank Logic Element in a Line of Ladder Logic Step Action 1 Place cursor in desired location 2 Press key This function overwrites any existing element to the right of the cursor Inserting a log
63. 620 Selection Menu Stand Alone Mode continued Table 2 7 620 Selection Menu Selections Stand Alone Mode F5 F8 Key Title Description F5 Edit Processor Configuration Accesses Processor Configuration Menu to allow editing of the processor configuration refer to subsection 2 2 description titled Processor Configuration F6 Edit I O Configuration Accesses I O Configuration Menu to allow configuration of processor rack I O slots refer to subsection 2 2 description titled I O Configuration F7 Verify Processor Configuration Prompts you to enter a pathname to verify processor configuration F8 Verify I O Configuration Prompts you to enter a pathname to verify I O configuration 22 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 2 4 Documentation Functions F3 Documentation Functions menu Press F3 Documentation Functions from the WinLoader Main Menu to access the Documentation Functions Menu shown in Figure 2 13 below This menu permits you to document all elements in your ladder logic program and to provide extensive labels descriptions and comments throughout the program Refer to Table 2 11 next page for descriptions of each available selection from this menu and refer to 620 WinLoader Documentation Functions LDR007 for complete explanations of each available function If you are just beginning to create and document a ladder logic program the default file name and pathname should be specifi
64. 68 Figure 3 49 Return to Beginning of Program Characteristics 70 Figure 3 50 Binary to BCD Conversion Characteristics 74 Figure 3 51 BCD to Binary Conversion Characteristics 77 Figure 3 52 Integer to Floating Point Conversion Characteristics 80 Figure 3 53 Floating Point to Integer Conversion Characteristics 84 Figure 3 54 Absolute Conversion Characteristics 86 Figure 3 55 Square Root Conversion Characteristics 88 Figure 3 56 Negate Characteristics 90 Figure 3 57 NOT Characteristics 92 Figure 3 58 Sequencer Instruction Block Diagram 94 Figure 3 59 Sequencer Symbols Output to I O Status Table 95 Figure 3 60 Sequencer Symbols Output to Data Register Table 96 Figure 3 61 Sequencer Characteristics 100 Figure 3 62 Load Sequencer Chara
65. Continued Accessing password and security functions Perform the Table 2 12 procedure to access password and security functions Table 2 9 Accessing Password and Security Functions Step Action 1 Press F4 on the WinLoader s Main Menu since a password has not been entered a default password must be used it is 620 If you have previously entered a password after accessing the Security Selection Menu the following prompt displays Note that Xs display as the password is entered A user selected password may be up to eight alphanumeric characters spaces are not permitted after it is entered and edited verify that it is complete and correct 2 Press the ENTER key If an incorrect password is entered an alarm beep is sounded and the following message displays The display returns to the Main Menu after you press any other key If the correct password is entered the Security Selection Menu appears on the screen see Figure 2 14 previous page Note that the default security code for each of the seven functions shown in the Security Selection Menu F1 through F4 and F6 through F8 is zero if a security code other than zero is entered that is 1 9999 and the edited security codes are saved you are prompted to enter the appropriate security code prior to gaining access to the secured function Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 27 2 5 Password amp Secur
66. For 620 12 1633 36 Models 2502 MSB Top Address of Flag Bit Area 2501 LSB 2499 System Status Table Size Hex 2498 Firmware Revision Hex 2497 Firmware Version Hex 2496 2491 Communication Port Configuration See Appendix B for definition 2047 I O Configuration Request 85 I O is configured 170 Reconfiguration requested 2043 Processor Control Configuration B7 B6 Not used B5 Watchdog Timer Enable Disable 0 Disabled 1 Enabled B4 Data Change Enable Disable 0 Disabled 1 Enabled B3 Allow Scan with Low Battery Enable Disable 0 Disabled 1 Enabled B2 Clear I O Enable Disable 0 Freeze 1 Clear B1 Force Enable Disable 0 Disabled 1 Enabled B0 On Line Programming Enable Disable 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2042 Processor Control Configuration B7 Enable Multidrop Operation 0 Disabled 1 Enabled B6 B5 Not used B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 Loader Port Nodal Address 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 27 2 3 System Status Information Continued For 620 12 1633 36 Models continued 2041 1904 I O Configuration Table 0019 SPEEDFLG 620 1633 36 Microprocessor Clock Speed This register contains one of the following codes which allows other devices in the system to determine the microprocessor speed of the embedded microprocessor s system clock FFH 10 MHz 00H 16 7 MHz 7FH 12 5 MHz 0018 BKPLNID 620 1633 36 Backplane Functional Identification This byte will hold a code identifying the
67. Symbol Usage Converts a two s complement binary number obtained from a data manipulation instruction or preceding calculation into a 4 digit BCD number within a range of 0 to 9999 BCD value can then be outputted through a discrete output module to a field device that requires BCD coded input data Characteristics Sign of original binary value can be indicated by programming a coil immediately following conversion with a send out or Push of 1 instruction programmed on next line An optional error status word may be assigned to monitor for non BCD operands out of range invalid data when this occurs bit 11 of error status word is asserted set to 1 and 2048 is written to specified error address conversion result of zero is placed on stack refer to Section 4 for information on error status word Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a binary to BCD conversion instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F9 to select Operators Logic Group 2 Press F6 to select Conversion Operators Group 3 Press F1 to select binary to BCD conversion instruction 4 Enter optional error address Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 73 3 11 Data Conversion Instructions Continued Binary to BCD conversion characteristics Figure 3 50 illustrates characteristics associated with the binary to BCD conversion instruction
68. Table 3 7 is continued on next page 56 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 3 2 Printer Function Menu F1 Continued Documentation Listings F2 continued Table 3 7 Documentation Listing Menu Selections Continued Key Selection Function F9 Vertical Spacing If toggled to MINIMUM printout of documentation listing is condensed to eliminate blank spaces and reduce paper usage F10 Option Summary If toggled ON prints documentation listing selections and their status at end of print out 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 57 3 3 Printer Characters F2 Selecting printer characters Select F2 Printer Characters from the Documentation Functions Menu via the Auxiliary Functions Menu to toggle between the following two printer character selections Standard printer characters standard alphanumeric characters Graphic printer characters encoded characters 58 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 3 4 Edit Default File F7 Procedure for Editing Default File Perform the Table 3 8 procedure to edit a default file name If label comment files to be loaded contain maximum number or more labels comments as specified by configuration file the message MAX LOAD displays WinLoader then loads maximum number of labels comments into memory remaining labels remain on disk to avoid losing remaining labels either change default file name or do
69. iii 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 About This Publication This manual provides Overall description of WinLoader Main Menu to include individual descriptions of Main Menu selections and descriptions of each available function and sub menu accessible from the Main Menu and Overall description of WinLoader Main Screen Display to include procedure for entering Main Screen Display and descriptions of individual Main Screen Display components 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation iv Table of Contents SECTION 1 WINLOADER IMPLEMENTATION OVERVIEW 1 1 1 Overview 1 1 2 WinLoader Start up 2 SECTION 2 WINLOADER MAIN MENU 1 2 1 Overview 1 2 2 620 Loader Monitor 4 2 3 620 Stand Alone Loader F2 18 2 4 Documentation Functions F3 22 2 5 Password amp Security Functions
70. 2421 Card fault address 6 2419 Card fault address 7 2417 Card fault address 8 2415 Card fault count 2413 Scan loss battery 2303 Model Number revision level 2301 Keyswitch jumpers 2299 Memory size 2297 Memory used 2295 Force count 2291 Scan time 2287 Software request for program 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 153 A 4 System Status Information for 620 11 14 1631 LCs Register Memory Map for 620 11 14 1631 LCs Refer to Figure A 3 next page for the 620 11 14 1631 LC 8K system memory map 620 11 14 1631 CPMs have 8K of user memory words each word is 24 bits wide and each ladder logic element of a logic line uses one word timer and counter preset and accumulated values are assigned to registers and do not use main memory Floating Point constants JSR TON and TOF instructions use two words of user memory Floating Point Bring Ins and Send Outs use two registers 620 11 14 1631 CPM s Output Status Table is contained on the processor board and accommodates status of 4096 single bit output elements For 620 11 CPM output status of real I O is contained in locations 0 255 control relay internal I O statuses are posted at addresses 256 4095 for a total of 256 real I O and 3840 internal I O For 620 14 CPM output status of real I O is contained in locations 0 639 control relay internal I O statuses are posted at addresses 640 4095 for a total of 640 real I
71. 25 and 35 processors are configurable only through hardware DIP switch selections as described in their respective user manuals Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 7 2 2 620 Loader Monitor F1 Continued Processor configuration Press F5 Edit Processor Configuration from 620 Selection Menu to access Processor Configuration Menu shown in Figure 2 3 next page which allows you to edit load and save 620 LC s processor configuration Refer to Table 2 3 for descriptions of each available selection from this menu If F5 Edit Processor Configuration is selected and PC is connected to 620 LC Processor Configuration Menu displays current 620 LC configuration configuration may be changed as outlined in Table 2 3 Press F7 Verify Processor Configuration from the 620 Selection Menu to verify your processor configuration once all configuration entries have been made this selection prompts you to enter a pathname to verify the current processor configuration Continued on next page 8 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 2 2 620 Loader Monitor F1 Continued Figure 2 3 Accessing Processor Configuration Menu Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 9 2 2 620 Loader Monitor F1 Continued Processor configuration continued Table 2 3 Processor Configuration Menu Selections Key Title Description F1 Run Mode Programming ENABLE DISABLE on line
72. 3 Provides one s complement of original data Each bit of word is inverted from its current state to its opposite state for example bit of zero is inverted to state of one bit of one is inverted to state of zero Data manipulation instruction is used to place word to be complemented onto stack NOT instruction tells processor to invert complement each bit in last word placed on stack then to write result of operation back to stack resulting word can then be read from stack by another data manipulation instruction and used as any other 16 bit data Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a NOT instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F9 to select Operators Logic Group 2 Press F8 to select Logical Operators Logic Group 3 Press F5 to select NOT instruction Continued on next page 92 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 11 Data Conversion Instructions Continued NOT characteristics Figure 3 57 illustrates characteristics associated with the NOT instruction Figure 3 57 NOT Characteristics 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 93 3 12 Sequencer Instructions Sequencer instruction types Table 3 67 presents the three types of sequencer instructions presented in this section Because the operations involved in using sequencers are not as straightforward as with other instructions separate subsec
73. 620 60 Software Configuration F6 Continued System Type and File Loads Menu continued Table 2 14 System Type and File Loads Menu Selections Key Title Description F2 Communications Port Enables you to specify how Loader will communicate with 620 LC select COM1 if RS232 422 Converter with COM1 is being used COM2 if RS232 422 Converter with COM2 is being used F5 Edit Paths and Files Allows you to enable toggle ON or disable toggle OFF ability to edit default path and file names while in Loader software if this parameter is set to OFF and Software Configuration Menu is not available unauthorized personnel cannot change pathnames and file names note that this function can be used to prevent accidental loss of programs or documentation F6 Current Ladder Line Allows you to specify line number of logic to be displayed on first entry into either Loader Monitor mode or Stand Alone mode each time Loader software is executed this line number is overwritten to reflect line number displayed at time of exit this allows you to automatically return to exact position in program loop being monitored Table 2 14 is continued on next page 40 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 2 7 620 60 Software Configuration F6 Continued System Type and File Loads Menu continued Table 2 14 System Type and File Loads Menu Selections continued Key Title Description F7 Ladder Logic Loa
74. A 4 System Status Information for 620 11 14 1631 LCs Continued System Status Table for 620 11 14 1631 LCs Refer to Tables A 6 A 7 and A 8 for a list of 8 bit address registers for 620 11 14 1631 LCs and the System Status Information that they contain Table A 6 620 11 14 1631 LC System Status Table System Diagnostic Status Decimal Address Register Contents Decimal Address Register Contents 2488 21845 No ARMP in progress 2412 Battery Bad 0 Good 128 2487 43690 ARMP in progress 2411 PM Fail 0 Pass 128 2470 Control Relay Size MSB before usage of real I O 2408 Motherboard ID Correct 128 2469 LSB 2404 Option Card CIM or CNM see Note 1 2468 Real I O Size MSB 2403 Option Card CIM or CNM see Note 1 2467 LSB 2402 Option Card CIM or CNM see Note 1 2466 Register Size MSB 2401 Option Card CIM or CNM see Note 1 2465 LSB 2399 Control Net Status Bits Opt Card 1 2432 Model Number BCD 2398 Control Net Status Bits Opt Card 2 2431 Card Fault Address 1 MSB 2397 Control Net Status Bits Opt Card 3 2430 LSB 2396 Control Net Status Bits Opt Card 4 2429 Card Fault Address 2 MSB 2395 PC Checksum MSB 2428 LSB 2394 LSB 2427 Card Fault Address 3 MSB 2393 PC Checksum Error Flag MSB 0 no error 1 error 2426 LSB 2392 LSB not used 2425 Card Fault Address 4 MSB 2391 PC Initial Checksum Flag system use only 2424 LSB
75. Enter appropriate numeric label 8448 3 Press F5 to select indirect jump NSKR instruction 60 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 10 Memory Reference Instructions Continued Indirect jump characteristics Figure 3 44 illustrates characteristics associated with the indirect jump instruction Figure 3 44 Indirect Jump Characteristics Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 61 3 10 Memory Reference Instructions Continued End of jump Refer to Table 3 53 for end of jump specifications Table 3 53 End of Jump Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 10 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Used with direct and indirect jumps to mark end of jump block Characteristics Unlike skip instruction direct jump can have multiple end of jump EOS instructions see Figure 3 45 and each EOS can be controlled by conditioning logic each EOS bears same reference number as that of jump program scan can be redirected selectively to one of several locations scan will always be redirected to last True EOS with same reference number as True jump instruction Uses the same neumatic symbol as end of skip EOS instruction Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program an end of jump instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F5 to select Skip Logic Group 2 Enter app
76. Example 2 Collect memory size and memory used values to calculate the free memory value Addresses 2299 and 2298 contain memory size in bytes Addresses 2297 and 2296 contain memory used in bytes Example 3 Collect the first eight card fault addresses Addresses 2431 and 2430 contain the first detected card fault address 34 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 2 3 System Status Information Continued Communication port protocol registers 620 12 1633 36 CPMs each have a 25 pin communication port for serial communications with host computers Through this port the 620 CPM accepts commands carries out data exchange requests and returns a response to the host computer 620 CPMs support the following three protocols Asynchronous Byte Count ABC MODBUS RTU and PeerData network Refer to Tables 2 4 2 5 and 2 6 for System Status Table register definitions for each respective protocol ABC protocol Table 2 4 lists 8 byte blocks which are reserved for On Board Communications Port Transaction Records using the ABC protocol Each count consists of two System Status Table locations that should be interpreted as a 16 bit word with a binary range of 0 65535 In the case of word wide registers the least significant byte is located in the System Status Table byte with the lower address and the most significant byte is located in the System Status Table byte with the higher address Note
77. F6 Float Width SINGLE selection causes all floating point numbers to display as one 7 character data field DOUBLE selection causes all floating point numbers to display as one 15 character data field If DOUBLE is selected instructions programmed immediately to right of floating point instruction must not have any data associated with them may be necessary to program an NOP between instructions which displays data if a double wide display is selected F7 Printer Characters STANDARD setting causes ASCII text characters to be used to make up all logic elements and vertical horizontal lines on all logic listings F8 Float Display Mode DEC EXP selection causes floating point numbers to be in decimal form until number being displayed exceeds ability of decimal form to display it display then automatically converts to exponential form EXP selection causes all floating point numbers to be displayed in exponential form Table 2 13 is continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 37 2 7 620 60 Software Configuration F6 Continued Operational Modes Menu continued Table 2 13 Operational Modes Menu Selections Continued Key Title Description F9 Logic Group Hold Can be set toggled ON to save 1 keystroke per element when programming elements from the same logic group Applies to F1 Contact logic group only you do not need to select the logic group each time before e
78. If ladder logic listing printout in 80 column format is selected to have all possible options enabled and compressed print mode is in AUTO position printout appears as follows line comment for each line of ladder logic is printed above associated line and coil comment for line terminator instruction is above associated line of ladder logic terminator instruction cross reference appears above line if seven or more series elements are encountered by software printer automatically goes into compressed print mode so that complete line of ladder logic including documentation fits within 80 columns if printer is placed in compressed mode of operation software effectively increases number of columns available to be printed and can therefore print each logic element with its description without loss of characters Some 80 column printers have fixed line length less than 140 columns if your printer cannot handle 140 columns in compressed mode check if printer configuration can be changed if not and your program contains lines of ladder logic that will trigger auto compressed mode select either full time compressed print or 132 column print format If ladder logic listing with all possible options in 132 column format is selected with compressed print mode in AUTO position printout is as follows because 132 column format provides enough columns to print 3 line by 9 character description for each of up to 9 series elemen
79. SHIFT F1 allows reverse sequence F2 Memory Size Enables toggling through list of available memory sizes for selected 620 LC model number note that memory size will not change if selected 620 LC does not offer a variable memory size this includes 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 and 36 LCs SHIFT F1 allows reverse sequence F3 Register Size Enables toggling through list of register sizes for selected 620 LC model number note that register size will not change if selected 620 LC does not offer a variable register size this includes 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 and 36 LCs SHIFT F1 allows reverse sequence F4 Real I O Size Enables toggling through list of real I O sizes for selected 620 LC model number note that real I O size will not change if selected 620 LC does not offer a variable size this includes 620 11 12 14 1631 2048 I O 1633 1024 I O and 36 LCs SHIFT F1 allows reverse sequence Figure 2 16 Stand Alone Parameters Menu Continued on next page 42 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 2 7 620 60 Software Configuration F6 Continued Multidrop Node Names Menu Press F5 Multidrop Node Names Not supported in Winloader 5 4 from the 620 60 Software Configuration Menu to access the Multidrop Node Names Menu shown in Figure 2 20 This menu is used to assign a Multidrop node name and address for Multi drop Loader network operation Refer to Table 2 20 for descriptions of
80. The number of registers PUSHed is user selectable using the Function Block Selections Menu key F8 and is not affected by the number of parameters chosen You should select a sufficiently large number of outputs to provide storage for all word type parameters chosen Refer to subsection 2 3 Function Block Parameters for information on the number of registers required for each specific output parameter The starting output parameter register address is fixed at 45 less than the starting input parameter register address specified on the Function Block Selections Menu key F5 Continued on next page 14 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 2 2 Function Block Operation Continued Lines 6 and 7 Function Block Body FBB The Function Block Body is comprised of the actual lines of control logic to be executed in order to perform the function of the Function Block For Function Block TSpindl1 the Function Block Body is comprised of Lines 6 and 7 which are presented in Figure 2 10 Figure 2 10 Function Block Body FBB for TSpindl1 Although the Function Block Body presented in Figure 2 10 consists of only two lines you may have as many lines of control logic in the Function Block Body as desired that is there is no limit on the number of lines that may be written in a Function Block Note that in Function Block TSpindl1 additional flexibility could be provided by making the 200 B input parameter n
81. When using F1 Goto the ENTER key must be pressed after entering the step number 5 F7 Press F7 Del Stp in the Full Edit Menu to delete the step selected in step 4 7 Repeat Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all desired existing steps have been deleted 8 ESC Press Escape to return to the Initial Edit Menu 9 ENTER Press Enter to write the displayed line of logic to the end of the control program INS ENTER Press Insert Enter to overwrite the existing line of logic INS Press Insert Page Down to overwrite the PAGE DOWN displayed line of logic ahead of the current line Continued on next page 114 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 12 Sequencer Instructions Continued Delete existing step in Run mode To delete an existing step from the data table while the processor is in the Run mode with CPM keyswitch in Run Program position follow the steps presented in Table 3 77 Table 3 77 Delete an Existing Step in Run Mode Step Action 1 PAGE UP or Move to the line of logic which contains the PAGE DOWN sequencer to be edited 2 M Press the Down Arrow key to display the first five lines of the data table and the Initial Edit Menu 3 F6 Press the F6 Edit Step to enter the Full Edit Menu 4 F1 Press F1 Goto to enter or use the Up Down Arrow Keys to select the step number where the new step is to be inserted All existing steps will be moved down one step an
82. defined printout type displays in one of the ten queue positions These ten selections may be a mixture of ladder logic listings and documentation listings Any entries in the queue may be edited at any time by placing cursor on desired entry and selecting type of listing desired either ladder logic F1 or documentation F2 Any entry may be deleted from queue by placing cursor on entry s number and pressing F3 Delete Selected Entry Execution of queue entries is in order from one to ten and is initiated by pressing F4 Start Queue Execution Figure 3 3 Listing Queue Menu Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 45 3 2 Printer Function Menu F1 Continued Listing Queue Menu continued Table 3 3 Listing Queue Menu Selections Key Selection Function F1 Ladder Logic Listing Selects ladder logic printout type and displays menu of available selections refer to subsequent subsection titled Ladder Logic Listing F1 for more information F2 Documentation Listings Selects documentation printout type and displays menu of available selections refer to subsequent subsection titled Documentation Listing F2 for more information F3 Delete Selected Entry Deletes highlighted queue entry place cursor on any entry s number and press F3 Delete Selected Entry to delete entry from queue F4 Start Queue Execution Initiates
83. entering each instruction and an additional section that describes 620 LC data representation the 16 bit error status word used to indicate any conditions or errors associated with programming operations and conditional data handling whereby conditional contacts are used to control 620 LC arithmetic or comparison operations iv 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference v Table of Contents SECTION 1 GENERAL LADDER LOGIC ENTRY EDIT PROCEDURES 1 1 1 Overview 1 1 2 General Entry Procedures 2 1 3 General Editing Procedures 6 SECTION 2 620 INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW 13 2 1 Overview 13 2 2 Valid ladder Logic Instructions 16 2 3 System Status Information 20 SECTION 3 623 WINLOADER INSTRUCTION SET 39 3 1 Overview
84. in addition to real I O 16 BIT REGISTERS 1 2K 256 bit addresses 512 bit addresses 256 1K 256 bit addresses 512 bit addresses 256 2K 512 bit addresses 512 bit addresses 512 4K 512 bit addresses 512 bit addresses 512 Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 151 A 3 System Status Information for 620 10 15 LCs Continued Register Memory Map for 620 10 15 LCs continued Figure A 2 Register Memory Map for 620 10 15 LCs Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 152 A 3 System Status Information for 620 10 15 LCs Continued System Status Table for 620 10 15 LCs The 620 10 15 LC s System Status Table consists of memory locations 8 bits wide It stores processor system diagnostic information This information is accessed through the Loader Terminal by using a four digit decimal address and a PULL instruction in the control program The 620 15 LC instruction set includes the PULL instruction Three categories of information are stored in the System Status Table System Diagnostics System Hardware Status and System Identification Refer to Table A 4 for the more commonly used addresses and register contents Table A 4 620 10 15 LC System Status Table Decimal Address Register Contents 2431 Card fault address 1 2429 Card fault address 2 2427 Card fault address 3 2425 Card fault address 4 2423 Card fault address 5
85. invalid and sequencer continues to output last valid step number data the message Invalid displays beneath step number register When using self recycling timers or counters there is no delay or undesirable effects presented as device passes through zero since device immediately recycles on maximum accumulated value Table 3 68 is continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 99 3 12 Sequencer Instructions Continued Sequencer continued Table 3 68 Sequencer Specifications Continued SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a sequencer instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F7 to select Sequencer Logic Group 2 Press F7 to select Sequencer instruction 3 Enter desired most significant I O address or specific data register address 4 Enter desired step number address 5 Enter desired data table value repeat until all data table values are entered 6 Press F8 to store data table values 7 Press ENTER to save sequencer to memory Continued on next page 100 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 12 Sequencer Instructions Continued Sequencer characteristics Figure 3 61 illustrates characteristics associated with the sequencer instruction Figure 3 61 Sequencer Characteristics Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 101 3 12 Sequencer In
86. keystrokes Perform the following steps to program an input status scan instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F1 to select Contact Logic Group 2 Press F8 to select input status scan instruction Continued on next page 132 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 14 Miscellaneous Instructions Continued Input status scan characteristics Figure 3 68 illustrates characteristics associated with the input status scan instruction Figure 3 68 Input Status Scan Characteristics 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 133 Section 4 Characteristics of Data Representation and the Error Status Word 4 1 Overview Section contents These are the topics covered in this section Topic See Page 4 1 Overview 133 4 2 Data Representation 134 4 3 Error Status Word 141 4 4 Conditional Data Handling 143 Purpose of this section This section describes the three different data types unsigned integer signed integer and floating point that may be used with 620 LCs and how data is represented for each system the 16 bit error status word whic
87. prompt enter last line number of Function Block to be deleted and press ENTER note that while performing this step you may use PgUp or PgDn key to display existing lines of logic to be considered for this function 6 At Delete Block Ok Y N prompt press Y to delete designated Function Block or press N to abort delete procedure 48 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 Section 5 Function Block Displays 5 1 Overview Section contents These are the topics covered in this section Topic See Page 5 1 Overview 48 5 2 Displaying Function Blocks 49 5 3 Online Monitoring of Function Blocks 55 Purpose of this section This section presents basic procedures for displaying Function Blocks and procedures for performing on line monitoring of Function Block parameters 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 49 5 2 Displaying Function Blocks Background Once a Function Block has been entered and called up on the main screen display the Function Block body and associated internal ladder logic lines are displayed as an external box referred to as the Function Block Display box preceded by a ladder rung which represents the enable instructions
88. to determine address where final data is being accessed from when using indirect bring in use WinLoader paging up or down to line of logic which contains indirect bring in causes Effective Address to display briefly as data ZZZZ this value then changes to final data value while it is brief length of time Effective Address displays is sufficient enough to be read Indirect bring in cannot be forced and is not affected by skip instructions Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program an indirect bring in instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F3 to select Bring In Logic Group 2 Enter desired address 3 Press F1 to select Indirect Bring In instruction 94 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Indirect bring in characteristics Figure 3 17 Indirect Bring In Characteristics 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 95 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Indirect bring in characteristics Figure 3 18 illustrates indexing used with indirect bring in instruction first line reads value from Register Address 5000 adds 1 to this value and places new sum back into address 5000 in line two indirect bring in instruction has reference address of 5000 when this instruction is executed it reads current value in reference address and uses this value as its Effective Address processor th
89. to display documentation for all other elements using same address Table 1 1 is continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 5 1 2 Documentation Types Continued Address Labels Description Detail continued Table 1 1 Creating Address Labels Descriptions Continued Step Action 5 Press ENTER to save any changes If editing changes were made upon exit from 620 Loader Monitor or 620 Stand Alone Loader mode a SAVE Changes to Disk LABELS COMMENTS Y N Y prompt appears press Y to save changes to disk if file already exists an Overwrite Existing Files Y N N prompt appears enter Y to overwrite existing file enter N to abort function Address labels descriptions are stored on disk in different files depending on element type being documented files are created with same base filename extensions used are as follows File Ext Definition ACE Logic element address comments BCE Bit read write instruction comment file BLB Bit read write instruction label file FBL Function Block parameter names and detail JSR Subroutine documentation JSR SUB RTS LBL Logic element address labels LCE Ladder logic line comments SKP Skip documentation NSKR NSKD EOS Continued on next page 6 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 1 2 Documentation Types Continued Address Comments Address comments may be crea
90. 05 3 8 Math Instructions Continued Addition Refer to Table 3 42 for addition specifications Table 3 42 Addition Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Used to calculate sum of two 16 bit data values obtained through data manipulation instructions sum is also generated as a 16 bit data value as shown below Table 3 42 is continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 33 3 8 Math Instructions Continued Addition continued Table 3 42 Addition Specifications Continued SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Characteristics Values being added can originate from I O Status or Data Register Tables and can be obtained using any combination of the following instructions bring in indirect bring in Pull of 1 constant Sum can be output to I O Status or Data Register Tables using the following instructions send out indirect send out Push of 1 When adding unsigned integer data values the two values being added and the sum can range from 0 to 65535 when adding signed register data values the two values being added and the sum can range from 32767 to 32768 Since addition of two 16 bit unsigned integers can produce a sum of 131070 and signed integers a sum of 65534 the following methods for handling or detecting these overflows should be considered pro
91. 1 Overview Continued Copying Function Block Library control programs continued Table 7 1 Loading Function Block Library Control Program Continued Step Action 6 Press ENTER to verify line number Block Addressing screen shown in Figure 7 2 below displays Start Address is where current block of software s first address resides End Address is where current block of software s last address resides New Start Address is where you want copied starting address to reside Note that any number between 0 and 8191 is valid entry for Start and End fields software automatically checks for overlap addresses that when converted would be the same and allows only those numbers that do not overlap to be legal entries if there is an address overlap or a calculation that exceeds a specified range an error message appears and overlapping offset or range is highlighted If you want to change the addresses follow the steps as shown on the display Table 7 1 is continued on next page Figure 7 2 Block Addressing Screen 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 67 7 1 Overview Continued Copying Function Block Library control programs continued Table 7 1 Loading Function Block Library Control Program Continued Step Action 7 Press F6 after range and New Start addresses are defined software prompts for a filename 8 Enter one of the following file names an
92. 1 7 Searching for a Line Marker or Function Block Marker Step Action 1 Select F13 to access Search Menu shown in Figure 1 3 2 Select F2 Line Marker or F6 Function Block Line Marker to begin search 3 Enter desired line marker number to be searched for and press ENTER If a valid line marker has been entered line containing that marker displays with the following message displayed in lower right hand corner Again N marker number entered Press yes Y to proceed to any other lines that contain the same marker number pressing any other key will terminate the search When end of memory is encountered or no marker is found the following message displays Continued on next page 16 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 1 4 Search Functions F13 Continued Searching for a logic element Perform the Table 1 8 procedure to search for a specific logic element Table 1 8 Searching for a Logic Element Step Action 1 Select F13 to access Search Menu shown in Figure 1 3 2 Select F3 OpCode amp Address 3 Enter desired address and proceed as appropriate If searching for a specific address any opcode press ENTER If searching for a specific address contained in a specific group of opcodes for example contacts coils etc select the desired element group F1 F10 and press ENTER If searching for a specific address with a specific opcode se
93. 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Corresponds to and controls ON OFF states of field devices or internal coils Characteristics Turns ON when preceding logic is TRUE and OFF when preceding logic is FALSE after power fail condition or PRGM to RUN all nonretentive coils are reset to zero OFF regardless of previous states prior to first logic scan see Figure 3 3 Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a nonretentive coil in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F2 to select the Coil Logic Group 2 Enter desired address 3 Press F2 to select nonretentive coil Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 49 3 2 Contact and Coil Instructions Continued Retentive coil Refer to Table 3 7 for retentive coil specifications Table 3 7 Retentive Coil Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 10 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Corresponds to and controls ON OFF states of field devices or internal coils Characteristics Turns ON when preceding logic is TRUE and OFF when preceding logic is FALSE after power fail condition or PRGM to RUN all retentive coils are returned to previous state after all start up routines are completed but before user program is executed including input status scan Retentive scan After power is reestablished to CPM standard start up routines are performed an
94. 16 bit user register area and I O status tables see Figure 2 3 next page The 620 12 CPM has 2K of user memory words the 620 1633 CPM has 8K of user memory words and the 620 36 CPM has 32K of user memory words see Figure 2 3 Each word is 24 bits wide and each ladder element of a logic line uses one word Note that floating point constants and JSR TON and TOF instructions each use two words of user memory floating point bring in and send out instructions each use two registers Refer to Appendix A for System Status information for 620 06 10 11 14 15 1631 25 and 35 LCs I O Status Table Each processor s I O Status Table is contained on each CPM s processor board The status of real I O is stored in locations 0 255 for the 620 12 CPM locations 0 1023 for the 620 1633 CPM and locations 0 2047 for the 620 36 CPM see Figure 2 3 Control relay internal I O statuses are stored in locations 256 4096 for the 620 12 CPM locations 1024 4095 for the 620 1633 CPM and locations 2048 4095 for the 620 36 CPM Data Register Table Timer and counter instruction preset and accumulator values described in subsection 3 4 and other user data are contained in the Data Register Table see Figure 2 3 Each timer or counter uses two registers and each register is 16 bits wide The 620 12 CPM has 256 registers 4096 4351 and the 620 1633 and 620 36 CPMs each have 4096 registers 4096 8191 Refer to the memory map Figure 2 3 which
95. 2390 PC Initial Checksum Pass Flag 0 initial calculation in progress 1 initial checksum complete 2423 Card Fault Address 5 MSB 2318 Option Card Fault Bits 1 CIM CNM 2422 LSB 2317 Option Card Fault Bits 2 CIM CNM 2421 Card Fault Address 6 MSB 2316 Option Card Fault Bits 3 CIM CNM 2420 LSB 2315 Option Card Fault Bits 4 CIM CNM 2419 Card Fault Address 7 MSB 2418 LSB Note 1 11111111 component not present 2417 Card Fault Address 8 MSB 00000001 CIM present amp failed 2416 LSB 10000001 CIM present amp passed 2415 Card Fault Count MSB 00000010 CNM present amp failed 2414 LSB 10000010 CNM present amp passed 2413 Scan Loss Scan Loss 0 Valid Scan 128 Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 156 A 4 System Status Information for 620 11 14 1631 LCs Continued System Status Table for 620 11 14 1631 LCs continued Table A 7 620 11 14 1631 LC System Status Table System Hardware Status Decimal Address Register Contents Decimal Address Register Contents 2303 Processor Type 1 620 11 14 1631 2291 0 MSB 2302 Revision Level 64 in 620 11 14 16 2290 Scan Time LSB 2299 Memory Size MSB 2287 Software Request for Prgm MSB 2298 LSB 2286 LSB 2297 Memory Used MSB 2284 Memory Type EPROM 128 Fail 255 2296 LSB 2275 Option Card 1 ID 2295 Force Count MSB 2274 Option Card 2 ID 2294 LSB 2273
96. 27 Figure 1 10 Floating Point Data Value Display Format 28 Figure 1 11 Displaying Individual Bits From I O Status Table Using On Off Format 29 Figure 1 12 Displaying Individual Bits From Data Register Table Using On Off Format 30 Figure 1 13 Block Operations Functions Menu 32 Figure 1 14 Block Addressing Screen 37 Figure 1 15 Search amp Exchange Function Examples 44 Figure 2 1 Auxiliary Function Menu 48 Figure 2 2 Clear Memory Functions Menu 50 Figure 2 3 Upload Download Functions Menu 51 Figure 2 4 Append From Disk to 620 Example 56 Figure 2 5 Documentation Functions Menu 58 Figure 2 6 Display and Diagnostic Functions Menu 59 Figure 2 7 620 Hardware Status Display
97. 3 2 Defining Function Blocks Introduction No special editor is required to generate Function Blocks Generation may be performed by defining a Function Block with either new logic or existing logic as described in the two separate procedures presented in this subsection Function Blocks may only be created when the 620 LC CPM is in the Program mode of operation and only when all conditions for Function Block programming are met such as WinLoader is in Program mode edit program permission is granted etc When developing Function Blocks you should restrict addressing to at most eight different ranges it is good programming practice to use consecutive addresses whenever possible to facilitate address translation A Function Block may not be inserted into a clear memory at least one program line must be entered first Function Blocks may be nested indefinitely limited only by maximum amount of system memory available refer to Section 8 Advanced Function Block Applications for more information on nesting Function Blocks Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 23 3 2 Defining Function Blocks Continued Defining a Function Block with new logic Perform the Table 3 1 procedure to define a Function Block with new logic Table 3 1 Defining Function Block With New Logic Step Action 1 At the main screen display press ALT F8 to clear the screen if necessary
98. 38 Table 1 21 Procedure for Using Last Line Entered Function 40 Table 1 22 Procedure for Performing Search amp Exchange Function 43 Table 2 1 Auxiliary Function Menu Selections 49 Table 2 2 Clear Memory Functions Menu Selections 50 Table 2 3 Upload Download Functions Menu Selections 52 Table 2 4 Changing the Pathname 53 Table 2 5 Documentation Functions Menu Selections 58 Table 2 6 Display and Diagnostic Functions Menu Selections 60 Table 2 7 Diagnostic Status Screen Selections 62 Table 2 8 Mode Change Functions Menu Selections 66 Table 2 9 Register Table Functions Menu Selections 70 Table 2 10 Changing the Pathname 72 Table 2 11 Update Display Menu Selections 78 Table 2 12 Edit Display Menu Selections 80 viii 623 WinLoader Edi
99. 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Pull from System Status Table characteristics Figure 3 29 Pull from System Status Table Characteristics 18 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 7 Integer Comparison Instructions Integer comparison instruction types Table 3 36 presents the four types of integer comparison instructions presented in this section Table 3 36 Integer Comparison Instructions Integer Comparison Instructions Refer to page Equal To 20 Less Than 23 Greater Than 26 Test for Zero 29 Integer comparison instructions Integer comparison instructions are used to compare two data values obtained from data manipulation instruction see subsection 3 6 These instructions are useful in determining whether a given process value such as might be obtained from a field device operator data entry math operation result etc is equal to or within a predetermined range of values Although this subsection is specifically dedicated to their use with signed and unsigned integer data 620 LC comparison instructions can also be used with floating point data Typical application A typical application using integer comparison instructions would be a manufacturing process whereby the process liquid must be maintained within a specified temperature range A loop controller or device executing a PID algorithm could be used to measure and control the temperature but a comparison routine within a 6
100. 7 1 2 Software Mode Control Function F11 Continued Performing on line programming Follow the Table 1 3 procedure to perform on line programming Table 1 3 Performing On line Programming Step Action 1 Set 620 keyswitch to Run Program 2 Press SHIFT F1 to select software on line programming the following message displays CAUTION 620 in RUN Mode RUN Mode program enabled Output bit s will remain in last state if deleted or address changed Press any key to clear this message 3 Display desired line monitoring will continue In Run Program mode WinLoader monitors line displayed until a contact group or function is selected monitoring resumes if or when edited line is saved Esc key is pressed or PgUp then PgDn keys are pressed 4 Edit existing program line as usual When a contact group is selected the following message appears WARNING Loader is not monitoring line status Press any key to clear this message 5 When changes are complete press Ins and then Enter the following message displays WARNING Run Mode Programming Enabled Enter to Execute Any Key to Cancel 6 Press Enter to complete the process a Please Wait message flashes while the line edit function is being executed when this message disappears line monitoring resumes 8 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 1 2 Software Mode Control Function F11
101. 82 for invert matrix specifications Table 3 82 Invert Matrix Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Changes status of each bit 1 s to 0 s and 0 s to 1 s in matrix A and transfers them to matrix C Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program an invert matrix instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F10 to select Matrix Logic Group 2 Enter desired matrix address 3 Press F2 to select Invert Matrix instruction 4 Program the necessary matrix information as prompted reference address start address size etc 5 Press RETURN or ENTER after each entry Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 121 3 13 Matrix Instructions Continued OR matrix Refer to Table 3 83 for OR matrix specifications Table 3 83 OR Matrix Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Logically ORs the contents of matrix A with matrix B and transfers resulting bit pattern to matrix C Characteristics Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program an OR matrix instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F10 to select Matrix Logic Group 2 Enter desired matrix address 3 Press F4 to select OR Matrix instruction 4 Program the necessary matrix
102. Converts signed integer values from positive to negative or negative to positive see Figure 3 56 Characteristics Provides two s complement of original data Data manipulation instruction is used to place word to be complemented onto stack negate instruction tells processor to determine two s complement of last word placed on stack then to write result of operation back to stack resulting word can then be read from stack by another data manipulation instruction and used as any other 16 bit data Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a negate instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F9 to select Operators Logic Group 2 Press F8 to select Logical Operators Logic Group 3 Press F4 to select negate instruction Continued on next page 90 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 11 Data Conversion Instructions Continued Negate characteristics Figure 3 56 illustrates characteristics associated with the negate instruction Figure 3 56 Negate Characteristics Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 91 3 11 Data Conversion Instructions Continued NOT Refer to Table 3 66 for NOT specifications Table 3 66 NOT Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 36 LCs Symbol Usage Performs NOT operation on a single 16 bit data word see Figure 3 57
103. Documentation Functions Menu when the Documentation Functions Menu is accessed from the WinLoader s Auxiliary Function Menu iv 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions v Table of Contents SECTION 1 CHARACTERISTICS OF DOCUMENTATION TYPES 1 1 1 Overview 1 1 2 Documentation Types 3 SECTION 2 DOCUMENTATION FUNCTIONS MENU FROM MAIN MENU 11 2 1 Overview 11 2 2 Function Block Parameter Name Editor F1 16 2 3 Label Description Editors F2 F5 F6 22 2 4 Comment Editors F3 F4 29 2 5 Bit Comment Editor F7 39 2 6 Bit Label Editor F8 40 2 7 Edit Default File F9 41 SECTION 3 DOCUMENTATION FUNCTIONS MENU FROM AUXILIARY MENU 42 3 1 Ov
104. Edit Mode Menu 30 31 Modes of operation 25 F7 Bit Comment Editor 32 Accessing 32 F8 Bit Label Editor 33 Accessing 33 F9 Edit Default File 34 Editing procedure 34 Selections 13 Documentation types 1 9 Index 64 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 L M N O Line comments 8 9 Creating 8 Deleting 9 Displaying 9 Editing 8 Line markers 7 Adding 7 Deleting 9 Listing Queue Menu 42 43 F1 Ladder Logic Listing 44 45 F2 Documentation Listings 52 54 Printer Parameters Menu 46 51 P Q R Printer Parameters Menu 46 47 F1 Port Function 48 F7 F8 Cross Reference Range 50 F9 Corresponding Print Mode 51 Selections 47 Serial port configuration menu 49 Serial port configuration procedure 49 S T U V W X Y Z Serial port configuration procedure 41 Industrial Automation and Control Honeywell Inc 1100 Virginia Drive Fort Washington Pennsylvania 19034
105. Figure 2 7 Input Parameter Unloading FBU Line for TSpindl1 11 Figure 2 8 Function Block Output Parameter FBO Line for TSpindl1 12 Figure 2 9 Output Parameter Unloading FBU Line for TSpindl1 13 Figure 2 10 Function Block Body FBB for TSpindl1 14 Figure 2 11 Function Block End FBE Line for TSpindl1 15 Figure 3 1 Block Edit Menu 23 Figure 3 2 Function Block Selections Menu 24 Figure 3 3 External Function Block Display Box 30 Figure 3 4 Input Parameter Functions Menu 32 Figure 3 5 Output Parameter Functions Menu 33 Figure 4 1 Cursor Positions for Editing Function Block Parameters 38 Figure 4 2 Block Edit Menu 40 Figure 4 3 Function Block Selection Menu 41 Figure 5 1 Typical Function Block Display
106. Form 621 8985 for more information on how to use this configuration utility 30 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 2 7 620 60 Software Configuration F6 Accessing the 620 60 Software Configuration Menu Press F6 620 60 Software Configuration on the WinLoader Main Menu to access the 620 60 Software Configuration Menu shown in Figure 2 15 below This menu allows you to preset the following operational characteristics of the WinLoader software default paths file names floating point data handling personal computer options and WinLoader hardware operation A virtual library of unique software configurations may be created for use in various systems environments and situations that might arise in your particular plant or facility Refer to Table 2 15 next page for descriptions of each available selection from this menu Figure 2 12 620 60 Software Configuration Menu Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 31 2 7 620 60 Software Configuration F6 Continued Accessing the 620 60 Software Configuration Menu continued Table 2 11 620 60 Software Configuration Menu Selections Key Title Description Refer to F1 Paths and Files Accesses Paths and Files Menu to enter default label ladder file and path names as well as labels comments and cache size maximums and 620 driver information Subsequent subsection titled Paths and Files Menu F2 Opera
107. Group 2 Enter desired address 3 Press F5 to select bit write 4 Enter desired bit position 5 Press RETURN or ENTER Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 59 3 3 Single Bit Instructions Continued Bit write characteristics As shown in Figure 3 6 bit write is an output instruction that controls or writes to the status of a single bit within a 16 bit data register in the Register Function Figure 3 6 Bit Write Characteristics 60 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 3 Single Bit Instructions Continued Logic inverter Refer to Table 3 13 for logic inverter specifications Table 3 13 Logic Inverter Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 36 LCs Symbol Usage Examines overall True False status of preceding logic on its line of ladder logic if a logical current path exists through preceding logic True logic inverter instruction inverts this state to False If logical current path does not exist through preceding logic False logic inverter instruction inverts this state to True see Figure 3 7 Characteristics Requires no address numeric label or other identifier it operates only on the line of logic in which it is programmed see Figure 3 7 Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a logic inverter instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F
108. Group Selection Menu displays and you are permitted to program on line refer to subsequent subsection titled Performing On line Programming 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 5 1 2 Software Mode Control Function F11 Continued F11 mode change function is not used in Stand Alone programming mode because Program mode is the only available mode of operation Monitoring in subroutines or jump type not skip elements Follow the Table 1 2 procedure if it is necessary to monitor ladder logic that is executed more than one time within a program scan as may occur in subroutines or jump type not skip elements When using this technique you may display any line of logic except any outside the subroutine skip element Those instructions not being executed the number of times specified show no status along with the message NoExec Table 1 2 Monitoring in Subroutines or Jump type Not Skip Elements Step Action 1 Press Shift F1 your 620 LC must be in Monitor mode the F11 MODE legend displays in reverse video and the following prompt appears 2 Enter the execution number to be monitored for example if a subroutine executes five times in one CPM program scan and you need to know status of logic on second execution type a 2 3 Press Enter the following prompt displays on lower right portion of screen Monitoring Scan 2 Display will be updated any time the monitored line is execut
109. I O configuration Slots A N in the I O Configuration Menu correspond with slots in the 620 LC processor rack Figure 2 6 below specifies the I O slot assignment for each I O module when you configure the 620 3691 Processor Rack by accessing the I O Configuration Menu Figure 2 10 next page shows I O slot assignments for the 620 3691 1690 1693 1695 processor racks Figure 2 6 I O Slot Assignments for 620 3691 Processor Rack Processor full rack assignments 620 3691 processor racks In the 620 3691 Standard Processor Rack for the 620 36 CPM shown in Figure 2 10 I O module slots A F correspond directly with slots A F in the I O Configuration Menu Note that slots G H are designated for the power supply module slots I L are designated for the option modules and slots M N are designated for the CPM therefore slots G through N are not defined in the I O Configuration Menu Note also that slots E F can also be designated either for I O modules or for Serial Link Modules SLMs in 620 1633 36 configurations 620 3691 620 1693 and 620 1695 processor racks do not support more than one 627 1002R 1003R MiniCOP Module Slots E and F in 620 3691 processor rack and slot H in 620 1690 1693 processor racks do not support 621 0012R ASCII Communications Modules or 627 1002R 1003R MiniCOP Modules Continued on next page 16 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 2 2 620 Loader Monitor F1 Continued Figure 2 7 I O
110. If necessary refer to Section 3 of 623 WinLoader Implementation LDR003 for procedure on how to enter main screen display prior to this step 2 Press F17 or SHIFT F7 to access Block Edit Menu shown in Figure 3 1 below 3 Select F5 Function Block Define from the Block Edit Menu to access the Function Block Selections Menu shown in Figure 3 2 next page 4 Use appropriate Function Block Selection Menu keys to configure Function Block overhead refer to Table 3 2 for descriptions of each available selection from menu 5 When configuration of Function Block overhead is complete press ENTER pressing Esc aborts the configuration procedure 6 Following message displays Function Block Insert ready Press ESC to cancel any other key to continue Press ENTER to continue 7 After Function Block is inserted into program memory an external Function Block Display line with following message displays Function Block Insert Complete Press ENTER to clear message 8 Press Ctrl PgDn to access internal body of Function Block to begin inserting user logic 9 Following warning displays Warning No User lines Use ENTER to install your first program line Press ENTER 10 Enter first line of logic and press ENTER to load it Refer to 623 WinLoader Programming Reference LDR004 for information on entering and loading lines of ladder logic Table 3 1 is continued on next page Fig
111. Instructions Continued Less than Refer to Table 3 38 for less than specifications Table 3 38 Less Than Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Compares two data values and if the first value is less than the second power is passed to succeeding instructions see Figure 3 32 Characteristics Cannot execute a direct bit by bit comparison of both values since most significant bit is included as data for unsigned integer values and is a sign bit for signed integer values Signed integer values range from 32767 to 32768 and use twos complement notation if sign bit is 0 remaining 15 bits represent a positive value from 0 to 32767 if sign bit is a 1 remaining 15 bits represent a negative value from 1 to 32768 Unsigned integer values range from 0 to 65535 all 16 bits represent data Requires special considerations regarding type of data being compared signed or unsigned and display mode signed or unsigned of WinLoader Uses no addressing and displays no data Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a less than instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F9 to select Operators Logic Group 2 Press F7 to select Math Operators Logic Group 3 Press F4 to select less than instruction Continued on next page 24 620 WinLoader Progra
112. Label Description List or F8 Comment Listing function is selected to display address labels address comments bit labels bit comments or line comments all Function Block parameters up to 45 input and 45 output maximum will be listed below Function Block define box in printout with address labels address comments bit labels bit comments and or line comments shown due to space limitations however printout will not include descriptions of each parameter address Only one selection may be made from this menu for each queue entry when you press ENTER the last selection made is placed in the queue the functions in the Printer Parameters Menu operate as previously described Figure 3 8 Documentation Listing Menu Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 55 3 2 Printer Function Menu F1 Continued Documentation Listings F2 continued Table 3 7 Documentation Listing Menu Selections Key Selection Function F1 Cross Reference List Toggling address ADDR selects complete cross reference of used ladder logic addresses presently in memory Toggling Line Marker LINE MARK presents listing showing each line marker reference number and line number to which it is attached Toggling Function Block FUNC BLK presents listing of all Functions Blocks in program to include each starting line number total number of lines number of parameters number of memory
113. Menu to access the Operational Modes Menu shown in Figure 2 17 below This menu is used to set modes of operation for ladder logic display options programming options printer options Refer to Table 2 17 next two pages for descriptions of each available selection from this menu Note that the following parameters on the Operational Modes Menu may be changed from either LOADER or UTILITY F1 Auto Clear F2 Scan Time Display F3 Output Check F4 Full Time Detail Figure 2 14 Operational Modes Menu Continued on next page 36 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 2 7 620 60 Software Configuration F6 Continued Operational Modes Menu continued Table 2 13 Operational Modes Menu Selections Key Title Description F1 Auto Clear Can be set toggled ON so that display automati cally clears each time line of logic is loaded or inserted F2 Scan Time Display Can be set toggled ON to show 620 scan time from System Status Table on status line while monitoring ladder logic F3 Duplicate Output Check Can be set toggled ON to check terminator instructions for previous use and if so prompts user to specify whether OK to continue F4 Full Time Detail Can be set toggled ON to display and or edit a detail block containing an element s label and description F5 Beep Can be set toggled ON so that audible beep sounds when error occurs or current function is finished
114. Multielement Display Function F15 23 1 7 Ladder Logic List Function F16 31 1 8 Block Operations Functions F17 32 1 9 Clear Display Function F18 39 1 10 Last Line Entered Function F19 40 1 11 Search amp Exchange Function F20 41 1 12 Data Change Function 46 SECTION 2 AUXILIARY FUNCTION MENU 47 2 1 Overview 47 2 2 Clear 620 Memory F1 50 2 3 Upload Download Functions F2 51 2 4 Documentation Functions Menu F3 58 2 5 620 Diagnostics Menu F4 59 2 6 Program Mode Change Functions F5 66 2 7 Register Table Functi
115. NOT SKIP any lines of logic in skip block skip block logic is executed False scan SKIPS any lines of logic in skip block skip block logic is not executed All on off conditions and data values within an active skipped skip block are deenergized cleared output coils are turned OFF regardless of their last state prior to being skipped data values timer accumulators send outs Push instruction values etc are all zeroed regardless of their last states prior to being skipped when skip block is no longer active on off conditions and data values are initially off or zero Can be forced to a desired True False state using force function when FORCED ON acts as if control logic is True when FORCED OFF acts as if control logic is False Acts as a line terminator see Figure 3 13 Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a not skip and deenergize instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F5 to select Skip Logic Group 2 Enter desired numeric label 3 Press F6 to select NSKD Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 83 3 5 Skip Instructions Continued Skip characteristics As shown in Figure 3 13 skip instructions have similar True False conditioning and operating characteristics they differ only with regards to their operational effect on skipped logic Figure 3 13 Skip Characteris
116. NOT perform an overwrite Edit Default File function may also be accessed through Documentation Functions Menu in Main Menu furthermore label and comment editors may also be accessed by Documentation Functions Menu in Main Menu Table 3 8 Procedure for Editing Default File Step Action 1 Select F7 Edit Default File from Documentation Functions Menu 2 Enter default pathname where documentation files are to be stored 3 Enter file name of up to 8 characters to be used to identify all documentation files created for a specific project or application Software installs the name 620 as default until desired name is defined 4 Following prompt appears Press Y or ENTER to load documentation files Press N or any key other than Y or ENTER to accept file name without attempting to load documentation files Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 59 3 4 Edit Default File F7 Continued Procedure for Editing Default File continued If you are just beginning to create and document a ladder logic program a default file name and pathname should be specified for documentation files to prevent accidental loss of documentation data if any new labels descriptions are created while editing ladder logic they are saved using the present default file name and pathname when any documentation editor is selected if a default file name has not been specif
117. O and 3456 internal I O For 620 1631 CPM output status of real I O is contained in locations 0 2039 control relay internal I O statuses are posted at addresses 2048 4095 for a total of 2040 real I O and 2048 internal I O Timer and counter presets accumulated values and other user data are contained in Register Table at addresses 4096 8191 these addresses represent 4096 16 bit registers available to user each timer or counter uses two registers for maximum of 2048 timers and counters combined refer to I O bit and register capacities in Table A 5 and memory map in Figure A 3 next page Table A 5 620 11 14 1631 LC I O and Register Capacities SYSTEM MODEL amp MEMORY SIZE MAXIMUM REAL I O MAXIMUM NO OF INTERNAL CONTROL RELAYS in addition to real I O 16 BIT REGISTERS 620 1131 8K 256 single bit I O capacity 3840 single bit I O capacity 4096 620 1431 8K 640 single bit I O capacity 3456 single bit I O capacity 4096 620 1631 8K 2040 single bit I O capacity 2048 single bit I O capacity 4096 Any unused real I O address may be used as an internal control I O address Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 154 A 4 System Status Information for 620 11 14 1631 LCs Continued Register Memory Map for 620 11 14 1631 LCs continued Figure A 3 620 11 14 1631 LC 8K System Memory Map Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 155
118. Option Fault Address 2 2291 Scan Time 2425 Option Fault Address 3 2287 Software Request for Program 2423 Option Fault Address 4 2421 Option Fault Address 5 2419 Option Fault Address 6 2417 Option Fault Address 7 2415 Card Fault Count 2413 Scan Loss Battery Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 161 A 5 System Status Information for 620 25 35 LCs Continued Expanded diagnostics for 620 35 LC For 620 35 LCs to take advantage of the Expanded Serial I O Diagnostics the status of each Serial Link Module SLM is automatically posted in the controller s System Status Table This information is available by PULLing System Status Table address 3125 8 bit addresses 3124 and 3125 SLM1 and address 3127 8 bit addresses 3126 and 3127 SLM 2 Refer to Table A 10 for a list of the information that can be found in these System Status Table addresses Table A 10 SLM Statuses for 620 35 LC Expanded Serial I O Diagnostics Data Status Definition 0 SLM Not Present Indicates processor rack does not include a 620 0085 2048 IOCM this SLM is not present in processor rack or this SLM if present is not active 255 SLM Present Not Tested Indicates that this SLM does not include firmware V R 2 3 or higher and is therefore not capable of performing the Expanded Serial I O Diagnostics 16384 SLM Diagnostics Passed Indicates Expanded Serial I O Diagnostic routi
119. Press F1 GOTO 2 Enter desired relative position number in response to prompt 3 Press ENTER WinLoader software goes to specified relative position number and displays that Function Block along with any parameter names or label descriptions previously defined F3 SEARCH To search for a specific Function Block number Step Action 1 Press F3 SEARCH 2 Enter Function Block number to be searched for 3 Press ENTER Desired Function Block appears along with any parameter names or label descriptions previously defined F4 COPY To copy all parameter names label descriptions from one Function Block number into a new Function Block number Step Action 1 Press F4 COPY 2 Enter Function Block number to be copied to 3 Press ENTER Desired Function Block number appears on screen with appropriate parameter names and label descriptions copied in it F6 DELETE To delete parameter names and label descriptions specified for a particular Function Block number press F6 DELETE Function Block and all parameter names and description labels are deleted and next succeeding Function Block number appears on screen Table 2 2 is continued on next page 18 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 2 2 Function Block Parameter Name Editor F1 Continued Accessing Function Block Parameter Name Editor continued Table 2 2 Function Block Parameter N
120. Programming Reference 37 2 3 System Status Information Continued PeerData network Table 2 6 next page lists 8 bit address registers used for the PeerData Network Whenever any PeerData Network configuration value is changed the restart network byte must be set to 170 by the same command that changes the value This rule applies to the nodal address as well If the restart cannot be asserted in the same command and the same memory word zero the port must be disabled location 2491 the configuration changed and the port then reenabled System Status Table locations 2548 through 2556 relate to MSB and LSB as indicated in Table 2 6 for example for location 2548 node 31 is the MSB and node 24 is the LSB Continued on next page 38 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 2 3 System Status Information Continued PeerData network Table 2 6 PeerData Network Registers Register Description Register Description 2493 This node s nodal address 2534 of registers to transfer for node 18 2512 MSB Register table start address 2535 of registers to transfer for node 19 2513 LSB 2536 of registers to transfer for node 20 2514 Restart network byte 170 restart enable 85 enable PeerData Net 00 disable PeerData Net port must also be enabled 2491 2537 of registers to transfer for node 21 2515 Maximum nodal address 2538 of registers to transfer for node 22 2516 of registers to trans
121. SHIFT F7 to access Block Edit Menu shown in Figure 3 1 2 Select F5 Function Block Define from Block Edit Menu 3 At Block Beginning Enter Line prompt enter first line number to be included in Function Block or accept default for current line number and press ENTER note that while performing this step you may use PgUp or PgDn key to display existing lines of logic to be considered for block define function 4 At Block Ending Enter Line prompt enter last line number to be included in Function Block and press ENTER note that while performing this step you may use PgUp or PgDn key to display existing lines of logic to be considered for this function 5 Function Block Selection Menu displays shown in Figure 3 2 use appropriate keys to configure Function Block overhead as described in Table 3 2 when configuration of Function Block overhead is complete press ENTER pressing Esc aborts configuration procedure 6 Following message displays Function Block Insert ready Press ESC to cancel any other key to continue Press ENTER to continue 7 Following message displays Function Block Insert Complete Press ENTER to continue 8 Press F17 or SHIFT F7 to access Block Edit menu shown in Figure 3 1 9 Select F10 Save to save newly defined Function Block If save protection level is set for either USER or OEM you are required to enter your secu
122. Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Used as a line terminator to mark the beginning of a jump block see Figure 3 44 Characteristics Uses reference number 8448 Uses formatted logic line consisting of contact used to condition or control execution of line data manipulation instruction such as bring in that places data value on stack to be used as reference number of EOS instruction to be jumped to indirect jump identified by numeric label 8448 When preceding control logic is True scan will NOT JUMP any lines of logic in jump block jump block logic is executed False scan WILL JUMP to EOS with specified reference number jumped logic is not read or executed scan is redirected to first instruction after EOS with specified reference number All on off conditions and data values within an active jumped jump block are retained output coils are frozen in last state prior to being jumped data values timer accumulators send outs Pushes and other instruction values are frozen in last state prior to being jumped Uses same neumatic symbol as not skip and retain NSKR instruction Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program an indirect jump instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F5 to select Skip Logic Group 2
123. Stand Alone Loader mode a SAVE Changes to Disk LABELS COMMENTS Y N Y prompt appears press Y to save changes to disk if file already exists an Overwrite Existing Files Y N N prompt appears enter Y to overwrite existing file enter N to abort function To create line comment from Documentation Menu of Main Menu refer to subsection 2 4 of this manual Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 9 1 2 Documentation Types Continued Line Comments continued Perform the Table 1 5 procedure to display a line comment Table 1 5 Displaying a Line Comment Step Action 1 To display a line comment from MONITOR Mode Press 2 To display a line comment from Program Mode Step Action 2A Press the Line Marker Edit Menu appears 2B Select C from the Line Marker Edit Menu to show the line comment if it exists Perform the Table 1 6 procedure to delete a line comment line marker from the ladder logic editor Table 1 6 Deleting a Line Comment and Line Marker Step Action 1 Press the Line Marker Edit Menu appears 2 Select D from Line Marker Edit Menu to access delete function and delete line marker 10 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 11 Section 2 Documentation Functions Menu from Main Menu 2 1 Overview Section contents These are the topics cove
124. action and error squared on proportional action or normal is based upon the process variable signal being digitized by an analog input module to the range of 0 to 4095 12 bit A D converter and has an output command on the range of 0 to 4095 for transmission to a 12 bit A D converter in an analog output module This is Function Block FB26062 LDR file on the disk Refer to Table 7 2 next page for Single Loop PID Function Block specifications and to Figure 7 3 for an external view of this Function Block Single Loop PID Function Block is for operation only on the following 620 LC processors 620 11 620 12 620 14 620 1631 620 1633 620 36 Version 2 0 or higher Detailed descriptions of each line of Function Block s code may be obtained by loading Function Block and using WinLoader s address comment functions Total description of Function Block may be seen in line comments at line comment markers 26062 17620 and 17621 Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 69 7 2 Function Block Library Control Programs Continued Single Loop PID Function Block continued Table 7 2 Single Loop PID Function Block Specifications Specification Description Applicable Processors and V R Required 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 620 36 Version 2 0 or higher Function Block Description at Line Markers using Line Comments 26062 17620 and 17621 Fun
125. also requires a word of memory Because of this a sequencer can be quite large and may require a substantial amount of time to be written to the 620 LC memory This could cause the processor watchdog timer to timeout if in Run mode which when configured as on will fault the system To prevent accidental timeouts the length of time required for a given line of logic to be written to memory is calculated prior to the attempt If the time required will cause the processor to exceed its watchdog timer the operation is aborted and a message declaring this action is displayed In the procedures presented in Tables 3 72 through 3 77 note that the F6 Edit Steps function used to enter the Full Edit Menu may only be accessed under the following processor keyswitch Loader mode conditions CPU Keyswitch Program DISABLE Run Program Run Program Run Loader Mode Program Monitor Program Monitor Monitor F6 Ins Stp YES NO YES NO NO F7 Del Stp YES NO YES NO NO F8 Snd Stp YES YES YES YES YES These functions are not available on processors that do not include the Augmented Run Mode Programming ARMP function or on ARMP processors that have line comment line markers programmed on the sequencer ladder line refer to 620 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions LDR005 for information on ARMP processors Continued on next page 108 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 12 Sequencer Instructions Continue
126. and associated cables 623 6225 Refer to Section 3 of this manual for a complete overview of the 620 WinLoader version 5 4 software program which is provided with both hardware platforms 620 6150A Loader Terminal The 620 6150A Loader Terminal is an industrially hardened portable hardware platform offered by Honeywell that has the latest version of 620 WinLoader software loaded on the internal hard disk Comes with an RS232 422 External Converter Box to be installed through 620 6150A Loader Terminal s serial port When power is applied the unit immediately responds as a 620 WinLoader Terminal Refer to the separate documentation supplied with 620 6150A Loader Terminal for appropriate specifications and operating procedures Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Overview 3 1 2 620 WinLoader Continued How can I benefit from WinLoader The 620 WinLoader software program offers a full variety of features that turn your personal computer into an industrial programming device features and benefits of the package include Easy to use completely menu driven offers a series of Help screens and minimal training required Integrated programming documentation provides comprehensive link between ladder logic and documentation Stand alone programming may be used to develop ladder logic without being connected to a 620 Logic Controller LC On line monitoring
127. and press ENTER Do not execute Terminate and Stay Resident TSR programs from the F10 DOS Shell function this includes the CIM EXE driver used by Utility software execution of TSR programs from the DOS Shell could result in failed WinLoader software possibly requiring reset of the personal computer Do not use the DOS Mode command to change serial port parameters from the F10 DOS Shell function this could interfere with the operation of the WinLoader s communications software Index 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit Display Functions 83 A Address label entering 13 Augmented Run Mode programming 6 9 Auxiliary Function Menu F12 10 47 80 F1 Clear 620 Memory 50 F2 Upload Download Functions 51 57 Append from disk to 620 F4 56 Current path 52 Load from disk to 620 F2 55 Save from 620 to disk F1 54 Upload Download Functions Menu 51 52 Verify functions 57 F3 Documentation Functions Menu 58 F4 620 Diagnostics Menu 59 65 620 Self Test display screen 64 Diagnostic status screens and functions 61 62 Display and Diagnostic Functions Menu 59 60 Hardware status display screen 63 I O Module status display screen 65 F5 Program Mode Change Function 66 68 Mode Change Functions Menu 66 Software Program Mode 67 68 F6 Register Table Functions 69 73 Current path 70 Load from disk to 620 F2 72 Save from 620 to disk F1 72 Typical application 73 Verify 620 to disk F3 72 F7 Flag Mode Address 74 F8 Da
128. be associated with the position to provide a descriptive label Stack Unloading Lines Consist solely of a PUSH instruction to user defined registers PUSH instruction transfers data placed on CPM s internal stack by the FBI or FBO to registers used internally by the Function Block by using these holding registers programmer need not keep track of stack data these lines are also automatically programmed by WinLoader when a Function Block is created Zoom In Mode WinLoader state where FBPs FBUs and FBBs may be examined Index 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 85 Function Blocks Advanced applications 79 81 Benefits of using 2 Block Edit Menu 56 Copying Function Blocks 45 Defining Function Blocks 22 28 with existing logic 28 with new logic 23 27 Deleting Function Blocks 46 Displays 47 53 Display control 50 Printouts 52 Zoom In mode 51 Downloading Function Blocks 55 60 Editing Function Blocks 39 46 Function Block header 39 42 Function Block logic 43 Entering conditioning logic 33 Ladder logic format 3 4 Loading Function Blocks 58 60 Moving Function Blocks 44 Nesting Function Blocks 80 Operation 8 16 Overview 1 5 Parameters 17 19 29 32 36 38 53 57 Programming 2 21 33 Saving Function Blocks 56 57 Theory of Operation 7 19 Uploading Downloading Function Blocks 55 60 Using Function Blocks as subroutines 81 Function Block Library 5 61 77 Copying control programs 63 65 Installing Function Block Librar
129. can be obtained from data manipulation instructions or as result of math operation resulting converted value can be used in subsequent math operation or written to data table using floating point send out or Push of 2 instruction Characteristics Since all valid integers can be represented in 620 LC as floating point values no error status word may be assigned to this instruction Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program an integer to floating point conversion instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F9 to select Operators Logic Group 2 Press F6 to select Conversion Operators Group 3 Press F3 to select integer to floating point conversion instruction 4 Enter optional error address Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 79 3 11 Data Conversion Instructions Continued Integer to floating point conversion characteristics Figure 3 52 illustrates characteristics associated with the integer to floating point conversion instruction In the first line of logic Bring in instruction reads integer value 185 from Data Register Table address 5000 and places it on stack Integer to floating point instruction reads last word placed on stack converts last word on stack to its floating point equivalent 1 85 x 1002 places 32 bit result two 16 bit words on stack Floating point send out instruction reads
130. contents These are the topics covered in this section Topic See Page 2 1 Overview 5 2 2 Function Block Operation 6 2 3 Function Block Parameters 16 Purpose of this section This section presents a general overview of Function Block programming theory of operation The general format for a sample Function Block is described in detail A separate subsection concerning Function Block input and output parameters is also presented 6 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 2 2 Function Block Operation General description A Function Block is a group of lines of ladder logic that is represented on the main screen display simply as a box referred to as the Function Block Display box preceded by a ladder rung which represents the enable instructions for the Function Block see Figure 2 1 below Figure 2 1 Typical Function Block titled TSpndl1 The Function Block TSpndl1 shown in Figure 2 1 actually represents the lines of ladder logic presented in Figure 2 2 below Figure 2 2 Lines of Ladder Logic Represented by Function Block TSpndl1 Once a Function Block such as TSpndl1 is generated the lines of ladder logic are hidden from view and are conta
131. data table while the processor is in the Run mode with CPM keyswitch in Run Program position follow the steps presented in Table 3 73 Table 3 73 Edit an Existing Step in Run Mode Step Action 1 PAGE UP or Move to the line of logic which contains the PAGE DOWN sequencer to be edited 2 M Press the down arrow key to display the first five lines of the data table and the Initial Edit Menu 3 F6 Press the F6 Edit Step to enter the Full Edit Menu 4 F1 Press F1 Goto to enter or use the Up Down Arrow Keys to select the step number to be edited When using F1 Goto the ENTER key must be pressed after entering the step number 5 F2 Pressing F2 Value opens a data entry window where you can enter the new value in decimal F3 F4 Using the F3 ON and F4 OFF keys in conjunction with the left and right arrow keys you can enter the new value in a binary format 6 F8 Press F8 Snd Stp in the Full Edit Menu to accept the new value entered in step 5 7 Repeat Repeat steps 4 through 6 until all desired existing steps have been edited 8 ESC ESC Press Escape to exit both Edit Menus 9 ENTER Press Enter to write the displayed line of logic to the end of the control program INS ENTER Press Insert Enter to overwrite the existing line of logic INS Press Insert Page Down to overwrite the PAGE DOWN displayed line of logic ahead of the current line Continued on
132. define edit copy delete load and save ladder logic blocks that is one or more contiguous lines of ladder logic within a control program These functions make it possible to create ladder logic programs that can then be combined to perform specific functions Refer to Table 1 13 for descriptions of each available selection from the Block Operations Functions Menu Table 1 13 Block Operations Functions Menu Selections Key Selection Function F1 EDIT Allows you to perform typical editing procedures such as search search amp exchange force all of an address list page up and page down on a defined ladder logic block F2 MOVE Allows you to move a defined ladder logic block to another location in your program F3 COPY Allows you to copy a defined ladder logic block to another location in your program F4 DELETE Allows you to delete a defined ladder logic block from your program F5 FBDef Allows you to create Function Blocks which are multiple lines of ladder logic handled as a single element Refer to 623 WinLoader Function Blocks LDR006 for complete coverage of Function Blocks F7 PATH Allows you to identify path to desired mass storage device and directory where defined ladder logic blocks are to be stored to or loaded from pathnames of up to 30 characters may be entered F9 LOAD Allows you to load an existing ladder logic block from disk to a 620 LC F10 SAVE Allows you to save de
133. desired I O register address and then press RETURN or ENTER 4 Enter desired accumulator register address and press RETURN or ENTER 5 Enter desired preset value in desired resolution 6 Press RETURN to enter off delay timer Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 69 3 4 Timer and Counter Instructions Continued On and off delay timer characteristics As shown in Figure 3 8 on and off delay timers are similar in appearance and structure they differ only in operation for True False conditioning Figure 3 8 On and Off Delay Timer Characteristics 70 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 4 Timer and Counter Instructions Continued Retentive timer Refer to Table 3 18 for retentive timer specifications Table 3 18 Retentive Timer Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 10 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Resides in 9 by 5 matrix portion of logic line and used when wished to delay energizing output or internal coil by predetermined time once controlling logic becomes True retain accumulated value during power failures and resume timing from value when power is restored Characteristics Retentive timer has two input lines and one output line TRN timer run input line when True and RST is True as defined by conditioning logic timer begins accumulating time in selected resolut
134. each available function that is accessible from the Documentation Functions Menu when the Documentation Functions Menu is accessed from the WinLoader s Auxiliary Function Menu Continued on next page 8 620 WinLoader Overview 4 05 1 3 620 WinLoader Version 5 4 User Manual Continued How to use 620 WinLoader user manual continued 620 WinLoader Networking Functions LDR008 which provides detailed information on the following communications networks which are available from Honeywell for the interconnection of 620 LCs and associated peripheral devices Multidrop Loader Network 4 05 620 WinLoader Overview 9 Section 2 620 WinLoader Hardware 2 1 Overview Section contents These are the topics covered in this section Topic See Page 2 1 Overview 9 2 2 WinLoader Hardware Charactristics 11 2 3 Personal Computer and Printer Hardware Characteristics 15 2 4 620 LC Networks 16 3 1 Overview 17 3 2 Software Characteristics 18 Purpose of this section This
135. element Display always defaults to display the most significant bit bit 15 in the 16 bit word collected from the CPM s Register Function By placing the cursor in a multi element field containing data displayed in the On Off condition format you can use the up and down arrow keys to move through and display each of the individual bit conditions Figure 1 11 below illustrates the structure of a data value obtained from the I O Status Table and displayed in this manner Figure 1 11 Displaying Individual Bits From I O Status Table Using On Off Format Continued on next page 30 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 1 6 Multi element Display Function F15 Continued Displaying individual bits continued Figure 1 12 below illustrates the structure of a data value obtained from the Data Register Table and displayed in this manner Figure 1 12 Displaying Individual Bits From Data Register Table Using On Off Format 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 31 1 7 Ladder Logic List Function F16 Accessing Ladder Logic List Function The F16 Ladder Logic List Function is used to automatically page through your ladder logic control program The program being listed may reside in either the CPM s Memory Function or in your PC s RAM memory when the WinLoader is in the Stand Alone mode To access Ladder Logic List Function press F16 or Shift F6 from Edit and Display Functions Menu
136. energized Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a set one matrix instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F10 to select Matrix Logic Group 2 Enter desired matrix address 3 Press F3 to select Set Matrix instruction 4 Program the necessary matrix information as prompted reference address start address size etc 5 Press RETURN or ENTER after each entry Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 119 3 13 Matrix Instructions Continued Move matrix Refer to Table 3 81 for move matrix specifications Table 3 81 Move Matrix Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Transfers data stored in one area of I O Status Table or register table matrix A to a second area matrix C Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a move matrix instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F10 to select Matrix Logic Group 2 Enter desired matrix address 3 Press F1 to select Move Matrix instruction 4 Program the necessary matrix information as prompted reference address start address size etc 5 Press RETURN or ENTER after each entry Continued on next page 120 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 13 Matrix Instructions Continued Invert matrix Refer to Table 3
137. enter the new value in a binary format 6 F6 Press F6 Ins Stp in the Full Edit Menu to accept the new value entered in step 5 7 Repeat Repeat steps 4 through 6 until all desired existing steps have been edited 8 ESC ESC Press Escape to exit both Edit Menus 9 ENTER Press Enter to write the displayed line of logic to the end of the control program INS ENTER Press Insert Enter to overwrite the existing line of logic INS Press Insert Page Down to overwrite the PAGE DOWN displayed line of logic ahead of the current line Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 113 3 12 Sequencer Instructions Continued Delete existing step in Program mode To delete an existing step from the data table while the processor is in the Program mode follow the steps presented in Table 3 76 Table 3 76 Delete an Existing Step in Program Mode Step Action 1 PAGE UP or Move to the line of logic which contains the PAGE DOWN sequencer to be edited 2 M Press the down arrow key to display the first five lines of the data table and the Initial Edit Menu 3 F6 Press the F6 Edit Step to enter the Full Edit Menu 4 F1 Press F1 Goto to enter or use the Up Down Arrow Keys to select the step number where the new step is to be deleted All existing steps will be moved up one step and the total number of steps will decrease by one for each new step deleted
138. file saved uses the VUE extension if different configurations are to be created and stored each must be given a unique file name Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 79 2 9 Data Display Functions F8 Continued Edit Display In the Edit Display shown in Figure 2 16 below you may edit the addresses to be monitored in the Update Display refer to Table 2 12 next page for available menu selections When software is in Edit Display note that if an address is entered as a bit type but controller being used does not support bit types in that address range data display window displays address but does not advance to next window when Update Display is entered the message INVLD displays beside address Figure 2 16 Edit Display Integer Bit Format Continued on next page 80 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 2 9 Data Display Functions F8 Continued Edit Display continued Table 2 12 Edit Display Menu Selections Selection Function F1 MODE Toggles between Edit and Update Displays F2 BIT When selected address entered is considered a single bit address and its status displays as either ON or OFF in Update Display F3 SIGNED Displays signed integers using two s complement notations in a 16 bit word with a value range of 32768 to 32767 F4 UNSIGNED Causes entered address to be monitored for a data value to be displayed in 16 bit un
139. highlighted in Figure 3 8 below provides access to the various instructions elements used to program ladder logic control programs This menu appears directly below the program area and is the first of several lines of menus and information located at the bottom of the WinLoader s Main Screen Display There are ten menu selections available through the Logic Group Selection Menu and each is identified by function keys F1 through F10 Each logic group selection contains a number of similar elements instructions which are used to program your ladder logic control program Pressing a particular function key F1 through F10 will cause a corresponding menu to display which illustrates the particular logic elements contained in the selected group The new menu displays in the space directly below the Logic Group Selection Menu which then disappears while the new menu is open Refer to 620 WinLoader Programming Reference LDR004 and 620 WinLoader Edit Display Functions LDR005 for more complete coverage of WinLoader ladder logic elements available instructions and the Logic Group Selection Menu Figure 3 8 Logic Group Selection Menu Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 65 3 2 Main Screen Display Continued Edit and Display Functions Menu The Edit and Display Functions Menu highlighted in Figure 3 9 below provides access to various functions used to edit display and control ladder logic progra
140. input instruction that examines the status of a single bit within a 16 bit data register in the Data Register Table Figure 3 5 Bit Read Characteristics Continued on next page 58 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 3 Single Bit Instructions Continued Bit write Refer to Table 3 12 for bit write specifications Table 3 12 Bit Write Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 36 LCs Symbol Usage Acts as an output instruction that controls or writes to the status of a single bit within a 16 bit data register in the Data Register Table the True or False state of this bit is determined by the status of the preceding line of logic Characteristics Operates with the same characteristics as a nonretentive coil see Figure 3 6 except that it writes to a single bit position within a 16 bit word in the Data Register Table it can only access Register addresses 4096 to 8191 upper range dependent on CPM model it does not write to the I O Status Table When programming this instruction you must specify the data register address and bit position of the word to be accessed bit position is specified as 0 through 15 with 0 being the least significant bit and 15 the most significant bit Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a bit write instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F2 to select the Coil Logic
141. is not greater than 3407 a logical current path does not exist through the greater than instruction the output coil is deenergized Continued on next page 28 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 7 Integer Comparison Instructions Continued Greater than characteristics Figure 3 33 Greater Than Characteristics Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 29 3 7 Integer Comparison Instructions Continued Test for zero Refer to Table 3 40 for test for zero specifications Table 3 40 Test for Zero Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Used to examine contents of data register or 16 consecutive I O addresses for a zero condition see Figure 3 34 Characteristics Zero condition exists when all bits are off False or set to zero can test signed unsigned integer and floating point values If zero condition is encountered instruction is True logical current flow is passed to succeeding logic elements If zero condition is not encountered instruction is False logical current flow is not passed to succeeding logic elements Can be forced by using data change function Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a test for zero instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F9 to select Operators
142. is embedded and the Function Block parameters are used for Function Block inputs and outputs Parameters are any opcodes selected by the programmer whose data equivalency that is C for data bit B for Bring In data K for constant data etc is placed in the appropriate FBI or FBO line in the interior of the Function Block The given formal parameters are internally identified by being written into formatted ladder logic lines which are placed immediately after the Function Block Display line These parameter lines are for display only You will not be able to make any changes to these lines while they are displayed This includes force data change insert delete and overwrite opcodes Parameter unloading The FBI and FBO lines of the Function Block cause data from certain opcodes to be temporarily placed on the stack in the CPU In order to keep this data for the use of the Function Block a register PUSH should be assigned for each register placed on the stack This is the purpose of selecting a number of inputs and outputs Since nonregister parameters are not placed on the processor stack you must be aware of how the data are saved by the PUSHes Refer to Tables 2 1 and 2 2 next page for input and output parameter unloading guidelines note that these guidelines should be referred to in conjunction with the guidelines for entering Function Block parameters which are presented in subsection 3 3 Continued on next page 4 05 623
143. it with either a new address or a new instruction and address see 620 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions LDR005 Data Change Function Allows inserting data into register address at present cursor position see 620 WinLoader Edit Display Functions LDR005 Data Value Format Function 620 LCs can display data as unsigned integers signed integers or as floating point data values with the following data value ranges Data Type Data Value Range Unsigned Integer 0 to 65535 Signed Integer 32768 to 32767 Floating Point Data 3 40282 x 1038 to Value applicable only 1 175494 x 10 38 for Floating Point and the value zero 0 instructions Refer to subsection 4 2 of this manual for more information on 620 LC data types and data value ranges Error Word Option 620 12 1633 36 LCs only Allows specifying user register for storing 16 bit formatted word which indicates any particular conditions of note for any of the following operations addition subtraction multiplication division square root absolute value floating point to integer conversion integer to BCD conversion BCD to integer conversion Refer to Section 4 of this manual for more information on error status word 20 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 2 3 System Status Information Background Each 620 CPM is a self contained processor consisting of a logic processor user program memory
144. its present mode of operation to the alternate mode either Program or Monitor If the WinLoader is connected to a 620 LC the F11 mode change function operates in the following manner If 620 LC keyswitch is in Program position and Loader is in Program mode with Logic Group Selection Menu displayed Monitor mode may be selected by pressing F11 or SHIFT F1 the Logic Group Selection Menu is instantly removed from the display which disables the logic editing functions accessed through function keys F1 through F10 note that function keys F17 through F20 are also disabled while in Monitor mode refer to subsequent subsection titled Monitoring in Subroutines or Jump type Not Skip Elements if necessary to monitor ladder logic that is executed more than one time within a particular program scan When 620 LC keyswitch is placed in Disable or Run position WinLoader software automatically reverts to Monitor mode the F11 mode change function then has no effect on software operation an error message displays to indicate Loader and 620 LC must be in Program mode If 620 LC keyswitch is in Run Program position and WinLoader software is in Monitor mode you may select the on line programming function by pressing SHIFT F1 to enable the F11 mode change function at this point the WinLoader software displays a warning message informing you that 620 LC is in Run mode when the warning message is cleared by pressing any key the Logic
145. label descriptions for any logic element subroutine instruction reference numbers 0 255 included in your ladder logic program Subsection 2 3 F7 Bit Comment Editor Enables you to create comments of up to 20 lines 67 characters per line for any bit location in your ladder logic program bit comment addresses may be any register address 4096 8191 and any bit value 0 15 Subsection 2 5 Table 2 1 is continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 15 F8 Bit Label Editor Enables you to assign 7 character labels and 3 line by 9 character label descriptions for any logic element bit location bit label addresses can be any register address 4096 8191 and any bit value 0 15 Subsection 2 6 F9 Edit Default File Permits you to specify a default file name of up to 8 characters to be used to store all documentation files for any defined labels descriptions and comments included in your ladder logic program Subsection 2 7 16 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 2 2 Function Block Parameter Name Editor F1 Accessing Function Block Parameter Name Editor When using Function Block programming a 7 character name may be assigned to each Function Block parameter location and a 3 line by 9 character label description may be assigned to each Function Block using the Function Block Parameter Name Editor Press F1 from the Main Menu Documentation Functions Menu to access th
146. line of ladder logic is entered inserted or overwritten in program can be invoked only from within WinLoader using function keys to clear present display without enabling auto clear function press Alt F8 display of present ladder logic line clears and permits you to enter new ladder logic instructions 40 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 1 10 Last Line Entered Function F19 Using Last Line Entered function The Last Line Entered function is used to repeat the last line of ladder logic entered at any point in your control program When this function is invoked by following the Table 1 21 procedure below the last line entered may be repeated by entering it at the end of the program inserting it between two existing lines or overwriting an existing line Note that Last Line Entered function cannot be used on Function Blocks This function also allows you to designate any line of ladder logic that was not the last line entered as the new last line entered To copy a line that was not just entered select Alt F9 to designate the line displayed as the new last line entered and follow the Table 1 21 procedure Table 1 21 Procedure for Using Last Line Entered Function Step Action 1 Using last line entered or selecting new last line with Alt F9 keys page up down to line number where desired to load selected line 2 Press F19 or Shift F9 to display las
147. logic control programs Continued on next page 2 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 1 1 Overview Continued Edit and Display Functions Menu There are ten categories of edit and display functions which are available for use when programming 620 LC ladder logic control programs Each of these categories is represented on the WinLoader main screen display as part of the Edit and Display Function Menu This menu which appears as the second of several lines of menus directly below the program area highlighted in Figure 1 1 below provides access to various functions used to edit display and control ladder logic programs and their associated data The following main groups of edit and display functions are available Display Functions used to display information related to your ladder logic control program and controller operations diagnostics Edit Functions used when editing ladder logic control program Control Functions used to control ladder logic control program and controller operations Upload Download Functions used to transfer ladder logic based information between controller and hard floppy disk in PC Other Miscellaneous Functions Figure 1 1 Edit and Display Functions Menu Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 3 1 1 Overview Continued Edit and Display Functions Menu continued The ten menu selections available through t
148. not be longer than Search For string because characters after Search For string will be overwritten F4 COPY To copy label description reference number into new reference number Step Action 1 Press F4 COPY window prompts you to enter reference number to be copied from destination reference number where label description should be stored 2 Enter desired number in Copy From area and press ENTER 3 Enter reference number in Copy To area and press ENTER Software displays Overwrite Y N N prompt press Y to execute function press N or any other key to abort copy function Table 2 5 is continued on next page 26 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 2 3 Label Description Editors F2 F5 F6 Continued Accessing Function Block Parameter Name Editor continued Table 2 5 Label Description Editor Functions Continued Key Function Description F5 BLOCK Allows multiple labels descriptions to be either copied or deleted by entering range of reference numbers and when copying also enter destination address for block must be used with either F4 COPY or F6 DELETE function To perform a block copy Step Action 1 Press F5 BLOCK then immediately press F4 COPY 2 Enter start and end reference numbers to define block to be copied from press ENTER after each number 3 Enter Copy To number where labels
149. number of labels descriptions that may be edited as specified in configuration file number of labels descriptions presently in memory and relative position not reference number of edit field 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 23 Figure 2 3 Label Description Editor Continued on next page 24 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 2 3 Label Description Editors F2 F5 F6 Continued Accessing Label Description Editor continued Table 2 5 Label Description Editor Functions Key Function Description F1 GOTO To GOTO any reference number in label description editor whether defined or not Step Action 1 Press F1 GOTO 2 Enter desired reference number in response to prompt 3 Press ENTER key WinLoader software searches for specified number and displays it along with any text previously defined for that number at this point label description may be edited F2 LAST Permits labels descriptions composed of identical text to be created with exception of an identifier number or series of numbers Step Action 1 Enter first in sequence of similar labels descriptions 2 Press F2 LAST to create label description of identical text 3 Press ENTER to load label description into memory Follow these steps to enter series of identical labels descriptions Step Action 1 Use F1 GOTO function to select first in ser
150. on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 69 2 6 Program Mode Change Functions F5 Continued Software Program Mode continued Figure 2 12 WinLoader Status Line and Function Codes 620 36 SESSION nnnn FREE MEM 8110 MODE nnn KEYSW PGM Session Indicator Description for 620 12 1633 36 LCs Rev 70 and greater only LP Loader Port LP owns User Memory Session UMS FP Fixed Port FP owns User Memory Session UMS OP1 Option Card 1 OP1 owns User Memory Session UMS OP2 Option Card 2 OP2 owns User Memory Session UMS OP3 Option Card 3 OP3 owns User Memory Session UMS OP4 Option Card 4 OP4 owns User Memory Session UMS Mode Indicator Description for all 620 LC models S A Loader is in Stand Alone S A Mode RUN 620 LC is in Run mode PRG 620 LC is in Program Mode DIS 620 LC is in Disable mode STF 620 LC has had self test failure STF SPG Non IMS Interprocessor Messaging Service logic controller is in Software Program Mode SPM Additional Mode Indicator Description for 620 12 1633 36 LCs Rev 70 and greater only SLP IMS Interprocessor Messaging Service logic controller is in Software Program Mode SPM on Loader Port SFP IMS Interprocessor Messaging Service logic controller is in Software Program Mode SPM on Fixed Port OP1 IMS Interprocessor Messaging Service logic controller is in Software Progr
151. on screen see Figure 4 3 next page make appropriate changes and press ENTER Refer to Table 4 8 for descriptions of each available selection from the Function Block Selection Menu WinLoader does not delete PUSHes to registers if you select either F6 inputs or F8 outputs and enter a smaller number however you may delete PUSH lines directly and select new values from Function Block Selection Menu in order to optimize register usage Figure 4 2 Block Edit Menu Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 41 4 3 Editing Function Blocks Continued Editing Function Block header continued Figure 4 3 Function Block Selection Menu Table 4 8 Function Block Selection Menu Selections Key Selection Description F1 Function Block Number Allows selecting number for Function Block between 1 and 19 999 which is used by 620 LC as NSK reference address that is it is programmed by WinLoader as reference number for NSK and its accompanying EOS Select F1 enter desired Function Block number and press ENTER Pressing Spacebar clears F1 block Function Block number displays on right hand side of menu s F1 block After Function Block overhead is formally entered same Function Block number is also included as part of both the internal FBD and FBE lines unseen in interior of Function Block as well as in external Function Block Display box for exampl
152. overwrite with copied block Press N or any other key to abort procedure To perform a block delete Step Action 1 Press F5 BLOCK then immediately press F6 DELETE 2 Enter start and end reference numbers to define block to be deleted press ENTER after each number Continue delete Y N N prompt displays 3 Press Y to delete block Press N or any other key to abort Table 2 7 is continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 35 2 4 Comment Editors F3 F4 Continued Comment Editor functions continued Table 2 7 Comment Editor Functions Command Mode Continued Key Function Description F6 DELETE Deletes comment presently displayed in edit field press F6 DELETE to delete comment at reference number currently displayed in edit field F8 MERGE Combines contents of comment file in disk memory with comment file presently in comment editor Step Action 1 Press F8 MERGE 2 Enter pathname and file name of disk file to be merged with comment file presently in comment editor If comments with same reference numbers exist in both files comment from disk file overwrites those presently in comment editor F9 LOAD Loads comment file from disk into comment editor Press F9 LOAD and enter pathname and file name for file to be loaded into comment editor If comm
153. programming and Augmented Run Mode programming F2 Force Functions ENABLE DISABLE force functions F3 Scan with Low Battery ENABLE DISABLE scan with low battery Scan will be prevented only after CPM keyswitch is changed to RUN mode or upon power up F4 Data Change Function ENABLE DISABLE data change F5 Scan Watchdog Timer ENABLE DISABLE scan loss watchdog timer halts CPM scan if scan time exceeds 160ms when enabled F6 On Mode Change I O will CLEAR FREEZE local outputs upon transition to SOFTWARE PROGRAM PROGRAM or DISABLE mode or upon scan loss F7 Multidrop Configuration Not supported in Winloader 5 4 F8 F9 Load Processor Configuration Loads processor configuration file Filename PRC previously saved to Processor Configuration Menu F10 Save Processor Configuration Saves processor configuration on a disk file to path and file specified ENTER Return or Enter Installs configuration data on Processor Configur ation Menu to 620 LC s CPM note that you must verify that all selections are correct by pressing ENTER before configuration is written to CPM Continued on next page 10 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 2 2 620 Loader Monitor F1 Continued Processor configuration for Multidrop Loader Network Press F7 Multidrop Configuration Presently Not Supported in WinLoader 5 4 from Processor Configuration Menu to access the Multidrop Configuration Men
154. prompt enter last line number of Function Block to be moved and press ENTER note that while performing this step you may use PgUp or PgDn key to display existing lines of logic to be considered for this function 6 At Move to Enter Line prompt enter line number where designated Function Block is to be moved to and press ENTER to complete the move operation Continued on next page 46 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 4 3 Editing Function Blocks Continued Copying Function Blocks Perform the Table 4 11 procedure to copy a designated Function Block and position the duplicated Function Block at another location within your ladder logic program This function may only be performed in Program mode When performing this procedure you must define entire Function Block that is partial Function Block may not be copied Table 4 11 Copying a Function Block Step Action 1 Display desired external Function Block Display line 2 Press F17 or Shift F7 to access Block Edit Menu shown in Figure 4 1 below 3 Select F3 Copy from Block Edit Menu 4 At Block Beginning Enter Line prompt enter first line number of Function Block to be copied or accept default for current line number and press ENTER note that while performing this step you may use PgUp or PgDn key to display existing lines of logic to be considered for block define function 5 At B
155. registers instruction assembles each word from two consecutive eight bit registers see Figure 3 29 the higher address becomes most significant 8 bits while lower address becomes least significant 8 bits System Status Table data can be contained in one or two registers if data is in two registers then specifying most significant of two addresses always assembles correct 16 bit word however if data is contained in one register two scenarios are possible first data may be preceded by register that is permanently set to zero this allows data to be accessed as if it were in two registers zero register should be specified as most significant second data may not be preceded by zero register this forces either of the following to be performed mask off undesired bits by storing word in I O Status Table zero undesired bits and read new 16 bit result scale off undesired bits by multiplying 16 bit word by factor of 256 has same effect as masking with less memory while not using any I O Status registers Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a Pull from System Status Table instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F4 to select Pull Logic Group 2 Enter desired address 3 Press F5 to select PULS 4 Enter the desired number of words to be Pulled 5 Press RETURN to enter instruction 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 17 3
156. requesting it Data exchange occurs when the specified control bits single bit registers within the CPM s Register Function are set that is transitioned from OFF to ON To implement the Flag Mode Address function enter the most significant of 16 single bit addresses desired to trigger flag mode operation and press ENTER This function applies only to 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 and 36 LCs 620 0048 and 620 0052 Data Collection Modules DCMs Flag bit range is programmable in 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 and 36 LCs through a Modify Flag Mode routine you may write to addresses 2501 least significant byte and 2502 most significant byte in System Status Table or use F7 Flag Mode Address function described here to specify most significant address of desired range of flag bits otherwise CPM defaults flag bit range to addresses 2016 to 2031 and DCM monitors these addresses for OFF to ON transitions Refer to following manuals as appropriate for more information on flag mode operation 620 12 1633 36 Logic Controller User Manual Form 620 8964 620 11 14 1631 Logic Controller User Manual Form 620 8976 and 620 0048 amp 620 0052 Data Collection Modules User Manual Form 620 8980 620 0080 expanded serial I O diagnostics use addresses 1992 2039 therefore if expanded diagnostics and Flag Mode are used Flag Mode address defaults must be reassigned 76 623 WinL
157. right of title Name Check current default file name assigned during software configuration appears as shown in Figure 3 2 Refer to subsection 3 4 of 620 WinLoader Documentation Functions LDR007 for procedure for editing default file Note that if a name is entered that is too long for title field so that it extends into default file name field last 8 characters as shown in Figure 3 2 when program is loaded into CPM WinLoader recognizes that this field contains characters and incorrectly identifies them as desired default file these characters then appear in name check displayed beneath title block to correct situation edit title block to remove or set last 8 characters of title to default file name preferred refer to subsection 3 5 of 620 Win Loader Documentation Functions LDR007 for procedure for editing title block Figure 3 2 Name Check Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 57 3 2 Main Screen Display Continued Name check continued When responding to the Name Check message box if you respond yes Y or ENTER to load any previously configured labels or comments the software initiates the loading of labels address comments and comment files that bear the default file name see Figure 3 3 a subsequent message displays during this operation which indicates the status of the loading operation Bad Load indicates that the file name specified does not exist
158. section presents Detailed hardware description specifications and shipping contents of 620 6020 WinLoader Additional hardware characteristics to include compatible personal computers personal computer specifications and printer options and Available 620 LC networks Continued on next page 10 620 WinLoader Overview 4 05 2 1 Overview Continued Background Depending on the type of control strategy you have configured for your application the WinLoader software program may be provided by Honeywell as part of either of the following control system hardware platforms 620 60 WinLoader provides a user supplied DOS compatible personal computer with the capability to program and monitor all 620 Logic Controller CPMs and is available in the following two versions 620 6020 WinLoader which comes with an RS232 RS422 External Converter Box to be installed through a PC s RS232 serial communications port Refer to subsection 2 3 for additional hardware description specifications and shipping contents of the 620 6020 WinLoader 620 6150A Loader Terminal an industrially hardened laptop computer capable of all WinLoader functions Comes with an RS232 422 External Converter Box to be installed through the 620 6150A Loader Terminal s serial port Refer to the separate 620 6150A Loader Terminal User Manual 620 8940 for hardware description system components and operating i
159. seven is always ORed with bit position seven and so on Data manipulation instructions are used to place the two words onto stack OR instruction tells processor to OR last word placed on stack with next word placed there then to write results of operation back to stack resulting word can then be read from stack by another data manipulation instruction and used as any other 16 bit data Operates on 16 bit integer data only Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program an OR instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F9 to select Operators Logic Group 2 Press F8 to select Logical Operators Logic Group 3 Press F2 to select OR instruction Continued on next page 52 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 9 Logical Operator Instructions Continued OR characteristics Figure 3 41 illustrates characteristics associated with the OR instruction Figure 3 41 OR Characteristics Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 53 3 9 Logical Operator Instructions Continued Exclusive OR XOR Refer to Table 3 49 for exclusive OR XOR specifications Table 3 49 Exclusive OR XOR Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 36 LCs Symbol Usage Performs Exclusive OR operation on two 16 bit data words see Figure 3 42 Characteristics Each bit of one wor
160. shows I O bit and register capacities Note that individual bits within a register may be read from or written to using Bit Read BR and Bit Write BW instructions System Status Table Each 620 CPM s System Status Table stores processor diagnostic information that can be accessed by the WinLoader or by a PULS instruction in the control program The System Status Table consists of memory locations that are 8 bits wide see Figure 2 3 The table is divided into three sections System Identification System Hardware and System Diagnostics Refer to the remainder of this subsection for definitions of the 8 bit address registers contained in the System Status Table System Status Table addresses appear to overlap internal real and control addresses System Status memory is a separate area of memory that cannot be affected by the execution of relay ladder logic 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 21 2 3 System Status Information Continued System Status I O and Register Table configurations continued Refer to Figure 2 3 for System Status I O and Register Table configuration information for 620 12 1633 36 LCs refer to Appendix A for other processors Figure 2 3 System Status I O and Register Table Configuration 22 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 2 3 System Status Information Continued System Diagnostic status Following is a list of 8 bit address registers and the system status inf
161. signal or stream of values at predetermined time may be used to condition NSKD and NSKR skip instructions but should not be used inside a skip element contact is TRUE only during program scan immediately following ON to OFF change of state Characteristics Examines specified address in I O Status Table see Figure 3 2 to determine CURRENT condition this is then compared with PREVIOUS condition as determined from History bits if contact has transitioned from ON to OFF it is interpreted as being TRUE if contact has not transitioned from ON to OFF it is interpreted as being FALSE this includes OFF to ON ON to ON and OFF to OFF comparisons Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a transition OFF contact in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F1 to select the Contact Logic Group 2 Enter desired address 3 Press F4 to select transition OFF contact 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 47 3 2 Contact and Coil Instructions Continued Transition ON and OFF contact characteristics Figure 3 2 Transition ON and OFF Contact Characteristics Continued on next page 48 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 2 Contact and Coil Instructions Continued Nonretentive coil Refer to Table 3 6 for nonretentive coil specifications Table 3 6 Nonretentive Coil Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 10 11 12
162. start and end lines are internal FBD and FBE lines Function Block is saved to either default pathname as displayed or any file name specified Default file name is built from Function Block number for example FBxnnn LDR if Function Block with that particular name or number already exists you are prompted with Overwrite Existing Files Y N Once Function Block is saved E flag indicating an edited Function Block is reset Because of memory limitations only the first 1000 addresses encountered in any predefined Function Block have label descriptions saved When Function Block is saved any specified line comments are also saved Refer to Table 6 2 next page for procedure for saving Function Block input parameter register values to disk Figure 6 1 Block Edit Menu Continued on next page 58 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 6 2 Saving Function Blocks Continued Saving Function Block input parameter register values Perform the Table 6 2 procedure to save Function Block input parameter register values from a designated 620 LC s memory to disk Function Block register values may be saved in Program mode only Table 6 2 Saving Function Block Input Parameter Register Values Step Action 1 With Function Block Display FBD line displayed press F17 or SHIFT F7 to access Block Edit menu shown in Figure 6 1 previous page 2 Select F10 Save f
163. the following example to read Receive Message Count 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 35 2 3 System Status Information Continued Table 2 4 ABC Protocol Registers Register 8 Byte Block Description 2511 09CFh FIXP_REC 7 MSB Receive Message Count 2510 09CEh FIXP_REC 6 LSB 2509 09CDh FIXP_REC 5 MSB Transmit Message Count 2508 09CCh FIXP_REC 4 LSB 2507 09CBh FIXP_REC 3 MSB Receive Error Count 2506 09CAh FIXP_REC 2 LSB 2505 09C9h FIXP_REC 1 MSB Event Count 2504 09C8h FIXP_REC LSB 36 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 2 3 System Status Information Continued MODBUS RTU protocol Table 2 5 lists 8 byte blocks which are reserved for On Board Communications Port Transaction Records using the MODBUS RTU protocol Each count consists of two System Status Table locations that should be interpreted as a 16 bit word with a binary range of 0 65535 In the case of word wide registers the least significant byte is located in the System Status Table byte with the lower address and the most significant byte is located in the System Status Table byte with the higher address Table 2 5 MODBUS RTU Protocol Registers Register 8 Byte Block Description 2504 09C8h FIXP_REC LSB Event Count 2505 09C9h FIXP_REC 1 MSB 2506 09CAh FIXP_REC 2 LSB LSB Valid Message Count 2507 09CBh FIXP_REC 3 MSB Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader
164. to access I O Status Table addresses that do not contain analog or special function modules these inputs are read in real time specifying address 4096 and greater transfers data from data table real time access to analog and special function input modules these inputs are read in real time when Pull instruction addressed to real I O address is executed CPM retrieves current data directly from that module local and parallel I O only if addressed module is located in serial I O Pull generates a read Pull request which SLM processes and executes when viewed through WinLoader data read displays beneath instruction s number of Pulled registers note if True or is preceded by True conditioning logic each data word Pulled displays from most to least significant if False or is preceded by False conditioning logic the message No Data appears beneath symbol indicating that no data is currently being read Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a Pull instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F4 to select Pull Logic Group 2 Enter desired address 3 Press F4 to select Pull 4 Enter desired number of words to be Pulled 5 Press RETURN to enter instruction Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 11 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Pull characteristics Fig
165. topics covered in this section Topic See Page 3 1 Overview 17 3 2 WinLoader Installation 18 Purpose of this section This section presents a procedure for installing the WinLoader software program onto your personal computer Note that the WinLoader is already factory installed on the 620 6150A Loader Terminal if your system includes the 620 6150A Loader Terminal you do not have to perform the installation procedure 4 05 620 WinLoader Installation 17 3 2 WinLoader Installation Un installing Winloader 620 WinLoader un installation 5 x installation provides you the option to uninstall any existing 5 x application If you already have any 5 x application on your system double click the Win Loader installer A confirmation screen is displayed as shown below Step Action 1 To uninstall click Yes You can either choose to uninstall or not If you do not want to uninstall click No and the installer exits without making any changes 2 Click Yes to uninstall the application A confirmation screen appears as shown below 3 Click Finish The un installation is completed successfully Alternately you can also use the Windows Add Remove program feature to uninstall 5 x If you uninstall you can install the latest by referri
166. used if range values being multiplied can exceed 32767 When multiplying signed integer values two values being multiplied can range from 32767 to 32768 product is handled as two 16 bit data values from 32767 to 32768 and can represent values up to 1 073 721 824 most significant bit of most significant 16 bit word is sign bit most significant bit of least significant word is data Overflow conditions can occur when product of multiplication operation is handled using single 16 bit data manipulation instruction send out indirect send out etc program output coil directly after multiplication operation instead of after data manipulation instruction to detect for overflow values if overflow occurs coil energizes otherwise it remains unenergized error status word can also be assigned to multiplication operation test for bit 1 signed overflow bit refer to Section 4 for more information Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a multiplication instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F9 to select Operators Logic Group 2 Press F7 to select Math Operators Logic Group 3 Press F1 to select multiplication instruction 4 Enter optional address Continued on next page 40 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 8 Math Instructions Continued Basic multiplication operation Figure 3 37 illustrates a simple line of logic which contains a
167. whether you want to load ladder logic if you respond yes Y to load ladder logic you are then prompted to enter the pathname and file name to be used if you respond no N to the prompt you will proceed directly to the Title Page display Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 55 3 2 Main Screen Display Continued Title Page display The Title Page display shown in Figure 3 1 below provides two blocks of information WinLoader software and 620 LC s CPM status which indicate firmware revision level of CPM operating status enabled disabled or secured of software configurable functions and pass fail result of CPM s Power up Self Test Ladder logic program title block which if a ladder logic program currently resides in memory indicates program title date program was written or last modified and programmer s name Title Page display indicates a firmware revision level of zero when WinLoader software is in 620 Stand Alone Loader mode Figure 3 1 Typical Title Page Display Continued on next page 56 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 3 2 Main Screen Display Continued Name check Pressing ENTER at the Title Page displays a message box shown in Figure 3 2 below which asks if you wish to use the default file to load any previously configured labels or comments from disk to be used in your ladder logic program Note that to
168. within a data register word as follows enter desired register address select F1 On Off Condition access status of individual bits by using up and down arrow keys as previously described bit number indicates relative position of bit 15 most significant 0 least significant If address entered is 4097 or greater and you select F3 Floating Point Data software checks to see that address is within range and has two consecutive registers if these conditions are true software writes address into multi element field immediately to right then floating point data is retrieved and displayed in double wide format in form decimal or scientific notation chosen in configuration functions Continued on next page 26 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 1 6 Multi element Display Function F15 Continued On Off condition display format continued Figure 1 8 On Off Condition Display Format Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 27 1 6 Multi element Display Function F15 Continued Integer data value display format When you select Integer Data as the display format for a given field in the Multi element Display the WinLoader always collects 16 bits If the specified address is in the I O Status Table the Loader collects the On Off Condition of 16 contiguous single bit registers using the given address as the most significant bit MSB If the specified ad
169. words 16 bits between the Register Function and a working buffer in the CPM called the stack Numeric values can be collected from or transferred to the I O Status Table Data Registers System Status Table or in some cases the I O modules If necessary refer to the Glossary at the end of this manual for definitions of terms used in this section such as the stack The 620 LC instruction set offers the following direct integer data manipulation instructions bring in send out constant Pull Push Pull from System Status Table Typical uses for direct integer data manipulation instructions include reading or writing data values to and from analog I O modules reading or writing data values to and from special function I O modules permits transfer of data words to and from intelligent field devices reading current status of system operation from System Status Table which provides ability to condition execution of control program entirely or partially to system status collect system information for transfer to another or higher level control system providing a means to compare or act upon numeric data mathematically Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 87 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Indirect integer data manipulation instructions The 620 LC instruction set offers the following indirect integer data manipulat
170. words used and associated comment lines for each Function Block F2 Un Used Address Listing Lists all addresses not accessed by ladder logic presently in memory labels descriptions are optional and when included make this listing a tool for debugging ladder logic programs F3 Conflicting Address Listing Identifies output addresses used more than once as overlapping coil Send Out and sequencer addresses labels and or descriptions are optional F4 Forced Address Listing Lists all forced logic elements by line number and address and indicates whether they are forced ON or OFF labels descriptions are optional F5 Labels Enables On default or disables printing of 7 character label on listings selected with F1 thru F4 function keys F6 Descriptions Enables ON default or disables printing of 27 character description on listings selected with F1 thru F4 function keys F7 Label Description List Enables listing all documentation associated with any logic element types ADDRessed elements BIT elements SKIP instructions and JSR instructions using Label Description form of documentation Press F7 until desired element type is highlighted When this key or F8 is selected all other functions F1 thru F6 are disabled F8 Comment Listing Allows selecting either a listing of LINE comments ADDRess comments or BIT comments Press F8 until desired listing type displays in highlighted area
171. 0 LSB specifying address 4096 and greater transfers data from data table not used to access analog or special function I O and addresses assigned to these modules should not fall within 16 bit range Table 3 25 is continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 91 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Bring in continued Table 3 25 Bring In Specifications Continued SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Characteristics continued When viewed through WinLoader data read from Register Function displays beneath instruction regardless of the True False state of any conditioning logic except jump blocks the data located in the specified address is read and also placed on the stack then displayed beneath instruction as either an unsigned signed or hexadecimal integer Bring in data can be changed using data change function this technique is often called forcing data because you are placing specific value on CPM s stack regardless of data read from specified address perform the following steps to use data change function Step Action 1 Use cursor control keys to position cursor to immediate left of instruction 2 Press equal key 3 Enter numeric value to be forced into CPM 4 Press ENTER or RETURN key Bring in instruction is not affected by skip instructions Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a br
172. 0 6020 WinLoader software will not communicate with a 620 LC unless an interface port is installed in your personal computer Continued on next page 14 620 WinLoader Overview 4 05 2 2 620 6020 WinLoader Hardware Characteristics Continued 629 6019 Converter specifications Refer to Table 2 4 below for specifications for the 629 6019 Converter that is used with 620 6020 WinLoaders Table 2 2 629 6019 Converter Specifications Specification Description 5 Pin Circular DIN Male Connector Specification Description Supply Voltage 4 75 5 25 VDC 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Supply Input Current 250mA 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F 9 Pin Subminiature D Type Male Connector Specification Description Maximum Cable Length 50 feet 15m Interface Type RS232 Input Output Data Rate Up to 9600 baud 9 Pin Subminiature D Type Female Connector Specification Description Maximum Cable Length 2000 feet 610m Interface Type RS422 Input Output Data Rate Up to 9600 baud Environmental Specifications Specification Description Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Humidity 5 95 non condensing 4 05 620 WinLoader Overview 15 2 3 Personal Computer and Printer Hardware Characteristics 620 60 WinLoader compatible PCs The personal computer used to support the 620 6020 WinLoader program must be 100 compatible with the Windows 2000 and Windows XP operati
173. 05 Figures Figure 3 24 Constant Characteristics 6 Figure 3 25 Floating Point Constant Characteristics 8 Figure 3 26 Pull Characteristics 11 Figure 3 27 Push Characteristics 14 Figure 3 28 System Status Table Structure 15 Figure 3 29 Pull from System Status Table Characteristics 17 Figure 3 30 Complex Comparison Structures 19 Figure 3 31 Equal To Characteristics 22 Figure 3 32 Less Than Characteristics 25 Figure 3 33 Greater Than Characteristics 28 Figure 3 34 Test for Zero Characteristics 30 Figure 3 35 Basic Addition Operation 34 Figure 3 36 Basic Subtraction Operation
174. 05 by Honeywell Inc Revision 01 April 01 2005 While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in its written agreement with and for its customer In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect special or consequential damages The information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice This document was prepared using Information Mapping methodologies and formatting principles Information Mapping is a trademark of Information Mapping Inc MS DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Honeywell Industrial Automation and Control Automation College 1100 Virginia Drive Fort Washington PA 19034 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions iii About This Publication This publication Presents general characteristics of documentation types used in ladder logic programming with the 623 WinLoader to include descriptions of address labels and descriptions address comments line comments and line numbers Describes each available documentation function that is accessible from the Documentation Functions Menu when the Documentation Functions Menu is accessed from the WinLoader s Main Menu and Describes each available function that is accessible from the
175. 1 Table 7 1 Loading Function Block Library Control Program 64 Table 7 2 Single Loop PID Function Block Specifications 69 Table 7 3 Cascade Control Two Loop PID Function Block Specifications 72 Table 7 4 Ratio Control Single Loop PID Function Block Specifications 75 Table 7 5 Split Range Time Proportioning Single Loop PID Function Block Specifications 78 viii 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 Acronyms ADDR Address CPM Control Processor Module CPU Central Processing Unit EOS End of Skip FB Function Block FBB Function Block Body FBD Function Block Display FBE
176. 1 the SIOM addresses must start at 192 or higher Verify I O configuration Press F8 Verify I O Configuration from the 620 Selection Menu to verify the I O configuration this selection prompts you to enter a pathname to verify the current I O configuration 18 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 2 3 620 Stand Alone Loader F2 620 Selection Menu Stand Alone Mode Press F2 620 Stand Alone Loader from the WinLoader Main Menu to access the 620 Selection Menu Stand Alone Mode shown in Figure 2 8 below This menu allows you to designate a specific 620 CPM configuration without actually being connected to the processor Note that you cannot execute a program or perform execution based functions while in the Stand Alone mode Refer to Table 2 9 next page for descriptions of each available selection from this menu Figure 2 8 620 Selection Menu Stand Alone Mode F1 F5 Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 19 2 3 620 Stand Alone Loader F2 Continued 620 Selection Menu Stand Alone Mode continued Table 2 6 620 Selection Menu Selections Stand Alone Mode F1 F5 Key Title Description F1 Model Number Toggling F1 displays list of available 620 CPM model numbers select 620 CPM that corresponds with your system As model number is changed F2 Memory Size F3 Register Size and F4 Real I O Size also change respectively F2 Memory Size Toggling F2 disp
177. 1 to select the Contact Logic Group 2 Press F6 to select logic inverter Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 61 3 3 Single Bit Instructions Continued Logic inverter characteristics As shown in Figure 3 7 logic inverter is a logic instruction that allows the 620 LC to invert the status of the result of all logic solved up to the point when the invert element is executed Figure 3 7 Logic Inverter Characteristics 62 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 4 Timer and Counter Instructions Timer and counter types Table 3 14 presents the four types of timer and counter instructions presented in this section Table 3 14 Timer and Counter Instructions Timer and Counter Instructions Refer to page On Delay Timer 63 64 67 Off Delay Timer 65 67 Retentive Timer 68 70 Retentive Counter 71 74 Timers and counters Timer and counter instructions are used in much the same way as external hardware timers and counters They are used to activate or deactivate a field device or internal block of program logic after a predetermined period of time has elapsed or a specific count has been reached Timers and counters can both be logically or manually paused resumed or reset cleared If necessary refer to the Glossary at the end of this manual for definitions of terms used in this section Resolution Resolution is often referred to as the time base It refers to th
178. 12 14 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Used to read 16 bit data word from specified step in sequencer s data table see Figure 3 63 Characteristics Operates independently of sequencer it reads from that is it can unload new data from any step in data table regardless of current step being output to sequencer itself Is entered as output instruction on formatted line of ladder logic which consists of contact instruction used to condition or control execution of line data manipulation instruction such as bring in that places a data value on stack to be used by unload sequencer to identify step number to be read unload sequencer instruction which reads last value written to stack and uses value to identify step number to be read unloads reads data found in specified step number of next sequencer in control program Unload sequencer line of logic MUST be programmed in control program BEFORE sequencer that is to be accessed and AFTER all previous sequencers Is essentially a specialized data manipulation instruction that allows a sequencer s data table to be accessed independently of sequencer instruction Only one unload sequencer instruction is executed per scan for each sequencer if multiple unload sequencer lines are programmed for a given sequencer and two or more are enabled at the same time only the last will be executed Table 3
179. 13 2 2 620 Loader Monitor F1 Continued Figure 2 5 Accessing I O Configuration Menu Continued on next page 14 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 2 2 620 Loader Monitor F1 Continued I O configuration continued Table 2 5 I O Configuration Menu Selections Key Title Description F1 Mode Allows you to switch between slot edit and rack edit modes while software is in rack edit mode use the following selections as appropriate F2 Processor Toggle toggles through all processor racks available for current CPM model number F3 Slave Toggle toggles through all slave racks available for current CPM model number valid for 620 11 14 1631 CPMs only To retain selections and return to slot edit mode press F1 Mode key F2 0 Assigns 0 points to designated I O slot in processor rack F3 8 Assigns 8 points to designated I O slot in processor rack F4 16 Assigns 16 points to designated I O slot in processor rack F5 32 Assigns 32 points to designated I O slot in processor rack F6 SLM Assigns SLM module to designated I O slot in processor rack F9 Load Loads I O configuration data from disk file to I O Configuration Menu F10 Save Saves configuration data to disk file ENTER ENTER Installs I O configuration from menu to CPM Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 15 2 2 620 Loader Monitor F1 Continued I O slot assignments for
180. 16 bit words of data placed on stack F7 Floating Point Bring In Fb Two 16 bit words of data placed on stack Output parameter unloading guidelines Table 2 2 Output Parameter Unloading Guidelines Key Output Parameter Unloading Guideline F1 Indirect Send Out I One 16 bit word of data placed on stack F2 Coil C No data placed on stack F3 PUSH P No data placed on stack The number of registers PUSHed is user selectable using the Function Block Selections Menu F6 and F8 keys and is not affected by the number of parameters chosen you should select a sufficiently large number of inputs and outputs to provide storage for all word type parameters chosen F4 Send Out S One 16 bit word of data placed on stack F5 Floating Point Send Out F One 16 bit word of data placed on stack Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 19 2 3 Function Block Parameters Continued Parameter passing theory Data words that is 16 bit words of data from Bring In B Constant K Indirect Bring In I Indirect Send Out I PUSH P PULL P and Floating Point Send Out F parameters are loaded onto the 620 LC s internal stack as a result of normal operation Therefore any operation that uses stack data such as an arithmetic Send Out or PUSH operation removes the appropriate number of words from the stack In particular an arithmetic or Send Out operation makes
181. 1633 36 LCs Symbol Usage Allows chain type math calculations like those used in integer math to be executed with much greater degree of accuracy eliminates build up in round off errors typically found in integer math calculations typical applications include manipulation of process data such as performing PID algorithms and other math intensive process industry applications Characteristics Transfers two 16 bit words 32 bits from CPM s stack to two contiguous registers in Register Function s Data Register Table within range of 4097 to 8191 see Figure 3 23 address associated with instruction is most significant of the two registers and is specified when instruction is programmed least significant register is automatically allocated by system as next lower address When viewed through WinLoader data read from Register Function displays beneath instruction when True when False the message No Data appears indicating that currently no data is being read If skipped by NSKR stops transferring data to registers when skipped by NSKD gives all zeroes all bits off when controlled by False conditioning logic data being transferred out freezes at last value transferred while True Table 3 30 is continued on next page 108 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Floating point send out continued Table 3 30 Floating Point Send Out Specifica
182. 2 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 1 11 Search amp Exchange Function F20 Continued Refer to Table 1 22 next page for the general procedure for performing the Search amp Exchange function Refer to Figure 1 15 for several examples that illustrate how the Search amp Exchange function is performed In certain logic element exchange operations WinLoader requires each exchange to be verified if you choose not to verify every exchange function WinLoader searches for every occurrence of address instruction and replaces it automatically If forced element is encountered during this function prompt appears asking whether Search amp Exchange function should continue a key response of Y replaces forced element with new address instruction in unforced state if any other key is pressed that element is not replaced and search continues If Function Block programming is used Search amp Exchange function skips over any Function Blocks if it is not started within a particular Function Block Search amp Exchange function is limited to a particular Function Block however if it is started within that particular Function Block When changing addresses inside a counter timer or matrix DO NOT select a contact group this could result in lost memory Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 43 1 11 Search amp Exchange Function F20 Continued Performing Sea
183. 20 LC would provide additional benefits If the process temperature were to exceed the specified parameter range before the loop controller could regulate the heating device the comparison routine would be used to automatically execute an emergency contingency program to protect any nearby workers and equipment as well as the process itself Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 19 3 7 Integer Comparison Instructions Continued Complex comparison structures Complex signed and unsigned comparison structures may be programmed for use with both signed and unsigned integer values using the three basic integer comparison instructions presented in this subsection These complex comparison structures are illustrated in Figure 3 30 Refer to the remainder of this subsection for descriptions of each basic instruction and its associated symbol Figure 3 30 Complex Comparison Structures Continued on next page 20 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 7 Integer Comparison Instructions Continued Equal to Refer to Table 3 37 for equal to specifications Table 3 37 Equal To Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Compares two data values and passes power to succeeding instructions when values are equal Characteristics Compares two 16 bit words bit by bit obtained by data manipulation instructions se
184. 20 Selection Menu configuration is entered asking whether you want to load ladder logic if nonexistent pathname and file name are entered an error message appears if you respond yes Y to load ladder logic you are then prompted to enter the pathname and file name to be used if you respond no N to the prompt you will proceed directly to the Title Page display Continued on next page 54 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 3 2 Main Screen Display Continued Entering Main Screen Display via F2 620 Stand Alone Loader Perform the procedure presented in Table 3 2 to enter the WinLoader s Main Screen Display by using the F2 620 Stand Alone Loader function Note that this procedure does not require that the PC running the WinLoader software be connected to a 620 LC Table 3 2 Entering Main Screen Display Via F2 620 Stand Alone Loader Step Action 1 Press F2 620 Stand Alone Loader from WinLoader Main Menu to access 620 Selection Menu 2 Refer to Subsection 2 3 620 Stand Alone Loader F2 in Section 2 of this manual for instructions on configuring 620 Selection Menu 3 After 620 Selection Menu is configured as desired press ENTER to proceed to Title Page display shown in Figure 3 1 refer to subsequent subsection titled Title Page Display for additional information If a ladder logic program currently resides in memory a prompt appears after 620 Selection Menu configuration is entered asking
185. 20 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Utility Functions LDR009 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 6041 620 8989 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 1 Section 1 WinLoader Implementation Overview 1 1 Overview Section contents These are the topics covered in this section Topic See Page 1 1 Overview 1 1 2 WinLoader Start up 2 Purpose of this section This section describes how to start up the Winloader Loader from prompt Note that the procedures presented in this section assume that the 620 WinLoader software program has been previously installed on your PC For information on how to install the 620 WinLoader software program refer to 620 WinLoader Installation LDR002 2 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 1 2 WinLoader Start up Starting up WinLoader from DOS prompt Refer to Table 1 1 for the three methods that can be used to start up the WinLoader Note that each of the three methods is performed after changing the current path to the one where the WinLoader software is located refer to Table 1 2 1 3 1 4 or 1 5 as appropriate for respective procedure Table 1 1 Methods for Starting WinLoader Start up Method Description Refer to Method 1 Select Program gt 620Winloader gt Loader exe To execute the loade
186. 4 Table 1 7 Searching for a Line Marker or Function Block Marker 15 Table 1 8 Searching for a Logic Element 16 Table 1 9 Searching for an Opcode 17 Table 1 10 Searching for a Function Block 18 Table 1 11 Force Function Menu Selections 20 Table 1 12 Multi element Display Selections 24 Table 1 13 Block Operations Functions Menu Selections 32 Table 1 14 Defining a Ladder Logic Block 33 Table 1 15 Procedure for Editing Ladder Logic Block 33 Table 1 16 Procedure for Moving Ladder Logic Block 34 Table 1 17 Procedure for Copying Ladder Logic Block 35 Table 1 18 Procedure for Deleting Ladder Logic Block 36 Table 1 19 Procedure for Loading Ladder Logic Block 37 Table 1 20 Procedure for Saving Ladder Logic Block
187. 421 Card fault address 6 2419 Card fault address 7 2417 Card fault address 8 2415 Card fault count 2413 Scan loss battery 2302 Revision Level 48 is current 2301 Keyswitch jumpers 2299 Memory size 2297 Memory used 2295 Force count 2291 Scan time 2287 Software request for program 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 150 A 3 System Status Information for 620 10 15 LCs Register Memory Map for 620 10 15 LCs Refer to Figure A 2 next page for Register Memory Map for 620 10 15 LCs 620 10 15 LC s Output Status Table contained on CPU printed circuit board accommodates status of 768 output locations for 1 2K and 1K Memory and 1024 output locations for 2K and 4K Memory output status of real I O is contained in locations 0 255 for 1 2K and 1K Memory and 0 511 for 2K and 4K Memory control relay status is contained in locations 256 767 for 1 2K and 1K Memory and 512 1023 for 2K and 4K Memory Timer and counter presets and accumulated values plus other data are contained in Register Table at 16 bit wide addresses 4096 4351 for 1 2K and 1K Memory and 4096 4607 for 2K and 4K Memory Figure A 2 next page illustrates the memory distribution Table A 3 below describes system capacities of real I O control relay addresses and 16 bit registers Table A 3 620 10 15 LC I O and Register Capacities SYSTEM MEMORY SIZE MAXIMUM REAL I O CAPACITY NUMBER OF CONTROL RELAY ADDRESSES
188. 45 input and 45 output parameters may be entered with up to 16 input and 16 output parameters displayed per screen If Function Block Display line is full you are not allowed to enter additional parameters C type and PUSH parameters are for information purposes only and have no effect on internal logic of Function Block Parameters may be exchanged only for those of similar type that is exchanging parameters must use same number of data words Parameters may be entered only when 620 LC is in Program mode Table 3 4 Input and Output Parameter Types I O Symbol Opcode Represented Actual Opcode I B Bring In Bring In I C Contact NOP vector I Fb Floating Point Bring In Floating Point Bring In I Fk Floating Point Constant Floating Point Constant I I Indirect Bring In Indirect Bring In I K Constant Constant I P PULL PULL O C Coil NOP vector O S Send Out Constant O F Floating Point Send Out Constant O I Indirect Send Out Bring In O P PUSH NOP vector Continued on next page 32 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 3 3 Entering Function Block Parameters Continued Entering input parameters Perform the Table 3 5 procedure to enter input parameters Table 3 5 Entering Input Parameters Step Action 1 From main screen display with Edit amp Display Functions Menu at bottom of screen use arrow keys to position cursor on left side of Func
189. 620 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions LDR005 620 WinLoader instruction set Ten different categories of ladder logic instructions are available for use by the 620 LC to include contacts coils single multiple data words timers counters sequencers and other logic groups Refer to 620 WinLoader Programming Reference LDR004 for more information on the 620 WinLoader instruction set 620 WinLoader documentation functions 620 WinLoader documentation functions allow you to add labels descriptions and comments to your ladder logic program and to program printouts Refer to 620 WinLoader Documentation Functions LDR007 for information on the documentation program 4 05 620 WinLoader Overview 19 3 2 Software Characteristics Continued WinLoader files The following files from the WinLoader are found with the Install Shield Sl No EXE Files CFG Files DAT Files HLP Files 1 LOADER EXE LOADER CFG SCR LD I DAT LOADER HLP 2 DCMNTED EXE MODCNFIG CFG SCR LD R DAT 620 0025 HLP 3 CONFIG EXE STR LD I DAT 4 MODCNFIG EXE STR LD R DAT 5 620 0025 EXE 6 620 0020 EXE Refer to Table 3 1 next page for descriptions of each of these files Refer to Table 3 2 for a list of WinLoader file extensions Continued on next page 20 620 WinLoader Overview 4 05 3 2 Software Characteristics Continued WinLoader files continued Table 3 1 620 WinLoader File Descriptions Fi
190. 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 7 1 2 Documentation Types Continued Line Markers You may assign a line marker to a ladder logic line presently being edited which is then used as a reference number to identify the line comment associated with that particular line You must add a line marker to each line of ladder logic that has a comment associated with it The line marker is a program element that is inserted in memory at the beginning of a line The line marker contains a number identifying the line comment associated with it You reference this number while in the Line Comment Editor Perform the Table 1 3 procedure to add a line marker to a line of ladder logic Table 1 3 Adding Line Marker to Line of Ladder Logic Step Action 1 Display ladder logic line to which comment is to be attached 2 Press to display Line Marker Edit Menu 3 Press E Edit Create Line Marker 4 Enter number that identifies comment to be associated with this line 0 32766 Note that this number does not have to be the actual line number 5 Press ENTER to verify that number is correct Line marker appears on screen BUT IS NOT YET ATTACHED TO LINE 6 Attach line marker to ladder logic line by using one of the line enter procedures for example press Ins ENTER Line marker now becomes a part of the ladder logic line to which it is attached and is also stored in the 620 LC After a line marker is prog
191. 7 if sign bit is a 1 remaining 15 bits represent a negative value from 1 to 32768 Unsigned integer values range from 0 to 65535 all 16 bits represent data Requires special considerations regarding type of data being compared signed or unsigned and display mode signed or unsigned of WinLoader Uses no addressing and displays no data Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a greater than instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F9 to select Operators Logic Group 2 Press F7 to select Math Operators Logic Group 3 Press F3 to select greater than instruction Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 27 3 7 Integer Comparison Instructions Continued Greater than continued Figure 3 33 illustrates characteristics associated with the greater than instruction in the first line the WinLoader is in the signed mode of display and the signed value read from address 7000 is compared to determine if it is greater than the signed value read from address 7500 since 1917 is greater than 467 a logical current path exists through the greater than instruction the output coil is energized in the second line the WinLoader is in the signed mode of display and the signed value read from address 7500 is compared to determine if it is greater than the signed value read from address 8000 since 467
192. 70 is continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 105 3 12 Sequencer Instructions Continued Unload sequencer continued Table 3 70 Unload Sequencer Specifications Continued SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program an unload sequencer instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F7 to select Sequencer Logic Group 2 Enter address where unloaded data is to be stored 3 Press F6 to select unload sequencer instruction Continued on next page 106 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 12 Sequencer Instructions Continued Unload sequencer characteristics Figure 3 63 illustrates characteristics associated with the unload sequencer instruction Figure 3 63 Unload Sequencer Characteristics Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 107 3 12 Sequencer Instructions Continued Edit sequencer It is possible to edit the control output address the step number register address and the data table of an existing sequencer instruction The data table can be edited while the 620 LC is in either the Run or Program modes of operation The control output and step number registers can only be edited while the WinLoader is in the Program mode The sequencer instruction requires one word of memory each for the control output address and the step number register Each step in the data table
193. A matrix instruction treats 16 successive I O Status Table addresses or one group register address as a group A matrix must be located in either area but not both Figure 3 64 illustrates a matrix with a reference address of 5000 comprising four registers Figure 3 64 Matrix with Reference Address of 5000 Comprising 4 Registers Continued on next page 116 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 13 Matrix Instructions Continued Primary matrix instruction groups There are three primary groups of matrix instructions those that merely change status of addresses within a matrix set zero matrix set one matrix those that affect the status of addresses within a matrix and move the bit pattern to a second matrix location move matrix insert matrix those that perform an operation on two matrices and place the resulting bit pattern in a third matrix location OR matrix exclusive OR matrix AND matrix compare The third group of matrix operations those instructions that perform an operation on two matrices and place the resulting bit pattern in a third matrix location to include OR exclusive OR AND and compare matrices work in this manner see Figure 3 65 logical operation is performed on most significant elements of matrices A and B result is placed in most significant position in matrix C Note that the compare operation is unique because it stores only th
194. ACEBAR Editing timer counter preset accumulator or bring in data Perform the Table 1 13 procedure to edit a timer counter s preset value accumulator value or bring in data Table 1 13 Editing Timer Counter Preset Accumulator or Bring In Data Step Action 1 Place cursor at desired location 2 Press key 3 Enter desired new value 4 Press ENTER to complete entry This function is enabled in 620 20 25 35 LCs by closing DIP switch 5 on the Parallel Link Driver Module in 620 15 LCs by closing DIP switch 5 on the processor module and in 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 36 LCs by enabling function from Processor Configuration menu selected from 620 Selection Menu of WinLoader software Refer to 620 WinLoader Implementation LDR003 for more information on how to configure the Processor Configuration menu Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 11 1 3 General Editing Procedures Continued Logic group hold function The Logic Group Hold function whether selected from either the Software Configuration Menu which enables this operation on F1 CONTACTS only or by pressing the CTRL key and then F1 F3 or F4 allows you to enter several elements from one logic group without leaving the logic group s display field This saves you one keystroke per element when programming When using Logic Group Hold note that all cursor control functions and special edi
195. Action 1 Press F6 to select Timer Counter Logic Group 2 Press F5 to select Counter 3 Enter desired accumulator register address and then press RETURN or ENTER 4 Enter desired preset value in desired resolution 5 Press RETURN to enter retentive timer Continued on next page 76 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 4 Timer and Counter Instructions Continued Counter characteristics As shown in Figure 3 10 the counter instruction can be configured to count up down or up and down Figure 3 10 Counter Characteristics 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 77 3 5 Skip Instructions Skip instruction types Table 3 20 presents the three types of skip instructions presented in this section Table 3 20 Skip Instructions Skip Instructions Refer to page Not Skip and Retain NSKR 79 81 Not Skip and Deenergize NSKD 80 81 End of Skip EOS 82 Skip instructions background Skip instructions control the behavior of a segment or block of a program that consists of one or more lines of logic These instructions are used to define the boundaries of a skip block An NSKR or NSKD instruction marks the beginning of the skip block and the EOS instruction marks the end of the skip block The behavior of the skip block is controlled by the conditioning elements that precede the NSKR or NSKD instruction either of which would be a terminating element By the behavior
196. Continued Additional ARMP editing procedures Perform the following ARMP procedures when appropriate note that these procedures are similar to the edit line process presented in Table 1 3 To insert and load a logic line between existing lines Press Ins PgDn To load a logic line at the end of a program Press Enter To overwrite an existing logic line with an edited line Press Ins Enter To delete an existing logic line Press Del PgDn the caution and warning messages mentioned previously will display be sure line terminator if a coil is OFF prior to delete operation make sure Send Out element is set to zero prior to delete operation Editing sequencers in Augmented Run Mode Programming Sequencers of 80 steps or less may be inserted loaded or deleted in ARMP mode using normal Run mode methods Sequencers with more than 80 steps cannot be deleted as a whole The only way to delete such sequencers is to delete individual steps until there are 80 steps or less at which time the entire sequencer may be deleted Multiple step editing or the editing of the Output Control Address or Step Register address is not permitted in sequencers with more than 80 steps In sequencers with 80 steps or less all editing procedures are the same as those for regular sequencer instructions as described in 623 WinLoader Programming Reference LDR004 except that the ARMP warning messages previously de
197. Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 37 Inserting parameters Perform the Table 4 3 procedure to insert a parameter in a designated Function Block This procedure may be performed only in Program mode Table 4 3 Inserting Parameters Step Action 1 Position cursor at appropriate parameter location see Figure 4 1 next page and press INSERT 2 Enter appropriate parameter address and type Continued on next page 38 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 4 2 Editing Function Block Parameters Continued Cursor positions for editing Function Block parameters Figure 4 1 Cursor Positions for Editing Function Block Parameters Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 39 4 2 Editing Function Block Parameters Continued Deleting parameters Perform the Table 4 4 procedure to delete a parameter from a designated Function Block This procedure may be performed only in Program mode Table 4 4 Deleting Parameters Step Action 1 Position cursor at address to be deleted see Figure 4 1 previous page and press DEL Inserting parameter names Perform the Table 4 5 procedure to insert a parameter name in a designated Function Block Table 4 5 Inserting Parameter Names Step Action 1 Position cursor at appropriate parameter name location see Figure 4 1 previous page and press INSERT 2 Enter appropri
198. Entry Procedures Continued Branching Branching is inherent to parallel ladder logic For these instances each line of logic consists of up to three rungs Each rung line includes elements in series connected to other rungs by branches Each branch represents the particular path by which the current logical power flow must flow to and from the parallel logic Figure 1 3 illustrates a line of parallel logic whereby each of the branches is identified Figure 1 3 Up and Down Branches in a Parallel Line of Logic 6 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 1 3 General Editing Procedures Ladder logic editing keystroke guide Table 1 2 presents the basic keystrokes required for general editing procedures when programming lines of ladder logic using the WinLoader Table 1 2 General Editing Instructions Keystroke Guide Procedure Keystrokes MOVE to LEFT of FIRST ELEMENT Home MOVE to LEFT of LINE TERMINATOR END DISPLAY LINE 1 in control program Control Home DISPLAY LAST LINE in control program Control End MOVE one LINE UP Page Up MOVE one LINE DOWN Page Down DELETE an existing logic ELEMENT DEL K or ENTER a BLANK ELEMENT ENTER a DOWN BRANCH MOVE to left most down branch or left rail and ENTER a DOWN BRANCH MOVE to LEFT MOST or LEFT RAIL and move CURSOR one branch DOWN TAB Shift TAB DELETE a DOWN BRANCH DEL LOAD a LINE to the END of the con
199. Group 2 Press F7 to select no operation instruction Continued on next page 130 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 14 Miscellaneous Instructions Continued No operation characteristics Figure 3 67 illustrates characteristics associated with the no operation instruction Figure 3 67 No Operation Characteristics Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 131 3 14 Miscellaneous Instructions Continued Input status scan ISS Refer to Table 3 90 for input status scan specifications Table 3 90 Input Status Scan Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 10 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage User programmable version of Input Status Scan ISS stored in memory word zero and executed at beginning of every scan Characteristics Programmed as part of input section of logic line see Figure 3 68 Causes processor to temporarily suspend control program execution processor updates I O Status Table by collecting current status of all real world inputs does not perform other functions option module communications collection of output card faults on line diagnostics which are executed by system programmed ISS Resumes execution at logic element immediately following ISS after update is complete Used to refresh real world inputs in a control program with a long scan time Programming
200. Logic Group 2 Press F7 to select Math Operators Logic Group 3 Press F6 to select test for zero instruction 4 Enter desired address and press RETURN or ENTER Continued on next page 30 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 7 Integer Comparison Instructions Continued Test for zero characteristics Figure 3 34 illustrates characteristics associated with the test for zero instruction in line 1 since a zero condition is not encountered the instruction is False and the output coil is deenergized in line 2 since a zero condition is encountered the instruction is True and the output coil is energized Figure 3 34 Test for Zero Characteristics 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 31 3 8 Math Instructions Math instruction types Table 3 41 presents the four types of math instructions presented in this section Table 3 41 Math Instructions Math Instructions Refer to page Addition 32 Subtraction 35 Multiplication 38 Division 43 Math instructions Math instructions allow you to manipulate program data through calculations which might be used to provide scaling execute formulas and perform other similar operations Although this subsection is specifically dedicated to their use with signed and unsigned integer data 620 LC math instructions can also be used with floating point data Continued on next page 32 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4
201. Menu shown in Figure 1 3 below This menu is used to access functions which are used to locate specific items in any ladder logic program The program being searched may reside in the CPM s memory function or in the PC s RAM memory when the WinLoader is in the Stand Alone mode Refer to Table 1 4 next page for descriptions of each available selection from this menu and refer to subsequent subsections for actual search procedures Before a menu selection may be made the desired numeric value must be entered through the Enter Value or Label message prompt Searches performed while the 620 35 Logic Controller is in the Run Program or Run mode of operation may take up to 15 minutes on a 32K program it may appear that the processor is dormant but it is actually executing the search Figure 1 3 Search Menu Continued on next page 12 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 1 4 Search Functions F13 Continued Search Menu continued Table 1 4 Search Menu Selections Key Selection Function F1 Line Number Used to search for and go to any valid line number in the program F2 Line Marker Used to search for and go to any valid line marker in the program line markers are part of the WinLoader s ladder logic Documentation function line markers are used to attach comments to lines of logic F3 OpCode amp Address can be used to search for and go to each reference to a specifi
202. Option Card 3 ID 2293 0 MSB 2272 Option Card 4 ID 2292 Baud Rate LSB Table A 8 620 11 14 1631 LC System Status Table System Identification Decimal Address Register Contents Decimal Address Register Contents 2502 MSB Top Address of Flag Bit Area 2047 I O Configuration Request 85 I O is configured 170 reconfiguration requested 2501 LSB 2043 2499 System Status Table Size Hex 2042 Processor Control Configuration 2498 Firmware Revision Hex 2041 1904 I O Configuration Table 2497 Firmware Version Hex 0013 MSB Executive ROM Check Code 2496 2491 Communication Port Configuration 0012 LSB 2175 ASCII Bit Pattern for Program Date 0004 System Error Word 2170 0003 MSB 0 01 Timebase Counter History for Last Scan 2169 ASCII Bit Pattern for Programmer 0002 LSB 2144 0001 MSB 0 01 Timebase Counter 2143 ASCII Bit Pattern for Program Title LSB 2048 Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 157 A 4 System Status Information for 620 11 14 1631 LCs Continued System Status Table for 620 11 14 1631 LCs continued The following 8 byte block is reserved for onboard communication port transaction records for 620 11 14 1631 LCs the format varies depending on the protocol being used each count is comprised of two Status Table Locations which should be interpreted as a 16 bit word with a binary range of 0 65535 ABC Protocol
203. Receive RTS Request to send RXD Receive Data SLS Serial Link Selector TXD Transmit Data XMIT Transmit vi 620 WinLoader Installation 4 05 References Publication Title Publication Number Binder Title Binder Number 620 WinLoader Overview LDR001 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Implementation LDR003 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Programming Reference LDR004 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Edit Display Functions LDR005 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Function Blocks LDR006 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Documentation Functions LDR007 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Networking Functions LDR008 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Utility Functions LDR009 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 6041 Terminal Emulator User Manual 620 8989 4 05 620 WinLoader Installation vii Section 1 WinLoader Installation Overvi
204. Refer to Table 2 1 next page for descriptions of each available selection from this menu Refer to 623 60 WinLoader Implementation LDR003 for information on how to access functions from the WinLoader s Main Menu If you are just beginning to create and document a ladder logic program a default file name and pathname should be specified for documentation files to prevent accidental loss of documentation data if any new labels descriptions are created while editing ladder logic they are saved using the present default file name and pathname when any documentation editor is selected the default filename and pathname for documentation may be specified using the F9 Edit Default File function of the Documentation Functions Menu described in this section if a default file name has not been specified any labels descriptions created while editing ladder logic are saved to the default file name specified in the configuration file a pathname defining where ladder logic files are to be stored may be specified in the Upload Download Functions Menu refer to subsection 2 3 of 623 WinLoader Edit Display Functions LDR005 for information Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 13 Figure 2 1 Documentation Functions Menu Continued on next page 14 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 2 1 Overview Continued Documentation Functions menu continued Table 2 1 D
205. Refer to subsection 2 3 titled Label Description Editors F2 F5 F6 for editing instructions and descriptions of each function key Figure 2 7 Bit Label Editor 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 41 2 7 Edit Default File F9 Procedure for Editing Default File Perform the Table 2 9 procedure to edit a default file name If label comment files to be loaded contain maximum number or more labels comments as specified by configuration file the message MAX LOAD displays WinLoader then loads maximum number of labels comments into memory remaining labels remain on disk to avoid losing remaining labels either change default file name or do NOT perform an overwrite Table 2 9 Procedure for Editing Default File Step Action 1 Select F9 Edit Default File from Documentation Functions Menu 2 Enter default pathname where documentation files are to be stored 3 Enter file name of up to 8 characters to be used to identify all documentation files created for a specific project or application Software installs the name 620 as default until desired name is defined If you are just beginning to create and document a ladder logic program a default file name and pathname should be specified for documentation files to prevent accidental loss of documentation data if any new labels descriptions are created while editing ladder logic they are saved using the present default fil
206. SKs 8192 to 8449 which permit absolute jumps to other portions of the program should be used with caution F2 Skip Type Allows selecting either an NSKR or NSKD skip instruction to define how CPU views any associated outputs when Function Block is not executed Toggle F2 to obtain desired skip type NSKR or NSKD default setting is NSKR Skip type displays on right hand side of F2 block on menu After Function Block overhead is formally entered in step 5 of Table 3 1 or 3 3 procedure same skip type is also included as part of internal FBD line unseen in interior of Function Block F3 Function Block Parameter Line Output Address Allows identifying output address from 0 to 4095 processor dependent that is to be used as line output dummy terminator Select F3 enter appropriate output address and press ENTER default setting is highest control I O address processor dependent Pressing Spacebar clears F3 block Parameter line output address displays on right hand side of menu s F3 block After Function Block overhead is formally entered in step 5 of Table 3 1 or 3 3 procedure address is shown as parameter output address in both FBI and FBO lines inside Function Block Table 3 2 is continued on next page 26 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 3 2 Defining Function Blocks Continued Defining a Function Block with new logic continued Table 3 2 Fun
207. Selection Menu is displayed MEM SZ Displays available memory size for corresponding 620 LC model number When 620 12 1633 36 Version 2 0 or greater CPMs are connected to WinLoader Version 3 5 or greater the status line MEM SZ parameter is replaced by the SESSION parameter described below SESSION Indicates CPM s current User Memory Session UMS status as indicated in table below refer to subsequent subsection titled User Memory Session for complete description SESSION Indicator Description LP Loader port owns UMS FP Fixed port owns UMS OP1 Option card 1 owns UMS OP2 Option card 2 owns UMS OP3 Option card 3 owns UMS OP4 Option card 4 owns UMS When SESSION indication flashes a UMS status your Loader device owns the UMS When no one Loader device has established a session all Loader devices may read program memory this means that you can monitor and save the user program memory with your Loader device When another Loader device establishes a session you cannot monitor load save or print the user program memory with your Loader device When you establish a session with your Loader device you can monitor load save and print user program memory FREE MEM Displays in number of 24 bit memory words the amount of available memory for ladder logic storage this figure is the difference between size of memory function used by a given CPM and number of words used in the l
208. Serial Link Module SLM in 620 LC system as either PASS FAIL NOT PRESENT NOT TESTED also shows redundant status of each Serial I O Module SIOM linked to each respective SLM F5 PeerData Net Presents diagnostic display indicating status of each node on PeerData network Refer to 623 WinLoader Networking Functions LDR008 for more information on PeerData Network F6 Multidrop Presents diagnostic display indicating status of each actively connected node on Multidrop Loader network Refer to 623 WinLoader Networking Functions LDR008 for more information on Multidrop Loader Network 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 63 2 5 620 Diagnostics Menu F4 Continued Hardware Status display screen The F1 Hardware Status display screen is presented in Figure 2 7 below If this screen is selected the following data contained in the hardware status block is automatically updated 620 LC firmware revision level 48 or greater Augmented Run Mode Programming ARMP 70 or greater User Memory Session UMS 620 LC firmware Version Revision processor selections for force data change and on line Program functions overall self test results scan time in milliseconds and number of forced logic elements Processor Not Scanning message flashing at top of Hardware Status display screen indicates something has caused WinLoader to lose scan Press F1 to up
209. Slot Assignments for Processor Racks Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 17 2 2 620 Loader Monitor F1 Continued Processor full rack assignments 620 1690 1693 processor racks In the 620 1690 1693 Processor Racks for the 620 36 CPM shown in Figure 2 10 I O module slots A H correspond directly with slots A H in the I O Configuration Menu Note that slots I J are designated for the power supply module slots K L are designated for option modules and slots M N are designated for the CPM therefore slots I through N are not defined in the I O Configuration Menu Note also that slot H may be designated for either an I O module or an SLM in 620 1633 36 configurations Processor half rack assignments 620 1695 processor rack In the 620 1695 Augmented Processor Half Rack shown in Figure 2 10 I O module slots A D correspond directly with slots A D in the I O Configuration Menu Note that slots E F are reserved for the power supply and that slots G H are reserved for the CPM Note also that the half rack does not support option modules or Serial Link Modules SLMs Serial I O assignments 620 1633 36 CPMs support serial I O by designating a valid I O slot for the Serial Link Module SLM in the I O Configuration Menu SIOM addresses must start at some address greater than the highest address used in the last processor rack slot assigned for instance if the highest address in slot F is 19
210. The WinLoader software program is factory installed on the 620 6150A Loader Terminal if your system includes a 620 6150A Loader Terminal you do not have to install any additional software Although version 5 4 and greater WinLoaders are shipped and is set for point to point operation This section is not supporting Multidrop feature therefore presents information that pertains only for point to point operation 4 05 620 WinLoader Installation 1 Continued on next page 1 1 Overview Continued 620 6020 WinLoader hardware 620 6020 WinLoader hardware includes 629 6019 External Converter Box provides RS232 422 interface must be installed through PC s serial communications port and requires 5VDC 250mA power supply 10 foot Loader Terminal cable 628 3000 shielded cable that connects External Converter Box to Loader Terminal port on 620 CPM if desired you can also build your own custom length cable up to a maximum length of 2000 feet 610m 12 inch converter communications cable provides communications between PC s serial port and 629 6019 External Converter Box Power splitter cable common connector plugs into PC s keyboard jack and one end of split is connected to keyboard cable other end to converter box Refer to subsection 2 3 of this manual for information on installing the RS232 422 External Converter Box 620 60 WinL
211. VDC at 650mA through its keyboard jack use a compatible external power supply not supplied by Honeywell that has been fitted with a 5 pin female standard DIN connector It is your responsibility to determine if your PC has a compatible keyboard port with 5VDC on the appropriate pins and if it is capable of supplying the 650mA necessary to operate the 629 6019 converter If your PC is capable of supplying 5VDC at 650mA through its keyboard jack use the power splitter cable as follows see Figure 6 Step Action 4A Disconnect keyboard cable from PC 4B Attach common power splitter cable to PC s keyboard port 4C Attach one of the split connectors to the keyboard cable 4D Attach other split connector to external converter box port labelled 5VDC INPUT 5 Reconnect power cords that were disconnected in step 1 of this procedure To prevent the potentially damaging effects of ground loop currents ensure that the personal computer or 620 6150A Loader Terminal and any connected devices including the 620 LC system are powered from a source that has a common ground reference Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Installation 11 2 3 629 6019 External Converter Box Continued Figure 6 Power Splitter Cable Connections 12 620 WinLoader Installation 4 05 2 4 Cabling to RS232 Serial Printers Installing cabling from WinLoader to serial printer Refer to Figures 7 and 8 for pin ou
212. WinLoader Function Block Programming 17 Parameter unloading example If the Register Block Start Address is programmed at 8191 with 5 inputs and 7 input parameters are programmed as follows Parameter 1 5000 Bring In Parameter 2 100 Contact Parameters 3 amp 4 99 9 Floating Point Constant Parameter 5 101 Contact Parameter 6 amp 7 6000 Floating Point Bring In The following results are achieved data for 5000 Bring In is PUSHed into register 8191 data for 99 9 Floating Point Constant is PUSHed into registers 8190 and 8189 data for 6000 Floating Point Bring In is PUSHed into registers 8188 and 8187 and any parameter selection that does not place data on the stack for example 100 Contact and 101 Contact is used for information purposes only and does not affect the internal working of the Function Block Continued on next page 18 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 2 3 Function Block Parameters Continued Input parameter unloading guidelines Table 2 1 Input Parameter Unloading Guidelines Key Input Parameter Unloading Guideline F1 Contact C No data placed on stack F2 Indirect Bring In I One 16 bit word of data placed on stack F3 Bring In B One 16 bit word of data placed on stack F4 PULL P One 16 bit word of data placed on stack F5 Constant K One 16 bit word of data placed on stack F6 Floating Point Constant Fk Two
213. a Manipulation Instructions Continued Floating point data manipulation instructions The 620 LC instruction set offers the following floating point data manipulation instructions floating point bring in floating point send out floating point constant Like their integer counterparts floating point data manipulation instructions are used to collect transfer and compare numeric values within the CPM These instructions are most commonly used to handle data used in math operations which require a greater degree of accuracy than simple integers can provide Floating point instructions allow chain type math calculations like those used in integer mathematics to be executed with a much greater degree of accuracy Floating point chain type math also eliminates the build up in round off errors typically found in integer math calculations Important characteristics that are unique to floating point instructions include floating point values consist of three parts sign exponent mantissa floating point numerical value is determined as V 1 s M re where s sign bit r base for exponent M mantissa e exponent This format is analogous to scientific notation where the value is determined by raising ten to the power of the exponent and multiplying by the mantissa the difference is that in floating point the exponent represents a power of two not a power of ten me
214. abelled PC see Figure 4 2B Attach other end of communications cable to serial port on PC or 620 6150A Loader Terminal if connecting to a PC use COM 1 your PC may also require using a 25 pin to 9 pin adapter if connecting to a 620 6150A Loader Terminal use COM 2 4 05 620 WinLoader Installation 7 2 3 629 6019 External Converter Box Continued Figure 4 Communications Cable Connections 8 620 WinLoader Installation 4 05 2 3 629 6019 External Converter Box Continued Installing 629 6019 External Converter Box continued Table 1 Installing 629 6019 External Converter Box Continued Step Action 3 Install the 10 foot Loader Terminal cable as shown in Figure 5 and as described below Step Action 3A Attach the cable s straight connector to the 9 pin port labelled 620 on the external converter box see Figure 5 3B Attach the angled connector of the cable to the 9 pin Loader Terminal port on the CPM 4 05 620 WinLoader Installation 9 2 3 629 6019 External Converter Box Continued Figure 5 Loader Terminal Cable Connections 10 620 WinLoader Installation 4 05 2 3 629 6019 External Converter Box Continued Installing 629 6019 External Converter Box continued Table 1 Installing 629 6019 External Converter Box Continued Step Action 4 Provide a power connection as appropriate If your PC is not capable of supplying 5
215. able 2 1 Documentation Functions Menu Selections 14 Table 2 2 Function Block Parameter Name Editor Functions 17 Table 2 3 Entering Parameter Names 20 Table 2 4 Entering Function Block Parameter Names 21 Table 2 5 Label Description Editor Functions 24 Table 2 6 Editing Entry in Label Description Editor 28 Table 2 7 Comment Editor Functions Command Mode 31 Table 2 8 Comment Editor Functions Edit Mode 38 Table 2 9 Procedure for Editing Default File 41 Table 3 1 Document Functions Menu Selections 43 Table 3 3 Listing Queue Menu Selections 45 Table 3 4 Ladder Logic Listing Menu Selections 47 Table 3 5 Printer Parameters Menu Selections 49 Table 3 6 Serial Port Configuration Menu Selections 51 Table 3 7 Docume
216. ad prompt if terminator being entered coil send out etc is also used in any other line of program PUSH elements are not checked as already being used due to how they re stored in CPM only specified address is checked therefore all addresses used by send out are not checked when outputs are programmed for example if send out with address of 121 is programmed a duplicate will not be found if output coil with address of 116 is programmed refer to 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions LDR007 for more information when Clear function is disabled F8 Full Time Detail When Set detail block displays and detail edit function is enabled automatically upon entry of eligible elements in Loader Monitor CPM must be in Program mode or Stand Alone Program mode to enable this function when Clear function is disabled 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 61 2 5 620 Diagnostics Menu F4 Continued Diagnostics Status Screens and Functions Select F1 Diagnostics from the Display and Diagnostic Functions Menu to access one of the following three available diagnostic status screens 620 LC hardware status screen 620 self test status screen or I O Module status screen Refer to subsequent subsections for coverage of each of these diagnostic status screens Note that the following selections are available on all three diagnostic status screens F1 Hard
217. ad this data and Push it to appropriate addresses Continued on next page 94 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 12 Sequencer Instructions Continued Sequencer instructions continued Figure 3 58 Sequencer Instruction Block Diagram Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 95 3 12 Sequencer Instructions Continued Sequencer instructions continued Figure 3 59 Sequencer Symbols Output to I O Status Table Continued on next page 96 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 12 Sequencer Instructions Continued Sequencer instructions continued Figure 3 60 Sequencer Symbols Output to Data Register Table Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 97 3 12 Sequencer Instructions Continued Sequencer Refer to Table 3 68 for sequencer specifications Table 3 68 Sequencer Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 10 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Although there is only one sequencer instruction its appearance differs depending on the type of register I O Status data it is writing to see Figures 3 59 and 3 60 Usage Allows 620 LC to store up to 1024 16 bit data words of variable data in its memory data can be sent sequentially to I O Status Table for control of repetitive operations or can be treated a numerical values thereby allowing sequencer table to be used as a look up tab
218. adder logic control program number is updated as additions and deletions are made to the control program Table 3 3 is continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 69 3 2 Main Screen Display Continued Status line information continued Table 3 3 Status Line Information Continued Status Field Description MODE Displays current mode of CPM via the following mode indicators The following mode indicators are used by all CPM models Mode Indicator Description S A WinLoader in Stand Alone mode no communications with CPM RUN CPM in standard run mode keyswitch in RUN position PGM CPM in program mode keyswitch in PROGRAM position DIS CPM in disable version of RUN mode keyswitch in DISABLE position STF Self test failure has occurred in CPM SPG Non IMS Interprocessor Messaging Service CPM is in software program mode P F I O power fail has occurred The following are 6 additional mode indicators used by CPM models 620 12 1633 36 with firmware revision 70 or greater Mode Indicator Description SLP CPM has been placed in PROGRAM software program mode by way of WinLoader and is being accessed via Loader port CPM keyswitch must be in PROGRAM position SFP CPM has been placed in PROGRAM software program mode by way of fixed port serial communications port OP1 CPM has been placed in PROGRAM software program mode by way of Optio
219. adder logic program from the PC and transfer it to the CPM s Memory Function This function adds the new ladder logic program file to the end of the existing program The appended ladder logic may then be edited as required see Figure 2 4 below This function is useful in that common routines may be programmed and saved to disk then appended to programs under development it may also be used to load pre built diagnostics routines into the existing program to assist in troubleshooting a system Figure 2 4 Append From Disk to 620 Example Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 57 2 3 Upload Download Functions F2 Continued Verify functions The following two Verify functions are available from the Upload Download Function Menu F3 Verify 620 Logic amp Data is used to check the ladder logic program as well as all data being used by the program in the CPM s Memory Function against its master program file which resides on disk in the PC when this function is initiated the program and associated data in Memory Function is compared instruction by instruction with the master program all miscompares are displayed to the main screen display and a file is created from path specified which contains the miscompare information F5 Verify 620 Logic is used to check the ladder logic program in the CPM s Memory Function against its master program file which resides on disk in t
220. address 0 8191 in your ladder logic program F3 Address Comment Editor Enables you to create comments of up to 20 lines 67 characters per line for any logic element address 0 8191 in your ladder logic program including those of Function Blocks F4 Line Comment Editor Enables you to create comments of up to 20 lines 67 characters per line which are related to ladder logic lines including those of Function Blocks by a reference number opcode added to each line during programming note that reference numbers and line numbers do not have to be the same F5 Skip Label Editor Enables you to create 7 character labels and 3 line by 9 character label descriptions for any logic element skip instruction reference numbers 0 32767 included in your ladder logic program F6 Subroutine Label Editor Enables you to create 7 character labels and 3 line by 9 character label descriptions for any logic element subroutine instruction reference numbers 0 255 included in your ladder logic program F7 Bit Comment Editor Enables you to create comments of up to 20 lines 67 characters per line for any bit location in your ladder logic program bit comment addresses may be any register address 4096 8191 and any bit value 0 15 F8 Bit Label Editor Enables you to assign 7 character labels and 3 line by 9 character label descriptions for any logic element bit location bit label addresses can be any register address 4096 8191 a
221. address 5200 holds upper 16 bits or the remainder 0 address 5199 holds lower 16 bits or the quotient 9 Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 47 3 8 Math Instructions Continued Basic division operation continued Figure 3 39 Basic Division Operation 48 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 9 Logical Operator Instructions Logical operator instruction types Table 3 46 presents the three types of logical operator instructions presented in this section Table 3 46 Logical Operator Instructions Logical Operator Instructions Refer to page AND 49 OR 51 Exclusive OR 53 Logical operator instructions The logical operators AND OR and Exclusive OR are used to perform simple logic operations on two 16 bit data words Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 49 3 9 Logical Operator Instructions Continued AND Refer to Table 3 47 for AND specifications Table 3 47 AND Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 36 LCs Symbol Usage Performs AND operation on two 16 bit data words see Figure 3 40 Characteristics Each bit of one word is ANDed with corresponding bit position in other for example bit position zero is always ANDed with bit position zero bit position seven is always ANDed with bit position seven and so on Data manipulation instruct
222. am Mode SPM on Option Card 1 OP2 IMS Interprocessor Messaging Service logic controller is in Software Program Mode SPM on Option Card 2 OP3 IMS Interprocessor Messaging Service logic controller is in Software Program Mode SPM on Option Card 3 OP4 IMS Interprocessor Messaging Service logic controller is in Software Program Mode SPM on Option Card 4 70 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 2 7 Register Table Functions F6 Accessing Register Table Functions Menu Press F6 Register Table Functions from the Auxiliary Function Menu to access the Register Table Functions Menu shown in Figure 2 13 below This menu provides access to functions which permit you to read write or verify the contents of the CPM Register Function s I O Status Table and or Data Register Table Available Register Table Functions include Save I O Status and Data Register data from CPM to disk Load I O Status and Data Register Table data from disk to CPM Verify I O Status Table and Data Register Table data in the CPM against that of the master file on disk and Select the pathname where the Save Load or Verify operation is to read or write its data Refer to Table 2 9 below for descriptions of each available selection from the Register Table Functions Menu Table 2 9 Register Table Functions Menu Selections Selection Function F1 Save from 620 to Disk Saves contents of specified 620 LC register tabl
223. ame Editor Functions Continued Key Function Description F8 MERGE To allow contents of Function Block file in disk memory may contain more than one Function Block to be combined with Function Block file presently in Function Block Parameter Name Editor Press F8 MERGE and enter pathname and file name of Function Block file to be merged with Function Block file presently in editor If there are parameter names label descriptions in both files with the same Function Block number parameter name label description from disk file overwrites one in editor F9 LOAD To load a Function Block from disk to Function Block Parameter Name Editor press F9 LOAD and enter pathname and file name for Function Block file to be loaded into editor Load operation overwrites all existing parameter names and label descriptions 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 19 2 2 Function Block Parameter Name Editor F1 Continued F10 SAVE Permits you to save one set or all Function Block parameter names and label descriptions presently in editor onto disk memory Select F10 SAVE then enter Y for yes or N for no to indicate whether only specified Function Block labels should be saved as opposed to saving all Function Block labels in memory if you answer Y to Save prompt then only Function Block labels displayed will be saved enter pathname and file name where information
224. amed RPM_max a constant K of 200 and then using the following line of control logic for Line 7 in the Function Block Body This permits changing the address of parameter RPM_max directly from the Function Block Display box The general point to be made is that Bring In instructions should be used when the program is varying data values at a fixed address Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 15 2 2 Function Block Operation Continued Lines 8 Function Block End FBE line The Function Block End FBE line which contains the corresponding ending instruction EOS for the Function Block and is unseen when the interior of the Function Block is accessed is automatically programmed by the WinLoader after configuring the overhead of the Function Block using the Function Block Selections Menu as described in Section 3 Function Block Programming For Function Block TSpindl1 the FBE line has the format presented in Figure 2 11 Figure 2 11 Function Block End FBE Line for TSpindl1 Note that just as with the FBD line the sequence K2 8 K2 8 which is included in this line represents the eight lines in the Function Block that is the Function Block size 16 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 2 3 Function Block Parameters Introduction To pass information between the program environment the user main program in which the Function Block
225. and to make sure that each address is properly initialized before use most efficient way to address internal variables is to use same address locations for all internal addresses used with each different Function Block Table 4 8 is continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 43 4 3 Editing Function Blocks Continued Editing Function Block header continued Table 4 8 Function Block Selection Menu Selections Continued Key Selection Description F6 Parameter Inputs Allows specifying total number of addresses up to 45 processor dependent in 620 LC register table to be reserved for data associated with input parameters Select F6 enter desired number of input parameter addresses and press ENTER Pressing Spacebar clears F6 block Corresponding number displays on right hand side of F6 block on menu and corresponding input parameter address range based on starting address specified using F5 function displays in middle of F6 block After Function Block overhead is formally entered corresponding number of input parameter registers is entered into appropriate input parameter unloading FBU line inside Function Block When using F6 function refer to Section 2 Function Block Programming Theory of Operation for information regarding number of registers required for each specific parameter F8 Parameter Outputs Allows specifying total number of addresses u
226. arch for any opcode displayed in the menu if the PC is attached to an invalid 620 LC the selection Opcode Only will not display If a valid opcode has been entered the line containing that opcode displays with the following message displayed in lower right hand corner Again N opcode entered Press yes Y to proceed to any other lines that contain the same opcode pressing any other key will terminate the search When the end of memory is encountered or no opcode is found the following message displays Continued on next page 18 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 1 4 Search Functions F13 Continued Searching for a Function Block Perform the Table 1 10 procedure to search for a specific Function Block Table 1 10 Searching for a Function Block Step Action 1 Select F13 to access Search Menu shown in Figure 1 3 2 Select F5 Function Block 3 Enter desired Function Block number to be searched for and press ENTER or press ENTER to perform a generic Function Block search note that it may be necessary to press the spacebar first to clear the numeric screen before attempting a generic search If a valid Function Block number has been entered the line containing that number displays with the following message displayed in lower right hand corner Again N Function Block number entered Press yes Y to proceed to any other lines that contain the same F
227. at by performing this function all ladder logic and documentation that may currently reside in PC s RAM memory will be lost before using this function you should save your current work Continued on next page 20 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 2 3 620 Stand Alone Loader F2 Continued 620 Selection Menu Stand Alone Mode continued Press ENTER from the 620 Selection Menu Stand Alone Mode to access a continuation of the 620 Selection Menu display see Figure 2 12 below This menu allows you to configure the designated 620 CPM processor and any associated I O slots in its rack Refer to Table 2 10 next page for descriptions of each available selection from this menu Note that you cannot execute programs or perform execution based functions while in the Stand Alone mode 620 Stand Alone menu software selections F5 F6 F7 and F8 shown in Figure 2 12 apply only to 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 and 36 processor modules other 620 CPMs that is 620 06 10 15 25 and 35 processors are configurable only through hardware DIP switch selections as described in their respective user manuals note that the F5 through F8 selections presented in Figure 2 12 are not available for 620 06 10 15 25 and 35 processor modules Figure 2 9 620 Selection Menu Stand Alone Mode F5 F8 Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 21 2 3 620 Stand Alone Loader F2 Continued
228. ate on two contiguous registers see Figure 4 3 Figure 4 3 32 Bit Floating Point Operand Specify the most significant register address N and system automatically allocates next lower register address N 1 bit 15 in register N provides sign bits 14 through 7 provide exponent and bits 6 through 0 provide upper seven bits of 23 bit floating point value register N 1 provides lower 16 bits of 23 bit floating point value Advantages of floating point notation include eliminates rounding errors inherent to integer math reduces amount of ladder logic needed to structure math operations increases range of data values available to 1 175494 x 10 38 to 3 40282 x 1038 increases precision in chains of math calculations Typical applications include manipulation of process data such as performing PID algorithms and other math intensive process industry applications Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 139 4 2 Data Representation Continued Valid data manipulation instructions Values being added subtracted multiplied or divided in 620 LCs can be obtained using any combination of the following instructions floating point bring in or Pull of 2 The result can then be output using the following instructions floating point send out or Push of 2 Floating point math data value ranges When performing math operations on floating point data th
229. ate parameter name and press ENTER Editing parameter names Perform the Table 4 6 procedure to edit a parameter name in a designated Function Block This procedure may be performed only in the Program mode Table 4 6 Editing Parameter Names Step Action 1 Position cursor on parameter name to be edited see Figure 4 1 previous page and press E Existing parameter name is highlighted to indicate that entry of a new parameter name is allowed 2 Type in new parameter name and press ENTER New parameter name is saved to current data base New parameter name is only saved permanently at end of WinLoader session 40 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 4 3 Editing Function Blocks Editing Function Block header Perform the Table 4 7 procedure to edit the header of a designated Function Block This procedure may be performed in Program mode only Table 4 7 Editing Function Block Header Step Action 1 Display desired external Function Block Display line 2 Press F17 or Shift F7 to access Block Edit Menu shown in Figure 4 2 below 3 Select F5 Function Block Define from Block Edit Menu 4 At Change Function Block Header Y N prompt press Y to indicate that you wish to change Function Block header If N is selected WinLoader assumes Function Block is to be defined with existing logic and proceeds accordingly 5 Function Block Selection Menu appears
230. atic Manual and Ratio modes of control In Automatic Mode the Set Point is manually set In Manual Mode the Set Point tracks the Process Variable In Ratio Mode the Set Point becomes the value of the Wild variable multiplied by the value of the Ratio and the loop then operates in Automatic mode This is Function Block FB26081 LDR file on the disk Refer to Table 7 4 next page for Ratio Control Single Loop PID Function Block specifications and to Figure 7 5 for an external view of this Function Block Ratio Control Single Loop PID Function Block is for operation only on the following 620 LC processors 620 11 620 12 620 14 620 1631 620 1633 620 36 Version 2 0 or higher Detailed descriptions of each line of Function Block s code may be obtained by loading Function Block and using WinLoader s address comment functions Total description of this Function Block may be seen in line comments at line comment markers 26081 26181 and 26281 Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 75 7 2 Function Block Library Control Programs Continued Ratio Control Single Loop PID Function Block continued Table 7 4 Ratio Control Single Loop PID Function Block Specifications Specification Description Applicable Processors and V R Required 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 620 36 Version 2 0 or higher Function Block Description at Line Markers us
231. ation 18 iv 620 WinLoader Installation 4 05 Figures and Tables Figure 1 Rear View of 620 6150A Loader Terminal 4 Figure 2 Cable Construction 5 Figure 3 629 6019 Converter Cable Pin Assignments 6 Figure 4 Communications Cable Connections 8 Figure 5 Loader Terminal Cable Connections 10 Figure 6 Power Splitter Cable Connections 12 Figure 7 Cabling to RS232 Serial Printer Using 25 Pin Female Connector 13 Figure 8 Cabling to RS232 Serial Printer Using Parallel Serial Adapter 9 Pin Female Connector 13 Figure 9 Recommended WinLoader Installation in a 620 Redundant Control System14 Figure 10 Recommended WinLoader Installation in a 620 Redundant Control System15 Table 1 Installing 629 6019 External Converter Box 7 4 05 620 WinLoader Installation v Acronyms 620 LC
232. ation test for bit 5 integer divide by zero bit refer to Section 4 for more information Table 3 45 is continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 45 3 8 Math Instructions Continued Division continued Table 3 45 Division Specifications Continued SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a division instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F9 to select Operators Logic Group 2 Press F7 to select Math Operators Logic Group 3 Press F2 to select division instruction 4 Enter optional address Continued on next page 46 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 8 Math Instructions Continued Basic division operation Figure 3 39 illustrates a simple line of logic which contains a basic division operation first instruction constant of 0 is placed on stack as upper 16 bits of 32 bit dividend first bring in from address 5000 places value 27 on stack division instruction tells processor to divide combined 32 bit result from last two words placed on stack by next value placed on stack second bring in from address 5100 places value 3 on stack values are immediately divided and quotient and remainder are placed on stack in form of two 16 bit values 27 3 9 with no remainder Push 2 instruction writes last two values placed on stack to addresses 5200 and 5199
233. aximum Timers Counters 620 12 4096 to 4351 0 to 255 on off delay timers max of 128 counters or any timers 620 1633 4096 to 8191 0 to 1023 on off delay timers max of 2048 counters and retentive timers or 1024 on off delay timers 620 36 4096 to 8191 0 to 255 on off delay timers max of 2048 counters or any timers Continued on next page 64 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 4 Timer and Counter Instructions Continued Additional information Note the following when using timer and counter instructions all timers and counters are internal to the CPM and use the Register Function s data table to store preset and accumulated values on off delay timers also use the I O Status Table all timers increment from zero to the preset value which can range from 0 to 65535 counters increment or decrement through 65536 counts in the unsigned mode these counts range from 0 to 65535 from zero to the preset value which can range from 0 to 65535 in the signed mode the range is 32768 to 32767 preset and accumulator registers can be accessed read from or written to by data manipulation instructions see subsection 3 6 counter and timer outputs can be forced since all timers and counters require two data registers it is good practice to use an odd address for the accumulated value this practice provides for the maximum number of timers and counters the preset r
234. basic multiplication operation first bring in from address 5000 places value 250 on stack multiplication instruction tells processor to multiply next value placed on stack with last value placed there second bring in from address 5100 places value 5 on stack values are immediately multiplied and product is placed on stack in form of two 16 bit values 250 x 5 1250 Push 2 instruction writes last two values placed on stack to address 5200 and 5199 address 5200 holds upper 16 bits of 32 bit result 0 address 5199 holds lower 16 bits of 32 bit result 1250 Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 41 3 8 Math Instructions Continued Basic multiplication operation continued Figure 3 37 Basic Multiplication Operation Continued on next page 42 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 8 Math Instructions Continued Scaling unsigned integers for multiplication Although in general 620 12 1633 36 LCs do not provide a 16 bit unsigned integer multiplication operation 16 bit unsigned integer values in the range of 0 to 32767 may be used as for signed integer multiplication Therefore unsigned integer values greater than 32767 can be scaled by dividing the desired operand by a known factor typically 2 and using this result in further calculations refer to Figure 3 38 which illustrates this technique Figure 3 38 Scaling Unsigned Integers for Multip
235. ber of Output Parameters None Number of Memory Words Required 635 Amount of Additional Scan Time per Function Block 7 milliseconds Number of Internal Coil Addresses Required per Function Block on Block Loads 15 Number of Data Registers Required on Block Loads 106 Lines to be Changed by User 8 9 and 15 Specific Parameters to be Changed Before Use Addresses 878 95 and 144 Default Function Block Stacking Register Block Starting Address 4351 Default Function Block Stacking Line Terminator Address 4094 Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 79 7 2 Function Block Library Control Programs Continued Split Range Time Proportioning Single Loop PID Function Block continued Figure 7 6 Split Range Time Proportioning Single Loop PID Function Block External View Section 8 Advanced Function Block Applications 80 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 8 1 Overview Section contents These are the topics covered in this section Topic See Page 8 1 Overview 80 8 2 Nesting Function Blocks 81 8 3 Nesting Function Blocks as Subroutines 82 Purpose of this section This section presents general guidelines for nesting Funct
236. ble 2 2 620 Selection Menu Selections Key Title Description F1 Model Number Displays model number of connected 620 CPM Regardless of connected CPM you may toggle F1 to change model number as desired note that as model number changes F2 Memory Size F3 Register Size and F4 Real I O Size also change respectively F2 Memory Size Toggling F2 displays different amounts of memory available for selected 620 CPM select desired memory size F3 Register Size Toggling F3 displays different amounts of data registers available for selected 620 CPM select desired register size F4 Real I O Size Toggling F4 displays various sizes of real I O available for selected CPM select desired real I O size F5 Edit Processor Configuration Accesses Processor Configuration Menu to allow editing of processor configuration refer to subsequent subsection titled Processor Configuration F6 Edit I O Configuration Accesses I O Configuration Menu to allow configuration of processor rack I O slots refer to subsequent subsection titled I O Configuration F7 Verify Processor Configuration Prompts you to enter a pathname to verify processor configuration F8 Verify I O Configuration Prompts you to enter a pathname to verify I O configuration 620 Selection Menu software selections F5 F6 F7 and F8 apply only to 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 and 36 processor modules other 620 CPMs that is 620 06 10 15
237. c structures can be programmed on a preceding line with their output coil controlling a contact on the counter s input line additional complex logic structures can also be programmed on output line after counter and before line terminator To create up or down only counter simply do not enter any logic element on undesired input line this holds line in constant True state so leading edges transitions do not occur To create a counter with a negative preset press minus sign before entering preset value data should be set to signed mode for programs with counters using negative presets this also limits maximum positive integer to 32767 if data is set to unsigned mode this negative value will be interpreted as a positive integer between 32768 and 65535 CPM will not see this as a negative Counter can be thought of as similar to contact instruction if accumulator value equals preset value then logic element is True and logical current is passed if accumulator value does not equal preset value then logic element is False and logical current is not passed 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 75 3 4 Timer and Counter Instructions Continued Counter continued Refer to Table 3 19 for counter specifications Table 3 19 Counter Specifications Continued SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a counter instruction in a line of logic Step
238. c address in the program can be used to search for and go to each reference to a specific address and element instruction type in the program F4 OpCode Only Used to search for and go to each reference to a specific element instruction type in the program F5 Function Block Used to search for and go to any valid Function Block number in the program Function Blocks are a modular programming technique where multiple lines of ladder logic can be handled as a single program element Function Blocks are numbered for ease of reference F6 FB Line Marker Used to search for and go to any valid Function Block line marker in the program Function Block line markers are part of the WinLoader s ladder logic Documentation function Function Block line markers are used to attach comments to Function Blocks Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 13 1 4 Search Functions F13 Continued Entering an address label Perform the Table 1 5 procedure to enter an address label If label begins with an alphabetic character simply enter the label Backspace key may be used for editing labels and addresses space bar will clear out the address block at this point a menu selection may be made NSKR or NSKD instruction types cannot be searched for by means of a label Table 1 5 Entering an Address Label Step Action 1 If label begins with non alphabet
239. ces 16 bit result on stack Send out instruction reads 16 bit word from stack 43 and writes it to Data Register Table address 5111 Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 83 3 11 Data Conversion Instructions Continued Floating point to integer conversion characteristics continued In the last two lines of logic Floating point bring in instruction reads value 4 12 x 1006 from addresses 5005 and 5004 and places it on stack Floating point to integer instruction reads last two 16 bit words placed on stack converts last two 16 bit words from stack to their integer equivalent 4 12 x 1006 floating point equals 4120000 integer Since true result of conversion exceeds maximum negative signed integer limit an overflow condition occurs error status word 32768 is written to error address 4105 32768 bit 15 floating point overflow either coil or error status word or both can be used by control program to flag overflow condition coil energizes indicating overflow Send out instruction reads last 16 bit word from stack saturated value 32768 and writes it to Data Register Table address 5113 Continued on next page 84 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 11 Data Conversion Instructions Continued Floating point to integer conversion characteristics continued Figure 3 53 Floating Point to Integer Conversion Charac
240. ch executed will overwrite the previous results Conditional contacts must precede math operations contacts programmed after math operations will have no effect on a math operation Refer to Figure 4 10 for an example of a logic line that does not follow conditional data handling rules in this example the down branch preceding contacts 8 and 10 newly conditions the data handling statements on each contact s respective line although contact 7 or 9 may be false when contacts 0 and or 3 and contacts 8 and or 10 are true the data from bring in 5044 or 5037 will be loaded onto the system stack should branch 1 or 2 be true and contact 8 or 10 be energized the bring in from branch 3 or 4 would be sent out instead of the intended constant since none of the logic branches is exclusive that is none of the conditioning ladder logic is interlocked multiple branches could be true at one time under this condition the last true branch s data would be sent out Figure 4 10 Example Logic Line That Does Not Follow Conditional Data Handling Rules 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 146 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 147 Appendix A System Status Information for 620 06 10 11 14 15 1631 25 35 LCs A 1 Overview Appendix contents These are the topics covered in this appendix Topic See Page A 1 Overview
241. cifications Table 3 11 Bit Read Specifications SPECIFICATIO N DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 36 LCs Symbol Usage Examines the status of a single bit within a 16 bit data register in the Register Function the True or False state of this bit is then sent to the processor where it is used in a line of ladder logic in the same manner as any contact instruction Characteristics Operates with the same characteristics as any contact see Figure 3 5 except that it reads a single bit position within a 16 bit word in the Data Register Table it can only access Register addresses 4096 to 8191 upper range dependent on CPM model it does not read from the I O Status Table When programming this instruction you must specify the data register address and bit position of the word to be accessed bit position is specified as 0 through 15 with 0 being the least significant bit and 15 the most significant bit Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a bit read instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F1 to select the Contact Logic Group 2 Enter desired address 3 Press F5 to select bit read 4 Enter desired bit position 5 Press RETURN or ENTER Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 57 3 3 Single Bit Instructions Continued Bit read characteristics As shown in Figure 3 5 bit read is an
242. completed more quickly than it would be listing to a printer depending on the speed of the disk drive You can then use any text editor to open and view the prn file Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 51 3 2 Printer Function Menu F1 Continued Serial Port Configuration Menu If either the COM1 or COM 2 destination is selected from the F1 Port function of the Printer Parameters Menu the Serial Port Configuration Menu shown in Figure 3 6 below displays on the screen when the Printer Parameters Menu is completed by pressing ENTER Refer to Table 3 6 for descriptions of each available selection from this menu To change any of the parameters displayed in the Serial Port Configuration Menu Press appropriate function key until desired parameter displays select desired baud rate number of data bits number of stop bits and parity to be used by serial communications port Press ENTER to install parameters selected Table 3 6 Serial Port Configuration Menu Selections Key Selection Function F1 Communications Port Indicates current Serial Communications port COM1 or COM2 F2 Baud Rate Toggles baud rate from 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 and 9600 F3 Data Bits Determines number of data bits associated with message character as either 7 or 8 F4 Stop Bits Determines number of stop bits that delimit a message character as either 1 or 2 F5 Parity Determ
243. convert a binary number greater than 9999 to its equivalent attempt is made to convert an invalid representation to an equivalent binary string 12 IO Invalid operator this bit is asserted set to 1 when either of the following occur square root of negative number is attempted division by zero is attempted 13 F O Floating point divide by zero this bit is asserted set to 1 when attempt is made to divide floating point number by zero 14 FU Floating point underflow this bit is asserted set to 1 when a floating point operation result is less than 1 175494 x 10 38 15 FO Floating point overflow this bit is asserted set to 1 when a floating point operation result is greater than 3 40282 x 1038 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 143 4 4 Conditional Data Handling Conditional contact When a logic line ends in an output coil a conditional contact can be used to control an arithmetic or comparison operation see Figure 4 6 In the Figure 4 6 example of a conditional contact if contact 50 is ON the comparison is executed if contact 50 is OFF the comparison is not executed and the coil is OFF Figure 4 6 Conditional Contact Example Using skip instruction to control execution You can use a skip instruction to control execution when a ladder logic line ends in a Send out or Push instruction see Figure 4 7 In the Figure 4 7 example if contact 60 is ON t
244. cribed in this and subsequent subsections To understand the purpose of the Function Block Input Parameter FBI line you must first note that to pass information between the program environment the user main program in which the Function Block is embedded and the Function Block up to 45 input parameters may be used for Function Block inputs Input parameters are opcodes selected by the programmer that represent specific input addresses or constants in the control logic refer to Section 3 Function Block Programming for more information on entering input parameters For Function Block TSpindl1 the FBI line has the format shown in Figure 2 6 Figure 2 6 Function Block Input Parameter FBI Line for TSpindl1 In the Figure 2 6 FBI line a Bring In with address 200 and a data value of 12 has been entered as one input parameter and the two NOP opcodes represent the Start and Stop Contacts the Bring In parameter and the Contacts were entered into the external Function Block Display line according to the procedures presented in Section 3 Function Block Programming A parameter output address of 4095 has also been specified this address was entered using the Function Block Selections Menu as described in Section 3 Function Block Programming the default setting is the highest control I O address available for the specific CPU Note that once the interior of the Function Block is accessed the FBI line is shown for display pur
245. cteristics 103 Figure 3 63 Unload Sequencer Characteristics 106 Figure 3 64 Matrix with Reference Address of 5000 Comprising 4 Registers 115 Figure 3 65 OR Function Matrix Example 116 Figure 3 66 Delay Characteristics 128 Figure 3 67 No Operation Characteristics 130 Figure 3 68 Input Status Scan Characteristics 132 Figure 4 1 Common Methods of Representing Integer Data 135 Figure 4 2 32 Bit Floating Point Structure 137 Figure 4 3 32 Bit Floating Point Operand 138 Figure 4 4 Number Line for Floating Point Data Value Range 139 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 3 Figure 4 5 Error Status Word Format Floating Point Bits 142 Figure 4 6 Conditional Contact Example 143 Figure 4 7 Example o
246. ction Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Installation 5 2 3 629 6019 External Converter Box Continued Interface port for 629 6019 External Converter Box continued Figure 3 629 6019 Converter Cable Pin Assignments Continued on next page 6 620 WinLoader Installation 4 05 2 3 629 6019 External Converter Box Continued Installing 629 6019 External Converter Box Perform the Table 1 procedure to install the 629 6019 External Converter Box If you are installing the External Converter Box on a personal computer consult the PC s users manual for any specific instructions regarding connections to its serial ports If you are connecting the external converter box to a 620 6150A Loader Terminal refer to the 620 6150A Loader Terminal User Manual for additional information Note that the installation procedure presented in Table 1 includes steps which are generic in nature and can be applied to any personal computer to which you are installing the External Converter Box Table 1 Installing 629 6019 External Converter Box Step Action 1 Turn off the personal computer or 620 6150A Loader Terminal remember to close any and all running applications programs and disconnect power cords from power source 2 Install the 12 inch communications cable shown in Figure 4 as described below Step Action 2A Attach one end of communications cable to external converter box port l
247. ction Block Line by Line Description using Address Comments Each address Number of Lines Used 80 Number of Input Parameters 17 Number of Output Parameters None Number of Memory Words Required 552 Amount of Additional Scan Time per Function Block 6 7 milliseconds Number of Internal Coil Addresses Required per Function Block on Block Loads 6 from 2051 2056 Number of Data Registers Required on Block Loads 72 from 4101 4172 Lines to be Changed by User None Specific Parameters to be Changed Before Use see Address Comments Default Function Block Stacking Register Block Starting Address 4325 Default Function Block Stacking Line Terminator Address 4094 PID Algorithm Used CC Km Kp e Ki e x dt KD x de dt CC Control Command Km Value of Mid Range constant output bias Kp Proportional Gain Ki Integral Gain KD Derivative Gain e Error de dt Rate of Change of Error Continued on next page 70 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 7 2 Function Block Library Control Programs Continued Single Loop PID Function Block Figure 7 3 Single Loop PID Function Block External View Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 71 7 2 Function Block Library Control Programs Continued Cascade Control Two Loop PID Function Block This is a dual loop PID control program that offers Automatic Manual and Cascade modes of co
248. ction Block Selection Menu Selections Continued Key Selection Description F4 Function Block Save Protection Allows selecting appropriate save protection NONE USER OEM for when Function Block is saved to disk Toggle F4 to obtain desired save protection default setting is NONE corresponding save protection displays on right hand side of F4 block on menu After Function Block overhead is formally entered in step 5 of Table 3 1 or 3 3 procedure numerical code that represents save protection level is included as part of internal FBD line unseen inside Function Block Refer to 623 WinLoader Implementation LDR003 for a description of security coding which is accessed through WinLoader Main Menu F5 Register Block Start Address Allows identifying where parameter data is to be stored available address range is from 4096 to 8191 processor dependent Select F5 enter appropriate start address to define range for locations of input and output parameter data and press ENTER Pressing Spacebar clears F5 block Selected address displays on right hand side of menu s F5 block After Function Block overhead is formally entered in step 5 of Table 3 1 or 3 3 procedure start address is used for first input parameter PUSH line inside Function Block Since internal variables used with each Function Block share available common address space with entire program it is your respon
249. ction is preceded by single 16 bit instruction Product can be output to I O Status or Data Register Table using following instructions Push of 2 indirect send out send out When dividing signed integer data values the dividend value can range from 1 073 721 824 to 32768 while divisor can range from 32767 to 32768 result is handled as two 16 bit data values from 32767 to 32768 representing a 16 bit quotient and a 16 bit remainder Overflow conditions can occur when either quotient or remainder exceeds data value range this happens when 32 bit value greater than 32767 is divided by value that produces quotient greater then 32767 for example dividend of 80000 divided by 2 results in quotient of 40000 causing overflow program output coil directly after division instead of data manipulation to detect for overflow values if overflow occurs coil energizes otherwise it remains unenergized error status word can also be assigned to division operation test for bit 1 signed overflow bit refer to Section 4 for more information Dividing by 0 is invalid there are two methods for handling or testing for this situation program output coil directly after division operation instead of a data manipulation instruction to test for a divide by zero condition if divide by zero is attempted coil energizes otherwise it remains unenergized error status word can also be assigned to division oper
250. cumentatio n Functions Permits you to document ladder logic control programs without entering 620 Loader Monitor or 620 Stand Alone modes can add descriptive text to control programs 22 F4 Password amp Security Functions Permits you to assign security code to various system functions when attempt to access functions is made system prompts for security code before gaining access password protects security code function from unauthorized entry 25 F5 I O Configuration Utility Lists any previously installed I O communications programs which are used to program and configure certain special function I O modules 29 F6 620 60 Software Configuration Allows you to preset numerous operational characteristics of WinLoader software user configurable characteristics include default paths floating point data handling file names WinLoader hardware personal computer options operation 30 F7 Terminal Emulator Not Supported in Winloader 5 4 46 F8 Utility Functions Not Supported in Winloader 5 4 47 F10 Exit Allows you to quit WinLoader and return 48 4 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 2 2 620 Loader Monitor F1 620 Loader Monitor mode Entering the 620 Loader Monitor mode by selecting F1 620 Loader Monitor from the WinLoader Main Menu permits you to establish communications with a 620 Logic Controller system From this selection you can program edit docu
251. d Edit control output address or step number register address To change the current control output address or step number register address of an existing sequencer follow the steps presented in Table 3 71 Table 3 71 Edit the Control Output Address or Step Number Register Address Step Action 1 PAGE UP or Move to the Line of logic which contains the PAGE DOWN sequencer to be edited 2 J or K Place the cursor to the left of the address to be changed 3 ALT F7 Press Alternate F7 to call up the data change window 4 New Address Enter the new Control Output or Step Number Register Address 5 ENTER Press Enter to accept the new address 6 ENTER Press Enter to write the displayed line of logic to the end of the control program INS ENTER Press Insert Enter to overwrite the existing line of logic INS Press Insert Page Down to overwrite the PAGE DOWN displayed line of logic ahead of the current line Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 109 3 12 Sequencer Instructions Continued Edit an existing step in Program mode To edit an existing step of the data table while the processor is in the Program mode follow the steps presented in Table 3 72 Table 3 72 Edit an Existing Step in Program Mode Step Action 1 PAGE UP or Move to the Line of logic which contains the PAGE DOWN sequencer to be edited 2 M Press the down arrow k
252. d Enables you to specify any of the following upon entry to Stand Alone mode for Stand Alone mode only AUTO LOAD to load ladder logic files automatically NO LOAD so that no logic is loaded upon entry to Stand Alone mode PROMPT to prompt user for verification before any ladder logic files are loaded F8 Documentation Load Enables you to specify the following with regard to documentation files label description address comment line comment upon entry to Stand Alone mode for Stand Alone mode only AUTO LOAD to load documentation file automatically NO LOAD so that no documentation file is loaded upon entry to Stand Alone mode PROMPT to prompt user for verification before any documentation files are loaded Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 41 2 7 620 60 Software Configuration F6 Continued Stand Alone Parameters Menu Press F4 Stand Alone Parameters from the 620 60 Software Configuration Menu to access the Stand Alone Parameters Menu shown in Figure 2 19 below This menu enables you to set configuration options for stand alone Loader operation Refer to Table 2 19 below for descriptions of each available selection from this menu Table 2 15 Stand Alone Parameters Menu Selections Key Title Description F1 Model Number Enables toggling through list of 620 LC model numbers to select one for Stand Alone mode to emulate
253. d before program executes a retentive scan is executed during which each word in memory is read to find any retentive instructions such as retentive coil if retentive coil is found history bits from 24 bit word are read bits 21 and 20 in opcode previous condition of coil is determined and immediately written to Output Status Table if coil s address resides in real world device it controls returns to state it held prior to power fail that is ON or OFF see Figure 3 3 It is important to note that retentive scan executes prior to execution of user program therefore even if field input is made false during power fail or anytime prior to execution after restart field device returns to previous ON OFF condition before controlling logic executes For example a motor controlled by retentive coil which was running at power fail could restart or jog prior to the logic which directs it to turn off therefore care must be used when determining which field devices are controlled by retentive coils Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a retentive coil in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F2 to select the Coil Logic Group 2 Enter desired address 3 Press F1 to select retentive coil 50 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 2 Contact and Coil Instructions Continued Nonretentive and retentive coil characteristics As shown in Figure 3 3 nonretentive and retentive c
254. d is XORed with corresponding bit position in other for example bit position zero is always XORed with bit position zero bit position seven is always XORed with bit position seven and so on Data manipulation instructions are used to place the two words onto stack XOR instruction tells processor to XOR last word placed on stack with next word placed there then to write results of operation back to stack resulting word can then be read from stack by another data manipulation instruction and used as any other 16 bit data Operates on 16 bit integer data only Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program an exclusive OR instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F9 to select Operators Logic Group 2 Press F8 to select Logical Operators Logic Group 3 Press F3 to select XOR instruction Continued on next page 54 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 9 Logical Operator Instructions Continued Exclusive OR characteristics Figure 3 42 illustrates characteristics associated with the exclusive OR instruction Figure 3 42 Exclusive OR Characteristics 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 55 3 10 Memory Reference Instructions Memory reference instruction types Table 3 50 presents the seven types of memory reference instructions presented in this section Table 3 50 Data Conversion Instructions Memory Re
255. d line number is lower than start line number start and end line numbers are automatically adjusted to keep same lines of logic within defined block Destination line number may be any line number except one of the lines contained in defined ladder logic block You may also insert block at beginning or end of memory by pressing HOME or END keys respectively to define destination line number In addition to using END key to copy block to end of program you are also permitted to enter number corresponding to last line number plus one for appending block to end of program Continued on next page 36 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 1 8 Block Operations Functions F17 Continued Deleting ladder logic blocks Perform the Table 1 18 procedure to delete a ladder logic block from your program Table 1 18 Procedure for Deleting Ladder Logic Block Step Action 1 Press F4 DELETE from Block Operations Functions Menu prompt appears asking you to define ladder logic block s start and end line numbers 2 Define ladder logic block as desired refer to Table 1 14 3 Press Y in response to Delete Block prompt to complete delete operation Pressing N at prompt aborts procedure Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 37 1 8 Block Operations Functions F17 Continued Loading ladder logic blocks Perform the Table 1 19 procedure to load an ex
256. d the total number of steps will increase by one for each new step inserted When using F1 Goto the ENTER key must be pressed after entering the step number 5 F7 Press F7 Del Stp in the Full Edit Menu to delete the step selected in step 4 6 Repeat Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all desired existing steps have been deleted 7 ESC ESC Press Escape to exit both Edit Menus 8 ENTER Press Enter to write the displayed line of logic to the end of the control program INS ENTER Press Insert Enter to overwrite the existing line of logic INS Press Insert Page Down to overwrite the PAGE DOWN displayed line of logic ahead of the current line 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 115 3 13 Matrix Instructions Matrix instruction types Table 3 78 presents the eight types of matrix instructions presented in this section Table 3 78 Matrix Instructions Matrix Instructions Refer to page Set Zero Matrix 117 Set One Matrix 118 Move Matrix 119 Invert Matrix 120 OR Matrix 121 Exclusive OR Matrix 122 AND Matrix 123 Compare 124 Matrix instructions Matrix instructions allow 620 LCs to manipulate large blocks of data contained in the I O Status Table or register tables Matrix instructions perform operations on groups of data within the I O Status Table or Register Table in multiples of 16 bits A maximum of eight groups may be specified in each matrix instruction
257. d then press ENTER FB26062 FB26071 FB26081 FB26091 9 Follow prompts as directed to complete load operation if you want to load documentation press Y at the Load Function Block Documentation prompt otherwise press N if you want to overwrite documentation that is already loaded press Y at the Overwrite Existing Documentation prompt otherwise press N enter appropriate pathname at pathname prompt and press ENTER enter appropriate file name at file name prompt and press ENTER 10 When load is completed press ENTER to return to main screen display If appropriate remove 623 6050 disk when completed all desired loading if you wish to load a different Honeywell defined Function Block repeat procedure starting at step 3 68 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 7 2 Function Block Library Control Programs Single Loop PID Function Block This is a single loop PID control program that offers Automatic and Manual modes of control As furnished the set point tracks the process variable when the loop is in Manual mode in order to prevent a bump to the valve when the loop is switched back to Automatic mode from Manual There is logic within this PID Function Block that may be changed to prevent the set point from tracking the process variable in Manual mode This PID Function Block offers the following options direct versus reverse
258. d with each address and or ladder logic line and printouts may be made containing any combination of these forms of documentation When using Function Block programming a 7 character name may be assigned to each Function Block parameter location and a 3 line by 9 character label description may be assigned to each Function Block using the Function Block Parameter Name Editor as described in subsection 2 2 of this manual a textual description of each Function Block may also be provided through the use of line comments Function Blocks may be printed out in either an expanded or compressed external FBD box only format refer to 623 WinLoader Function Blocks LDR006 for description of external FBD box and other Function Block terminology 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 3 1 2 Documentation Types Address Labels Description Detail Labels and descriptions may be attached to an address when you display ladder logic in either the 620 Loader Monitor or 620 Stand Alone Loader mode Labels and descriptions may be created using the Label Editor which may be accessed from the Documentation Functions Menu as described in subsection 2 3 of this manual or while editing or monitoring ladder logic as described below Perform the Table 1 1 procedure to create an address label and descriptions Table 1 1 Creating Address Labels Descriptions Step Action 1 With WinLoader in 620 Loader Monitor or 620 Stand Alone L
259. date display Figure 2 7 620 Hardware Status Display Continued on next page 64 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 2 5 620 Diagnostics Menu F4 Continued 620 Self Test display screen The F2 620 Self Test status display screen is presented in Figure 2 8 below This screen indicates the status and or self test results of 620 Mother Board Control Processor Module Memory Module 620 20 25 35 LCs only Register Module 620 20 25 35 LCs only System Control Module 620 20 25 35 LCs only I O Control Module 620 20 25 35 LCs only and any associated option modules Figure 2 8 620 Self Test Status Display Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 65 2 5 620 Diagnostics Menu F4 Continued I O Module Status display screen The F3 I O Module Status display screen is presented in Figure 2 9 below If an I O module fails the most significant address of that module is displayed on this screen If the address displayed has any documentation labels and descriptions assigned this information is also displayed Figure 2 9 I O Module Status Display 66 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 2 6 Program Mode Change Functions F5 Mode Change Functions Menu Press F5 Program Mode Change Functions from the Auxiliary Function Menu to access the Mode Change Functions Menu shown in Figure 2 10 below This menu allows
260. der File Filename FBR Function Block Register File Filename IOC Input Output Configuration 620 11 12 14 16 36 LCs only Filename JSR Subroutine documentation JSR SUB RTS Filename LBL Logic Element Address Labels Filename LCE Ladder Logic Line Comments Filename LDR Ladder Logic File Filename PIN Printer Initialization File Filename PRC Processor Configuration 620 11 12 14 16 36 LCs only Filename PRN Printer File stored to disk Filename REG Register Value File Filename RVR Register Compare File Filename SKP Skip Documentation NSKR NSKD EOS Filename VER Logic and or Data Verification Miscompare File Filename VUE Data Display Files Continued on next page 22 620 WinLoader Overview 4 05 3 2 Software Characteristics Continued WinLoader menu selections Refer to Appendix A for an overview of WinLoader menu selections Refer to Appendix B for an overview of ladder logic programming mode menu selections 4 05 620 WinLoader Overview 23 Appendix A Overview of 620 WinLoader Menu Selections 24 620 WinLoader Overview 4 05 4 05 620 WinLoader Overview 25 26 620 WinLoader Overview 4 05 4 05 620 WinLoader Overview 27 28 620 WinLoader Overview 4 05 4 05 620 WinLoader Overview 29 30 620 WinLoader Overview 4 05 Appendix B Overview of Ladder Logic Programming Mode Menu Selections 4 05 620 WinLoader Overview 31 32 620 W
261. der Programming Reference i 620 WinLoader 620 WinLoader Programming Reference LDR004 4 05 ii 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 Copyright Notices and Trademarks Printed in U S A Copyright 2005 by Honeywell Inc Revision 01 April 01 2005 While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in its written agreement with and for its customer In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect special or consequential damages The information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice This document was prepared using Information Mapping methodologies and formatting principles Information Mapping is a trademark of Information Mapping Inc Honeywell Industrial Automation and Control Automation College 1100 Virginia Drive Fort Washington PA 19034 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference iii About This Publication This manual presents a general overview of ladder logic entry and editing procedures which are required for programming 620 LC instructions a general overview of the different categories of ladder logic instructions that are available for 620 LCs descriptions of each instruction in the 620 LC instruction set to include methods for
262. der always collects 16 bits If the specified address is in the I O Status Table the Loader collects the On Off condition of 16 contiguous single bit registers using the given address as the most significant bit MSB If the specified address is in the Data Register Table a 16 bit word binary data value is collected from the given address In both cases the multi element function displays the On Off condition for the MSB Figure 1 8 next page illustrates the format for each type of register address when On Off condition format is selected Use up and down arrow keys to select which of the 16 bits is to be displayed for On Off status a bit number ranging from 15 0 appears to left of On Off status bit 15 indicates that status displayed is status of address entered it is also the most significant bit of the 16 bits to be monitored as arrow keys are pressed address increments or decrements appropriately and its status on off displays If address entered falls in register range 4096 8191 you must choose again from two display formats F2 or F3 F2 Integer Data displays register data in decimal the sign of the number is indicated by the foreground background color combination of the display number a negative number appears in reverse video with black characters on a brown or highlighted background a positive number displays in normal video or brown characters on a black background you may monitor the status of individual bits
263. description of the WinLoader Main Menu individual descriptions of WinLoader Main Menu selections descriptions of each available function and sub menu accessible from the WinLoader Main Menu Continued on next page 2 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 2 1 Overview Continued WinLoader main menu The WinLoader Main Menu is the primary entry vehicle into the WinLoader software it can be thought of as the root menu through which all software controlled 620 LC and WinLoader functions are accessed The Main Menu displays eight selections which when selected display submenus through which the various individual functions can be accessed except the functions F7 and F8 Figure 2 1 illustrates the Main Menu display and Table 2 1 presents functional descriptions of each individual Main Menu selection Figure 2 1 620 WinLoader Main Menu Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 3 2 1 Overview Continued WinLoader main menu continued Table 2 1 WinLoader Main Menu Selections Key Title Description Refer to page F1 620 Loader Monitor Permits communicating with 620 LC can program edit document execute and monitor ladder logic control programs residing in CPM 4 F2 620 Stand Alone Loader Allows you to program edit and document ladder logic control programs without being connected to 620 LC cannot execute program or perform execution based functions 18 F3 Do
264. displays stating Overwrite Y N Select Y and press ENTER to overwrite the existing file press any key other than Y to abort the save operation default is N As a program is being saved to disk from the 620 LC the message Please Wait displays while the line numbers being saved are displayed incrementally on the right hand side of the main screen display Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 55 2 3 Upload Download Functions F2 Continued Load from Disk to 620 F2 Press F2 to access the Load from Disk to 620 function This function is used to transfer a previously saved ladder logic program from the PC to the CPM s Memory Function When initiated this function uses the current path to retrieve the specified ladder logic program file If the file cannot be located in the current path a message displays stating Error Unable to Open File If the file is found the CPM clears any existing ladder logic from its Memory Function before the new program is written there As a program is loaded from disk to the 620 LC s CPM line numbers display incrementally on the right hand side of the main screen display After the entire program is loaded the following three pieces of information are displayed Last line number loaded indicates length of the program File Statistics CPM model number and specifications in which program was created number of fo
265. dress is in the Data Register Table a 16 bit word binary data value is collected from the given address In both cases these 16 bits are then displayed as their decimal equivalent value Figure 1 9 below illustrates the format for each type of register address when the Integer Data format has been selected Figure 1 9 Integer Data Value Display Format Continued on next page 28 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 1 6 Multi element Display Function F15 Continued Floating point data value display format When you select Floating Point Data as the display format in the Multi element Display the WinLoader collects 32 bits Floating point data is always stored in two contiguous addresses in the Data Register Table Two fields of the multi element function are required when displaying floating point data A maximum of four floating point data values can be displayed at any one time Figure 1 10 below illustrates the format for each type of register address when the Floating Point Data format has been selected Figure 1 10 Floating Point Data Value Display Format Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 29 1 6 Multi element Display Function F15 Continued Displaying individual bits You may access any of the 16 bits that are collected when either the I O Status Table or Data Register Table addresses are selected and displayed using the On Off Condition option The Multi
266. e addresses of miscompares in matrix C Figure 3 65 OR Function Matrix Example Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 117 3 13 Matrix Instructions Continued Set zero matrix Refer to Table 3 79 for set zero matrix specifications Table 3 79 Set Zero Matrix Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Sets all bits in matrix C to zero deenergized Characteristics To use this instruction topmost conditional contact must be energized Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a set zero matrix instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F10 to select Matrix Logic Group 2 Enter desired matrix address 3 Press F3 to select Set Matrix instruction 4 Program the necessary matrix information as prompted reference address start address size etc 5 Press RETURN or ENTER after each entry Continued on next page 118 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 13 Matrix Instructions Continued Set one matrix Refer to Table 3 80 for set one matrix specifications Table 3 80 Set One Matrix Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Sets all bits in matrix C to 1 energized Characteristics To use this instruction middle conditional contact must be
267. e config error if corresponding bit is set 2531 of registers to transfer for node 15 2554 Nodes 15 MSB thru 8 LSB have config error if corresponding bit is set 2532 of registers to transfer for node 16 2555 Nodes 7 MSB thru 0 LSB have config error if corresponding bit is set 2533 of registers to transfer for node 17 2556 Listen only fatal error flag 80 fatal listen only 00 nonfatal operational 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 39 Section 3 620 WinLoader Instruction Set 3 1 Overview Section contents These are the topics covered in this section Topic See Page 3 1 Overview 39 3 2 Contact and Coil Instructions 40 3 3 Single Bit Instructions 54 3 4 Timer and Counter Instructions 62 3 5 Skip Instructions 77 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions 85 Purpose of this section This section describes each instruction in the 620 LC instruction set and also presents methods in terms of programming keystrokes for entering each
268. e for Function Block TSpndl1 Function Block number of 254 is shown in top of Function Block Display Box see Figure 2 1 NSKs 8192 to 8449 which permit absolute jumps to other portions of the program should be used with caution F2 Skip Type Allows selecting either an NSKR or NSKD skip instruction to define how CPU views any associated outputs when Function Block is not executed Toggle F2 to obtain desired skip type NSKR or NSKD default setting is NSKR Skip type displays on right hand side of F2 block on menu After Function Block overhead is formally entered same skip type is also included as part of internal FBD line unseen in interior of Function Block Table 4 8 is continued on next page 42 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 4 3 Editing Function Blocks Continued Editing Function Block header continued Table 4 8 Function Block Selection Menu Selections Continued Key Selection Description F3 Function Block Parameter Line Output Address Allows identifying output address from 0 to 4095 processor dependent that is to be used as line output dummy terminator Select F3 enter appropriate output address and press ENTER default setting is highest control I O address processor dependent Pressing Spacebar clears F3 block Parameter line output address displays on right hand side of menu s F3 block After Function Block ove
269. e 2 1 the Logic Group Selection Menu appears directly below the programming area It is the first of several lines of menus and information located at the bottom of the display There are ten menu selections each identified by function keys F1 through F10 Each logic group selection contains a number of similar elements instructions used to program your ladder logic control program Figure 2 1 Logic Group Selection Menu Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 15 2 1 Overview Continued Accessing logic groups from Logic Group Selection Menu The logic groups in the Logic Group Selection Menu are accessed using the function keys F1 through F10 When one of these groups is selected by pressing the corresponding function key the instructions in that group are displayed The new menu displays in the space directly below the Logic Group Selection Menu and the Logic Group Selection Menu then disappears while the logic group is open Some logic groups such as the Operators Group contain subgroups of instructions Figure 2 2 illustrates and highlights the Contact logic group after it has been accessed by pressing F1 from the Logic Group Selection Menu Figure 2 2 Contact Logic Group on Main Screen Display 16 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 2 2 Valid Ladder Logic Instructions WinLoader ladder logic groups Refer to Table 2 1 below for a listing of each WinLoader ladder logic
270. e 2 15 Update Display Integer Bit Format Continued on next page 78 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 2 9 Data Display Functions F8 Continued Update Display continued Table 2 11 Update Display Menu Selections Selection Function F1 MODE Toggles between Update and Edit Displays F2 CLRVAL Removes data value at present position of highlighted area F3 SEND Transmits data value entered at register presently highlighted to 620 LC s CPM In Update Display only register values and status of groups of 16 bit addresses are affected by SEND function status of individual bit addresses may only be monitored not changed it is not recommended to control an individual bit address by sending a data value to a group of 16 addresses containing desired address F4 COPY Duplicates register value in data value field at CPM address presently highlighted F7 ALL When selected begins blinking to indicate software may perform F2 CLRVAL F3 SEND or F4 COPY function on all entries in data display being viewed Once selected you must then access other format integer bit or floating point by paging up or down and perform desired operation again F9 LOAD Allows you to load previously defined Data Display Function from disk to CPM F10 SAVE Stores present Data Display Function to disk both integer bit and floating point formats uses pathname and file name specified each
271. e Figure 3 31 Requires no special considerations when applied to signed or unsigned integer values Uses no addressing and displays no data Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program an equal to instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F9 to select Operators Logic Group 2 Press F7 to select Math Operators Logic Group 3 Press F5 to select equal to instruction Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 21 3 7 Integer Comparison Instructions Continued Equal to characteristics Figure 3 31 illustrates characteristics associated with the equal to instruction in the first line the value read from address 5000 is compared to the specified constant value of 255 since 1710 does not equal 250 a logical current path does not exist through the equal to instruction the output coil is deenergized in the second line the value read from address 5000 is compared to the specified constant value of 1710 since it is equal a logical current path exists through the equal to instruction the output coil is energized Continued on next page 22 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 7 Integer Comparison Instructions Continued Equal to characteristics continued Figure 3 31 Equal To Characteristics Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 23 3 7 Integer Comparison
272. e Function Block Parameter Name Editor shown in Figure 2 2 below This editor operates exactly as any other label editor except that the Function Block name label description and parameter names are entries The files operated on will have the extension FBL Refer to Table 2 2 next two pages for descriptions of each available selection from this menu Edit the default file name through the configuration function on the Documentation Functions Menu F9 Default File before entering the Function Block Parameter Name Editor The FBL file describes the parameter names and detail description for the formal parameters of a Function Block and may be either an individual Function Block file or the merger of multiple Function Block parameter name files the FBL file contains the name s of the Function Block s the label description s associated with the Function Block and up to 90 parameter names for each Function Block in the file Figure 2 2 Function Block Parameter Name Editor Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 17 2 2 Function Block Parameter Name Editor F1 Continued Accessing Function Block Parameter Name Editor continued Table 2 2 Function Block Parameter Name Editor Functions Key Function Description F1 GOTO To GOTO any Function Block Parameter Name Editor based on its relative position to all Function Blocks in memory at any time Step Action 1
273. e into specified PC disk storage file F2 Load from Disk to 620 Loads contents of previously saved 620 LC register table from PC disk storage into 620 LC memory F3 Verify 620 to Disk Verifies contents of specified 620 LC register table by comparing data values to PC disk containing 620 register table file and indicates whether comparison is valid F4 Enter Pathname Enables you to temporarily change current pathname where register table data values are to be saved to or loaded from change remains in effect until changed again or WinLoader software is exited pathname always resets to current default path when WinLoader software is first executed Figure 2 13 Register Table Functions Menu Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 71 2 7 Register Table Functions F6 Continued Current path The Current Path field which is located at the bottom of the Register Table Functions Menu see Figure 2 13 displays the pathname where the specified 620 LC register table data values are to be saved to or loaded from This field normally indicates the default pathname that was set using the Paths and Files selection of the 623 60 Software Configuration Menu refer to subsection 2 7 of 623 60 WinLoader Implementation LDR003 If the current path is blank then no path was specified and the software uses its default pathname which is the same path used by the WinLoader software Th
274. e name and pathname when any documentation editor is selected if a default file name has not been specified any labels descriptions created while editing ladder logic are saved to the default file name specified in the configuration file a pathname defining where ladder logic files are to be stored may be specified in the Upload Download Functions Menu refer to subsection 2 3 of 623 WinLoader Edit Display Functions LDR005 for information 42 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 Section 3 Documentation Functions Menu from Auxiliary Menu 3 1 Overview Section contents These are the topics covered in this section Topic See Page 3 1 Overview 42 3 3 Printer Characters F2 57 3 4 Edit Default File F7 58 3 5 Edit Title Block from 620 F8 60 Purpose of this section This section describes each available function that is accessible from the Documentation Functions Menu when the Documentation Functions Menu is accessed from the WinLoader s Auxiliary Function Menu Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 43 3 1 Overview Continued Accessin
275. e period of time that constitutes one count in a timing operation The three timers available in the 620 LC instruction set each have the following three resolution options 1 second resolution whole second 0 1 second resolution 1 10 second 0 01 second resolution 1 100 second The resolution is specified when the logic element is programmed and becomes part of the specific instruction s opcode Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 63 3 4 Timer and Counter Instructions Continued Address range Each timer and counter requires two data registers which contain the logic element s preset and accumulator values Any consecutive pair of data registers can be specified On and off delay timers also require a real or internal I O address The maximum number of timers and counters is limited only by CPM model as indicated in Table 3 15 In 620 35 LCs Logic Managers 01 second timers must be programmed in register addresses 4097 4111 The 0 01 second timer is updated by the controller on a 0 01 second interrupt basis For this reason the maximum error in any 0 01 second timer is one program scan This can be reduced by programming multiple 0 01 second timers with the same output address preset register and accumulator register in 620 35 processors only Table 3 15 620 LC Address Ranges and Maximum Timers Counters CPM Data Register Address Range I O Register Address Range M
276. e status of 620 LC I O Module and associated network Subsection 2 5 F5 Program Mode Change Functions Allow you to change 620 mode of operation from Run to Program or Program to Run Subsection 2 6 F6 Register Table Functions Permit you to read or write contents of 620 Register Table and or I O Status Table Subsection 2 7 F7 Flag Mode Address Allows you to specify most significant of 16 addresses to be used to trigger flag mode operation of Communications Interface Module and or built in serial communications ports on designated processors Subsection 2 8 F8 Data Display Functions Permit you to monitor data or status of up to 84 signed or unsigned register or bit addresses and up to 42 floating point data registers in addition you may write data values into desired register or copy contents of any or all registers on display Subsection 2 9 F10 DOS Shell Permits you to temporarily return to DOS command level where you may execute other programs and DOS commands without exiting WinLoader software Subsection 2 10 50 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 2 2 Clear 620 Memory F1 Accessing Clear Memory Functions Menu Press F1 Clear 620 Memory from the Auxiliary Function Menu to access the Clear Memory Function Menu shown in Figure 2 2 below This menu provides access to functions used to clear memory in either the CPM s Memory Function or the PC s RAM memo
277. e two values being manipulated added subtracted multiplied or divided and their result each have a value range of 3 40282 x 1038 to 1 175494 x 10 38 As shown in Figure 4 4 this means that the system can handle positive values from 1 175494 x 10 38 to 3 40282 x 1038 negative values from 1 75494 x 10 38 to 3 40282 x 1038 the value zero 0 Note that values outside of these positive and negative ranges are invalid Figure 4 4 Number Line for Floating Point Data Value Range Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 140 4 2 Data Representation Continued Handling overflow conditions Since any math operation on two 32 bit floating point values can produce a result greater than 3 40282 x 1038 a method for handling or detecting overflows should be considered One of the following two options should be considered for handling overflows Output coil program an output coil after the math operation program a floating point send out or Push of 2 on the next line if an overflow condition occurs the coil will energize if an overflow condition does not occur the coil will remain deenergized Error Status Word assign an error status word address to the math instruction test the complete word using equal to instruction or bit 15 using the bit read instruction if bit 15 is asserted set to 1 an overflow condition has occurred
278. each available selection from this menu also note the following To configure WinLoader for Multidrop Loader network make sure that 620MD is entered in Paths and File Menu F9 620 Driver File Once multidropped Loader and connected processors have been configured you can communicate through Loader to 620 LC by specifying nodal address on Paths and Files Menu F10 Driver Node selection Once Loader is configured Multidrop Node Name Menu displays when you select F1 620 Loader Monitor on WinLoader Main Menu Loader defaults to nodal address entered at F10 in Paths and Files Menu by selecting F1 Nodal Address on Multidrop Node Names Menu you can sequentially toggle the multidrop node you wish to communicate with SHIFT F1 is reverse sequence If node name doesn t exist for an address address displays when you press ENTER Loader polls selected node to see if it responds if it does Loader continues on to 620 Selection Menu as normal Loader reads multidrop node names from Loader software configuration file current node name displays on ladder logic EDIT MONITOR screen in lower right hand corner Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 43 Table 2 16 620 60 Software Configuration Menu Selections Key Title Description F1 Nodal Address Enables you to toggle sequentially to select desired nodal address SHIFT F1 is reverse sequence F2 Node Name Enables you to enter node na
279. ed Default filename is built from Function Block number for example FBxnnn LDR if Function Block with that particular name or number already exists you are prompted with Overwrite Existing Files Y N press Y to save changes and follow prompts as required to complete Save procedure Figure 3 2 Function Block Selections Menu Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 25 3 2 Defining Function Blocks Continued Defining a Function Block with new logic continued Table 3 2 Function Block Selection Menu Selections Key Selection Description F1 Function Block Number Allows selecting number for Function Block between 1 and 19 999 which is used by 620 LC as NSK reference address that is it is programmed by WinLoader as reference number for NSK and its accompanying EOS Select F1 enter desired Function Block number and press ENTER Pressing Spacebar clears F1 block Function Block number displays on right hand side of menu s F1 block After Function Block overhead is formally entered in step 5 of Table 3 1 or 3 3 procedure same Function Block number is also included as part of both the internal FBD and FBE lines unseen in interior of Function Block as well as in external Function Block Display box for example for Function Block TSpndl1 Function Block number of 254 is shown in top of Function Block Display Box see Figure 2 1 N
280. ed by relay ladder logic execution and option modules Figure 3 1 Normally Open Closed Contact Characteristics 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 45 3 2 Contact and Coil Instructions Continued Transition ON contact Refer to Table 3 4 for transition ON contact specifications Table 3 4 Transition ON Contact Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 10 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Examines Input and Output Status Tables at specified address for OFF to ON transition in order to pass power for one logic controller scan simulates momentary push button operation nonmomentary input device such as toggle switch reacts similarly to momentary push button when transition ON contact is addressed to it provides read in type pulse block of ladder logic may be conditioned to execute only when field device or internal coil addressed by transition ON contact transitions from OFF to ON can input output specific values from continuous signal or stream of values at predetermined time contact is TRUE only during program scan immediately following OFF to ON change of state may be used to condition NSKD and NSKR skip instructions but should not be used inside a skip element Characteristics Examines specified address in I O Status Table see Figure 3 2 to determine CURRENT condition this is then compared with PREVIOUS condit
281. ed for documentation files to prevent accidental loss of documentation data A pathname defining where ladder logic files are to be stored may be specified in the Upload Download Menu the default file name and pathname for documentation files may be specified using F9 in the Documentation Functions Menu If any new labels and or descriptions are created while editing ladder logic they are saved using the present default file name and pathname when any documentation editor is selected If you have not specified a default file name using F9 in the Documentation Functions Menu any labels descriptions created while editing ladder logic are saved to the default file name specified in the configuration file 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 23 Figure 2 10 Documentation Functions Menu Continued on next page 24 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 2 4 Documentation Functions F3 Continued Documentation Functions menu continued Table 2 8 Documentation Functions Menu Selections Key Title Description F1 Function Block Parameter Name Editor Enables you to create 7 character labels and 3 line by 9 character label descriptions for any Function Blocks in your ladder logic program refer to 620 WinLoader Function Blocks LDR006 for information on Function Blocks F2 Address Label Editor Enables you to create 7 character labels and 3 line by 9 character label descriptions for any logic element
282. ed in the bit or Register Area see Figure A 4 The Register Area is 16 bits wide and includes a 17th bit sign bit which is normally used to indicate the sign of the data contained in a particular register in certain operations the 17th bit indicates overflow conditions Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 159 A 5 System Status Information for 620 25 35 LCs Continued Register Memory Map for 620 25 35 LCs continued Figure A 4 Register Memory Map for 620 25 35 LCs Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 160 A 5 System Status Information for 620 25 35 LCs Continued System Status Table for 620 25 35 LCs The 620 25 35 LC System Status Table consists of memory locations 8 bits wide The table stores processor system diagnostic information which is accessed through the Loader Terminal using a four digit decimal address and a PULL instruction in the control program The three categories of information stored in the System Status Table are System Diagnostics System Hardware Status and System Identification Refer to Table A 9 for the most useful four digit decimal addresses and register contents Table A 9 620 25 35 LC System Status Table System Diagnostic Status Decimal Address Register Contents Decimal Address Register Contents 2431 Option Fault Address 0 2299 Memory Size 2429 Option Fault Address 1 2297 Memory Used 2427
283. ed or scanned twice in one CPM program scan 4 Press Esc to return to normal monitoring Continued on next page 6 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 1 2 Software Mode Control Function F11 Continued Augmented RUN Mode Programming characteristics Augmented Run Mode Programming ARMP gives you the ability to make program changes while the processor is in the Run Program mode These changes program additions and deletions have no harmful effect on system operation when the system is in Run mode but will temporarily increase scan time 20ms max Augmented Run Mode Programming is possible only when WinLoader is in Program mode processor keyswitch is in Run Program position and processor on line programming DIP switch is enabled Augmented RUN Mode Programming firmware capability and upgrade kits ARMP is included with all 620 15 25 and 35 LCs that have a firmware revision of 48 or greater and all 620 06 11 12 14 1631 1633 and 36 LCs Earlier firmware revisions may be upgraded to ARMP status by means of one of the following upgrade kits 220 0005 620 10 Upgrade Kit 620 1034 1035 1036 1037 only 220 0006 620 15 Upgrade Kit 620 1534 1535 1536 1537 only 220 0007 620 0080 Upgrade Kit 620 25 35 CPMs To perform ARMP operations the WinLoader must be Rev 2 0 or higher Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions
284. ed to delay inputting of data values from Data Register Table True False conditions from I O Status Table data values from Push Pull compatible modules in real I O outputting of data values to Data Register Table True False conditions to I O Status Table data values to Push Pull compatible modules in real I O Is programmed in input section of a line of ladder logic partially operates in a manner similar to constant instructions in that its opcode and data time delay timer are stored in main memory Delay period is specified during programming specified in microseconds has a maximum of 65535 microseconds 656 535 milliseconds Can be conditioned by preceding logic if preceding logic is True delay will be executed if preceding logic is False delay will not be executed Will not be executed when it is contained within a skip or jump block to include not skip and retain NSKR not skip and deenergize NSKD jump NSKR numeric range of 8192 8448 Table 3 88 is continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 127 3 14 Miscellaneous Instructions Continued Delay continued Table 3 88 Delay Specifications Continued SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a delay instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Pre
285. een can be called up by pressing ALT F10 only Some WinLoader functions require multiple Help screens this is indicated by the message HELP ALT F10 NEXT at the bottom of the first Help screen display in a sequence After viewing the additional Help screen you may return to the previous Help screen by pressing ALT F9 Figure 2 21 Typical WinLoader Help Screen 50 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 51 Section 3 WinLoader Main Screen Display 3 1 Overview Section contents These are the topics covered in this section Topic See Page 3 1 Overview 51 3 2 Main Screen Display 52 Purpose of this section This section describes the WinLoader Main Screen Display to include general description of Main Screen Display how to enter the Main Screen Display and individual components of the Main Screen Display 52 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 3 2 Main Screen Display Entering Main Screen Display The WinLoader Main Screen Display may be entered from the Loader s Main Menu through either the F1 620 Loader Monitor or F2 620 Stand Alone Loader selection shown in Figure 2 1 Note that both the F1 and F2 selections from the WinLoader Main Menu are almost
286. egister is automatically assigned as the accumulator address minus one data manipulation and comparison instructions should not be programmed in the same line of logic as a timer or counter when using the F3 Search function to find a timer or counter preset address must be used this is only address actually stored in 620 CPM memory a maximum of one retentive timer or counter is allowed per line of logic on and off delay timers can be combined on the same line of logic with the retentive timer or counter Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 65 3 4 Timer and Counter Instructions Continued On delay timer Refer to Table 3 16 for on delay timer specifications Table 3 16 On Delay Timer Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 10 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Used as logic line terminators where it is wished to delay energizing output or internal coil by predetermined time once conditioning logic becomes True delay de energizing output or internal coil by predetermined time once controlling logic becomes False Characteristics When controlling logic preceding on delay timer is False timer s coil de energizes turns off False When control logic is True timer begins accumulating time in selected resolution until accumulated value equals preset value at this time timer s coil energizes turns on
287. eing saved in the Function Block Library programs using Function Blocks have fewer faults and thereby save program testing time Modular Function Block programming provides better readability than conventional ladder logic programming Function Blocks are easy to generate maintain and invoke Function Blocks help standardize functions for special operations Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 3 1 2 Function Blocks Function Block ladder logic format A typical Function Block is shown in Figure 1 1 which presents an external Function Block level display Note that this single line represents the entire Function Block it shows the logic body of the Function Block as a box referred to as the Function Block Display box preceded by a ladder rung which represents the enable conditions for the Function Block The parameters which are previously defined addresses or constants used as inputs or outputs for the Function Block are shown with their actual values or address labels outside the Function Block Display box The names within the Function Block Display box are parameter names which are the same for each occurrence of a particular Function Block Parameters names generally indicate the use of a particular parameter within the Function Block Figure 1 1 Typical Function Block Continued on next page 4 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 1 2 Function Blocks C
288. eld device 4 digit BCD thumbwheel switch during input status scan these on off states are written to addresses 47 through 32 in I O Status Table as a binary bit pattern since processor does not recognize BCD code directly it interprets resulting bit pattern as if it were the binary value 54 Bring in instruction reads 16 bit word from addresses 47 through 32 and places this value 54 on stack BCD to binary instruction reads last word written to stack interprets it as BCD code and converts it to binary equivalent 36 resulting bit pattern is then placed back on stack Bit pattern on stack is finally retrieved by send out instruction and written to address 5500 in Register Function s data table Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 77 3 11 Data Conversion Instructions Continued BCD to binary conversion characteristics Figure 3 51 BCD to Binary Conversion Characteristics Continued on next page 78 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 11 Data Conversion Instructions Continued Integer to floating point conversion Refer to Table 3 61 for integer to floating point conversion specifications Table 3 61 Integer to Floating Point Conversion Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 36 LCs Symbol Usage Converts 16 bit signed two s complement integer to 32 bit floating point value integer value
289. elect F2 from CONTACT menu to enter normally closed contact 6 Enter address for third element normally closed contact 7 Select F2 from CONTACT menu to enter normally closed contact 12 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 13 Section 2 620 Instruction Set Overview 2 1 Overview Section contents These are the topics covered in this section Topic See Page 2 1 Overview 13 2 2 Valid ladder Logic Instructions 16 2 3 System Status Information 20 Purpose of this section This section presents General overview of the ten different categories of Ladder Logic instructions available for use by 620 LCs Valid 620 LC Ladder Logic instructions 620 LC System Status information Continued on next page 14 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 2 1 Overview Continued Logic Group Selection Menu Each category of ladder logic instructions that are available for use by the 620 LC is represented on the WinLoader main screen display as part of the Logic Group Selection Menu This menu provides access to the various instructions logic elements used to program ladder logic control programs As highlighted in Figur
290. elines on how to use 620 WinLoader Version 5 4 User Manual General characteristics of 620 WinLoader hardware Overview of 620 WinLoader software and Description of compatible personal computers and printer options iv 620 WinLoader Overview 4 05 4 05 620 WinLoader Overview v Table of Contents SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION TO 623 WINLOADER 1 1 1 Overview 1 1 2 623 WinLoader 2 1 3 623 WinLoader Version 5 X User Manual 6 SECTION 2 623 WINLOADER HARDWARE 9 2 1 Overview 9 2 2 WinLoader Hardware Charactristics 11 2 3 Personal Computer and Printer Hardware Characteristics 15 2 4 620 LC Networks 16 SECTION 3 623 WINLOADER SOFTWARE 17 3 1 Overview
291. en reads final data from Effective Address and places this value on stack value is then pushed to real I O address 72 lines three and four reset value in address 5000 back to its original value when it has been incremented to 6010 Assuming that address 5000 is preset to a value of 6000 this permits routine to cycle index through table of values in addresses 6001 through 6010 Continued on next page 96 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Indirect bring in characteristics continued Figure 3 18 Indirect Bring In with Indexing Characteristics 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 97 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Floating point bring in Refer to Table 3 27 for floating point bring in specifications Table 3 27 Floating Point Bring In Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 36 LCs Symbol Usage Allows chain type math calculations like those used in integer math to be executed with much greater degree of accuracy eliminates build up in round off errors typically found in integer math calculations used to handle data used in math operations which require greater degree of accuracy than simple integers can provide Characteristics transfers two contiguous 16 bit words from Register Function s Data Register Table to CPM s stack see Figure 3 19 address associated wi
292. entry in the label description editor Table 2 6 Editing Entry in Label Description Editor Step Action 1 GO TO desired address 2 Enter desired text 3 Press ENTER to store text in data base Changing text in previously entered label description To change text in a previously entered label description simply overwrite it with the new information Deleting a character To delete a character simply overwrite it with a space or place cursor to right of character and press Backspace key 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 29 2 4 Comment Editors F3 F4 Accessing Comment Editors The WinLoader allows you to create comments relating to an address or line number in the ladder logic program including those of Function Blocks These comments consist of up to 20 lines 67 characters per line Address and line number comment editors are identical in function with the exception of the following reference number limitations F3 Address Comment Editor reference numbers may be in range of 0 8191 F4 Line Comment Editor reference numbers may be in range of 0 32767 If either F3 Address Comment Editor or F4 Line Comment Editor is selected from the Documentation Functions Menu the comment editor screen shown in Figure 2 4 appears on the display Figure 2 4 Address Comment Editor Continued on next page 30 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 2 4 Com
293. ents already exist in comment editor they will be overwritten by new file F10 SAVE Permits you to save comments presently in temporary work file to permanent disk file Select F10 SAVE and enter pathname and file name where comments are to be stored If file exists with same file name prompt allows you to overwrite existing file When Load and Save functions are selected you may obtain a directory listing by entering DIR in file name prompt if you want to clear present contents of comment editor enter CLEAR in response to file name prompt Continued on next page 36 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 2 4 Comment Editors F3 F4 Continued Comment Editor Edit Mode After Edit Mode is entered by pressing E in the Line Comment Editor the cursor will be in the upper left hand corner of the edit field ready for text entry As characters are entered the cursor scrolls to the right until the end of the line is reached The characters then scroll down to the beginning of the next line When the comment editor is first entered the Edit function is in the Overwrite mode indicated by a full block cursor Characters entered will overwrite any characters at the present cursor position on the screen Place the editor into the Insert mode by pressing the Ins key not F3 The cursor changes to an underline cursor and characters entered from the keyboard are inserted at the present cursor posi
294. er 1 Model Number 629 6019 Shielded Cable 1 10 foot 3m Model number 628 3000 PC 620 LC Converter Communications Cable 1 Model number 628 6020 PC 620 LC Converter Power Cable 1 Model Number 628 6021 620 WinLoader Version 5 4 User Manual 1 Form 620 8983 Function Block Library Specifications 1 Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Overview 13 2 2 620 6020 WinLoader Hardware Characteristics Continued 629 6019 Converter The 629 6019 External Converter Box is provided with the 620 6020 WinLoader and must be installed through a serial communications port of your personal computer 629 6019 External Converter Box is factory configured for communications operation between personal computer s serial port and Loader Terminal port on CPM The interface port on the 629 6019 External Converter Box is a 9 pin female sub D connector with a tin plated shell and a latching mechanism The interface port has both transmit and receive capabilities along with clear to send and request to send control and is used to communicate with 620 LCs using the 10 foot Loader Terminal cable however you may wish to extend this length by constructing a cable according to the pin assignments specified in 620 WinLoader Installation LDR002 The 629 6019 External Converter Box may operate at a maximum distance of 2000 feet 610m Interface port is essential for 620 6020 WinLoader operation 62
295. er Documentation Functions LDR007 should be set up to correspond to each particular parameter to be entered Enter appropriate parameter address type and data value corresponding to each parameter name by following appropriate procedures presented in the two separate procedures presented in this subsection Once each address type and data value is entered appropriate opcode is inserted in FBI or FBO line at proper position by WinLoader software and Function Block Display line is updated see Table 3 4 for list of available parameters Run mode programming may not be used to insert or delete parameters changing parameter addresses or values but not types is permitted Single bit parameters may be passed by setting or clearing bit in a register and using Bring In or Send Out instruction in Function Block Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 31 3 3 Entering Function Block Parameters Continued Guidelines continued Refer to Table 3 4 for a list of the different parameter types available as well as symbols used for each type and the actual opcodes written into the parameter lines by the WinLoader When entering parameters you may select the same address multiple times provided each selection is a different data type for example three parameters with address 500 may be selected one C bit instruction one B integer direct and one I integer indirect Up to
296. er optional error address Continued on next page 82 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 11 Data Conversion Instructions Continued Floating point to integer conversion characteristics Figure 3 53 illustrates characteristics associated with the floating point to integer conversion instruction In the first line of logic Floating point bring in instruction reads value 5 12 x 1002 from Data Register Table addresses 5001 and 5000 and places it on stack Floating point to integer instruction reads last two 16 bit words placed on stack converts last two 16 bit words from stack to integer equivalent 512 places 16 bit result back on stack Send out instruction reads last 16 bit word from stack 512 and writes it to Data Register Table address 5109 In the second line of logic Floating point bring in instruction reads value 2 1892 x 1004 from addresses 5003 and 5002 and places them on stack Division instruction divides last floating point value placed on stack by next value placed on stack Floating point constant instruction places value 5 12 x 1002 on stack division operation is immediately executed and result 4 27578125 x 1001 is placed on stack 2 1892 x 1004 5 12 x 1002 4 27578125 x 1001 Floating point to integer instruction reads last word placed on stack converts last word on stack to its integer equivalent 43 pla
297. er s name F7 Clear Title Clears two line title field F8 Clear Programmer Clears programmer field Figure 3 9 Edit Title Block Menu 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 61 3 5 Edit Title Block from 620 F8 Continued Procedure for Editing Title Block continued Note that the title block shown in Figure 3 10 below includes a two line field where you may assign names to your ladder logic program using the F8 Edit Title Block function The end of the second line of the title field is actually an eight character field all to itself identified by the dashed line This field when completed informs the WinLoader to load a specific default file name for labels descriptions and comments associated with the program It is very important to note that this eight character field also overrides the WinLoader s default file which was set using the 623 60 Configuration Menu of the Main Menu If you enter a name that is too long for the title field so that it extends into the default file name field when program is then loaded into CPM WinLoader recognizes that this field contains characters and incorrectly identifies them as desired default file These characters then appear in the name check displayed beneath the title block see Figure 3 10 below At this point you may or may not notice that an unusual default file name appears in the title block Any attempt to load this file name results in an error message sta
298. ering Stand Alone Mode Upon Start up Step Action 1 Perform Table 1 2 procedure steps 1 and 2 2 Press ENTER after reading to acknowledge and clear display a menu appears Select F2 in the menu options to enter the Stand Alone mode 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 1 Section 2 WinLoader Main Menu 2 1 Overview Section contents These are the topics covered in this section Topic See Page 2 1 Overview 1 2 2 620 Loader Monitor 4 2 3 620 Stand Alone Loader F2 18 2 4 Documentation Functions F3 22 2 5 Password amp Security Functions 25 2 6 I O Configuration Utility F5 29 2 7 620 60 Software Configuration F6 30 2 8 Terminal Emulator F7 46 2 9 Utility Functions F8 47 Purpose of this section This section presents an overall
299. ern to matrix C Characteristics Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program an AND matrix instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F10 to select Matrix Logic Group 2 Enter desired matrix address 3 Press F7 to select AND Matrix instruction 4 Program the necessary matrix information as prompted reference address start address size etc 5 Press RETURN or ENTER after each entry Continued on next page 124 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 13 Matrix Instructions Continued Compare matrix Refer to Table 3 86 for compare instruction specifications Table 3 86 Compare Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Performs an exclusive OR operation using contents of matrix A with corresponding bits of matrix B if topmost contact is deenergized OFF resulting bit pattern is sent to matrix C if contact is energized ON the address of any miscompares is sent to matrix C if contents of matrix A or B are in I O table range register address of miscompares are displayed Characteristics Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a compare matrix instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F10 to select Matrix Logic Group 2 Enter desired matrix address 3 Press F6 to select Compare Matrix instruction 4 Pro
300. ers that is addresses 2040 to 2047 will not be translated Register range corresponding to that of 620 LC is 4096 to yyyy 8191 max Parameter readdressing does not affect any NSKR NSKD JSR or SUBR instructions in program you must be aware of any potential conflicts and make appropriate changes that is changes should be made after Function Block is loaded using normal editing techniques Table 6 3 Procedure for Loading Function Blocks Step Action 1 Press F17 or SHIFT F7 to access Block Edit menu shown in Figure 6 1 2 Select F9 Load from Block Edit Menu Block Operations Menu appears with following selections F1 LDR F2 FB and F3 REG 3 Select F2 FB from Block Operations Menu to indicate that Function Block file is to be loaded from disk to 620 LC s memory 4 When prompted enter line number where Function Block is to be inserted Table 6 3 is continued on next page 60 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 6 3 Loading Function Blocks Continued Procedure for loading Function Blocks continued Table 6 3 Procedure for Loading Function Blocks Continued Step Action 5 Press ENTER to verify line number Block Addressing screen shown in Figure 6 2 below displays Start address is where current block of software s first address resides End address is where current block of software s last address resides New Start address is where
301. erview 42 3 3 Printer Characters F2 57 3 4 Edit Default File F7 58 3 5 Edit Title Block from 620 F8 60 vi 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 Figures and Tables Figure 2 1 Documentation Functions Menu 13 Figure 2 2 Function Block Parameter Name Editor 16 Figure 2 3 Label Description Editor 23 Figure 2 4 Address Comment Editor 29 Figure 2 5 Edit Mode Menu 37 Figure 2 6 Bit Comment Editor 39 Figure 2 7 Bit Label Editor 40 Figure 3 1 Documentation Functions Menu 43 Figure 3 3 Listing Queue Menu
302. ess 2 to the on position Note that if this switch is positioned to the off position Process 2 is skipped if it is positioned on Process 2 is not skipped Observe the simplified block diagram in Figure 3 11 which illustrates the CPM s Memory Function Note that the control logic of Process 2 is contained in a skip block defined by a not skip and retain NSKR instruction where normally open NO contact 10 is the controlling logic and an end of skip EOS instruction Normally open contact 10 conditions the skip instruction and thereby the skip block by toggling the switch addressed to contact 10 operator can determine if skip block is to be executed or skipped Address 10 could also be tied to some other control logic which acting independently of the operator would determine whether the block is to be executed or skipped For example Process 1 might first perform some operation on the manufactured product then test it to ensure it meets the required specification if it does Process 2 is skipped if it does not Process 2 is executed Process 2 rejects substandard product as defined and executed by Process 1 otherwise product is passed to Process 3 Process 3 performs some final operation on the product Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 79 3 5 Skip Instructions Continued Additional information Figure 3 11 Sample Application Using Sk
303. ess Toggles sequentially to assign a specific nodal address SHIFT F2 is reverse sequence Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 11 2 2 620 Loader Monitor F1 Continued Figure 2 4 Accessing Multidrop Configuration Menu Continued on next page 12 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 2 2 620 Loader Monitor F1 Continued I O configuration Press F6 Edit I O Configuration from the 620 Selection Menu to access the I O Configuration Menu shown in Figure 2 8 next page This menu allows you to edit the 620 LC s processor rack I O slots Refer to Table 2 8 for descriptions of each available selection from this menu The processor rack I O slots must be configured to the number of points assigned to each slot according to the selections indicated in Table 2 5 Note that all I O slots in a processor rack will accommodate 8 16 and 32 point I O modules Default setting for I O Configuration Menu selections is 0 to edit number of points per slot select slot to be edited by using cursor control keys to position highlighted edit field then select F2 through F5 for desired increments of 0 8 16 or 32 points Press ENTER to complete editing process and store data in 620 LC 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 and 36 LCs must be in software or keyswitch selected PROGRAM mode when making I O configuration menu selections Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation
304. ess to analog and special function output modules when Push instruction addressed to real I O address is executed CPM sends new data directly to that module local and parallel I O only if addressed module is located in serial I O Push generates a write Push request which SLM processes and executes when viewed through WinLoader data read displays beneath instruction s number of Pushed registers note neither data Pushed nor message No Data appears regardless if it is True or is preceded by True conditioning logic Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a Push instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F4 to select Push Logic Group 2 Enter desired address 3 Press F3 to select Push 4 Enter desired number of words to be Pushed 5 Press RETURN to enter instruction The RETURN described above for the Push instruction will not validate the line of logic it only serves to establish the instruction in the personal computer s memory Continued on next page 14 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Push characteristics Figure 3 27 Push Characteristics 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 15 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Pull from System Status Table instruction The System Status Table is one of the three tables which make up the CPM s Register Funct
305. eter output address is entered using the Function Block Selections Menu as described in Section 3 Function Block Programming the default setting for the parameter output address is the highest control I O address available for the specific processor Also just as with input parameters once the interior of the Function Block is accessed the FBO line is shown for display purposes only and cannot be changed Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 13 2 2 Function Block Operation Continued Line 5 Output Parameter Unloading FBU line The Output Parameter Unloading FBU line s is the stack unloading line s for the output parameters which is automatically programmed by the WinLoader when the Function Block is created or the Function Block header is revised For Function Block TSpindl1 the FBU line has the format presented in Figure 2 9 Figure 2 9 Output Parameter Unloading FBU Line for TSpindl1 Note that the internal register address that is 8146 is specified via the Function Block Selections Menu as described in Section 3 Function Block Programming the available address range from 4096 to 8191 is processor dependent Additional PUSH lines may also be added by reconfiguring the Function Block header It should also be noted that each FBU line may accommodate up to 8 PUSH registers and as many FBU lines as required may be used to accommodate up to 45 output parameters
306. everything remaining on the stack inaccessible A Function Block may be designed to use the data on the stack in the same order as it was placed on the stack but it is less prone to error if the data is stored into internal registers before executing any control logic This is why internal registers are defined and PUSH instructions are used to save the data for use anywhere within the Function Block 20 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 21 Section 3 Function Block Programming 3 1 Overview Section contents These are the topics covered in this section Topic See Page 3 1 Overview 21 3 2 Defining Function Blocks 22 3 3 Entering Function Block Parameters 30 3 4 Entering Function Block Conditioning Logic 34 Purpose of this section This section presents procedure for defining a Function Block with new logic procedure for defining a Function Block with existing logic procedure for entering input parameters procedure for entering output parameters and procedure for entering Function Block conditioning logic 22 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05
307. ew 1 1 Overview Introduction The WinLoader includes a powerful software program that combines menu driven procedures and on line monitoring with integrated programming and documentation This ladder logic program lets you define the discrete control functions for your control strategy through relay ladder logic using familiar logic elements such as contacts coils timers counters and various other logic elements Depending on the type of control strategy you have configured for your application the WinLoader software program may be provided by Honeywell as part of either of the following control system platforms 620 60 WinLoader provides a user supplied Windows compatible personal computer with the capability to program and monitor all 620 Logic Controller CPMs and is available in the following two versions 620 6020 WinLoader which comes with an RS232 RS422 External Converter Box to be installed through a PC s RS232 serial communications port more complete hardware descriptions a list of compatible personal computers that can be used with each version and a description of the 620 WinLoader software that is provided 620 6150A Loader Terminal an industrially hardened laptop computer capable of all WinLoader functions 620 6150A Loader Terminal is sold as a spare part comes with an RS232 422 External Converter Box to be installed through the 620 6150A Loader Terminal s serial port
308. execution of queue entries press F4 Start Queue Execution to initiate execution of queue entries listings begin printing in order of queue position 1 thru 10 Continued on next page 46 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 3 2 Printer Function Menu F1 Continued Ladder Logic Listing F1 Press F1 Ladder Logic Listing from the Listing Queue Menu to access the Ladder Logic Listing Menu shown in Figure 3 4 below This menu is used to select the ladder logic printout type and other available printout selections Refer to Table 3 4 next page for descriptions of each available option from this menu and proceed as follows Select desired ladder logic listing to enable or disable any of the ten options by pressing associated function key as indicated in Table 3 4 When desired ladder logic listing is achieved press ENTER to install options After ladder logic listing options have been selected and installed the Printer Parameters Menu displays refer to subsequent subsection titled Printer Parameters Menu If Function Block Programming is used the format of the printed Function Block is the same as that shown on the display screen in either expanded or compressed format as selected address comments for each of the parameters is shown on the printout below the Function Block display if either the F3 Address Comments function of the Ladder Logic Listing Menu is set to ON or the F8 List F
309. exit the 620 Win Loader Install shield Click Back if you want to return to the previous screen at any point during the installation 22 620 WinLoader Installation 4 05 Industrial Automation and Control Honeywell Inc 1100 Virginia Drive Fort Washington Pennsylvania 19034 620 WinLoader Version 5 4 User Manual 620 8983 620 WinLoader 620 WinLoader Implementation LDR003 4 05 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation ii Copyright Notices and Trademarks Printed in U S A Copyright 2005 by Honeywell Inc Revision 01 April 01 2005 While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in its written agreement with and for its customer In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect special or consequential damages The information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice This document was prepared using Information Mapping methodologies and formatting principles IBM AT is a registered trademark of IBM Corporation Information Mapping is a trademark of Information Mapping Inc Terminal Emulator is a registered trademark of Honeywell Inc Honeywell Industrial Automation and Control Automation College 1100 Virginia Drive Fort Washington PA 19034
310. ext page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 69 3 10 Memory Reference Instructions Continued Return to beginning of program RBP Refer to Table 3 57 for return to beginning of program specifications Table 3 57 Return to Beginning of Program Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 10 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Used as a line terminator to mark the end of a subroutine block its most common use is to separate subroutines from main body of program see Figure 3 49 Characteristics When enabled causes normal sequential scan to be redirected to first instruction and reinitiate input status scan in control program at this point input status scan executes and program scan repeats Can be controlled by conditioning logic such as a contact if conditioning logic is True RBP is true and program scan is redirected to memory word zero that is initial line of input status scan False RBP is false and processor ignores RBP and continues executing any remaining lines of control program Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a return to beginning of program instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F5 to select Skip Logic Group 2 Press F4 to select return to subroutine instruction Continued on next page 70 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 10 Memory Re
311. ey to display the first five lines of the data table and the Initial Edit Menu 3 F6 Press the F6 Edit Step to enter the Full Edit Menu 4 F1 Press F1 Goto to enter or use the Up Down Arrow Keys to select the step number to be edited When using F1 Goto the ENTER key must be pressed after entering the step number 5 F2 Pressing F2 Value opens a data entry window where you can enter the new value in decimal F3 F4 Using the F3 ON and F4 OFF keys in conjunction with the left and right arrow keys you can enter the new value in a binary format F5 Press F5 Cursor to specify poisition cursor will go to when new data is entered into the table or when the table display is scrolled from step to step 6 F8 Press F8 Snd Stp in the Full Edit Menu to accept the new value entered in step 5 7 Repeat Repeat steps 4 through 6 until all desired existing steps have been edited 8 ESC Press Escape to return to the Initial Edit Menu 9 ENTER Press Enter to write the displayed line of logic to the end of the control program INS ENTER Press Insert Enter to overwrite the existing line of logic INS Press Insert Page Down to overwrite the PAGE DOWN displayed line of logic ahead of the current line Continued on next page 110 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 12 Sequencer Instructions Continued Edit existing step in Run mode To edit an existing step of the
312. eystrokes Perform the following steps to program a square root integer conversion instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F9 to select Operators Logic Group 2 Press F6 to select Conversion Operators Group 3 Press F6 to select the square root conversion instruction 4 Enter optional error address Continued on next page 88 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 11 Data Conversion Instructions Continued Square root conversion characteristics Figure 3 55 illustrates characteristics associated with the square root instruction Floating point bring in instruction reads 16 bit word from addresses 5101 and 5100 and places value 2 56 x 1002 on stack Square root instruction reads last two 16 bit words written to stack as 32 bit floating point value calculates square root of this value places 32 bit floating point result 1 60 x 1001 back on stack Floating point send out instruction reads last two 16 bit words from stack and writes them to addresses 5099 and 5098 in Data Register Table Figure 3 55 Square Root Conversion Characteristics Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 89 3 11 Data Conversion Instructions Continued Negate Refer to Table 3 65 for negate specifications Table 3 65 Negate Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 36 LCs Symbol Usage
313. f Using Skip Instruction to Control Execution 143 Figure 4 8 Example of Using Conditional Contact to Control Execution 144 Figure 4 9 Example of Using Conditional Contact to Control Execution at Various Points Within Logic Line 144 Figure 4 10 Example Logic Line That Does Not Follow Conditional Data Handling Rules 145 Figure A 1 Register Memory Map for 620 06 LCs 148 Figure A 2 Register Memory Map for 620 10 15 LCs 151 Figure A 3 620 11 14 1631 LC 8K System Memory Map 154 Figure A 4 Register Memory Map for 620 25 35 LCs 159 4 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 Tables Table 3 32 Floating Point Constant Instruction Specifications 7 Table 3 33 Pull Specifications 9 Table 3 33 Pull Specifications Continued 10 Table 3 34 Push Specifications
314. f the Verify operation or used as a reference for editing the program Continued on next page 74 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 2 7 Register Table Functions F6 Continued Typical Register Table Function application Register Table Functions are typically useful in situations where a single ladder logic program could be used to produce any one of several different products at a given time with the exception that each product requires different data values These data values could represent timing weights temperatures and any other appropriate process variables By developing one generic application program common to all processes multiple Register Data Table files recipes could be created with each representing a different product These recipes could then be loaded as needed depending on the product to be made Refer to Figure 2 14 for an illustration of this type of application Figure 2 14 Typical Register Table Function Application 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 75 2 8 Flag Mode Address F7 Accessing the Flag Mode Address function Press F7 from the Auxiliary Function Menu to access the Flag Mode Address function This function is used to specify the most significant address of a range of 16 single bit addresses used to trigger flag mode operation of the 620 CPM s fixed serial port Flag mode allows the communications port to provide data to the host without the host
315. fer for node 0 2539 of registers to transfer for node 23 2517 of registers to transfer for node 1 2540 of registers to transfer for node 24 2518 of registers to transfer for node 2 2541 of registers to transfer for node 25 2519 of registers to transfer for node 3 2542 of registers to transfer for node 26 2520 of registers to transfer for node 4 2543 of registers to transfer for node 27 2521 of registers to transfer for node 5 2544 of registers to transfer for node 28 2522 of registers to transfer for node 6 2545 of registers to transfer for node 29 2523 of registers to transfer for node 7 2546 of registers to transfer for node 30 2524 of registers to transfer for node 8 2547 of registers to transfer for node 31 2525 of registers to transfer for node 9 2548 Nodes 31 MSB thru 24 LSB online if corresponding bit is set 2526 of registers to transfer for node 10 2549 Nodes 23 MSB thru 16 LSB online if corresponding bit is set 2527 of registers to transfer for node 11 2550 Nodes 15 MSB thru 8 LSB online if corresponding bit is set 2528 of registers to transfer for node 12 2551 Nodes 7 MSB thru 0 LSB online if corresponding bit is set 2529 of registers to transfer for node 13 2552 Nodes 31 MSB thru 24 LSB have config error if corresponding bit is set 2530 of registers to transfer for node 14 2553 Nodes 23 MSB thru 16 LSB hav
316. ference Instructions Continued Return to beginning of program characteristics Figure 3 49 illustrates characteristics associated with a return to beginning of program instruction Figure 3 49 Return to Beginning of Program Characteristics 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 71 3 11 Data Conversion Instructions Data conversion instruction types Table 3 58 presents the eight types of data conversion instructions presented in this section Table 3 58 Data Conversion Instructions Data Conversion Instructions Refer to page Binary to BCD Conversion 72 BCD to Binary Conversion 75 Integer to Floating Point Conversion 78 Floating Point to Integer Conversion 81 Absolute Conversion 85 Square Root Conversion 87 Negate 89 NOT 91 Data conversion instructions Data conversion instructions provide a method for converting one data format to another format All data conversion instructions except integer to floating point can use the floating point or integer bits of the error status word see Section 4 for more information on the error status word Continued on next page 72 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 11 Data Conversion Instructions Continued Binary to BCD Conversion Refer to Table 3 59 for binary to BCD conversion specifications Table 3 59 Binary to BCD Conversion Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 36 LCs
317. ference Instructions Refer to page Jump 56 Indirect Jump 59 End of Jump 61 Jump to Subroutine 63 Subroutine 65 Return to Subroutine 67 Return to Beginning of Program 69 Memory reference instructions Memory reference instructions are used to redirect the normal sequential flow of control program execution The 620 LC instruction set includes two classifications of memory reference instructions Jump instructions use either direct or indirect addressing techniques can utilize multiple jump locations are used to redirect normal sequential control program scan Subroutine instructions use only direct addressing techniques are used to redirect normal sequential control program scan to a specified block of ladder logic are used after execution to redirect control program scan back to what was normal sequential scan point prior to redirection Continued on next page 56 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 10 Memory Reference Instructions Continued Jump instructions Jump instructions are variations of the not skip and retain NSKR instruction Jump instructions cause the sequential program scan to jump directly to a specific line of logic in the control program Unlike NSKR instructions which read all skipped lines of logic when a jump instruction is executed the lines of logic that are jumped are not read This means that program scan time can be reduced usi
318. ffective Address Effective Address YYYY contains Final process manufacturing related Address where data is to be stored normally not shown by instruction Data sent out ZZZZ displays beneath send out symbol Although Effective Address YYYY is not normally shown it can be temporarily displayed to determine address where data is being written when using indirect send out use WinLoader paging up down to line of logic which contains indirect send out causes Effective Address to display briefly as data ZZZZ value then changes to actual data value Effective Address displays long enough to be read Indirect send out cannot be forced An indirect send out skipped by a NSKR freezes data in specified address indirect send out skipped by NSKD clears data in specified address Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program an indirect send out instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F3 to select Bring In Logic Group 2 Enter desired address 3 Press F2 to select Indirect Send Out instruction 104 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Indirect send out characteristics Figure 3 21 Indirect Send Out Characteristics Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 105 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Indirect send out characteristics Fig
319. fications Continued SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Characteristics Counter has three input lines and one output line CTU count up input line counter counts or increments its accumulated value on leading edge of CTU line when CTU line transitions from False off to True on and RST is True on accumulated value is incremented by one no up count is recorded when CTU line is in steady True on or False off state or transitions from True on to False off CTD count down input line counter counts or decrements its accumulated value on leading edge of CTD line when CTD line transitions from False off to True on and RST is True on accumulated value is decremented by one no up count is recorded when CTD line is in steady True on or False off state or transitions from True on to False off RST reset input line when True as defined by preceding control logic counter is permitted to increment or decrement accumulated value by one each time CTU or CTD lines go True when False accumulator value is rest to zero regardless of current value or status of CTU and CTD lines OUT output line when accumulated value equals preset value OUT line goes True True condition provides logical current flow to succeeding logic elements on output line Up to seven logic elements can be entered in series on each input line paralleling elements on an input line is not valid but such complex logi
320. fine ladder logic block as desired refer to Table 1 14 3 Edit Menu appears offering selections F1 F10 logic groups and F11 F20 edit and display functions edit ladder logic block as desired Auxiliary Function Menu F1 Clear 620 Memory function clears memory from displayed line to end of memory regardless of block limitations 4 Press Esc key to exit from Block edit function Block Operations Functions Menu reappears allowing you to either edit the start end line of the block perform another block function or return to normal edit mode by pressing Esc again Continued on next page 34 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 1 8 Block Operations Functions F17 Continued Moving ladder logic blocks Perform the Table 1 16 procedure to move a ladder logic block to another desired location in your program Table 1 16 Procedure for Moving Ladder Logic Block Step Action 1 Press F2 MOVE from Block Operations Functions Menu prompt appears asking you to define ladder logic block s start and end line numbers 2 Define ladder logic block as desired refer to Table 1 14 prompt appears requesting line number where defined ladder logic block is to be moved 3 Enter destination line number then press ENTER to verify destination line number is complete and correct Pressing ENTER without a line number entry causes defined ladder logic block to be inserted at the line nu
321. fined ladder logic block from a 620 LC to a specified disk file Figure 1 13 Block Operations Functions Menu Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 33 1 8 Block Operations Functions F17 Continued Defining a ladder logic block In order to implement the F1 EDIT F2 MOVE F3 COPY and F4 DELETE Block operations functions you will be prompted to define a desired ladder logic block Refer to Table 1 14 as appropriate when required to define a ladder logic block Table 1 14 Defining a Ladder Logic Block Step Action 1 Enter beginning block number and press ENTER then enter ending block number and press ENTER or use HOME and END keys as appropriate to define ladder logic block limits 2 Note that you may use PgUp or PgDn keys to access desired line number while each prompt is being displayed press B for begin T for tag or Enter for current line to mark begin line then press E for end T for tag or Enter for current line to mark end line displayed lines are tagged as start or end line respectively Editing ladder logic blocks Perform the Table 1 15 procedure to edit a ladder logic block as desired Table 1 15 Procedure for Editing Ladder Logic Block Step Action 1 Press F1 EDIT from Block Operations Functions Menu prompt appears asking you to define ladder logic block s beginning and ending line numbers 2 De
322. for the Function Block The single Function Block Display FBD line shown in Figure 5 1 below represents the entire Function Block The ladder logic between the start and end markers is hidden within the Function Block Display box In the upper part of the box the Function Block number is shown as is the Function Block size which indicates the number of lines contained within the Function Block and assuming the label description file FILENAME FBL of the Function Block is available and loaded as described in 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions LDR007 the WinLoader also displays the Function Block name as shown in Figure 5 1 for Function Block TSpindl1 Figure 5 1 Typical Function Block Display Continued on next page 50 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 5 2 Displaying Function Blocks Continued Background continued Parameters are shown with actual values or address labels located outside of Function Block Display box detailed information about each parameter that is descriptions comments may be accessed by entering or when cursor is positioned on particular parameter Located within Function Block Display box are parameter names if specified previously also located within Function Block Display box are symbolic letters representing opcode type used with each parameter At bottom of Function Block Display box parameter display mode of Function Block is show
323. functions to include Clear 620 Memory Upload Download functions Auxiliary Documentation Menu 620 Diagnostics Menu Program Mode Change function Register Table functions Flag Mode Address Data Display functions and DOS Shell function Auxiliary Function Menu may be accessed anytime WinLoader is in either Program or Monitor mode Refer to Table 2 1 next page for descriptions of each of the available selections from this menu Figure 2 1 Auxiliary Function Menu Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 49 2 1 Overview Continued Accessing Auxiliary Function Menu continued Table 2 1 Auxiliary Function Menu Selections Key Selection Function Refer to F1 Clear 620 Memory Used to clear ladder logic memory all label description documentation all comment documentation and or all Function Block labels Subsection 2 2 F2 Upload Download Functions Permit you to transfer ladder logic programs from PC disk storage to 620 LC and from 620 LC to PC disk storage Subsection 2 3 F3 Documentation Menu Accesses auxiliary Documentation Functions Menu which provides functions for printing ladder logic control programs and documentation editing default file name for documentation and editing title block Subsection 2 4 F4 620 Diagnostics Menu Allows you to examin
324. fy entry by pressing ENTER specified ladder logic lines are written into specified file use F7 PATH command to verify that selected path is correct 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 39 1 9 Clear Display Function F18 Activating Clear Display function Press F18 or Shift F8 CLR from the Edit and Display Functions Menu to activate the Clear Display function This function is used to automatically clear the main screen display s program area each time a line of ladder logic is entered inserted or overwritten in your control program The Clear Display function s most common use is in program development The following are the two available variations of the Clear Display function offered by the WinLoader Automatic Clear Display automatically clears main screen display each time a line of ladder logic is entered inserted or overwritten in program can be invoked from within WinLoader using function keys or through 623 60 Software Configuration Menu Refer to subsection 2 7 of 623 60 WinLoader Implementation LDR003 for information on accessing F1 Auto Clear function from Operational Modes menu which is accessed from 623 60 Software Configuration Menu when activated F18 CLR display appears in reverse video on function menu line select F18 again to turn off auto clear function Manual Clear Display permits manual clearing of main screen display each time a
325. g Documentation Functions Menu Press F3 Documentation Menu from the Auxiliary Function Menu to access the auxiliary Documentation Functions Menu shown in Figure 3 1 below This menu provides further access to the four documentation functions described in Table 3 1 below Refer to 623 WinLoader Edit and Display Functions LDR005 for information on how to access functions from the WinLoader s Auxiliary Function Menu Table 3 1 Documentation Functions Menu Selections Key Selection Function F1 Printer Function Menu Enables selection of printout type ladder logic or documentation desired offers selection of various options formats and port parameters F2 Printer Characters Enables toggling between Standard and Graphic printer characters F7 Edit Default File Permits specifying pathname and file name where label descriptions and comments for ladder logic program are stored F8 Edit Title Block from 620 Permits changing title date and programmer s name in 620 LC title page Figure 3 1 Documentation Functions Menu 44 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 3 2 Printer Function Menu F1 Listing Queue Menu The Listing Queue Menu shown in Figure 3 3 below is accessed after entry into Printer function menu F1 The Listing Queue Menu is used to define up to ten different printout types refer to Table 3 3 next page for descriptions of each available selection from this menu Each
326. gram an output coil directly after the addition operation instead of a data manipulation instruction to detect for overflow if an overflow conditions occurs the coil energizes otherwise it remains unenergized error status word can also be assigned to addition operation for unsigned operations test for bit 0 carry bit for signed operations test for bit 1 signed overflow refer to Section 4 for more information Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program an addition instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F9 to select Operators Logic Group 2 Press F7 to select Math Operators Logic Group 3 Press F7 to select addition instruction Continued on next page 34 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 8 Math Instructions Continued Basic addition operation Figure 3 35 illustrates a simple line of logic which contains a basic addition operation first bring in from address 5000 places value 220 on stack addition instruction tells processor to add last value placed on stack to next value placed there second bring in from address 5100 places value 596 on stack both values are immediately added and sum is placed on stack 220 596 816 send out writes last value placed on stack 816 to address 5200 Figure 3 35 Basic Addition Operation Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 35 3 8 Math I
327. gram the necessary matrix information as prompted reference address start address size etc 5 Press RETURN or ENTER after each entry 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 125 3 14 Miscellaneous Instructions Miscellaneous instruction types Table 3 87 presents the three types of miscellaneous instructions presented in this section Table 3 87 Miscellaneous Instructions Miscellaneous Instructions Refer to page Delay 126 No Operation 129 Input Status Scan 131 Miscellaneous instructions Miscellaneous instructions provide unique functions that can add to the functionality and ease of use of your control program Miscellaneous instructions while located in specific logic groups do not actually belong to any specific groups Continued on next page 126 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 14 Miscellaneous Instructions Continued Delay Refer to Table 3 88 for delay instruction specifications Table 3 88 Delay Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 36 LCs Symbol Usage Delays program scan for a user defined period of time used in applications where it might be desired to interrupt or pause the normal program scan for a brief period of time Although delay instruction is a form of timer due to its unique characteristics it is presented separately from timer and counter instructions Characteristics Can be us
328. group and respective instructions contained within each category Instruction CPM compatibility Table 2 2 next page lists each available 620 LC instruction along with each element s corresponding symbol and CPM compatibility Table 2 1 Ten Categories of WinLoader Ladder Logic Instructions Logic Description Ladder Logic Instructions Group F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F1 Contact Logic Group Normally Open Normally Closed Transition On Transition Off Bit Read Logic Inverter No Operation Input Status Scan F2 Coil Logic Group Retentive Non Retentive Latch Unlatch Bit Write F3 B2 Single Data Word Logic Group Indirect Bring In Indirect Send Out Bring In Send Out Constant Floating Point Constant Floating Point Bring In Floating Point Send Out F4 PULL Multiple Data Word Logic Group Push Pull Pull from System Status Table F5 NSKR Skip Jump Logic Group End of Skip Return to Beginning of Program Not Skip and Retain Not Skip and De energize F6 TMR CT R Timer Counter Logic Group Off Delay Timer On Delay Timer Counter Retentive Timer Delay F7 SEQNCR Sequencer Logic Group Load Sequencer Unload Sequencer Sequencer F8 JSR Subroutine Logic Group Subroutine Return from Subroutine Jump to Subroutine F9 OPRATRS Operators Logic Group Conversion Operators Sub Group Math Operators Sub Group Logical Operato
329. h is used to indicate any particular conditions or errors of note associated with a specified programming operation and conditional data handling whereby conditional contacts are used to control arithmetic or comparison operations 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 134 4 2 Data Representation Background When discussing number systems and math operations it is important to remember a few basic facts about data information processing Within any type of computing device information is represented by sequences of binary digits of a specific length The definitions of these binary sequences is determined by the system designer and or the operator who is operating the machine Binary sequences may be interpreted as either instructions or data As data they may be further interpreted as nonnumeric data such as alphanumeric characters as numbers they may be further interpreted as either integers fixed point real numbers or floating point real numbers Integer data types There are several different ways in which a binary sequence of integers may be interpreted or represented Unsigned integer representation Signed integer representation of which there are two common methods sign magnitude representation of signed integer twos complement representation of signed integer Refer to Figure 4 1 which illustrates these three most common methods of representing integer data 620 12 1633 36 LCs ca
330. hains of math calculations typical applications include manipulation of process data such as performing PID algorithms and other math intensive process industry applications 90 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Bring in Refer to Table 3 25 for bring in specifications Table 3 25 Bring In Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Collects 16 consecutive I O addresses or one data register and deposits this data into processor for use within logic line Characteristics Data word can be read from Register Function s data or I O Status Tables when accessing I O Status Table CPM must construct 16 bit word since each register location consists of a single bit specific bring in operations for each location include Data Register Table reads single 16 bit word from specified address in data table see Figure 3 16 specifying address 4095 or lower transfers data from I O Status Table I O Status Table reads 16 consecutive I O Status Table registers using specified address as most significant bit MSB see Figure 3 16 when reading from real I O this operation is not limited by physical I O card boundaries module addresses or type of discrete I O module input or output lowest valid address specified is 15 which provides bits 15 MSB through
331. he Edit and Display Function Menu shown in Figure 1 1 are each identified by function keys F11 through F20 Many of these selections contain a separate menu of available operations for the particular function selected while others directly initiate the function they represent Refer to Table 1 1 for descriptions of each function group available from the Edit and Display Functions Menu Functions F11 through F16 are available in both PROGRAM and MONITOR modes of software operation functions F17 through F20 are available as editing aids only during PROGRAM mode of operation Table 1 1 Edit and Display Functions Menu Selections Key Selection Function Refer to F11 Software Mode Control Function Causes WinLoader software to change mode of operation PROGRAM or MONITOR Subsection 1 2 F12 Auxiliary Function Menu Accesses auxiliary menu which calls up additional edit and display functions Subsection 1 3 and Section 2 F13 Search Functions Used to locate specific items in any ladder logic program Subsection 1 4 F14 Force Functions Provide method for overriding status of contacts and coils as they are input from field devices or solved by program logic Subsection 1 5 F15 Multi element Display Function Allows you to display ON OFF conditions or data values contained in up to 8 addresses while monitoring a line of ladder logic in an executing program Subsection 1 6 F16 Ladder Logic Lis
332. he PC when this function is initiated the program in Memory Function is compared instruction by instruction with the master program all miscompares are displayed to the main screen display and a file is created from path specified which contains the miscompare information Verifying ladder logic is useful in that it indicates whether or not the program in the CPM s Memory Function has been changed from the original master program verifying data indicates whether predetermined data values such as timer and counter preset values have been changed Press Ctrl NmLk if necessary to pause the error listing to examine miscompares Press Esc to exit Verify function note that there is a slight delay before exit occurs Note that miscompare file created uses name specified during Verify operation with a VER extension this file may then be stored or printed as a record of the Verify operation or used as a reference for editing the program 58 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 2 4 Documentation Functions Menu F3 Accessing Documentation Functions Menu Press F3 Documentation Menu from the Auxiliary Function Menu to access the auxiliary Documentation Functions Menu shown in Figure 2 5 below This menu provides access to the four documentation functions described in Table 2 5 below Refer to 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions LDR007 for complete descriptions and coverage of each of the
333. he WinLoader only affects the display and not the operation of the CPM if the data in address 5500 is a signed value then the signed display mode should be used while viewing this line if the data in address 5500 is an unsigned value then the unsigned display mode should be used to view this line and two less than instructions should be used to tell the CPM what integer comparison type to execute Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 25 3 7 Integer Comparison Instructions Continued Less than characteristics continued Figure 3 32 Less Than Characteristics Continued on next page 26 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 7 Integer Comparison Instructions Continued Greater than Refer to Table 3 39 for greater than specifications Table 3 39 Greater Than Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Compares two data values and if the first value is greater than the second value power is passed to succeeding instructions Characteristics Cannot execute a direct bit by bit comparison of both values since most significant bit is included as data for unsigned integer values and is a sign bit for signed integer values Signed integer values range from 32767 to 32768 and use twos complement notation if sign bit is 0 remaining 15 bits represent a positive value from 0 to 3276
334. he addition operation is executed Figure 4 7 Example of Using Skip Instruction to Control Execution Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 144 4 4 Conditional Data Handling Continued Using conditional contact to control execution You may also use a conditional contact to control execution when a logic line ends in a send out or Push instruction see Figure 4 8 Figure 4 8 Example of Using Conditional Contact to Control Execution Conditional contacts may also be used to control execution at various points within the logic line see Figure 4 9 In the Figure 4 9 example the send out value is determined by the status of the three conditional contacts see Table 4 2 Table 4 2 Send Out Values for Conditional Contacts Example Contacts 55 66 77 Send Out Value False False or True False or True 0 True False False 0 True False True 20 True True False 60 True True True 30 Figure 4 9 Example of Using Conditional Contact to Control Execution at Various Points Within Logic Line Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 145 4 4 Conditional Data Handling Continued Rules governing conditional data handling The following rules govern conditional data handling Each down branch is newly conditioned unless preceding logic on main line is false Each down branch should have exclusive conditioning if not the last bran
335. his line in addition to the user defined conditioning logic displays the Function Block number size and user defined input and output parameters and parameter names Function Block End FBE Ladder logic line containing final EOS of the Function Block Function Block Parameter Lines Either of the required lines following the FBD into which the input FBI and output FBO parameters are programmed word data from Constants Bring Ins Indirect Bring Ins PULLs and Floating Point operations are loaded onto the internal stack of the CPM these lines are automatically programmed by the WinLoader when a Function Block is created Function Block Sequence Specific sequence of opcodes that define the start or end line of the Function Block sequence for the start line is KIN status KIN number of lines KIN number of lines NSKR or NSKD user selected valid skip number 1 32766 that is used as the Function Block number sequence for end line is KIN number of lines KIN number of lines EOS vector matching the start line s skip number There may be conditioning logic before the start sequence but the end sequence stands alone on the line Continued on next page 84 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 Glossary Continued Parameter Address or constant represented on FBD line which user may modify to implement desired function of a specific Function Block a parameter name may
336. iately preceding current cursor position on ladder line being displayed Continued on next page 24 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 1 6 Multi element Display Function F15 Continued Accessing Multi element Display continued Table 1 12 Multi element Display Selections Key Selection Function F1 On Off Conditio n Displays On or Off status of any I O Status Table address a B binary appears to left of address entered F2 Integer Data Displays integer data value contained in specified Data Register Table address a D data appears to left of address entered data displays in number system selected signed unsigned hex or floating point prior to entering Multi element Display For 620 06 10 15 25 and 35 LCs the F2 Integer Data function described above appears as F2 Data Value but has same functionality and F3 Floating Point Data function described below is not available F3 Floating Point Data Displays floating point data value contained in two specified contiguous Data Register Table addresses an F appears to left of address entered Figure 1 7 Multi element Display Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 25 1 6 Multi element Display Function F15 Continued On Off condition display format When you select F1 On Off Condition as the display format for a given field in the Multi element Display the WinLoa
337. ic element within a line of ladder logic Perform the Table 1 8 procedure to insert a particular logic element within a line of ladder logic Table 1 8 Inserting a Logic Element Within a Line of Ladder Logic Step Action 1 Place cursor in desired location 2 Press INSERT key then right arrow key this inserts a blank logic element field at the cursor s position 3 Select and enter desired logic element 4 Load line of ladder logic into program using one of the line loading procedures presented in Table 1 10 Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 9 1 3 General Editing Procedures Continued Deleting a logic element from within a line of ladder logic Perform the Table 1 9 procedure to delete a logic element from within a line of ladder logic Table 1 9 Deleting a Logic Element from Within a Line of Ladder Logic Step Action 1 Place cursor to left of element to be deleted 2 Press DELETE key then RIGHT ARROW key this deletes element to the right of the cursor leaving an open space at that point in the line of logic Note that lines with open spaces are not valid Logic element can also be deleted by first placing cursor to right of element to be deleted then pressing key thereby causing a blank element field to overwrite the element that was to be deleted on the screen 3 Load line of logic into program Entering a line of ladder logic Perform the appr
338. ic Group 2 Press F6 to select floating point constant 3 Enter desired floating point constant and press RETURN or ENTER Continued on next page 8 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Floating point constant characteristics Figure 3 25 Floating Point Constant Characteristics Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 9 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Pull Refer to Table 3 33 for Pull specifications Table 3 33 Pull Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Transfers one to eight 16 bit words to CPM s stack this data word can be read from the Register Function s data table or directly from analog or special function input modules Table 3 33 is continued on next page 10 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Pull continued Table 3 33 Pull Specifications Continued SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Characteristics Specific Pull operations for each accessible location include Data Register Table reads one to eight 16 bit words using specified address as most significant register see Figure 3 26 analog and special function input modules instruction reads one 16 bit word from each specified address see Figure 3 26 not used
339. ic character that is a number enter alphabetic character to indicate to WinLoader that a label is desired 2 Press Backspace key 3 Enter correct label 4 Press Enter Note that Pressing Enter actually enters the label The associated address displays If an alphacharacter is entered by mistake press Esc and reenter the Search function Continued on next page 14 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 1 4 Search Functions F13 Continued Searching for a line number Perform the Table 1 6 procedure to search for a specific line number in your ladder logic program Search Function begins search from line currently displayed to end of program to begin searching from line 1 of program press CTRL HOME Table 1 6 Searching for a Line Number Step Action 1 Select F13 to access Search Menu shown in Figure 1 3 2 Select F1 Line Number to begin search 3 Enter desired line number to be searched for and press Enter If a valid line number is entered that line will display if line number is not found the last line of ladder logic program displays the following message Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 15 1 4 Search Functions F13 Continued Searching for a line marker or Function Block marker Perform the Table 1 7 procedure to search for a specific line marker or Function Block marker in your ladder logic program Table
340. identical the primary difference between the two is the operating characteristics of the path used to get to each function F1 620 Loader Monitor function requires that the PC running the WinLoader software be connected to a 620 LC F2 620 Stand Alone Loader function does not require that the PC running the WinLoader software be connected to a 620 LC rather the WinLoader s software uses the PC s memory to emulate the memory of the 620 LC Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 53 3 2 Main Screen Display Continued Entering Main Screen Display via F1 620 Loader Monitor Perform the procedure presented in Table 3 1 to enter the WinLoader s Main Screen Display by using the F1 620 Loader Monitor function Note that this procedure requires that the PC running the WinLoader software be connected to a 620 LC Table 3 1 Entering Main Screen Display Via F1 620 Loader Monitor Step Action 1 Press F1 620 Loader Monitor from WinLoader Main Menu to access 620 Selection Menu 2 Refer to Subsection 2 2 620 Loader Monitor F1 in Section 2 of this manual for instructions on configuring 620 Selection Menu 3 After 620 Selection Menu is configured as desired press ENTER to proceed to Title Page display shown in Figure 3 1 refer to subsequent subsection titled Title Page Display for additional information If a ladder logic program currently resides in memory a prompt appears after 6
341. ied any labels descriptions created while editing ladder logic are saved to the default file name specified in the configuration file a pathname defining where ladder logic files are to be stored may be specified in the Upload Download Functions Menu refer to subsection 2 3 of 623 WinLoader Edit Display Functions LDR005 for information 60 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 3 5 Edit Title Block from 620 F8 Procedure for Editing Title Block Press F8 from the Documentation Functions Menu via the Auxiliary Functions Menu to access the Edit Title Block Menu shown in Figure 3 9 below This menu enables you to edit the 620 LC title block Refer to Table 3 9 below for descriptions of each available function from this menu Note that the end of the second line of title field is actually an 8 character field boundaried by the dashed line this field when completed informs WinLoader to load specific default file name for labels descriptions and comments associated with program Specified file name also overrides WinLoader s default file set in 623 60 Software Configuration Menu of Main Menu Press ENTER to save changes Table 3 9 Edit Title Block Menu Selections Key Selection Function F1 Edit Title Allows access to two line title field where you may assign a name to your ladder logic program F2 Edit Programmer Allows access to programmer field where you may enter programm
342. ies of reference numbers for which labels descriptions are to be created 2 Enter desired text for label description 3 Move cursor to position of letter or number that varies in series of labels descriptions 4 Press F7 CURSOR 5 Press ENTER 6 Press F2 LAST previously entered text displays variable character is ready to be changed 7 After variable character is changed press ENTER to update data base Steps 6 and 7 may be repeated as often as required Table 2 5 is continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 25 2 3 Label Description Editors F2 F5 F6 Continued Accessing Label Description Editor continued Table 2 5 Label Description Editor Functions Continued Key Function Description F3 SEARCH To search for string of up to 9 characters and if necessary replace with new string Step Action 1 Press F3 SEARCH and enter characters to be searched for in Search For display 2 Press ENTER to verify entry cursor appears at first character of specified Replace With string 3 Enter up to 9 characters to replace Search For string 4 Press ENTER to execute search If new string is shorter than string to be replaced short one overwrites number of characters equal to its length Use blank spaces to overwrite any remaining characters from previous Search For string Replace With string should
343. ignificant data at the lower address These words contain the following information DATA STATUS DEFINITION 0 0000 SLM not There is no SLM present specified in the I O Configuration Table or the SLM has not gone active 255 00FFH SLM present The SLM does not not tested have diagnostics capability or there is a Redundancy Module in the system 16384 4000H SLM The SLM handshake Diagnostics is passing Pass 32768 8000H SLM The SLM handshake is Diagnostics failing Fail 0013 MSB Executive ROM Check Code 0012 LSB 0011 Location currently unused 0010 Location currently unused Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 29 2 3 System Status Information Continued For 620 12 1633 36 Models continued 0009 WDT_FAIL Watchdog Timer Failure Byte This byte is used to indicate which general executive operation the PLC was performing when a WDT failure occurred It has the following format B7 Lock bit asserted to one by the scan loss service routine indicates that the byte should not be modified when a peripheral device reads this register it should then clear this register to 00 B4 B6 Not defined B3 Option Card window executing B2 On board Communications Port Window executing B1 Loader Terminal window executing B0 Real scan user program executing 0008 Reserved byte for expansion of KEYJMP2 This byte is cleared to ze
344. inLoader Overview 4 05 4 05 620 WinLoader Overview 33 34 620 WinLoader Overview 4 05 Industrial Automation and Control Honeywell Inc 1100 Virginia Drive Fort Washington Pennsylvania 19034 620 WinLoader Version 5 4 User Manual 620 8983 Rev D 620 WinLoader 620 WinLoader Installation LDR002 4 05 Copyright Notices and Trademarks Printed in U S A Copyright 2005 by Honeywell Inc Revision 01 April 01 2005 While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in its written agreement with and for its customer In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect special or consequential damages The information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice This document was prepared using Information Mapping methodologies and formatting principles IBM AT is a registered trademark of IBM Corporation Information Mapping is a trademark of Information Mapping Inc Terminal Emulator is a registered trademark of Honeywell Inc Honeywell Industrial Automation and Control Automation College 1100 Virginia Drive Fort Washington PA 19034 ii 620 WinLoader Installation 4 05 About This Publication This manual provides Installati
345. ined inside the Function Block that is in the interior of the Function Block along with other ladder logic lines that support the Function Block and allow interaction with the main ladder logic program environment The general format of Function Block TSpndl1 showing in detail the external Function Block Display Line and each internal line of the Function Block is presented in Figure 2 3 next page explanations follow Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 7 2 2 Function Block Operation Continued General description continued Figure 2 3 Function Block Format for Function Block TSpndl1 Continued on next page 8 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 2 2 Function Block Operation Continued Line 1 Function Block Display FBD line Line 1 the Function Block Display FBD line which contains the initial NSK instruction of the Function Block is seen externally as the Function Block Display Box with a ladder rung that represents the enable instructions for the Function Block For Function Block TSpndl1 the FBD line has the format presented in Figure 2 4 Figure 2 4 Function Block Display FBD Line Format for TSpndl1 Line 1 The Figure 2 4 FBD line which is unseen when the interior of the Function Block is accessed as described in Section 5 Function Block Displays is automatically programmed by the WinLoader after you configure the overhead of the Functi
346. ines parity if any associated with a message character as either ODD EVEN or NONE Figure 3 6 Serial Port Configuration Menu Continued on next page 52 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 3 2 Printer Function Menu F1 Continued F7 F8 Cross Reference Range When either the F7 Start Reference Number or F8 End Reference Number function is selected from the Printer Parameters Menu a Cross Reference Range Entry Block appears on the screen shown in Figure 3 7 below This entry block allows you to select up to eight address ranges to be cross referenced during the ladder logic listing When editing a range use Up Arrow Down Arrow TAB and SHIFT TAB to select field to be edited SPACEBAR to reset selected field to zero DEL to delete value from selected field ENTER to terminate editing and save data for reference during printing Figure 3 7 Cross Reference Range Entry Block Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 53 3 2 Printer Function Menu F1 Continued F9 Corresponding Print Mode When F9 Compressed Print mode is selected from the Printer Parameters Menu ON position all lines of ladder logic are printed in the compressed mode This also enables the software to place the cross reference of the terminator instruction on the right hand side of the printed page immediately to the right of the terminator instruction
347. information as prompted reference address start address size etc 5 Press RETURN or ENTER after each entry Continued on next page 122 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 13 Matrix Instructions Continued Exclusive OR XOR matrix Refer to Table 3 84 for exclusive OR matrix specifications Table 3 84 Exclusive OR XOR Matrix Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Exclusive ORs XORs contents of matrix A with matrix B and transfers resulting pattern to matrix C Characteristics Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program an exclusive OR matrix instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F10 to select Matrix Logic Group 2 Enter desired matrix address 3 Press F5 to select XOR Matrix instruction 4 Program the necessary matrix information as prompted reference address start address size etc 5 Press RETURN or ENTER after each entry Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 123 3 13 Matrix Instructions Continued AND matrix Refer to Table 3 85 for AND matrix specifications Table 3 85 AND Matrix Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Logically ANDs the contents of matrix A with matrix B and transfers resulting bit patt
348. ing Line Comments 26081 26181 and 26281 Function Block Line by Line Description using Address Comments Each address Number of Lines Used 84 Number of Input Parameters 20 Number of Output Parameters None Number of Memory Words Required 580 Amount of Additional Scan Time per Function Block 7 milliseconds Number of Internal Coil Addresses Required per Function Block on Block Loads 10 Number of Data Registers Required on Block Loads 106 Lines to be Changed by User 8 and 15 Specific Parameters to be Changed Before Use Addresses 95 and 144 Default Function Block Stacking Register Block Starting Address 4351 Default Function Block Stacking Line Terminator Address 4094 Continued on next page 76 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 7 2 Function Block Library Control Programs Continued Ratio Control Single Loop PID Function Block continued Figure 7 5 Ratio Control Single Loop PID Function Block External View Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 77 7 2 Function Block Library Control Programs Continued Split Range Time Proportioning Single Loop PID Function Block This is a single loop PID control program that offers Automatic and Manual modes with split range time proportioning output control It is intended for applications where it is required to proportion the amount of ON time to OFF time of both an on off heating device contr
349. ing in instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F3 to select Bring In Logic Group 2 Enter desired address 3 Press F3 to select Bring In instruction Continued on next page 92 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Bring in characteristics Figure 3 16 Bring In Characteristics 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 93 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Indirect bring in Refer to Table 3 26 for indirect bring in specifications Table 3 26 Indirect Bring In Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Operates much like direct bring in instruction in that it transfers a single 16 bit data word from Register Function to CPM s stack this data word can be read from Register Function s data or I O Status Tables Characteristics As illustrated in Figures 3 17 and 3 18 two addresses are associated with indirect bring ins Reference Address XXXX contains data which identifies second address known as effective address Effective Address YYYY contains final process manufacturing related data required by control program normally not shown by instruction final data ZZZZ is displayed beneath bring in symbol Although Effective Address YYYY is normally not shown it can be temporarily displayed
350. instruction The instructions are presented by groups as indicated in the Topic table above 40 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 2 Contact and Coil Instructions Contact and coil types Table 3 1 presents the eight types of contacts and coils presented in this section Table 3 1 Contacts and Coils Contact and Coil Instructions Refer to pages Normally Open NO Contact 40 42 Normally Closed NC Contact 41 42 Transition ON Contact 43 45 Transition OFF Contact 44 45 Nonretentive Coil 46 48 Retentive Coil 47 48 Latch Coil 49 51 Unlatch Coil 50 51 Contacts Contacts are logic inputs that correspond to field devices or internal coils and can be used to input the ON OFF states of field devices such as toggle switches proximity switches infrared sensors level switches flow switches push buttons input the ON OFF states of internal coils or logic outputs and can be used to provide interlocking and internal control in situations where external physical input devices are not needed or desired Coils Coils are logic line terminators or outputs that correspond to field devices or internal coils and can be used to control the ON OFF states of field devices such as indicator lamps control relays solenoids fans motor starters alarms control the ON OFF states of internal coils which might be used to provide interlocki
351. inued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 33 3 3 Entering Function Block Parameters Continued Entering output parameters Perform the Table 3 7 procedure to enter output parameters Table 3 7 Entering Output Parameters Step Action 1 From main screen display with Edit amp Display Functions Menu at bottom of screen use arrow keys to position cursor on right side of Function Block Display box in any appropriate parameter position Output Parameter Functions Menu shown in Figure 3 5 appears at bottom of main screen display Refer to Table 3 8 for descriptions of each available selection from Output Parameter Functions Menu 2 Enter desired output parameter address and type in either order and press ENTER 3 If desired to add parameter names refer to 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions LDR007 for procedure for entering Function Block Parameter names Figure 3 5 Output Parameter Functions Menu Table 3 8 Output Parameter Functions Menu Selections Key Selection Function F1 Indirect Send Out Used to output data to an address that is to be set up and possibly changed by external program F2 Coil Used to indicate that a single bit is set reset as a result of Function Block operation F3 PUSH Used to push data to defined registers or to a defined real I O a PUSH of n registers 0 lt n lt 9 results in n entries in Function Block Display and FBO li
352. involve entry of numbers when desired function is pressed a data entry window opens in the associated menu allowing you to enter the reference number press ENTER to verify that selected number is correct Figure 3 5 Printer Parameters Menu Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 49 3 2 Printer Function Menu F1 Continued Printer Parameters Menu continued Table 3 5 Printer Parameters Menu Selections Key Selection Function F1 Port Selects output port for selected listing options include LPT1 NTWK COM1 COM2 and DISK Refer to subsequent subsection titled F1 Port Function for more information F2 Columns Determines column width 80 or 132 columns Formats vary depending on compressed print mode function selection see F9 Compressed Print F3 Start Page Number Determines number printed on first page Range 1 9999 F4 Lines Per Page Determined by page length 50 99 0 NO BREAK F5 Start Line Number Determines line number where ladder logic printout begins F6 End Line Number Determines line number where ladder logic listing ends F7 Start Reference Number Determines lowest address used in documentation listings and in line cross reference Range 0 8191 Refer to subsequent subsection titled F7 F8 Cross Reference Range F8 End Reference Number Determines highest address used in documentation listings and in line cro
353. ion it is used by the CPM to store system information including status of jumper DIP switch or software selectable features of CPM I O card faults processor rack module statuses force count and other appropriate status information The data displayed by the WinLoader on the status line in any of the three built in diagnostic displays is obtained from the System Status Table As illustrated in Figure 3 28 the System Status Table consists of 4096 eight bit registers which are addressed from 0 to 4095 Note that while the System Status Table and the I O Status Table each share identical addresses they are two separate tables The bring in instruction is used to access the I O Status Table while the Pull from System Status Table instruction accesses the System Status Table Figure 3 28 System Status Table Structure 16 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Pull from System Status Table Refer to Table 3 35 for Pull from System Status Table specifications Table 3 35 Pull from System Status Table Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 36 LCs Symbol Usage Permits accessing of up to eight System Status Table registers operates as standard Pull instruction with exception that it is used exclusively to access the System Status Table Characteristics When pulling one or more System Status Table
354. ion Block control programs Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 63 7 1 Overview Continued General description of Function Block Library The 623 WinLoader s Function Block Library model number 623 6050 is furnished by Honeywell on a separate software diskette than the main 623 60 WinLoader program The Function Block Library contains a set of Honeywell created control programs that may be used for Function Block programming This Function Block Library which is updated periodically with new library routines is composed of LDR files for ladder logic and FBL files for parameter names Installing the Function Block Library The 623 6050 Function Block Library is installed during normal installation of the 623 WinLoader software program Refer to 623 WinLoader Installation LDR002 for the complete software installation procedure Continued on next page 64 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 7 1 Overview Continued Copying Function Block Library control programs Perform the Table 7 1 procedure to copy any Honeywell defined Function Block Library control programs to different areas of your control program Refer to instructions in body of PID Function Blocks for explanations of how to change addresses when copying the same Function Block Refer to line comments that describe operation of Function Block and what needs to be done to complete insertion proce
355. ion Blocks general guidelines for using Function Blocks as subroutines 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 81 8 2 Nesting Function Blocks Guidelines for nesting Function Blocks Function Blocks may be nested indefinitely limited only by maximum amount of system memory available 82 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 8 3 Using Function Blocks as Subroutines Guidelines for using Function Blocks as subroutines Certain applications may benefit by calling a Function Block a subroutine This may be done by defining a Function Block body as a JSR to a subroutine which has the control logic desired The parameters put on the stack may be pushed into registers in common with the subroutine before the JSR is executed or may be unloaded to the desired registers immediately upon entry to the subroutine The subroutine may be placed either inside or outside of a Function Block however in either case the stack data must be properly handled 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 83 Glossary Function Block FB Group of lines of ladder logic bounded by NSKR or NSKD and EOS instructions with specific sequences of opcodes preceding those line terminators Function Block Body FBB Actual control logic that executes in order to perform the function of the Function Block Function Block Display FBD Ladder logic line containing initial NSKR of the Function Block t
356. ion as determined from History bits if contact has transitioned from OFF to ON it is interpreted as being TRUE if contact has not transitioned from OFF to ON it is interpreted as being FALSE this includes ON to OFF ON to ON and OFF to OFF comparisons Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a transition ON contact in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F1 to select the Contact Logic Group 2 Enter desired address 3 Press F3 to select Transition On contact 46 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 2 Contact and Coil Instructions Continued Transition OFF contact Refer to Table 3 5 for transition OFF contact specifications Table 3 5 Transition OFF Contact Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 10 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Examines Input and Output Status Tables at specified address for an ON to OFF transition in order to pass power for one logic controller scan simulates momentary push button operation nonmomentary input device such as toggle switch reacts similarly to momentary push button when transition ON contact is addressed to it provides read in type pulse block of ladder logic may be conditioned to execute only when field device or internal coil addressed by transition ON contact transitions from OFF to ON can input output specific values from continuous
357. ion instructions indirect bring in indirect send out Like their direct counterparts these indirect integer data manipulation instructions are also used to transfer data words 16 bits between the Register Function and a working buffer in the CPM called the stack Indirect data manipulation instructions are different from direct data manipulation instructions in that they use a technique of indirectly addressing the location where data is to be retrieved or stored The address assigned to the indirect instruction does not specify the location where data is to be read from or written to in the Register Function rather it specifies the address of the address where data is to be read from or written to Although this round about approach might seem pointless and clumsy it should be noted that indirect addressing provides flexibility that is not available in direct addressing For example suppose you wished to create a history table of data values read from a field device and you also wanted to periodically record the current value sequentially one at a time stored in registers 6001 through 6010 You can do this by indexing the address of the registers that contain the data values This technique of indexing which is used with indirect addressing permits you to use a minimal amount of logic therefore less memory to create larger data bases Continued on next page 88 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 6 Dat
358. ion until accumulated value equals preset value when False as defined by preceding control logic timer stops accumulating time but accumulated value is retained RST reset input line when True as defined by preceding control logic timer is permitted to accumulate time if TRN input line is also True when False accumulator value is reset to zero regardless of current value or status of TRN line OUT output line when accumulated value equals preset value OUT line goes True provides logical current flow to succeeding logic elements on its line Up to seven logic elements may be entered in series on each input line paralleling elements on an input line is not valid but such complex logic structures can be programmed on a preceding line with their output coil controlling a contact on counter s input line additional complex logic structures may also be programmed on output line after timer and before line terminator 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 71 3 4 Timer and Counter Instructions Continued Retentive timer continued Table 3 18 Retentive Timer Specifications Continued SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Characteristics continued Retentive timer is similar to contact instruction if accumulator s value equals preset value logic element is True and logical current is passed if accumulator s value does not equal preset value logic element is False and logica
359. ions Table 2 7 Comment Editor Functions Command Mode Key Function Description F1 GOTO To GOTO any reference number in Comment Editor whether defined or not Step Action 1 Press F1 GOTO 2 Enter desired reference number in response to prompt 3 Press ENTER After specified reference number is found it displays on field line along with any text previously defined for that reference number editor automatically enters Edit mode and permits you to edit comment Table 2 7 is continued on next page 32 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 2 4 Comment Editors F3 F4 Continued F2 LAST Permits you to create series of comments that are very similar without entering each series separately Step Action 1 Enter first in sequence of similar comments and press F10 STORE to load that comment into memory 2 Press Esc to exit Edit mode and use F1 GOTO function to display comment field of any desired reference number press Esc to enter Mode Command 3 Press F2 LAST to select last function contents of last stored comment display and editor enters Edit mode to modify comment if necessary 4 Press F10 STORE to store new comment this process may be repeated any number of times Table 2 7 is continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 33 2 4 Comment Editors F3 F4 Continued Com
360. ions are used to place the two words onto stack AND instruction tells processor to AND last word placed on stack with next word placed there then to write results of operation back to stack resulting word can then be read from stack by another data manipulation instruction and used as any other 16 bit data Operates on 16 bit integer data only Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program an AND instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F9 to select Operators Logic Group 2 Press F8 to select Logical Operators Logic Group 3 Press F1 to select AND instruction Continued on next page 50 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 9 Logical Operator Instructions Continued AND characteristics Figure 3 40 illustrates characteristics associated with the AND instruction Figure 3 40 AND Characteristics Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 51 3 9 Logical Operator Instructions Continued OR Refer to Table 3 48 for OR specifications Table 3 48 OR Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 36 LCs Symbol Usage Performs OR operation on two 16 bit data words see Figure 3 41 Characteristics Each bit of one word is ORed with corresponding bit position in other for example bit position zero is always ORed with bit position zero bit position
361. ip Instructions Continued on next page 80 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 5 Skip Instructions Continued Nesting skip instructions Skip instructions may be nested and most programming languages permit nesting of certain instructions The most common nesting instructions are usually defined as one program block entirely included within another program block as shown in left hand side of Figure 3 12 Interleaved nests that is nests that either begin in or end in another nest but are not wholly contained in that nest although less common are also permitted as shown in right hand side of Figure 3 12 Figure 3 12 Nested Skip Instructions Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 81 3 5 Skip Instructions Continued Not skip and retain NSKR Refer to Table 3 21 for not skip and retain specifications Table 3 21 Not Skip and Retain NSKR Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 10 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Enables program scan to skip over logic lines while retaining on off status of output coils and freezing data in send outs and Push instructions refer to subsection 3 6 for description of Push instruction Characteristics When preceding control logic is True scan does NOT SKIP any lines of logic in skip block skip block logic is executed False scan SKIPS any lines of logic in s
362. ipulation instruction that allows a sequencer s data table to be accessed independently of sequencer instruction Only one load sequencer instruction is executed per scan for each sequencer if multiple load sequencer lines are programmed for a given sequencer and two or more are enabled at the same time only the last will be executed Table 3 69 is continued on next page 102 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 12 Sequencer Instructions Continued Load sequencer continued Table 3 69 Load Sequencer Specifications Continued SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a load sequencer instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F7 to select Sequencer Logic Group 2 Enter address where data to be loaded is stored 3 Press F5 to select load sequencer instruction Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 103 3 12 Sequencer Instructions Continued Load sequencer characteristics Figure 3 62 illustrates characteristics associated with the load sequencer instruction Figure 3 62 Load Sequencer Characteristics Continued on next page 104 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 12 Sequencer Instructions Continued Unload sequencer Refer to Table 3 70 for unload sequencer specifications Table 3 70 Unload Sequencer Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11
363. is means that your register table data files are saved to and loaded from the same directory as the WinLoader s application files Default pathnames and file names for register table data files must be specified in the Register Table Functions Menu but default file names for documentation must be specified in the Documentation Functions Menu described in subsection 2 4 of this manual unless the WinLoader was started from the same directory that contains the register table data files and documentation files to be used or these parameters are specified in the configuration file Continued on next page 72 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 2 7 Register Table Functions F6 Continued Selecting Register Table Functions Prior to selecting the desired Register Table Function consider whether the pathname needs to be changed As mentioned previously the current pathname is shown on the display at the bottom of the menu and is initially read from the configuration file Perform the Table 2 10 procedure to change the pathname as desired note that changes made from the Register Table Functions Menu will not change the contents of the configuration file Table 2 10 Changing the Pathname Step Action 1 Select F4 Enter Pathname from the Register Table Functions Menu WinLoader software presents a 30 character window permitting you to specify desired pathname 2 Enter desired pathname Pathname may be u
364. is to be stored If you answer N to Save prompt then all Function Block labels in memory are saved to specified project file enter pathname and file name where information is to be stored If a file is present with selected name you will be prompted to select whether existing file should be overwritten with new data Function Block labels are saved to file with default filename FB00XX whereby 00 digits represent single Function Block nameset in that file 20 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 2 2 Function Block Parameter Name Editor F1 Continued Entering parameter names Perform the Table 2 3 procedure to enter a parameter name from the Function Block Parameter Name Editor Table 2 3 Entering Parameter Names Step Action 1 Press E 2 Enter desired Function Block number and press ENTER 3 Enter up to 45 input parameter names and 45 output parameter names up to 7 characters each and press ENTER after each entry Press Up Arrow Down Arrow Left Arrow and Right Arrow keys to move cursor between input and output entries Press Home Del and Backspace keys to edit individual input and output entries 4 Press F10 Store to save parameter names into a nameset in memory and then press F10 Save to save to disk or press ESC to abort entry Respond Y to prompt to save parameter names to disk then enter pathname and file name where informatio
365. isting ladder logic block from disk to a 620 LC Table 1 19 Procedure for Loading Ladder Logic Block Step Action 1 Press F9 LOAD from Block Operations Functions Menu 2 Select type of file to be loaded Press F1 LDR for ladder logic Press F2 FB for Function Block 3 Enter line number where ladder logic block should be loaded 4 Press ENTER to verify line number Block Addressing Screen shown in Figure 1 14 below displays use arrow keys to enter desired start and end fields Any number between 0 and 8191 is valid entry for start and end fields if there is address overlap or calculation that exceeds specified range error message appears and overlapping offset or range is highlighted 5 Press F6 to continue after ranges and start addresses are defined 6 Enter appropriate filename when software filename prompt appears Figure 1 14 Block Addressing Screen Continued on next page 38 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 1 8 Block Operations Functions F17 Continued Saving ladder logic blocks Perform the Table 1 20 procedure to save a ladder logic block from a 620 LC to a specified PC disk Table 1 20 Procedure for Saving Ladder Logic Block Step Action 1 Press F10 SAVE from Block Operations Functions Menu 2 Press F1 LDR for ladder logic file then define ladder logic block as desired refer to Table 1 14 3 Enter filename of up to 8 characters and veri
366. ity Functions F4 Continued Changing password Perform the Table 2 13 procedure to change the password as desired Table 2 10 Changing the Password Step Action 1 Select F5 Edit Password from the Security Selection Menu shown in Figure 2 14 the present password or default password 620 if no password has previously been assigned is erased the cursor is positioned at the first character of the password 2 Type in the new password 3 Press ENTER Note that when you use a floppy disk as the default directory you must remove the write protect tabs before pressing ENTER to save the information If the default password is desired press ENTER after pressing F5 If you enter a new password from any device by means of Loader Terminal software or any I O Configuration Utility software the default password for all systems becomes the most recent password 4 Press ENTER to return to the WinLoader Main Menu If you use the ESC key to return to the Main Menu note that none of the new security codes or password information will be saved and the codes and passwords will remain as they were when the Security Selection Menu was first selected Continued on next Page 28 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 2 5 Password amp Security Functions F4 Continued Removing installed security codes Perform the Table 2 14 procedure to remove any installed security code To remove an
367. kip and Retain OUT Output RBP Return to Beginning of Program RTS Return to Subroutine RST Reset SUB Subroutine XOR Exclusive OR 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference ix References Publication Title Publication Number Binder Title Binder Number 620 WinLoader Overview LDR001 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Installation LDR002 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Implementation LDR003 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions LDR005 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Function Blocks LDR006 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Documentation Functions LDR007 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Networking Functions LDR008 620 WinLoader 620 8983 620 WinLoader Utility Functions LDR009 620 WinLoader 620 8983 4 05 620 Wi
368. kip block skip block logic is not executed All on off conditions and data values within an active skipped skip block are retained output coils are frozen in last state prior to being skipped data values timer accumulators send outs Push instruction values etc are frozen in last states prior to being skipped Can be forced to a desired True False state using force function when FORCED ON acts as if control logic is True when FORCED OFF acts as if control logic is False Acts as a line terminator see Figure 3 13 Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a not skip and retain instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F5 to select Skip Logic Group 2 Enter desired numeric label 3 Press F5 to select NSKR Continued on next page 82 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 5 Skip Instructions Continued Not skip and deenergize NSKD Refer to Table 3 22 for not skip and deenergize specifications Table 3 22 Not Skip and Deenergize NSKD Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 10 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Enables program scan to skip over logic lines but clears output coil status and data of any send outs or Push instructions in first scan after first scan acts as an NSKR Characteristics When preceding control logic is True scan does
369. l current is not passed Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a retentive timer instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F6 to select Timer Counter Logic Group 2 Press F6 to select retentive timer 3 Enter desired accumulator register address and then press RETURN or ENTER 4 Enter desired preset value in desired resolution 5 Press RETURN to enter retentive timer Continued on next page 72 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 4 Timer and Counter Instructions Continued Retentive timer characteristics The retentive timer is illustrated in Figure 3 9 Figure 3 9 Retentive Timer Characteristics 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 73 3 4 Timer and Counter Instructions Continued Counter Refer to Table 3 19 for counter specifications Table 3 19 Counter Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 10 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Resides in 9 by 5 matrix portion of logic line and used when wished to keep running total number of events that occur in given time period or during certain operation track number of ongoing tasks or operations taking place as new ones start and others complete Table 3 19 is continued on next page 74 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 4 Timer and Counter Instructions Continued Counter continued Table 3 19 Counter Speci
370. last two 16 bit words from stack and writes them to Data Register Table addresses 5109 and 5108 In the second line of logic Bring in instruction reads integer value 256 from Data Register Table address 5001 and places it on stack Integer to floating point instruction reads last word placed on stack converts last word on stack to its floating point equivalent 2 56 x 1002 places 32 bit result two 16 bit words on stack Addition instruction adds last two 16 bit words placed on stack with next two 16 bit words placed on stack floating point bring in instruction reads floating point value 3 02 x 1002 from Data Register Table addresses 5107 and 5106 and places this value on stack addition operation is immediately executed and result 5 58 x 1002 is placed on stack 2 56 x 1002 3 02 x 1002 5 58 x 1002 Floating point send out instruction reads last two 16 bit words from stack 5 58 x 1002 and writes them to Data Register Table addresses 5105 and 5104 Continued on next page 80 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 11 Data Conversion Instructions Continued Integer to floating point conversion characteristics Figure 3 52 Integer to Floating Point Conversion Characteristics Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 81 3 11 Data Conversion Instructions Continued Floating point to integer conversion Refer to Table 3 62 fo
371. lation Instructions Continued Constant characteristics Figure 3 24 Constant Characteristics Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 7 Floating point constant Refer to Table 3 32 for floating point constant instruction specifications Table 3 32 Floating Point Constant Instruction Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 36 LCs Symbol Usage allows programming a 32 bit data value for use in several types of floating point operations math provides means for establishing constant values in mathematical formulas comparisons provides means for establishing a benchmark or parameters upon which process manufacturing data can be judged Characteristics Does not use address numeric label or reference number Numeric value is stored in memory function as part of two 24 bit words see Figure 3 25 upper eight bits of each word are opcodes indicating most or least significant part of 32 bit data word lower 16 bits of each word are its numeric value including sign exponent and fraction Numeric value does not change and cannot be forced Range of numeric value is 1 175494 x 10 38 to 3 40282 x 1038 Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a floating point constant instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F3 to select Bring In Log
372. lays different amounts of memory available if appropriate for designated 620 CPM select memory size that corresponds with your system When in Stand Alone mode your PC s RAM memory is used to emulate 620 LC s main memory main memory is area in which 620 LC stores the user control program depending on amount of RAM available you may not be able to emulate amount of main memory in designated 620 LC in these cases select largest memory size that your PC can emulate F3 Register Size Toggling F3 displays different amounts of data registers available if appropriate for designated 620 CPM select size that corresponds with your system F4 Real I O Size Toggling F4 displays different amounts of real I O available if appropriate for designated 620 CPM select size that corresponds with your system F5 Free Allocated S A Memory Permits you to reallocate your PC s RAM memory When Stand Alone mode is selected a specific amount of PC s RAM memory is allocated for an area to emulate the selected memory size after Stand Alone mode is entered you can if desired go back and change the size and type of CPM which may also change the required amount of main memory which is being emulated if size and type is changed from one that requires a large amount of PC s RAM memory for main memory emulation the Free Allocated Stand Alone memory permits you to reallocate your PC s RAM memory using the F2 function Note th
373. le Description CONFIG EXE Allows setting certain default conditions Loader and Utility software read these conditions before execution DCMNTED EXE Allows editing Address skip and subroutine labels Descriptions Address and line comments LOADER CFG Contains configuration data LOADER EXE Performs all ladder logic programming and some documentation functions LOADER HLP Contains WinLoader Help Screen text must be resident on same drive or directory from which WinLoader software is loaded and executed MODCNFIG EXE Contains configuration utilities for 621 0020R and 621 0025R I O Modules SCR LD I DAT SCR LD R DAT STR LD I DAT STR LD R DAT These files are necessary WinLoader screen and text support files 621 0025 EXE Supports RTDM 621 0020 EXE Supports UAIM 621 0025 HLP Help screens for RTDM MODCNFIG CFG Contains the configuration data for RTDM and UAIM 4 05 620 WinLoader Overview 21 3 2 Software Characteristics Continued WinLoader file extensions Refer to Table 3 2 below for a list of 620 WinLoader file extensions Table 3 2 620 WinLoader File Extensions File Description Filename ACE Logic Element Address Comment Filename BCE Bit Read Write Instruction Comment File Filename BLB Bit Read Write Instruction Label File Filename CFG Loader Configuration Files Filename ERR Ladder Logic Load Error File Filename FBL Function Block Lad
374. le or data storage area Characteristics Consists of refer to Figure 3 58 control output address specifies either 16 individual I O register addresses or single 16 bit data register addresses to be operated on by sequencer step number register must use same address as driver driver writes a value to this address which is used by sequencer to identify step number to call sequencer data table storage area for sequencer s output data each step word of output data requires one word of memory up to 1024 words can be stored in sequencer table numbered 1 to 1024 also requires an external driver can be timer counter send out or any instruction that writes data to Data Register Table controls step number to be used to output data to control output address When 620 LC is running data associated with each step displays one at a time as it is called for by step number register While editing a sequencer a maximum of 8 consecutive steps may be displayed X O pattern indicates conditions of control outputs or data value when step is output Xs represent ones ONs Os represent zeroes OFFs decimal value of each step displays to right of each bit pattern data words may be entered into sequencer data table one bit at a time or as their 16 bit decimal equivalent refer to Sequencer Driver Characteristics next page and Figure 3 61 Table 3 68 is c
375. lect the desired element group F1 F10 and then the specific element search begins automatically when specific element is selected To locate a TON or TOF element search for a coil with the address of the TON or TOF If a valid element has been entered the line containing that element displays with the following message displayed in lower right hand corner Again N element entered Press yes Y to proceed to any other lines that contain the same element pressing any other key will terminate the search When the end of memory is encountered or no element is found the following message displays Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 17 1 4 Search Functions F13 Continued Searching for an opcode element Perform the Table 1 9 procedure to search for a specific opcode element note that this procedure works only when the PC is in the Stand Alone mode or when it is connected to a 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 or 36 LC of revision 65 or greater Table 1 9 Searching for an Opcode Step Action 1 Select F13 to access Search Menu shown in Figure 1 3 2 Select F4 OpCode Only 3 Select desired element group F1 F10 4 Select the specific element search begins automatically when specific element is selected If you press ENTER after selecting an opcode class without selecting a particular opcode the WinLoader will perform a Class Se
376. les from the 620 60 Software Configuration Menu to access the Paths and Files Menu shown in Figure 2 16 below This menu is used to enter default pathnames and file names for ladder logic default pathnames and file names for documentation files cache memory size maximum number of labels and comments for use in ladder logic and 620 driver information Refer to Table 2 16 next two pages for descriptions of each available selection from this menu Figure 2 13 Paths and Files Menu Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 33 2 7 620 60 Software Configuration F6 Continued Paths and Files Menu continued Table 2 12 Paths and Files Menu Selections Key Title Description F1 Ladder Path Enables you to enter default pathname to be used by LOADER and UTILITY to store ladder logic can be any previously defined directory pathname if left blank directory from which LOADER was executed becomes default directory F2 Ladder File Enables you to enter default ladder logic file name to be used by LOADER and UTILITY to store ladder logic default filename 620 is used if no other filename is specified F3 Label Path Enables you to enter default pathname which can be any previously defined directory pathname to be used by LOADER and UTILITY to store documentation if left blank directory from which LOADER was executed becomes default directory F4 Label File Enables you
377. lication Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 43 3 8 Math Instructions Continued Division Refer to Table 3 45 for division specifications Table 3 45 Division Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Used to calculate a quotient and remainder the dividend is a 32 bit value while the divisor is a 16 bit data value both can be obtained through data manipulation instructions the result of the division is a 32 bit data value generated as a 16 bit quotient and a 16 bit remainder as shown below Table 3 45 is continued on next page 44 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 8 Math Instructions Continued Division continued Table 3 45 Division Specifications Continued SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Characteristics In general 620 LCs only provide for signed integer division operations Values being divided can originate from I O Status or Data Register Table and can be obtained using any combination of the following instructions bring in Pull of 1 indirect bring in constant Two 16 bit values must be placed on stack as dividend can be result of Pull of 2 or any pair of single 16 bit data manipulation instructions including Pull of 1 programmed back to back division always divides 32 bit equivalent of last two 16 bit values placed on stack even if division instru
378. listed in printout F9 Vertical Spacing If toggled to NORMAL prints ladder logic listing with vertical spaces MINIMUM printout of ladder logic listing is condensed to eliminate blank spaces and reduce paper usage by removing vertical spaces between ladder logic lines line number and documentation text and contact address comments and the ladder logic line F10 Option Summary If toggled ON appends table of print parameters to printout Continued on next page 48 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 3 2 Printer Function Menu F1 Continued Printer Parameters Menu After the ladder logic listing options have been selected and installed the Printer Parameters Menu displays on the screen shown in Figure 3 5 below This menu permits you to select the format of the printout as well as other parameters controlling the final form of the selected listing Refer to Table 3 5 next page for descriptions of each available selection from this menu Depending on options selected in Ladder Logic Listing Menu some selections may not be available in Printer Parameters Menu Functions controlled by F1 Output Port F2 Number of Printer Columns and F9 Compressed Print Mode each present options available for that function simply press selected function key until desired parameter is shown on display and continue to next function to be selected Function keys F3 through F6
379. llows contents of label description file in disk memory to be combined with label description file presently in label description editor Press F8 MERGE to enter pathname and file name of disk file to be merged with label description file presently in editor If there are labels descriptions in both files with same reference number label description from disk file overwrites one in editor F9 LOAD Loads label description file from disk into label description editor Press F9 LOAD and enter pathname and file name for file to be loaded into editor If labels descriptions already exist in editor they will be overwritten by new file F10 SAVE Permits you to save labels descriptions presently in editor onto disk memory Select F10 SAVE and enter pathname and file name where information is to be stored If file is present with that name you are prompted to select whether existing file should be overwritten with new data When Load and Save functions are selected you may obtain a directory listing by entering DIR to the file name prompt if you want to clear the present contents of the label description editor enter CLEAR in response to the file name prompt Continued on next page 28 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 2 3 Label Description Editors F2 F5 F6 Continued Editing entry in label description editor Perform the Table 2 6 procedure to edit an
380. load Download Functions Menu shown in Figure 2 3 below This menu provides access to functions which are used to transfer files containing ladder logic between the hard or floppy disk drives in your PC that is the platform which is executing the WinLoader software and the Memory Function of the 620 LC CPM Available functions include Saving ladder logic from CPM to PC s hard or floppy disk Loading ladder logic from PC s hard or floppy disk to CPM Verifying ladder logic in CPM against master copy on PC s hard or floppy disk Appending or adding ladder logic from PC s hard or floppy disk to an existing ladder logic program in CPM and Specifying pathname where ladder logic files are to be saved to or loaded from PC s hard or floppy disk Upload Download functions may be accessed in either Stand Alone or Loader Monitor mode of operation When WinLoader is in Loader Monitor mode Upload Download Functions permit you to transfer ladder logic programs from disk storage in PC to 620 LC or from 620 LC to disk storage in PC In Stand Alone mode transfers are between disk storage and PC memory that is emulating 620 LC memory Refer to Table 2 3 next page for descriptions of the functions available from the Upload Download Functions Menu Figure 2 3 Upload Download Functions Menu Continued on next page 52 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 2 3 Upload Download Functions F2 Continued
381. lock Ending Enter Line prompt enter last line number of Function Block to be copied and press ENTER note that while performing this step you may use PgUp or PgDn key to display existing lines of logic to be considered for this function 6 At Copy to Enter Line prompt enter line number where designated Function Block is to be copied to and press ENTER to complete the copy operation Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 47 4 3 Editing Function Blocks Continued Deleting Function Blocks Perform the Table 4 12 procedure to delete a designated Function Block from your ladder logic program This function may only be performed in Program mode When performing this procedure you must define entire Function Block that is partial Function Block may not be deleted Table 4 12 Deleting a Function Block Step Action 1 Display desired external Function Block Display line 2 Press F17 or Shift F7 to access Block Edit Menu shown in Figure 4 2 3 Select F4 Delete from Block Edit Menu 4 At Block Beginning Enter Line prompt enter first line number of Function Block to be deleted or accept default for current line number and press ENTER note that while performing this step you may use PgUp or PgDn key to display existing lines of logic to be considered for block define function 5 At Block Ending Enter Line
382. main support functions Transfers ladder logic programs and documentation between the WinLoader and cassette tape Uploads downloads and appends ladder logic programs both to and from a 620 LC through the 620 0048 Data Collection Module Writes 620 06 11 14 and 1631 ladder logic programs to an EPROM programmer in the Motorola S record format Converts a formatted documentation data file to the 620 60 WinLoader proprietary documentation file format and converts the proprietary files to a formatted text file Refer to 620 WinLoader Utility Functions LDR009 for complete coverage of the 620 60 Utility software 48 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 2 10 Exit F10 Exiting via main menu selection Press F10 Exit from the WinLoader Main Menu to exit the user program as shown in Figure 2 23 below Note that any previously stored ladder logic programs and documentation files are not affected if an abnormal exit occurs Figure 2 20 Exit Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 49 2 11 Help Screens Accessing help screens More than 60 Help screens are provided with the WinLoader program to provide additional information about Loader functions A typical Help screen is presented in Figure 2 24 below A function with a Help screen is indicated by the words ALT F10 HELP in the upper left corner of the Loader display When the software is in the desired function that Help scr
383. may be associated with the specified programming operation Compatible instructions The error status word may be used with any of the following math and data conversion instructions addition subtraction multiplication division absolute value square root floating point to integer conversion BCD to binary conversion binary to BCD conversion The integer to floating point conversion instruction does not permit the use of the error status word Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 142 4 3 Error Status Word Continued Error status word format The 16 bit error status word can be subdivided into two 8 bit bytes The upper eight bits are dedicated to floating point operations while the lower eight bits are dedicated to integer operations The remainder of this section addresses only the upper eight bits as they apply to floating point operations Figure 4 5 illustrates the format of the error status word while Table 4 1 defines each bit Notice that the three least significant bits in the upper eight bits those containing X s are not used Figure 4 5 Error Status Word Format Floating Point Bits Table 4 1 Error Status Word Bit Definitions Floating Point Bits Bit Definition 8 X Not used 9 X Not used 10 X Not used 11 BD BCD error this bit is asserted set to 1 when either of the following occur attempt is made to
384. mber displayed 4 Defined ladder logic block is inserted ahead of destination line entered if end line number is lower than start line number start and end line numbers are automatically adjusted to keep same lines of logic within defined block Destination line number may be any line number except one of the lines contained in defined ladder logic block You may also insert block at beginning or end of memory by pressing HOME or END keys respectively to define destination line number Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 35 1 8 Block Operations Functions F17 Continued Copying ladder logic blocks Perform the Table 1 17 procedure to copy a ladder logic block to another desired location in your program Table 1 17 Procedure for Copying Ladder Logic Block Step Action 1 Press F3 COPY from Block Operations Functions Menu prompt appears asking you to define ladder logic block s start and end line numbers 2 Define ladder logic block as desired refer to Table 1 14 prompt appears requesting line number where defined ladder logic block is to be copied 3 Enter destination line number then press ENTER to verify destination line number is complete and correct Pressing ENTER without line number entry causes defined ladder logic block to be inserted at line number displayed 4 Defined ladder logic block is inserted ahead of destination line entered if en
385. me for particular nodal address selected up to 8 characters Figure 2 17 Multidrop Node Names Menu Continued on next page 44 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 2 7 620 60 Software Configuration F6 Continued Load Configuration Press F7 Load Configuration from the 620 60 Software Configuration Menu to specify the 620 60 configuration filename to be loaded Enter the appropriate file name in file name prompt that appears note that you may obtain a directory listing by entering DIR in the file name prompt and then pressing any key to continue Refer to Figure 2 21 below for a load configuration example Figure 2 18 Load Configuration Example Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 45 2 7 620 60 Software Configuration F6 Continued Save Configuration Press F8 Save Configuration from the 620 60 Software Configuration Menu to save the 620 60 configuration file that was edited Enter the appropriate file name in file name prompt that appears note that you may obtain a directory listing by entering DIR in the file name prompt and then pressing any key to continue Refer to Figure 2 22 below for a save configuration example When selected this function prompts you to enter the file name where the node address is to be stored if that particular address has already been entered a prompt allows you to select whether the existing file should be overwritten with the new data Figu
386. ment execute and monitor ladder logic control programs residing in the 620 LC s CPM Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 5 2 2 620 Loader Monitor F1 Continued 620 Selection Menu Press F1 620 Loader Monitor from the WinLoader Main Menu to access the 620 Selection Menu shown in Figure 2 2 below This menu permits configuration of the connected 620 LC Control Processor Module CPM the 620 LC s serial communications port and any connected I O modules in the processor rack Refer to Table 2 2 next page for descriptions of each available selection from this menu If F1 620 Loader Monitor is selected and your PC is connected to a 620 LC the 620 Selection Menu displays the present configuration of the 620 LC note that this configuration may be changed as outlined in Table 2 2 If the warning below or Command 66 Port Error displays after you select F1 Loader Terminal from the Main Menu check the PC 620 LC adapter cable connections power cable and loader port connections if the 620 6150A or 620 6020 products are being used also check the WinLoader configuration file for proper set up information WARNING Interface Module NOT Found Unauthorized use of this software is forbidden See the above notice Figure 2 2 620 Selection Menu Continued on next page 6 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 2 2 620 Loader Monitor F1 Continued 620 Selection Menu continued Ta
387. ment Editor functions continued Table 2 7 Comment Editor Functions Command Mode Continued Key Function Description F3 SEARCH Searches for and replaces string of up to 67 characters number of characters affected is equal to number of characters in Replace With string if new string is shorter than original it must be padded with enough blank spaces to match number of characters in original string if new string is longer than original characters in comment following original string are overwritten To search for string of up to 67 characters Step Action 1 Press F3 SEARCH window appears requesting Search For string 2 Enter desired string to be searched for at blinking cursor and press ENTER cursor moves to Replace With field 3 Enter new string and press ENTER editor searches for desired string if desired string is found associated comment displays cursor is placed at beginning of string and you are prompted CHANGE Y N Y if Y is selected editor replaces string if any key other than Y is selected string is left unchanged editor searches for next occurrence of desired string and continues process until strings are no longer found to halt search process press Esc key if editor doesn t find string Search string NOT found message displays F4 COPY Copies label description reference number comment i
388. ment Editors F3 F4 Continued Comment Editor modes of operation After the comment editor is entered there are two modes of operation command and edit The present mode displays in highlighted characters at the left center portion of the display When the comment editor is called from the Documentation Functions Menu the Command mode is entered automatically Refer to Table 2 7 next four pages for descriptions of each available menu selection while in Command mode Note that the following cursor key functions are available in Command mode use Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to increase decrease address marker numbers use PgUp and PgDn keys to find next defined comment use Home and End keys to find first last defined comment Press E to change from Command to Edit mode refer to Table 2 8 for descriptions of each available menu selection while in Edit mode Press Esc key to change from Edit to Command mode If Function Block programming is used a line marker may be assigned to the ladder logic line that invokes the Function Block Using line comments to describe a Function Block can be very helpful since a relatively large amount of text 23 lines by 67 characters may be used to describe the logic behind the Function Block Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 31 2 4 Comment Editors F3 F4 Continued Comment Editor funct
389. ment in a Line of Ladder Logic 8 Table 1 8 Inserting a Logic Element Within a Line of Ladder Logic 8 Table 1 9 Deleting a Logic Element from Within a Line of Ladder Logic 9 Table 1 10 Entering a Line of Ladder Logic 9 Table 1 11 Deleting a Line of Ladder Logic 10 Table 1 12 Editing Numeric Entries for Logical Elements 10 Table 1 13 Editing Timer Counter Preset Accumulator or Bring In Data 10 Table 1 14 Logic Group Hold Function Example 11 Table 2 1 Ten Categories of MS DOS Loader Ladder Logic Instructions 16 Table 2 2 620 LC Instruction Set 17 Table 2 3 Additional Programming Functions and Features 19 Table 3 1 Contacts and Coils 40 Table 3 2 Normally Open NO Contact Specifications 42 Table 3 3 Normally Closed NO Contact Specifications 43 Table 3 4 Transition ON Contact Specifications
390. ment was prepared using Information Mapping methodologies and formatting principles Information Mapping is a trademark of Information Mapping Inc Honeywell Industrial Automation and Control Automation College 1100 Virginia Drive Fort Washington PA 19034 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions iii About This Publication This user manual presents A general overview of the WinLoader s ten different categories of edit and display functions which are available for use when programming 620 LC ladder logic programs A detailed overview of the Auxiliary Function Menu functions which are accessible from the WinLoader s Edit and Display Functions Menu iv 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions v Table of Contents SECTION 1 EDIT amp DISPLAY FUNCTIONS OVERVIEW 1 1 1 Overview 1 1 2 Software Mode Control Function F11 4 1 3 Auxiliary Function Menu F12 10 1 4 Search Functions Menu F13 11 1 5 Force Functions F14 19 1 6
391. mming Reference 4 05 3 7 Integer Comparison Instructions Continued Less than characteristics Figure 3 32 illustrates characteristics associated with the less than instruction in the first line the WinLoader is in the signed mode of display and the signed value read from address 5000 is compared to determine if it is less than the signed value read from address 5500 since 225 is less than 2115 a logical current path exists through the less than instruction the output coil is energized in the second line the WinLoader is in the signed mode of display and the signed value read from address 5500 is compared to determine if it is less than the signed value read from address 6000 since 2115 is not less than 30 a logical current path does not exist through the less than instruction the output coil is deenergized If for line 2 the signed value read from address 5500 had actually been 32769 and this value had been compared to the signed value read from address 6000 that is 30 the less than instruction would actually have declared this comparison True and stated that 32769 is less than 30 this is because a single less than instruction always assumes that signed data is being compared even if the value in address 5500 is an unsigned integer the less than instruction assumes it is signed and interprets 32769 as 2 which is less than 30 the mode of data display as selected at t
392. ms and their associated data This menu appears below the Logic Group Selection Menu There are ten menu selections available through the Edit and Display Functions Menu and each is identified by function keys F11 through F20 Many Edit and Display Functions contain a menu of available operations for the particular function selected others directly initiate the function that they represent Pressing a particular function key F11 through F20 will either display another menu which contains accessible operations for the selected function or will initiate the desired function directly For example the F12 AUX Auxiliary function displays a second menu containing the available auxiliary operations while the F16 LIST function immediately begins listing the line contained in the control program Refer to 620 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions LDR005 for complete coverage of WinLoader ladder logic elements and the Edit and Display Functions Menu Figure 3 9 Edit and Display Functions Menu Continued on next page 66 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 3 2 Main Screen Display Continued Program area integer display formats Integer data values may be displayed with ladder logic in the WinLoader s Main Screen Display program area in the following three formats signed unsigned hex hexadecimal As highlighted in Figure 3 10 below the current integer display format is displayed on the Main Screen Display i
393. must be installed through a serial communications port of your personal computer or the 620 6150A Loader Terminal Figure 1 below provides a rear view of the 620 6150A Loader Terminal The External Converter Box is factory configured for communications operation between either the personal computer s or the 620 6150A Loader Terminal s serial port and the Loader Terminal port on the CPM no further settings are required or can be made to the hardware Figure 1 Rear View of 620 6150A Loader Terminal Continued on next page 4 620 WinLoader Installation 4 05 2 3 629 6019 External Converter Box Continued Interface port for 629 6019 External Converter Box The interface port on the 629 6019 External Converter Box is a 9 pin female sub D connector with a tin plated shell and a latching mechanism The interface port has both transmit and receive capabilities along with clear to send and request to send control and is used to communicate with 620 LCs using the 10 foot Loader Terminal cable however you may wish to extend this length by constructing a cable according to the pin assignments specified in Figures 2 and 3 The 629 6019 External Converter Box can operate at a maximum distance of 2000 feet 610m The interface port is essential for 620 6020 WinLoader operation 620 6020 WinLoader software will not communicate with a 620 LC unless an External Converter Box is installed in your personal computer Figure 2 Cable Constru
394. n Topic See Page 1 1 Overview 1 1 2 Software Mode Control Function F11 4 1 3 Auxiliary Function Menu F12 10 1 4 Search Functions Menu F13 11 1 5 Force Functions F14 19 1 6 Multielement Display Function F15 23 1 7 Ladder Logic List Function F16 31 1 8 Block Operations Functions F17 32 1 9 Clear Display Function F18 39 1 10 Last Line Entered Function F19 40 1 11 Search amp Exchange Function F20 41 1 12 Data Change Function 46 Purpose of this section This section presents a general overview of the ten different categories of edit and display functions which are available for use when programming 620 LC ladder
395. n NOP Refer to Table 3 89 for no operation specifications Table 3 89 No Operation Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 10 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Performs no logical functions but is a valid instruction with three common uses see Characteristics and Figure 3 67 Characteristics Facilitates on line programming changes as it is generally faster to exchange one instruction for another than to add a new instruction in this scenario NOP is programmed where additional logic is likely to be added in future where existing logic element is to be deleted from control program Used as space holder for double wide floating point data values depending on chosen method of displaying and formatting floating point data data display field may extend beneath instruction to the right if this instruction also displays data or other information it may overwrite visually a portion of the floating point data NOP displays no data and therefore creates a blank space for floating point data to be displayed When programmed in parallel with a contact acts as an electrical short note that this is the only available method for creating a short in ladder logic Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a no operation instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F1 to select Contact Logic
396. n Module 1 OP2 CPM has been placed in PROGRAM software program mode by way of Option Module 2 OP3 CPM has been placed in PROGRAM software program mode by way of Option Module 3 OP4 CPM has been placed in PROGRAM software program mode by way of Option Module 4 KEYSW Displays one of the following 3 physical positions of CPM keyswitch PRGM program position DIS disable position RUN PRGM run program position Continued on next page 70 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 3 2 Main Screen Display Continued Not supported in Winloader 5 4 User Memory Session The following information about User Memory Session and Session Parameter only applies if you are running WinLoader software Version 5 3 or higher with a Rev 70 or greater 620 12 1633 36 Version 2 0 or greater CPM This information pertains to Multiple Loader Terminal configurations Multiple Loader Terminal configurations allow all devices to see the CPM s user program memory when the User Memory Session UMS is not owned by any device When a Loader starts a UMS all other Loader devices lose visibility to the CPM s program memory When a Loader loses visibility the following pop up displays After losing visibility to program memory the Loader device can only perform these limited tasks mode change menu commands register menu commands and view menu commands Any Loader can issue a master clear program se
397. n as either parameter address mode ADDR displays corresponding address locations for user selected parameters label mode LABEL displays predefined parameter labels data value mode DATA displays actual data values for user selected parameters Mode Selection is made via Ctrl Right Arrow keys when CPU is in Program or Run modes note however that data value mode which displays data for user selectable parameters is accessible only when CPU is in Run mode A P is added before FB prefix in Function Block number PFBnxxx if save security level of Function Block is either USER or OEM If Function Block has been edited an E is added between Function Block number and size field and a numerical code indicating that Function Block has been edited is included as part of internal FBD line unseen in interior of Function Block both E and numerical code are removed when Function Block is saved to disk To display Function Block on single WinLoader screen page number of parameters is limited to maximum display capacity of 16 inputs and 16 outputs when more than 16 of either is defined Function Block Display box displays arrow in appropriate direction on center line to indicate more parameters use cursor controls or PgUp PgDn HOME END keys to display all parameters Typical Function Block display is only shown on WinLoaders with Version 4 0 software enhanceme
398. n display integer data in unsigned signed or hexadecimal formats Hexidecimally displayed numeric data is treated as unsigned by the processor To simplify operations yet increase speed and accuracy the 620 LC uses the twos complement method for handling integer values Note that when viewing data through the WinLoader software negative integer values are back lit in red on color monitors Non backlit data values indicate positive numbers Use the SHIFT 3 key to toggle between the three integer data types Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 135 4 2 Data Representation Continued Integer data types continued Figure 4 1 Common Methods of Representing Integer Data Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 136 4 2 Data Representation Continued Unsigned integer match characteristics The unsigned integer representation of a binary sequence always represents a positive binary number see Figure 4 1 Based on a 16 bit data word this method provides a numeric data range of 0 to 65535 Signed integer math characteristics The signed integer representation of a binary sequence can represent either a positive or negative binary number see Figure 4 1 In the sign magnitude method all but the most significant bit of the binary representation are interpreted as numeric data The most significant bit indicates the sign of the number Zero 0 indicate
399. n instruction Bring in instruction reads 16 bit word from address 5005 and places value 25974 on stack Absolute instruction reads last 16 bit word written to stack converts last 16 bit word on stack to absolute positive value places result back on stack Send out instruction reads last word from stack and writes it to address 5006 in Data Register Table Figure 3 54 Absolute Conversion Characteristics Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 87 3 11 Data Conversion Instructions Continued Square root conversion Refer to Table 3 64 for square root conversion specifications Table 3 64 Square Root Conversion Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 36 LCs Symbol Usage Calculates square root of any valid positive floating point value value can be obtained from floating point data manipulation instructions or floating point value resulting from a math operation Characteristics Cannot be applied to negative floating point values optional error status word may be assigned to monitor for this occurrence when this occurs bit 12 of error status word is asserted set to 1 and 4096 is written to specified error address square root of absolute positive value of negative floating point value is placed on stack refer to Section 4 for information on error status word Programming k
400. n is to be stored Inserting parameter names To insert a parameter name into an existing line of parameters while in the Function Block Parameter Name Editor described in Table 2 3 position cursor on next succeeding parameter and press F7 Insert Deleting parameter names To delete a parameter name while in the Function Block Parameter Name Editor described in Table 2 3 position cursor on appropriate parameter and press F6 Delete Entering Function Block Parameter Name detail Perform the Table 2 4 procedure to enter a Function Block parameter name detail from the Function Block Parameter Name Editor Continued on the next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 21 Table 2 4 Entering Function Block Parameter Names Step Action 1 Press D 2 Enter desired Function Block number and press ENTER 3 Enter desired 27 character description and 7 character label First three 9 character lines are description fourth line is label After entering each line press ENTER to proceed to next line 4 Press F10 Store to save parameter names into memory then press F10 Save to save to disk or press ESC to abort entry Respond Y to prompt to save parameter names to disk then enter pathname and file name where information is to be stored 22 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 2 3 Label Description Editors F2 F5 F6 Accessing Label Description Editor A 7 cha
401. n the far right hand side of the line space between the Logic Group Selection Menu and the Edit and Display Function Menu Figure 3 10 Program Area Integer Display Format Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 67 3 2 Main Screen Display Continued Status line At the very bottom of the Main Screen Display there is a status line highlighted in Figure 3 11 below which displays the following two categories of information displays information pertaining to physical status of the connected 620 LC CPM note that the following five statuses described in Table 3 3 next two pages are permanently displayed on the status line in display order from left to right CPM type memory size or User Memory Session available CPM memory CPM mode of operation CPM keyswitch position displays certain information in blank area to the right regarding actions taken from the WinLoader s keyboard Figure 3 11 Main Screen Display Status Line Continued on next page 68 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 3 2 Main Screen Display Continued Status line information Refer to Table 3 3 below for descriptions of the five CPM statuses which are permanently displayed on the Main Screen Display status line Table 3 3 Status Line Information Status Field Description CPM Type Displays model number of connected CPM when in Stand Alone mode model number specified in 620
402. nLoader Programming Reference 1 Section 1 General Ladder Logic Entry Edit Procedures 1 1 Overview Section contents These are the topics covered in this section Topic See Page 1 1 Overview 1 1 2 General Entry Procedures 2 1 3 General Editing Procedures 6 Purpose of this section This section presents a general overview of ladder logic entry and editing procedures which are required for programming the 620 LC instructions presented in Section 3 of this manual Refer to 620 WinLoaderEdit amp Display Functions LDR005 for more complete information on entering and editing 620 LC ladder logic instructions Continued on next page 2 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 1 2 General Entry Procedures Ladder logic entry keystrokes Table 1 1 lists the three basic methods of keystroking when entering a ladder logic instruction Each method involves in some particular order selecting a logic group selecting a logic element and entering a specific address or numeric label When referring to these three methods note that complete descriptions of the available 620 LC logic groups are presented in Section 2 of this manual while individual descriptions
403. ncer is deleted in this case the Load Unload instruction operates on the next sequencer in the program If a power loss occurs during a Run mode programming operation it could cause a write in progress failure this causes the 620 LC to shut down and the only recovery is to reload memory In addition to the above programming rules do not use read or write commands to execute CPM memory options via a 620 0043 Communications Interface Module during ARMP operations 10 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 1 3 Auxiliary Function Menu F12 Accessing the Auxiliary Function Menu Press F12 or Shift F2 AUX from the Edit and Display Functions Menu to access the Auxiliary Function Menu shown in Figure 1 2 below This menu is used to call up additional edit and display functions to include Clear 620 Memory Upload Download Functions Auxiliary Documentation Menu 620 Diagnostics Menu Program Mode Change Function Register Table Functions Flag Mode Address Data Display Functions and Return to DOS Shell Function Refer to Section 2 of this manual titled Auxiliary Function Menu for complete coverage of the Auxiliary Function Menu Figure 1 2 Auxiliary Function Menu 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 11 1 4 Search Functions F13 Search Menu Press F13 or Shift F3 SRCH from the Edit and Display Functions Menu to access the Search
404. nction Block Selection Menu Selections Continued Key Selection Description F8 Parameter Outputs Allows specifying total number of addresses up to 45 processor dependent in 620 LC register table to be reserved for data associated with output parameters Select F8 enter desired number of output parameter addresses and press ENTER Pressing Spacebar clears F1 block Corresponding number displays on right hand side of F8 block on menu and corresponding output parameter address range based on starting address specified using F5 function and input parameter address range specified using F6 function displays in middle of F8 block After Function Block overhead is formally entered in step 5 of Table 3 1 or 3 3 procedure corresponding number of output parameter registers is entered into appropriate output parameter unloading FBU line inside Function Block When using F8 function refer to Section 2 Function Block Programming Theory of Operation for information regarding number of registers required for each specific parameter Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 29 3 2 Defining Function Blocks Continued Defining Function Block with existing logic Perform the Table 3 3 procedure to define a Function Block with existing logic Table 3 3 Defining Function Block With Existing Logic Step Action 1 With line of logic displayed press F17 or
405. nd any bit value 0 15 F9 Edit Default File Permits you to specify a default file name of up to 8 characters to be used to store all documentation files for any defined labels descriptions and comments included in your ladder logic program 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 25 2 5 Password amp Security Functions F4 Security Selection menu Press F4 Password amp Security Functions from the WinLoader Main Menu to access the Security Selection Menu shown in Figure 2 14 below This menu allows you to assign a unique security code of up to four numeric digits to each of the seven available functions F1 through F4 and F6 through F8 as shown in the WinLoader Security Selection Menu in Figure 2 14 When an attempt to access any of these functions is made the system prompts the user for the security code before granting access A password protects the security code function itself from unauthorized entry Security codes must be entered each time you attempt to use any of the seven available functions F1 through F4 and F6 through F8 Even when the WinLoader is in the Stand Alone mode functions F1 F3 and F4 require proper security code entry each of these functions mode change forcing and data change may be protected by a unique security code Figure 2 11 Security Selection Menu Continued on next page 26 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 2 5 Password amp Security Functions F4
406. nes F4 Send Out Used to indicate that 16 bits are set reset as a result of Function Block operation Send Out is programmed in output parameter line as a constant to permit selection of output address without need to enter Function Block body F5 Floating Point Send Out Used to indicate that Function Block is to generate floating point data as output to external program 34 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 3 4 Entering Function Block Conditioning Logic Procedure for entering Function Block conditioning logic At any point after a Function Block has been defined user defined conditioning logic may be entered into the Function Block Display line Enter conditioning logic on ladder rung leading into Function Block Display box of Function Block just as you would any standard line of ladder logic Build up to a 4 x 5 array of any input instructions and press INSERT ENTER Note that once conditioning logic is formally entered it is also included as part of internal FBD line in interior of Function Block 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 35 Section 4 Function Block Editing 4 1 Overview Section contents These are the topics covered in this section Topic See Page 4 1 Overview 35 4 2 Editing Function Block Parameters
407. nes are currently passing for this SLM 32768 SLM Diagnostics Failed Indicates Expanded Serial I O Diagnostic routines have failed for this SLM 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 162 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 163 Glossary Accumulator Tracks running total of increments which have occurred since logic element became active times or counts in predefined resolution accumulated value is stored in a data register in CPM Register Function Control Output Address I O Status Table or Data Register Table address es where output data is to be written to Data Register Table Contains timer and counter instruction preset and accumulator values described in subsection 3 4 and other user data each timer or counter uses two registers and each register is 16 bits wide the 620 12 CPM has 256 registers 4096 4251 and the 620 1633 and 620 36 CPMs each have 4096 registers refer to subsection 2 3 Figure 2 3 in LDR004 1 for I O bit and register capacities Down Count In a counter a request to decrement or the actual decrementing of the accumulated value by one Driver Ladder logic that controls the step number to be used to output data to the control output address Input Status Scan ISS User specified program stored in processor s memory word zero and executed at beginning of every scan causes processor to update I O Status Table by collecting current statuses of all real world i
408. next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 111 3 12 Sequencer Instructions Continued Insert new step in Program mode To insert a new step to the data table while the processor is in the Program mode follow the steps presented in Table 3 74 Table 3 74 Insert a New Step in Program Mode Step Action 1 PAGE UP or Move to the line of logic which contains the PAGE DOWN sequencer to be edited 2 M Press the down arrow key to display the first five lines of the data table and the Initial Edit Menu 3 F6 Press the F6 Edit Step to enter the Full Edit Menu 4 F1 Press F1 Goto to enter or use the Up Down Arrow Keys to select the step number where the new step is to be inserted All existing steps will be moved down one step and the total number of steps will increase by one for each new step inserted When using F1 Goto the ENTER key must be pressed after entering the step number 5 F2 Pressing F2 Value opens a data entry window where you can enter the new value in decimal F3 F4 Using the F3 ON and F4 OFF keys in conjunction with the left and right arrow keys you can enter the new value in a binary format 6 F6 Press F6 Ins Stp in the Full Edit Menu to accept the new value entered in step 5 7 Repeat Repeat steps 4 through 6 until all desired existing steps have been edited 8 ESC Press Escape to return to the Initial Edit Menu 9 ENTER Press Enter
409. ng and internal control in situations where external physical output devices are not needed or desired 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 41 3 2 Contact and Coil Instructions Continued Additional information Note the following when using contact and coil instructions contact and coil instructions may reference that is may be assigned the address of any real or internal address in the I O Status Table bit read and write instructions may reference any bit in any register in the Register Table contact instructions may be placed anywhere in a logic line s 9 by 5 matrix except the logic terminator position positions that violate the rules of programming which are generally related to the algorithm used to solve logic and instructions that limit the available placement options of controlling and controlled logic coil instructions may be positioned only as line terminators if a coil is programmed at any other point the WinLoader automatically repositions it as the output a maximum of one line terminator per logic line is permitted to reduce the number of memory function words required per line a line terminator designates the end of a specific line of logic the effect of multiple outputs can be achieved by using multiple lines of logic which will generally use no more memory than if multiple outputs per line were permitted Continued on next page 42 620 WinLoade
410. ng jump instructions There are two types of jump instructions direct jump indirect jump In addition an end of jump instruction is used to mark the end of a jump Note also that unlike skip instructions direct jump instructions may include multiple end of jump instructions Subroutine instructions Subroutine instructions have characteristics which are very much similar to skip instructions Like skip instructions subroutine instructions include reference numbers which are used to define individual blocks of ladder logic that is subroutines A single control program may include multiple subroutines each with its own function and set of conditions which control its execution The following subroutine instructions are used in conjunction with other instructions to create ladder logic subroutines for use in control programs jump to subroutine JSR subroutine SUB return to subroutine RTS return to beginning of program RBP Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 57 3 10 Memory Reference Instructions Continued Jump Refer to Table 3 51 for jump specifications Table 3 51 Jump Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 10 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Used as a line terminator to mark the beginning of a jump block see Figure 3 43 Characteristics Use reference numbers 8192 through 8447 When preceding c
411. ng systems Personal computer specifications Refer to Table 2 3 for specifications for the WinLoader s personal computer Table 2 3 Personal Computer Specifications Specification Description Personal Computer Requirements Windows software and hardware compatible computers Memory Requirements 640K RAM minimum Mass Storage Requirements Category Description Floppy Only Systems Disk capacity of 1 2M bytes or greater Hard Disk Systems 1 floppy with 360K bytes capacity or greater and a minimum of 1 2M bytes of available hard disk storage Printer options Any IBM compatible printer will work with the WinLoader program 16 620 WinLoader Overview 4 05 2 4 620 LC Networks Available 620 LC networks The following communications networks are provided by Honeywell to allow for the interconnection of 620 LCs and associated peripheral devices Multidrop Loader Network allows a single WinLoader to be multidrop connected to up to thirty one 620 12 1633 36 LCs via the RS 485 electrical specifications using a version 4 1 or greater WinLoader and a 3 1 or greater 620 LC CPM version Refer to 620 WinLoader Networking Functions LDR008 for detailed information on each of these communications networks 4 05 620 WinLoader Overview 17 Section 3 620 WinLoader Software 3 1 Overview Section contents These are the topics covered in this section 1 1 Overview
412. ng the installation procedure 18 620 WinLoader Installation 4 05 3 2 WinLoader Installation Continued Installing Win Loader 620 WinLoader Installation 5 x installation does NOT uninstall 4 x or earlier DOS based loader application DO NOT use 4 x and 5 x on the same machine Follow this procedure to install WinLoader on your PC Step Action 1 Insert the WinLoader CD in your PC 2 Double click the WinLoader Setup icon to display the 620 WinLoader Install shield s welcome screen 3 Click Next to continue the installation 4 05 620 WinLoader Installation 19 3 2 WinLoader Installation Continued 4 The Customer Information screen is displayed Enter the User Name and Company Name and click Next 20 620 WinLoader Installation 4 05 3 2 WinLoader Installation Continued 5 The Choose Destination Location screen is displayed Click Browse and navigate to the folder where you want to store the application files 6 Click Next to continue with the installation 7 The Installation Wizard Complete screen is displayed on successful installation 4 05 620 WinLoader Installation 21 3 2 WinLoader Installation Continued 8 Select Launch readme file to install the release notes in the folder where you have installed the WinLoader application 9 Click Finish to complete the installation Click Cancel at any point during the installation if you want to cancel the installation and
413. nia 19034 623 WinLoader Version 5 X User Manual 623 8983 623 WinLoader 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming LDR006 4 05 ii 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 Copyright Notices and Trademarks Printed in U S A Copyright 2005 by Honeywell Inc Revision 01 April 01 2005 While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in its written agreement with and for its customer In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect special or consequential damages The information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice This document was prepared using Information Mapping methodologies and formatting principles Information Mapping is a trademark of Information Mapping Inc Honeywell Industrial Automation and Control Automation College 1100 Virginia Drive Fort Washington PA 19034 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming iii About This Publication This manual presents general guidelines and operating procedures for programming editing displaying and uploading saving Function Blocks in your WinLoader ladder logic control program Procedures for implementing Honeywell s predefined Function Block Library control programs are also presen
414. note that these parameters should be set to the minimum values consistent with the amount of documentation to be used Table 2 12 Paths and Files Menu Selections Continued Key Title Description F6 Label Cache Size Enables you to enter number of labels to be cached that is to be used in memory instead of on disk valid range is 10 200 Cache is a temporary memory area that allows faster access to frequently used labels but occupies system main memory the larger the cache the faster the access and the more memory to be used F7 Maximum Labels Enables you to specify maximum number of labels for use in ladder logic program valid range is 1000 16640 F8 Maximum Comments Enables you to specify maximum number of comments for use in a ladder logic program valid range is 1000 24576 F10 Driver Node Enables you to select a network location from 0 to 31 similar to nodal address via serial port communication Once multidropped Loader and connected processors have been configured via Multidrop Node Names Menu described in subsequent subsection you can communicate through the Loader to a given 620 LC by specifying a particular nodal address through this F10 Driver Node selection Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 35 2 7 620 60 Software Configuration F6 Continued Operational Modes Menu Press F2 Operational Modes from the 620 60 Software Configuration
415. nputs I O Status Table Stores statuses of real I O in locations 0 255 for 620 12 CPMs locations 0 1023 for 620 1633 CPMs and locations 0 2047 for 620 36 CPMs see subsection 2 3 Figure 2 3 in LDR004 1 control relay internal I O statuses are stored in locations 256 4096 for 620 12 CPMs locations 1024 4095 for 620 1633 CPMs and locations 2048 4095 for 620 36 CPMs refer to subsection 2 3 in LDR004 1 for more information Numeric Label Used to identify the beginning and end of a given skip operation multiple skips are permitted in one control program not to be confused with the seven character label which is available in WinLoader s documentation functions Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 164 Glossary Continued Preset Predetermined value which timer or counter increments to upon reaching specified preset value timer or counter energizes deenergizes or passes logical current flow depending on specific element in timers increments are based on selected resolution in counters increments are integer values preset value is stored in a data register in CPM Register Function Resolution In timers resolution or time base equals period of time that constitutes one count Sequencer Data Table Storage area for a sequencer s output data each step word of output data requires one word of memory up to 1024 words may be stored in sequencer table
416. nstructions Continued Subtraction Refer to Table 3 43 for subtraction specifications Table 3 43 Subtraction Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Used to calculate the difference between two 16 bit data values obtained through data manipulation instructions difference is also generated as a 16 bit value as shown below Table 4 43 is continued on next page 36 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 8 Math Instructions Continued Subtraction continued Table 3 43 Subtraction Specifications Continued SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Characteristics Values being subtracted may originate from I O Status or Data Register Tables and may be obtained using any combination of the following instructions bring in indirect bring in Pull of 1 constant Difference can be output to I O Status or Data Register Table using the following instruction send out indirect send out Push of 1 When subtracting unsigned integer data values the two values being subtracted and the difference may range from 0 to 65535 when subtracting signed integer data values the two values being subtracted and the difference can range from 32767 to 32768 Since subtraction of two 16 bit unsigned integers can produce a negative difference following method for handling or detecting negatives should be considered
417. nstructions presented in this section Table 3 24 Data Manipulation Instructions Data Manipulation Instructions Refer to page Bring In 90 Indirect Bring In 93 Floating Point Bring In 97 Send Out 100 Indirect Send Out 103 Floating Point Send Out 107 Constant 110 Floating Point Constant LDR004 2 Page 7 Pull LDR004 2 Page 9 Push LDR004 2 Page 12 Pull from System Status Table LDR004 2 Page 15 Data manipulation instructions background Data manipulation instructions are used to collect transfer and compare data stored in the I O Status Tables System Status Table or register tables The 620 LC instruction set includes the following three classifications of data manipulation instructions Direct integer data manipulation instructions use direct addressing techniques integer whole number numeric data values only Indirect integer data manipulation instructions use indirect addressing techniques integer whole number numeric data values only Floating point data manipulation instructions use direct addressing techniques floating point numeric data values only real numbers which include a fractional part Continued on next page 86 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Direct integer data manipulation instructions Direct data manipulation instructions are used to transfer data
418. nstructions for the 620 6150A Loader Terminal 4 05 620 WinLoader Overview 11 2 2 620 6020 WinLoader Hardware Characteristics 620 6020 WinLoader hardware 620 6020 WinLoader hardware includes 629 6019 External Converter Box provides RS232 422 interface must be installed through PC s serial communications port and requires 5VDC 250mA power supply 10 foot Loader Terminal cable Model number 628 3000 shielded cable that connects PC s interface card to Loader Terminal port on 620 CPM if desired you may also build your own custom length cable up to a maximum length of 2000 feet 610m 12 inch converter communications cable Model number 628 6020 provides communications between PC s serial port and 629 6019 External Converter Box Power splitter cable Model number 628 6021 common connector plugs into PC s keyboard jack and one end of split is connected to keyboard cable other end to converter box Continued on next page 12 620 WinLoader Overview 4 05 2 2 620 6020 WinLoader Hardware Characteristics Continued 620 6020 WinLoader shipping contents Refer to Table 2 1 below for shipping contents of the 620 6020 WinLoader Site licenses are available for 620 6020 WinLoader Site License Agreement Model Number 620 8000 is optional Table 2 1 620 6020 Shipping Contents Part Quantity Description RS232 422 Convert
419. ntation Listing Menu Selections 55 Table 3 8 Procedure for Editing Default File 58 Table 3 9 Edit Title Block Menu Selections 60 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions vii Acronyms 620 LC 620 Logic Controller ABC Asynchronous Byte Count Protocol ARMP Augmented Run Mode Programming CIM Communication Interface Module CPM Control Processor Module DCM Data Collection Module DOS Disk Operating System FB Function Block FC Forced Closed FO
420. ntering address and type of contact You may program F3 B2 and F4 PULL logic groups to operate in same manner while in edit mode by pressing and holding CTRL key when F3 or F4 or F1 is selected F10 Number of Decimal Points Enables you to fix location of decimal point by specifying number of decimal digits displayed when viewing floating point data 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 digits For example if 3 decimal digits are specified and Float Display Mode F8 is DEC EXP floating point numbers display as XXX XXX until value exceeds 999 999 at which point display automatically switches to exponential mode numbers less than 001 display as zero if desired to display smaller numbers number of decimal digits may be increased or Float Display Mode F8 can be set to EXP exponential only mode Continued on next page 38 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 2 7 620 60 Software Configuration F6 Continued System Type and File Loads Menu Press F3 System Type and File Loads from the 620 60 Software Configuration Menu to access the System Type and File Loads Menu shown in Figure 2 18 below This menu is used to select the particular type of system being used and to set specific file load conditions Refer to Table 2 18 next two pages for descriptions of each available selection from this menu Figure 2 15 System Types and File Loads Menu Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 39 2 7
421. nternal coil energize immediately once controlling logic becomes True delay de energizing output or internal coil by predetermined time once controlling logic becomes False Characteristics When conditioning logic preceding off delay timer is True timer s coil energizes turns On True When conditioning logic is False timer begins accumulating time in selected resolution until accumulated value equals preset value at this time timer s coil de energizes turns off coil remains deenergized until control logic goes True energizes immediately Accumulated value is automatically reset to zero nonretentive on delay timer when conditioning logic goes True If power is lost and then restored while control logic is False accumulated value is set equal to preset value coil deenergizes immediately upon execution of retentive scan accumulated value set equal to preset value Other than time delay timer coil functions like nonretentive coil 68 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 4 Timer and Counter Instructions Continued Off delay timer continued Table 3 17 Off Delay Timer Specifications Continued SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program an off delay timer instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F6 to select Timer Counter Logic Group 2 Press F3 to select Off Delay Timer 3 Enter
422. nto new reference number Step Action 1 Press F4 COPY 2 Enter desired address in Copy From area and press ENTER 3 Enter desired address in Copy To area and press ENTER If comment exists Overwrite Y N N prompt displays press Y to execute press N or any other key to abort Table 2 7 is continued on next page 34 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 2 4 Comment Editors F3 F4 Continued Comment Editor functions continued Table 2 7 Comment Editor Functions Command Mode Continued Key Function Description F5 BLOCK Permits you to copy or delete multiple comments by entering appropriate range of reference numbers must be used with either F4 COPY or F6 DELETE function blinks BLOCK keyword in menu line of display to alert to Block mode of operation BLOCK keyword is also highlighted for F4 COPY function must enter destination reference number To perform a block copy Step Action 1 Press F5 BLOCK then immediately press F4 COPY 2 Enter start and end reference numbers to define block to be copied press ENTER after each number cursor moves to Copy To reference number field 3 Enter starting reference number where information is to be copied and press ENTER prompt asks if information found at Copy To address should be overwritten with copied block 4 Press Y to
423. ntrol In Automatic Mode the set point of the secondary may be manually set the set point of the primary tracks its own process variable and the output of the primary tracks the set point of the secondary in this manner bumpless transfer is possible between all three modes In Manual Mode both set points track their own process variables In Cascade Mode the secondary set point is set by the output of the primary This is Function Block FB26071 LDR file on the disk Refer to Table 7 3 next page for Cascade Control Two Loop PID Function Block specifications and to Figure 7 4 for an external view of this Function Block Integer values 0 1 or 2 in register 6175 set the mode at Automatic Manual or Cascade respectively Cascade Control Two Loop PID Function Block is for operation only on the following 620 LC processors 620 11 620 14 620 1631 620 1633 620 36 Version 2 0 or higher Detailed descriptions of each line of Function Block s code may be obtained by loading Function Block and using WinLoader s address comment functions Total description of this Function Block may be seen in line comments at line comment markers 26071 17619 17620 and 17621 Continued on next page 72 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 7 2 Function Block Library Control Programs Continued Cascade Control Two Loop PID Function Block continued Table 7 3 Cascade Control Two L
424. nts if Model 623 50 623 51 or 623 60 with 3 X software revision or earlier is used Function Block body is shown not in hidden box format but as typical ladder logic code with start and end markers Function Blocks cannot be built with pre 4 0 WinLoader versions 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 51 If Function Block sequence is detected but some flaw exists for example EOS is not found where number of lines indicates it should be lines are displayed as normal ladder rungs Continued on next page 52 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 5 2 Displaying Function Blocks Continued Display control Refer to Table 5 1 for available Function Block keystroke commands in standard display control mode when displaying FBD line with cursor at Function Block Display box Table 5 1 Available Function Block Keystroke Commands Keystroke Command Description Right Arrow Moves cursor right towards output side of Function Block Display box Left Arrow Moves cursor left towards input side of Function Block Display box and towards user defined conditioning logic Up Arrow Moves cursor to previous parameter Down Arrow Moves cursor to next parameter Home Moves cursor to top of Function Block Display box and displays first parameter End Moves cursor to last parameter and if there are 16 or more parameters displays last parameter at bottom of Function Block Display box
425. o specify addresses and format of data to be displayed in Update Display Data Display tables Update Display table and Edit Display table also offer two different formats integer bit and floating point press PgDn to access floating point format from integer bit format press PgUp to access integer bit format from floating point format Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 77 2 9 Data Display Functions F8 Continued Update Display The Update Display is shown in Figure 2 15 below shown in integer bit format refer to Table 2 11 next page for available menu selections You may enter a value to be sent to a register or to 16 consecutive bit addresses while the software is in the Update Display by positioning the highlighted area on the desired address and entering the appropriate data Position the highlighted area by using up down right and left arrow keys as well as HOME and END keys BACKSPACE key may be used to delete digits from right to left or value can be set to zero by pressing SPACEBAR Negative integers display in reverse video in number field only signed integer values and floating point values carry the sign when written to 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 and 36 LCs Operations selected by function keys are the same in both integer bit and floating point formats Floating point numbers are sent only to register pairs Figur
426. oader continued Data Display function permits monitoring up to 126 addresses regardless of locations in program offers ability to read and write addresses write to register address only save snapshot of system conditions and create recipe file for presetting register data values External RS232 422 PC 620 LC converter device may be used with any IBM compatible personal computer that uses Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems Multidrop 620 LC option allows configuring network of up to thirty one 620 LC devices and connecting them to one WinLoader 6 620 WinLoader Overview 4 05 1 3 620 WinLoader Version 5 4 User Manual How to use 620 WinLoader user manual The documentation supplied with the 620 WinLoader includes the following user manuals refer to each appropriate manual to access the desired information or any particular operating procedure 620 WinLoader Overview LDR001 which presents brief overview of 620 WinLoader guidelines on how to use 620 WinLoader Version 5 4 User Manual general characteristics of 620 WinLoader hardware overview of 620 WinLoader software and descriptions of compatible personal computers and printer options 620 WinLoader Installation LDR002 which provides installation procedures for installing 629 6019 External Converter Box which is provided with 620 6020 WinLoaders and 620 6150A L
427. oader compatible PCs The personal computer used to support the 620 6020 WinLoader program must be 100 compatible with the Windows XP and 2K operating systems 2 620 WinLoader Installation 4 05 Section 2 Hardware Installation and Configuration 2 1 Overview Section contents These are the topics covered in this section Topic See Page 2 1 Overview 3 2 2 629 6019 External Converter Box 4 2 3 Cabling to RS232 Serial Printers 13 Purpose of this section This section presents procedures for Installing the 629 6019 External Converter Box which is provided with the 620 6020 WinLoader and must be installed through a serial communications port of the personal computer or the 620 6150A Loader Terminal Installing cabling from the WinLoader to typical RS232 serial printers and Installing cabling to a Serial Link Selector in a redundant control system 4 05 620 WinLoader Installation 3 2 2 629 6019 External Converter Box Description The 629 6019 External Converter Box converts an RS232 signal from a PC to an RS485 signal compatible with a device on an RS485 network in a 620 LC system It is provided with the 620 6020 WinLoader and the 620 6150A Loader Terminal and
428. oader mode place cursor to immediate left of logic element whose address is to be documented 2 Press SHIFT a Detail block appears at right hand side of main screen display just above line number as shown below In Detail block first three lines contain description fourth line contains label 3 Press E to access edit function Table 1 1 is continued on next page 4 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 1 2 Documentation Types Continued Address Labels Description Detail continued Table 1 1 Creating Address Labels Descriptions Continued Step Action 4 Edit any field as desired Following editing functions are available Edit Function Description Backspace Deletes character to immediate left of cursor End Moves cursor to end of fourth line Tab Moves cursor to beginning of next line Home Moves cursor to beginning of first line Left Arrow Moves cursor one character to left Right Arrow Moves cursor one character to right Up Arrow Moves character one character up Down Arrow Moves cursor one character down Page Up Moves cursor to beginning of previous line Page Down Moves cursor to beginning of next line Note that you may also leave any particular field blank If more than one element in line being edited uses address being documented you must refresh the ladder logic line using Page Up or Page Down functions
429. oader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 2 9 Data Display Functions F8 Accessing Data Display Functions Press F8 from the Auxiliary Function Menu to access the Data Display Functions These functions permit you to monitor the data or status of up to 84 signed or unsigned register or bit addresses and up to 42 floating point data registers In addition you may write data values into a desired register or copy the contents of any or all registers on the display These features combined with the ability to save and load the contents of a display including a specified data value enable this function to monitor a process or machine freeze operations initialize data values or a recipe Data Display Functions consist of two tables Update Display table and Edit Display table and two menus Update Display menu and Edit Display menu Tables are essentially the same except data displayed in Update Display table is updated dynamically when CPM is executing ladder logic Edit Display table is used to edit addresses and format of data displayed its data is static when activated Menus are used in conjunction with the displays Update Display menu is active whenever function displays Update Display table see Figure 2 15 it is used to write and read data to and from CPM and save and load data to and from disk Edit Display menu is active whenever function displays Edit Display table see Figure 2 16 it is used t
430. oader Terminals and must be installed through a serial communications port of a personal computer or the 620 6150A Loader Terminal installing cabling to RS232 serial printers installing cabling to Serial Link Selector in redundant applications and installing WinLoader software which is used 620 6020 WinLoaders 620 WinLoader Implementation LDR003 which provides general start up procedure for 620 WinLoader overall description of WinLoader s Main Menu to include individual descriptions of Main Menu selections and descriptions of each available function and sub menu accessible from the Main Menu and overall description of WinLoader s Main Screen Display to include procedure for entering Main Screen Display and descriptions of individual Main Screen Display components Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Overview 7 1 3 620 WinLoader Version 5 4 User Manual Continued How to use 620 WinLoader user manual continued 620 WinLoader Programming Reference LDR004 which presents general overview of ladder logic entry and editing procedures which are required for programming 620 LC instructions general overview of the different categories of ladder logic instructions which are available for 620 LCs descriptions of each instruction in the 620 LC instruction set to include methods for entering each instruction and descriptions of 620 LC data representati
431. oating point chain type math also eliminates the build up in round off errors typically found in integer math calculations Important characteristics that are unique to floating point instructions include Floating point values consist of three parts sign exponent mantissa Floating point numerical value is determined as V 1 s M re where s sign bit r base for exponent M mantissa e exponent This format is analogous to scientific notation where the value is determined by raising ten to the power of the exponent and multiplying by the mantissa the difference is that in floating point the exponent represents a power of two not a power of ten The method used by the 620 LC for handling floating point values follows the ANSI IEEE specification 754 1985 single precision format which consists of the following three fields sign bit 8 bit biased exponent 23 bit fraction Figure 4 2 illustrates the structure of the 32 bit floating point value which is used by the 620 LC Figure 4 2 32 Bit Floating Point Structure Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 138 4 2 Data Representation Continued Floating point math characteristics continued Floating point operands used by the 620 LC are 32 bits in length and require two contiguous Data Table Registers for storage when executed floating point data manipulation instructions oper
432. ocumentation Functions Menu Selections Key Title Description Refer to F1 Function Block Parameter Name Editor Enables you to create 7 character labels and 3 line by 9 character label descriptions for any Function Blocks in your ladder logic program refer to 623 WinLoader Function Blocks LDR006 for information on Function Blocks Subsection 2 2 F2 Address Label Editor Enables you to create 7 character labels and 3 line by 9 character label descriptions for any logic element address 0 8191 in your ladder logic program Subsection 2 3 F3 Address Comment Editor Enables you to create comments of up to 20 lines 67 characters per line for any logic element address 0 8191 in your ladder logic program including those of Function Blocks Subsection 2 4 F4 Line Comment Editor Enables you to create comments of up to 20 lines 67 characters per line which are related to ladder logic lines including those of Function Blocks by a reference number opcode added to each line during programming note that reference numbers and line numbers do not have to be the same Subsection 2 4 F5 Skip Label Editor Enables you to create 7 character labels and 3 line by 9 character label descriptions for any logic element skip instruction reference numbers 0 32767 included in your ladder logic program Subsection 2 3 F6 Subroutine Label Editor Enables you to create 7 character labels and 3 line by 9 character
433. of logic elements addresses and numeric labels are presented in Section 3 which presents descriptions of each individual instruction in the 620 LC instruction set Although some instructions require additional keystrokes to complete entry the keystrokes listed in Table 1 1 are the base keystrokes for all ladder logic instruction entries Table 1 1 Three Methods for Entering Ladder Logic Instructions Ladder Logic Entry Method General Procedure Method 1 preferred method select logic group enter address or numeric label select logic element Method 2 alternate method for experienced users enter address or numeric label select logic group select logic element Method 3 alternate method select logic group select logic element enter address of numeric label With these methods numeric keypad must be enabled manually Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 3 1 2 General Entry Procedures Continued Displaying ladder logic The program area of the WinLoaderallows one line of ladder logic to be displayed at any given time As illustrated in Figure 1 1 the displayed ladder logic line has a maximum size matrix of nine input type logic elements in series five parallel branches and one output type logic element line terminator Some logic elements may require the display space of more than one t
434. of the block it is meant that certain events within the block either occur that is they are not skipped or they do not occur that is they are skipped If necessary refer to the Glossary at the end of this manual for definitions of terms used in this section Additional information Skip instructions can be used when a manufacturing process consists of multiple subprocesses some of which might always be performed while others might be option based which means they depend on the actions of the operator the process or other factors Skip blocks are referenced by common numeric labels which are assigned to the beginning skip NSKR or NSKD and the terminating end of skip EOS instructions these numeric labels link the NSKR or NSKD instruction to the proper EOS range from 0 to 8191 and from 8449 to 32767 note that 8192 to 8448 are reserved for jump instructions which have different operating characteristics are displayed by the WinLoader software directly under the instruction s symbol refer to Figure 3 11 Continued on next page 78 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 5 Skip Instructions Continued Sample application Figure 3 11 illustrates a manufacturing process called Process 1 2 3 which consists of three sub processes In this multipart process Processes 1 and 3 are always performed while Process 2 is performed only if the operator manually positions a control switch called Proc
435. oils have similar characteristics regarding True False conditioning the difference between the two is in their operation following a power fail situation Figure 3 3 Nonretentive and Retentive Coil Characteristics Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 51 3 2 Contact and Coil Instructions Continued Latch coil Refer to Table 3 8 for latch coil specifications Table 3 8 Latch Coil Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 10 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Used along with unlatch coil to control latched or unlatched ON OFF state of same real world device or internal coil Characteristics Turns ON when preceding logic is TRUE and remains ON even if preceding logic goes FALSE see Figure 3 4 latch coil can only turn ON or latch its addressed point cannot turn it off Latch coils are retentive and will return to previous ON OFF state during a retentive scan Because of their operation latch and unlatch coils are used together to control the ON OFF state of their addressed point device or internal coil these coils simulate operation of electrically controlled mechanically latching unlatching relay coil When line with a latch coil is monitored output status displayed is result of logic to determine actual status of address enter address into multielement or data display screens Programming keystrokes Perform the foll
436. ol actuator and an on off cooling device control actuator This is Function Block FB26091 LDR file on the disk Refer to Table 7 5 for Split Range Time Proportioning Single Loop PID Function Block specifications and to Figure 7 6 for an external view of this Function Block Split Range Time Proportioning Single Loop PID Function Block is for operation only on the following 620 LC processors 620 11 620 12 620 14 620 1631 620 1633 620 36 Version 2 0 or higher Detailed descriptions of each line of Function Block s code may be obtained by loading Function Block and using WinLoader s address comment functions Total description of this Function Block may be seen in line comments at line comment markers 26091 26191 26291 and 26391 Continued on next page 78 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 7 2 Function Block Library Control Programs Continued Split Range Time Proportioning Single Loop PID Function Block continued Table 7 5 Split Range Time Proportioning Single Loop PID Function Block Specifications Specification Description Applicable Processors and V R Required 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 620 36 Version 2 0 or higher Function Block Description at Line Markers using Line Comments 26091 26191 26291 and 26391 Function Block Line by Line Description using Address Comments Each address Number of Lines Used 94 Number of Input Parameters 21 Num
437. omatically checking for conflicting output addresses during programming and automatically displaying output address documentation labels and descriptions for each line of ladder logic Refer to Table 2 6 next page for descriptions of the available functions from the Display and Diagnostic Functions Menu Figure 2 6 Display and Diagnostic Functions Menu Continued on next page 60 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 2 5 620 Diagnostics Menu F4 Continued Accessing Display and Diagnostic Functions Menu continued Table 2 6 Display and Diagnostic Functions Menu Selections Key Selection Function F1 Diagnostics Allows operator to examine status of 620 LC through following selections 620 LC hardware status F1 620 LC self test F2 I O module status F3 Serial Link Module SLM status F4 PeerData Network status F5 and Mulitdrop Loader Network status F6 Refer to subsequent subsection titled Diagnostics Status Screens and Functions for descriptions of each of these selections F2 Scan Time Display When Set displays 620 LC scan time on monitor line at bottom left corner of display note that displaying scan time while monitoring ladder logic line slows ladder logic update rate when Clear function is disabled F7 Duplicate Output Check When Set WinLoader alerts operator with Output Already USED Continue Lo
438. on 16 bit error status word used to indicate any conditions or errors associated with programming operations and conditional data handling whereby conditional contacts are used to control 620 LC arithmetic or comparison operations 620 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions LDR005 which presents general overview of WinLoader s ten different categories of edit and display functions which are available for use when programming 620 LC ladder logic programs and detailed overview of Auxiliary Function Menu functions which are accessible from the WinLoader s Edit amp Display Functions Menu 620 WinLoader Function Blocks LDR006 which presents general guidelines and operating procedures for programming editing displaying and uploading saving Function Blocks in an WinLoader ladder logic control program and procedures for implementing Honeywell s predefined Function Block control programs 620 WinLoader Documentation Functions LDR007 which presents general characteristics of documentation types used in ladder logic programming with the 620 WinLoader to include descriptions of address labels and address descriptions address comments line comments and line numbers descriptions of each available documentation function that is accessible from the Documentation Functions Menu when the Documentation Functions Menu is accessed from the WinLoader s Main Menu and descriptions of
439. on Block using the Function Block Selections Menu as described in Section 3 Function Block Programming Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 9 The selected NSK instruction that is NSKR is included on the right hand side of the line along with the selected Function Block Number that is 00254 and a numerical code located on the left center of the line that represents the desired save protection of the Function Block that is K2 0000 for NONE The number of lines in the Function Block referred to as the Function Block size is represented in the center of the line by the sequence K2 8 K2 8 to represent the eight lines in the Function Block and a single contact addressed 234 is included on the left hand side of the line as a single enable instruction After the overhead configuration is entered as described in Section 3 Function Block Programming this same FBD line is displayed externally as a Function Block Display box with a ladder rung as shown in Figure 2 5 Figure 2 5 External FBD Line for Function Block TSpindl1 Continued on next page 10 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 2 2 Function Block Operation Continued Line 2 Function Block Input Parameter FBI line Lines 2 through 7 of Function Block TSpindl1 may be accessed as described in Section 5 Function Block Displays and displayed on the main screen display as des
440. on procedure for 629 6019 External Converter Box which is provided with 620 6020 WinLoader and 620 6150A Loader Terminals and must be installed through a serial communications port of a personal computer or the 620 6150A Loader Terminal Additional WinLoader hardware installation procedures to include Installing cabling to RS232 serial printers and Installing cabling to Serial Link Selector in redundant applications Installation procedure for WinLoader software which is used with 620 6020 WinLoader 4 05 620 WinLoader Installation iii Table of Contents SECTION 1 WINLOADER INSTALLATION OVERVIEW 1 1 1 Overview 1 SECTION 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION 3 2 1 Overview 3 2 3 629 6019 External Converter Box 4 2 4 Cabling to RS232 Serial Printers 13 SECTION 3 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION 17 3 1 Overview 17 3 2 WinLoader Install
441. ons F6 70 2 8 Flag Mode Address F7 75 2 9 Data Display Functions F8 76 2 10 DOS Shell F10 81 vi 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 Figures Figure 1 1 Edit and Display Functions Menu 2 Figure 1 2 Auxiliary Function Menu 10 Figure 1 3 Search Menu 11 Figure 1 4 Force Function Menu 19 Figure 1 5 Force All Addresses Compared to Specific Addresses 21 Figure 1 6 Force Notification 22 Figure 1 7 Multielement Display 24 Figure 1 8 On Off Condition Display Format 26 Figure 1 9 Integer Data Value Display Format
442. ontinued Function Block ladder logic format continued For more information about the function of the Function Block Display box you may zoom in to display the actual ladder logic contents of the Function Block see Figure 1 2 When accessed the Zoom in mode attempts to display the first user entered line of ladder logic in the Function Block body this is the actual control logic that executes in order to perform the intended function of the Function Block Figure 1 2 Typical Function Block Body Line Other logic lines that are accessible while in the Zoom in mode include other Function Block Body lines Function Block Input Parameter FBI line Input Parameter Unloading FBU line Function Block Output Parameter FBO line and Output Parameter Unloading FBU line Refer to Section 2 Function Block Theory of Operation for information on the function of each of the internal Function Block logic lines Refer to Section 3 Function Block Programming for information on how to program Function Blocks Refer to Section 4 Function Block Editing for information on how to edit existing Function Blocks Refer to Section 5 Function Block Displays for information on how to manipulate the various available Function Block display functions 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 5 Section 2 Function Block Programming Theory of Operation 2 1 Overview Section
443. ontinued on next page 98 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 12 Sequencer Instructions Continued Sequencer continued Table 3 68 Sequencer Specifications Continued SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Sequencer Driver characteristics To run sequencer external driver of one or more lines of ladder logic must be programmed see Figure 3 61 can be timer counter send out or any instruction that writes data to Data Register Table register address associated with driver must be same as address used for sequencer s step number register For timers driver uses accumulator register as step number register uses value in accumulator register as current step number steps sequencer data table on each increment of accumulated value For counter driver uses accumulator register as step number register uses value in accumulator register as current step number steps sequencer data table on each increment or decrement of accumulated value For send out and similar data manipulation instructions driver uses register addressed by instruction as step number register uses value in addressed register as current step number moves sequencer table to specified step regardless of current step number Value of zero or one that is greater than sequencer table size represents an invalid step number in these instances sequencer display identifies step number as
444. ontrol logic is True scan will NOT JUMP any lines in jump block jump block logic is executed False scan WILL JUMP to EOS with specified reference number jumped logic is not read or executed scan is redirected to first instruction after EOS with specified reference number All on off conditions and data values within active jumped jump block are retained output coils are frozen in last state prior to being jumped data values timer accumulators send outs Pushes and other instruction values are frozen in last state prior to being jumped Use same neumatic symbol as not skip and retain NSKR instruction Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a jump instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F5 to select Skip Logic Group 2 Enter appropriate numeric label 8192 to 8447 3 Press F5 to select direct jump NSKR instruction Continued on next page 58 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 10 Memory Reference Instructions Continued Jump characteristics Figure 3 43 illustrates characteristics associated with the jump instruction Figure 3 43 Jump Characteristics Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 59 3 10 Memory Reference Instructions Continued Indirect jump Refer to Table 3 52 for indirect jump specifications Table 3 52 Indirect Jump
445. oop PID Function Block Specifications Specification Description Applicable Processors and V R Required 620 11 14 1631 1633 620 36 Version 2 0 or higher Function Block Description at Line Markers using Line Comments 26071 17619 17620 and 17621 Function Block Line by Line Description using Address Comments Each address Number of Lines Used 165 Number of Input Parameters 22 Number of Output Parameters None Number of Memory Words Required 1141 Amount of Additional Scan Time per Function Block 11 milliseconds Number of Internal Coil Addresses Required per Function Block on Block Loads 18 Number of Data Registers Required on Block Loads 220 Lines to be Changed by User 10 11 18 83 and 90 Specific Parameters to be Changed Before Use Addresses 94 95 144 and 145 Default Function Block Stacking Register Block Starting Address 8191 Default Function Block Stacking Line Terminator Address 4094 Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 73 7 2 Function Block Library Control Programs Continued Cascade Control Two Loop PID Function Block Figure 7 4 Cascade Control Two Loop PID Function Block External View Continued on next page 74 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 7 2 Function Block Library Control Programs Continued Ratio Control Single Loop PID Function Block This is a single loop PID control program that offers Autom
446. opriate Table 1 10 procedure to enter validate a completed line of ladder logic into a 620 Logic Controller Table 1 10 Entering a Line of Ladder Logic Procedure Actions 1 To load a line of ladder logic at the end of a program Press the ENTER key 2 To overwrite an old line of ladder logic with a new line Step Action 1 Edit old line as desired 2 Press INSERT key 3 Press ENTER key 3 To insert a line of ladder logic between two existing lines Step Action 1 Display line of logic ahead of where new line is to be inserted 2 Press ALT F8 to clear screen 3 Create line to be inserted 4 Press INSERT key 5 Press PgDn key Continued on next page 10 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 1 3 General Editing Procedures Continued Deleting a line of ladder logic Perform the Table 1 11 procedure to delete a line of logic Table 1 11 Deleting a Line of Ladder Logic Step Action 1 Display line of ladder logic to be deleted 2 Press DELETE key and then PgDn key Editing numeric entries Perform the Table 1 12 procedure to edit numeric entries such as addresses data values or numeric information for logical elements in a line of ladder logic Table 1 12 Editing Numeric Entries for Logical Elements Step Action 1 Delete digits from right to left by pressing BACKSPACE key 2 Number presently being edited may be reset to 0 by pressing the SP
447. or and exchanging address and or logic instruction of an existing logic element every time it is found in the ladder logic program requires only a few keystrokes Expanded Block editing functions allows readdressing logic element in a block of ladder logic while logic is being loaded into memory up to eight different groups of addresses may be reassigned to different address ranges Function Block programming features allows creating ladder logic programs in modular format which offers the following benefits reduces time required to assemble programs helps standardize functions for special operations makes programs easier to read and understand saves time during testing since Function Blocks are pretested and have fewer faults makes ladder logic programs easy to generate maintain and invoke and also provides Function Block Library which contains the ladder logic of all available Honeywell Function Blocks Flexible configuration feature allows specifying different parameters for WinLoader software to use for display editing and data storage functions based on requirements of individual applications offers an easy to use menu structure Universal 620 LC interface supports all 620 LCs for both on line programming and monitoring and stand alone operations 4 05 620 WinLoader Overview 5 1 2 620 WinLoader Continued How can I benefit from WinL
448. or is blank No message indicates that the file name specified does exist that it contains data and that it was successfully loaded After the loading operation is complete the message Done displays as shown in Figure 3 3 below press ENTER or Esc at this point to call up the WinLoader Main Screen Display shown in Figure 3 4 if you respond no N or Esc to the Name Check message box the loading procedure is aborted and the WinLoader Main Screen Display appears immediately on the screen shown in Figure 3 4 Figure 3 3 Loading Operation Messages Continued on next page 58 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 3 2 Main Screen Display Continued PROGRAM and MONITOR modes The WinLoader Main Screen Display shown in Figure 3 4 is also known as the Editor Monitor Mode Menu because it is used to both edit program and monitor ladder logic control programs Once you enter the Main Screen Display you must select the type of software operation desired PROGRAM or MONITOR Use F11 Mode that is press SHIFT F1 from WinLoader Main Screen Display to toggle between PROGRAM and MONITOR modes WinLoader software normally follows keyswitch position of 620 LC so it will be in MONITOR mode for all keyswitch positions except PROGRAM When in 620 Stand Alone Loader mode you are limited to PROGRAM mode only and may only create edit and document ladder logic programs Figure 3 4 Main Screen Display
449. ormation they contain 2488 21845 No ARMP in progress 2487 43690 ARMP in progress 2470 Control Relay Size MSB before usage of real I O 2469 LSB 2468 Real I O Size MSB 2467 LSB 2466 Register Size MSB 2465 LSB 2432 Model BCD 2431 Card Fault Address1 MSB 2430 LSB 2429 Card Fault Address2 MSB 2428 LSB 2427 Card Fault Address3 MSB 2426 LSB 2425 Card Fault Address4 MSB 2424 LSB 2423 Card Fault Address5 MSB 2422 LSB 2421 Card Fault Address6 MSB 2420 LSB 2419 Card Fault Address7 MSB 2418 LSB Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 23 2 3 System Status Information Continued 2417 Card Fault Address8 MSB 2416 LSB 2415 Card Fault Count MSB 2414 LSB 2413 Scan Loss Scan Loss 0 Valid Scan 128 2412 Battery Bad 0 Good 128 2411 PM Fail 0 Pass 128 2408 Motherboard ID Correct 128 Continued on next page 24 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 2 3 System Status Information Continued System Diagnostic status continued 2404 Option Card CIM or CNM see NOTE below 2403 Option Card CIM or CNM see NOTE below 2402 Option Card CIM or CNM see NOTE below 2401 Option Card CIM or CNM see NOTE below 2399 Control Network Status Bits Option Card1 2398 Control Network Status Bits Option Card2 2397 Control Network Status Bits Option Card3 2396 Control Network Status Bits Option Card4 2395 PC Checksum MSB 2394 LSB 2393 PC Checksum E
450. owing steps to program a latch coil output in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F2 to select Coil Logic Group 2 Enter desired address 3 Press F3 to select latch coil 52 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 2 Contact and Coil Instructions Continued Unlatch coil Refer to Table 3 9 for unlatch coil specifications Table 3 9 Unlatch Coil Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 10 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Used along with latch coil to control latched or unlatched ON OFF state of same real world device or internal coil Characteristics Turns OFF when preceding logic is TRUE and remains OFF even if preceding logic goes FALSE see Figure 3 4 unlatch coil can only turn OFF or unlatch its addressed point cannot turn it ON Latch coils are retentive and will return to previous ON OFF state during a retentive scan Because of their operation latch and unlatch coils are used together to control the ON OFF state of their addressed point device or internal coil these coils simulate operation of electrically controlled mechanically latching unlatching relay coils When line with an unlatch coil is monitored output status displayed is result of logic to determine actual status of address enter address into multielement or data display screens Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program an unlatch coil o
451. p to 45 processor dependent in 620 LC register table to be reserved for data associated with output parameters Select F8 enter desired number of output parameter addresses and press ENTER Pressing Spacebar clears F1 block Corresponding number displays on right hand side of F8 block on menu and corresponding output parameter address range based on starting address specified using F5 function and input parameter address range specified using F6 function displays in middle of F8 block After Function Block overhead is formally entered corresponding number of output parameter registers is entered into appropriate output parameter unloading FBU line inside Function Block When using F8 function refer to Section 2 Function Block Programming Theory of Operation for information regarding number of registers required for each specific parameter Continued on next page 44 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 4 3 Editing Function Blocks Continued Editing Function Block logic Perform the Table 4 9 procedure to edit logic in any designated Function Block Table 4 9 Editing Function Block Logic Step Action 1 Display desired external Function Block Display line 2 Press Ctrl PgDn to enter Zoom in mode to access Function Block Body 3 Edit logic as desired 4 Press Ctrl PgUp to exit Zoom in mode 5 Transfer edited Function Block back to Function Block lib
452. play only applies to Rev 70 or greater CPMs 620 12 1633 36 Version 2 0 or greater running WinLoader software Version 5 4 or later note that although these selections Ctrl F3 and Ctrl F4 perform the described operations they do not appear in any particular menu Software Program Mode SPM may be started by 22 possible devices To cause an SPM request select F2 Request S W Program Mode from the Mode Change Functions Menu see Figure 2 10 or perform any write action on user program memory while the 620 LC s keyswitch is in the Program mode If another WinLoader device is also using SPM you will receive a pending status pop up on your WinLoader screen display shown in Figure 2 11 below upon SPM request Press ENTER at SPM pop up to abort current process while keeping SPM request pending Press ESC at SPM pop up to abort current process and remove SPM request Continued on next page 68 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 WinLoader status line Mode parameter instructs you to the current CPM status refer to Figure 2 12 next page for all possible indications Mode field flashing SPM status indicates Loader owns SPM Word MODE flashing on screen indicates Loader has SPM request pending Mode Change Functions Menu also displays dynamic table of counts showing number of devices currently requesting SPM see Figure 2 10 Figure 2 11 Software Program Mode Pop Up Continued
453. plus Each of the 8 byte blocks above are structured as per the following example 32 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 2 3 System Status Information Continued Rev 2 0 620 1633 36 Processors Serial I O Diagnostic Registers 3119 MSB Number of SIOMs ONLINE Link 4 3118 LSB Number of SIOMs ONLINE Link 3 3117 MSB Number of SIOMs ONLINE Link 2 3116 LSB 3115 MSB Number of SIOMs ONLINE Link 1 3114 LSB 3113 MSB Starting Address of OFFLINE SIOM Link 4 3112 LSB 3111 MSB Starting Address of OFFLINE SIOM Link 3 3110 LSB 3109 MSB Starting Address of OFFLINE SIOM Link 2 3108 LSB 3107 MSB Starting Address of OFFLINE SIOM Link 1 3106 LSB 3105 MSB B15 For Redundancy Use B14 For Redundancy Use B13 Input PULL Data Ready Link 4 B12 SIOM OFFLINE Flag Link 4 B11 For Redundancy Use B10 For Redundancy Use B9 Input PULL Data Ready Link 3 B8 SIOM OFFLINE Flag Link 3 3104 LSB B7 For Redundancy Use B6 For Redundancy Use B5 Input PULL Data Ready Link 2 B4 SIOM OFFLINE Flag Link 2 B3 For Redundancy Use B2 For Redundancy Use B1 Input PULL Data Ready Link 1 B0 SIOM OFFLINE Flag Link 1 620 1200 620 1633 and 620 3632 LCs do not support redundancy 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 33 2 3 System Status Information Continued System Status Table programming examples Example 1 Collect program s scan time value ms in addresses 2291 and 2290
454. poses only and cannot be changed Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 11 2 2 Function Block Operation Continued Line 3 Input Parameter Unloading FBU line The Input Parameter Unloading FBU line or lines is basically a stack unloading line s that is automatically programmed by the WinLoader when the Function Block is created or the Function Block header is revised via the Function Block Selections Menu The FBU line s consists solely of a PUSH instruction that is used to transfer the data placed on the CPU s internal stack by the FBI line to registers used internally by the Function Block as shown in Figure 2 7 for Function Block TSpindl1 Figure 2 7 Input Parameter Unloading FBU Line for TSpindl1 For the Figure 2 7 PUSH instruction the data brought in for the input parameter is being pushed to the specified internal register address of 8191 specified via the Function Block Selections Menu the available address range from 4096 to 8191 is processor dependent Note that in general one PUSH register should be allocated for each data word put on the stack by the FBI line when you create a Function Block note that a quantity of 3 input parameters was specified for this example Additional PUSH lines may also be added by reconfiguring the Function Block header via the Function Block Selections Menu as described in Section 3 Function Block Programming It should also be no
455. r Programming Reference 4 05 3 2 Contact and Coil Instructions Continued Normally open NO contact Refer to Table 3 2 for normally open NO contact specifications Table 3 2 Normally Open NO Contact Specifications SPECIFICATI ON DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 10 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Examines Input and Output Status Tables at specified address for ON condition in order to pass power to succeeding instructions Characteristi cs Examines specified address in I O Status Table see Figure 3 1 to determine CURRENT condition if ORed result of bits read from I O Status Table produces zero NO contact interpreted as being in normal position open instruction considered OFF or FALSE if ORed result of bits read from I O Status Table produces a one NO contact interpreted as being in abnormal position closed instruction considered ON or TRUE Programmin g keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a normally open NO contact in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F1 to select the Contact Logic Group 2 Enter desired address 3 Press F1 to select the normally open NO contact Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 43 3 2 Contact and Coil Instructions Continued Normally closed NC contact Refer to Table 3 3 for normally closed NC contact specifications Table 3 3 Normally Closed NC Con
456. r floating point to integer conversion specifications Table 3 62 Floating Point to Integer Conversion Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 36 LCs Symbol Usage Converts a 32 bit floating point value into a 16 bit signed two s complement value integer value can be obtained from floating point data manipulation instructions or as result of a floating point math operation resulting converted value can be used like any other integer value Characteristics Round to nearest integer convention is used in conversion process to maintain highest level of precision Overflow condition can occur if resulting value is beyond range of valid signed integers that is 32768 to 32767 when this occurs bit 2 of error status word is asserted set to 1 and 2 is written to specified error address proper saturated integer value is placed on stack if result exceeds 32768 then 32768 is placed on stack if result exceeds 32767 then 32767 is placed on stack coil programmed after conversion operation energizes Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a floating point to integer conversion instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F9 to select Operators Logic Group 2 Press F6 to select Conversion Operators Group 3 Press F4 to select floating point to integer conversion instruction 4 Ent
457. r program Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 3 1 2 WinLoader Start up Continued Executing Loader program Click the WinLoader icon or navigate to the folder where you have installed the 620 WinLoader and select the Loader exe file 4 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 1 2 WinLoader Start up Continued Figure 1 1 WinLoader s Proprietary Information Screen Figure 1 2 620 WinLoader Main Menu Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 5 1 2 WinLoader Start up Continued Specifying Loader configuration filename upon start up The ability to specify the configuration filename when starting the WinLoader program enables you to change the environment in which the software operates in order to accommodate multiple projects or other functional variations of the program Perform the Table 1 2 procedure to specify a Loader configuration filename Table 1 2 Specifying Loader Configuration Filename Upon Start up Step Action 1 Execute the LOADER EXE the software loads into PC s main memory and begins executing by displaying proprietary information screen see Figure 1 1 2 Press ENTER after reading to acknowledge and clear display Continued on next page 6 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 1 2 WinLoader Start up Continued Specifying Loader mode of operation upon start up Specifying the appropriate parameter upon start up allows
458. racter label and 3 line by 9 character description may be assigned to any of the following three types of ladder logic element reference numbers address 0 8191 skip instruction element reference number 0 32767 and subroutine instruction element reference number 0 255 To access the editors that create these forms make the appropriate selection from the Documentation Functions Menu F2 F5 or F6 When an editor is selected labels descriptions whether created while editing ladder logic or loaded due to presence of a file name are loaded This is accomplished using the default file name presently in memory If desired edit the default file name through the configuration function or Documentation Functions Menu F9 Default File before entering any of the label description editors and before beginning a new project The three editors are identical in internal editing features however when an editor is used to create documentation and the documentation is then saved onto a disk file a file extension unique to that type of reference number is created Use the same file name for each label description file saved When an editor is selected the display shown in Figure 2 3 opens on the screen Refer to Table 2 5 next four pages for descriptions of each available selection from each editor s menu Note also that in each editor the following items display in the lower right hand position of the display maximum
459. rammed the line comment number assigned to the line of ladder logic displays in the lt gt display Note that the line number and line marker number are not required to be the same Each line marker uses one word of memory Note that even as lines are added and deleted from the program the comment originally assigned to a line of ladder logic remains associated with that logic regardless of any changes in line number Continued on next page 8 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 1 2 Documentation Types Continued Line Comments Line comments may be created using the Line Comment Editor from the Documentation Functions Menu selected from the Main Menu described in subsection 2 4 of this manual or while editing or monitoring ladder logic The Line Comment Editor is not available in the Documentation Menu selected from the Auxiliary Function Menu described in Section 3 of this manual Perform the Table 1 4 procedure to create or edit a line comment from the ladder logic editor Table 1 4 Creating or Editing a Line Comment Step Action 1 Press the Line Marker Edit Menu appears 2 Select C from the Line Marker Edit Menu to show the line comment 3 Select E to access edit function 4 Edit or create line comment as desired 5 Press F10 when editing is complete to store line comment into PC s memory If editing changes were made upon exit from 620 Loader Monitor or 620
460. rams 68 SECTION 8 ADVANCED FUNCTION BLOCK APPLICATIONS 79 8 1 Overview 80 8 2 Nesting Function Blocks 81 8 3 Nesting Function Blocks as Subroutines 82 GLOSSARY 83 GLOSSARY CONTINUED 84 vi 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 Figures Figure 1 1 Typical Function Block 3 Figure 1 2 Typical Function Block Body Line 4 Figure 2 1 Typical Function Block titled TSpndl1 6 Figure 2 2 Lines of Ladder Logic Represented by Function Block TSpndl1 6 Figure 2 3 Function Block Format for Function Block TSpndl1 7 Figure 2 4 Function Block Display FBD Line Format for TSpndl1 Line 1 8 Figure 2 5 External FBD Line for Function Block TSpindl1 9 Figure 2 6 Function Block Input Parameter FBI Line for TSpindl1 10
461. rary for future use using either the same or a different Function Block number and security features An E is added between Function Block number and size field if Function Block has been edited E is removed when Function Block is saved to disk Refer to Section 6 Uploading Downloading Function Blocks for information on saving Function Blocks to Function Block Library Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 45 4 3 Editing Function Blocks Continued Moving Function Blocks Perform the Table 4 10 procedure to move a designated Function Block from one location to another within your ladder logic program This function may only be performed in Program mode When performing this procedure you must define entire Function Block that is partial Function Block may not be moved Table 4 10 Moving a Function Block Step Action 1 Display desired external Function Block Display line 2 Press F17 or Shift F7 to access Block Edit Menu shown in Figure 4 1 below 3 Select F2 Move from Block Edit Menu 4 At Block Beginning Enter Line prompt enter first line number of Function Block to be moved or accept default for current line number and press ENTER note that while performing this step you may use PgUp or PgDn key to display existing lines of logic to be considered for block define function 5 At Block Ending Enter Line
462. rced elements contacts and coils in program Program Title Block program title date program was created or last edited and programmer s name When loading programs originally created for a 620 20 25 30 or 35 LC into a 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 or 36 LC you may encounter Invalid Opcode or Address Out of Range errors these errors will occur if a ladder logic program contains an element from the contact or coil logic group with an address of 4096 to 8191 these addresses are the 17th bit sign bits of the registers in the 620 20 25 30 and 35 LCs and are not valid contact or coil addresses in the 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 or 36 LCs if this condition occurs use the Stand Alone mode of the WinLoader configured to match the original 620 LC for which the program was written in order to delete or readdress these elements to conform to the limitations of the 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 or 36 LC if the original program used these elements to control a sign of a register you may want to use the negate NEG or absolute ABS operators to perform the necessary functions in the 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 or 36 LC Continued on next page 56 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 2 3 Upload Download Functions F2 Continued Append from Disk to 620 F4 Press F4 to access the Append from Disk to 620 function This function is used to load a previously saved l
463. rch amp Exchange function continued Table 1 22 Procedure for Performing Search amp Exchange Function Step Action 1 Place cursor to left of first occurrence of address instruction to be searched for and exchanged 2 Press Shift F10 3 Enter desired new address in response to prompt 4 If only a new address is desired Step Action 4A Press ENTER key 4B To verify search and exchange by keyboard entry press Y in response to Verify Each Choice Y N Y prompt otherwise search amp exchange procedure is performed automatically 4C Software displays Ok Y N N prompt each time specified address is found press Y to implement exchange function press N to skip current element and search for next occurrence of specified address 4D Continue searching to end of program or press Esc to terminate exchange function 5 If both a new address and a new instruction are to be searched for and exchanged Step Action 5A Select ladder logic group and specific ladder logic element to be exchanged with address instruction at present cursor position 5B To verify search and exchange by keyboard entry press Y in response to Verify Each Choice Y N Y prompt otherwise search amp exchange procedure is performed automatically 5C Software displays Ok Y N N prompt each time specified address instruction is found press Y to implement e
464. re 2 19 Save Configuration Example 46 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 2 8 Terminal Emulator F7 620 6041 Terminal Emulator program Press F7 Terminal Emulator Not supported in Winloader 5 4 from the WinLoader Main Menu to load and execute the 620 6041 Terminal Emulator software program Note that this description assumes that the 620 6041 Terminal Emulator software program has been included with your system The 620 6041 Terminal Emulator program is a software package that enables your PC to act as a dumb terminal The American National Standards Institute ANSI compatible Terminal Emulator allows you to perform peripheral communications programming functions with serial 620 LC products This includes program entry and data backup for the following Honeywell products 627 1002R 1003R MiniCOP 621 0012R ASCII Communication Module 621 0016R Controller Access Module CAM Refer to the separate 620 6041 Terminal Emulator User Manual Form 620 8989 for complete coverage of the Terminal Emulator software program 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 47 2 9 Utility Functions F8 620 60 Utility software Press F8 Utility Functions Not supported in Winloader 5 4 from the WinLoader Main Menu to load and execute the 620 60 Utility software Note that this description assumes that the 620 60 Utility software has been included with your system 620 60 Utility software comprises the following four
465. red in this section Topic See Page 2 1 Overview 11 2 2 Function Block Parameter Name Editor F1 16 2 3 Label Description Editors F2 F5 F6 22 2 4 Comment Editors F3 F4 29 2 5 Bit Comment Editor F7 39 2 6 Bit Label Editor F8 40 2 7 Edit Default File F9 41 Purpose of this section This section describes each available documentation function that is accessible from the Documentation Functions Menu when the Documentation Functions Menu is accessed from the WinLoader s Main Menu Continued on next page 12 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 2 1 Overview Continued Accessing Documentation Functions Menu Press F3 Documentation Functions from the WinLoader s Main Menu to access the Documentation Functions Menu shown in Figure 2 1 below This menu permits you to document all elements in your ladder logic program and to provide extensive labels descriptions and comments throughout the program
466. remember that signed integers provide for negative values of 1 to 32768 while unsigned integers provide for positive results program an output coil directly after the subtraction operation instead of a data manipulation instruction to detect for negative values if a negative difference occurs the coil energizes otherwise it remains unenergized error status word can also be assigned to subtraction operation test for bit 3 negative bit refer to Section 4 for more information Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a subtraction instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F9 to select Operators Logic Group 2 Press F7 to select Math Operators Logic Group 3 Press F8 to select subtraction instruction 4 Enter optional error address Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 37 3 8 Math Instructions Continued Basic subtraction operation Figure 3 36 illustrates a simple line of logic which contains a basic subtraction operation first bring in from address 5000 places value 1796 on stack subtraction instruction tells processor to subtract next value placed on stack from last value placed there second bring in from address 5100 places value 311 on stack both values are immediately subtracted and difference is placed on stack 1796 311 1485 send out writes last value placed on stack 1485
467. rete output modules lowest valid address specified is 15 which provides bits 15 MSB through 0 LSB specifying address 4096 and greater transfers data from data table not used to access analog or special function I O and addresses assigned to these modules should not fall within the 16 bit range 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 101 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Send out continued Table 3 28 Send Out Specifications Continued SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Characteristics continued When viewed through WinLoader data read from the Register Function displays beneath the instruction if True or is preceded by True conditioning logic the last data word written to stack is read transferred to specified address then displayed beneath instruction as either an unsigned signed or hexadecimal integer if False or is preceded by False conditioning logic the message No Data appears beneath the symbol indicating that no data is currently being transferred Send out data can be changed using data change function this technique is often called forcing data because you are writing specific value through send out instruction to specified register function address regardless of value read from CPM s stack perform the following steps to use data change function Step Action 1 Use cursor control keys to position cursor to immediate left of instruction
468. rhead is formally entered address is shown as parameter output address in both FBI and FBO lines inside Function Block F4 Function Block Save Protection Allows selecting appropriate save protection NONE USER OEM for when Function Block is saved to disk Toggle F4 to obtain desired save protection default setting is NONE corresponding save protection displays on right hand side of F4 block on menu After Function Block overhead is formally entered numerical code that represents save protection level is included as part of internal FBD line unseen inside Function Block Refer to 623 WinLoader Implementation LDR003 for a description of security coding which is accessed through WinLoader Main Menu F5 Register Block Start Address Allows identifying where parameter data is to be stored available address range is from 4096 to 8191 processor dependent Select F5 enter appropriate start address to define range for locations of input and output parameter data and press ENTER Pressing Spacebar clears F5 block Selected address displays on right hand side of menu s F5 block After Function Block overhead is formally entered start address is used for first input parameter PUSH line inside Function Block Since internal variables used with each Function Block share available common address space with entire program it is your responsibility to keep track of addressing range
469. rify desired address To examine each element found before it is forced press Y or yes in response to Verify Each prompt a N or no response causes selected force to be applied to each element found with selected address You can then select desired state to force address by selecting F1 for On F2 for Off or F4 for Clear Refer to subsequent subsection titled Forcing All Addresses for additional information This function does not affect any Send Out instructions with specified address that may be in logic program This function will not work with bit read bit write instructions for 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 and 36 LCs each occurrence of these instructions must be forced individually F6 MASTER CLR Allows you to clear all forces presently in ladder logic program from beginning to end of memory This function does not work in Stand Alone mode Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 21 1 5 Force Functions F14 Continued Forcing all addresses The F5 Force All Addresses function operates somewhat differently than the Force On and Force Off functions When this function is requested the WinLoader first prompts you for the address to be forced Next you are given the option to force all references to that address as either ON Closed or OFF Open You also have the option of clearing all forces assigned to the specified addres
470. rity code to save Function Block Refer to 623 WinLoader Implementation LDR003 for description of security coding which is accessed through WinLoader Main Menu 10 Select F2 FB to save Function Block to disk Function Block is saved to either default pathname as displayed or any file name specified press Y to save changes and follow prompts as required to complete Save procedure Default filename is built from Function Block number for example FBxnnn LDR if Function Block with that particular name or number already exists you are prompted with Overwrite Existing Files Y N 30 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 3 3 Entering Function Block Parameters Guidelines Once a Function Block has been defined input and output parameters may be entered at an empty parameter location or if desired at a previously entered parameter location on either the input or output side of the external Function Block Display box see Figure 3 3 Up to 45 input and 45 output parameters may be entered either for display purposes only or to also be used to push stack data into internal registers associated with the Function Block that is into PUSH registers set up using the Parameter Unloading lines Figure 3 3 External Function Block Display Box Parameter names contained within Function Block Display box which are entered separately using Function Block Parameter Name Editor described in 623 WinLoad
471. ro on cold start 0007 KEYJMP2 Expansion of change history information for MODCON B0 IO_CONF change history for MODCON 0006 IO_CK_WIP Configuration Table Checksum Write in Progress AAH No Write in Progress 55H No Write in Progress 0005 Reserved byte for expansion of SYS ERR This byte is cleared to zero on cold start Continued on next page 30 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 2 3 System Status Information Continued For 620 12 1633 36 Models continued 0004 SYS_ERR System Error Word Signals the nature of an error indicated by the assertion of B0 of ERROR2 It has the following format B7 No longer defined was previously defined as User Checksum Error bit this information is contained in ERRFLG B6 Processor Control IO Configuration Checksum Error B5 RUN attempted without valid Processor Control IO Configuration B4 RUN attempted with failed battery AND RUN with low battery negated B3 Self Test Failure B2 Illegal IO Configuration B1 Scan Loss B0 No ISS IOM in User Program 0003 MSB 0 01 Timebase Counter History for Last Scan 0002 LSB 0001 MSB 0 01 Timebase Counter LSB Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 31 2 3 System Status Information Continued Rev 2 0 620 12 1633 36 Processors All of the above plus 0021 User Program Rev Ctr LSB 0020 User Program Rev Ctr MSB Rev 3 0 620 12 1633 36 Processors All of the above
472. rogramming Reference 99 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Floating point bring in characteristics Figure 3 19 Floating Point Bring In Characteristics 100 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Send out Refer to Table 3 28 for send out specifications Table 3 28 Send Out Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Transfers last 16 bit data word written from CPM s stack to Register Function this data word can be written to either the Register Function s data or I O Status Tables when accessing I O Status Table CPM must dissect 16 bit word since each of these locations consists of a single bit Characteristics Specific send out operations for each location include Data Register Table reads last 16 bit word from stack and transfers it to specified address in data table see Figure 3 20 specifying addresses 4095 and lower transforms data to I O Status Table I O Status Table reads last 16 bit word from stack and transfers it to 16 consecutive I O Status Table registers using specified address as most significant bit see Figure 3 20 to ensure accuracy this operation should remain within physical I O card boundaries module addresses when writing to real I O this operation should be limited to addresses occupied by disc
473. rom Block Edit Menu Block Operations Menu appears with following selections F1 LDR F2 FB and F3 REG 3 Select F3 REG from Block Operations Menu and follow prompts as directed to save Function Block input parameter register values to disk If save protection level is set for either USER or OEM you are required to enter your security code to save Function Block Refer to 623 WinLoader Implementation LDR003 for description of security coding which is accessed through WinLoader Main Menu Data are saved to file with FBR extension Default file is FBxxxxx but you have option of changing name 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 59 6 3 Loading Function Blocks Procedure for loading Function Blocks Perform the Table 6 3 procedure to load a designated Function Block from disk to a designated 620 LC s memory Program mode security is only code needed to load any Function Block into 620 LC memory Before loading Function Block you must first decide if you want to give Function Block logic program new addresses to prevent overwriting of addresses already used in program to do this define following ranges to create internal address definition table for Function Block to be loaded Real I O range corresponding to that of 620 LC attached or selected is 0 to xxxx Control I O range maximum value is 2039 or that of 620 LC to avoid conflict with serial I O status regist
474. ropriate numeric label 3 Press F3 to select end of jump EOS instruction Continued on next page 62 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 10 Memory Reference Instructions Continued Jump to multiple EOS characteristics Figure 3 45 illustrates characteristics associated with a jump to multiple EOS instruction Figure 3 45 Jump to Multiple EOS Characteristics Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 63 3 10 Memory Reference Instructions Continued Jump to subroutine JSR Refer to Table 3 54 for jump to subroutine specifications Table 3 54 Jump to Subroutine Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Used as a line terminator and causes 620 LC to immediately begin executing a subroutine program see Figure 3 46 Characteristics When enabled causes normal sequential scan to be redirected to specified subroutine block which is typically located elsewhere in control program Includes user defined numeric label 0 to 255 which is used to identify subroutine with same numeric label to be jumped to Can be controlled by conditioning logic such as a contact if conditioning logic is True JSR is true and scan jumps to first line in subroutine block identified by JSR s numeric label False JSR is false and normal sequential scan of control program continue
475. rror Flag MSB 0 no error 1 error 2392 LSB 2391 PC Initial Checksum Flag System use only 2390 PC Initial Checksum Flag 0 initial checksum calculation in progress 1 initial checksum complete 2318 Option Card Fault Bits 1 CIM CNM 2317 Option Card Fault Bits 2 CIM CNM 2316 Option Card Fault Bits 3 CIM CNM 2315 Option Card Fault Bits 4 CIM CNM NOTE 11111111 Component Not Present 00000001 CIM Present amp Failed 10000001 CIM Present amp Passed 00000010 CNM Present amp Failed 10000010 CNM Present amp Passed Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 25 2 3 System Status Information Continued System Hardware status 2303 Processor Type 1 620 12 1633 36 2302 Revision Level gt 65 in the 620 12 1633 36 2299 Memory Size MSB 2298 LSB 2297 Memory Used MSB 2296 LSB 2295 Force Count MSB 2294 LSB 2293 0 MSB 2292 Baud Rate LSB 2291 0 MSB 2290 Scan Time LSB 2287 Software Request for Program MSB 2286 LSB 2284 Memory Type EPROM 128 Fail 255 2275 Option Card 1 ID 2274 Option Card 2 ID 2273 Option Card 3 ID 2272 Option Card 4 ID Continued on next page 26 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 2 3 System Status Information Continued System identification 2175 ASCII Character Bit Pattern for Program Date 2170 2169 ASCII Character Bit Pattern for Programmer 2144 2143 ASCII Character Bit Pattern for Program Title 2048
476. rs Sub Group Conversion Sub Operator Group Binary to BCD BCD to Binary Floating Point to Integer Integer to Floating Point Absolute Square Root Math Sub Operator Group Multiply Divide Greater Than Less Than Equal To Test for Zero Addition Subtraction Logical Sub Operator Group AND OR Exclusive OR Negate Not F10 MATRIX Matrix Logic Group Move Invert Set OR Exclusive OR Compare AND 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 17 2 2 Valid Ladder Logic Instructions Continued Table 2 2 620 LC Instruction Set INSTRUCTION SYMBOL 620 06 15 620 10 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 36 620 25 35 Normally Open Contact x x x x Normally Closed Contact x x x x Transition ON Contact x x x x Transition OFF Contact x x x x Bit Read BR x Logic Inverter o x Series and Parallel Branches x x x x Non Retentive Output x x x x Retentive Output R x x x x Latch Output L x x x x Unlatch Output U x x x x Bit Write BW x 0 1 1 0 Second ON Delay Timers TON x x x x 0 1 1 0 Second OFF Delay Timers TOF x x x x 0 1 1 0 Second Retentive ON Delay Timers TON x x x x 01 Second ON Delay Timer TON x x 01 Second OFF Delay Timer TOF x x 01 Second Retentive Timer TON x Counter CTU CTD
477. ry Refer to Table 2 2 below for descriptions of the functions available from this menu If any of the Clear functions is selected the following safety prompt appears Are you sure Y N N 620 memory is cleared only when the Y key is selected to abort function press any key except Y Clear Memory functions may be used when software is in Stand Alone mode or Loader Monitor mode with 620 LC in Program mode Figure 2 2 Clear Memory Functions Menu Table 2 2 Clear Memory Functions Menu Selections Key Selection Function F1 Clear Ladder Logic Clears ladder logic from CPM s Memory Function With WinLoader in Stand Alone mode area of PC s RAM memory used for Memory Function emulation is cleared Note that ladder logic memory is cleared from present cursor position to end of memory to clear entire ladder logic memory press Ctrl Home keys to return to beginning of memory prior to activating this function F2 Clear Labels Clears all documentation labels from PC s RAM memory F3 Clear Comments Clears all documentation comments from PC s RAM memory F4 Clear Function Block Labels Clears all Function Block documentation labels from PC s RAM memory 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 51 2 3 Upload Download Functions F2 Accessing Upload Download Functions Menu Press F2 Upload Download Functions from the Auxiliary Function Menu to access the Up
478. s By selecting to force all addresses either on or off you are in effect forcing a coil of that address to the on or off state All similarly addressed contacts in the program then respond to the state of the forced coil Figure 1 5 below illustrates this point and compares the forcing of all addresses to the forcing of a specific address Figure 1 5 Force All Addresses Compared to Specific Addresses Continued on next page 22 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 1 5 Force Functions F14 Continued Force notification There are four primary notification methods which are used for indicating that force conditions exist in a particular ladder logic control program When one or more forces of any type exist in a program currently loaded in your 620 CPM s memory function The word Force is displayed beneath the line number on the Main Screen Display The red Force LED on the CPM s frontplate is lit The Force Count in the Hardware Status display in the Auxiliary Function Menu s 620 Diagnostics Menu is equal to or greater than one force count value indicates the total number of forced elements in the program FO Force Open Off or FC Force Closed ON is displayed beneath each forced element each element also indicates its forced True or False condition as illustrated in Figure 1 6 below Figure 1 6 Force Notification 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 23
479. s Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program an end of jump instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F8 to select Subroutine Logic Group 2 Enter appropriate numeric label 0 to 255 3 Press F8 to select jump to subroutine JSR instruction Continued on next page 64 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 10 Memory Reference Instructions Continued Jump to subroutine characteristics Figure 3 46 illustrates characteristics associated with a jump to subroutine JSR instruction Figure 3 46 Jump to Subroutine JSR Characteristics Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 65 3 10 Memory Reference Instructions Continued Subroutine SUB Refer to Table 3 55 for subroutine specifications Table 3 55 Subroutine Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Used as line terminator to define beginning of group of logic lines that are to be used as subroutine see Figure 3 47 Characteristics When SUB s line of logic is entered via a JSR and control logic is enabled processor executes subroutine block Includes user defined numeric label 0 to 255 which is used to identify subroutine and as a link to its JSR Can be controlled by conditioning logic such as a contact if conditioning logic is True SUB is true and processor execu
480. s a positive number one 1 indicates a negative number Like the sign magnitude method all but the most significant of the binary representation are interpreted as numeric data in the twos complement method Positive numeric data appears in exactly the same form as in the sign magnitude representation However negative numbers have a different form as compared to sign magnitude which allows for faster execution of math operations using less complex electronic circuitry In math or comparison operations such circuitry produces the correct representation of the result whether the input data is considered an unsigned or a twos complement data point Based on a 16 bit data word both the sign magnitude and twos complement methods provide a numeric data range of 32767 to 32768 Twos complement notation is the normal integer mode for 620 12 1633 36 LCs It is recommended that twos complement mode be used when integer math is applicable For efficiency speed and ease of programming you will find this mode to be simple and straightforward The valid range for twos complement notation is 32768 to 32767 see Figure 4 1 Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 137 4 2 Data Representation Continued Floating point math characteristics Floating point instructions allow chain type math calculations like those used in integer mathematics to be executed with a much greater degree of accuracy Fl
481. s wide Figure A 1 below illustrates the memory distribution Table A 1 below describes the system capacities of real I O control relay addresses and 16 bit registers Table A 1 620 06 LC I O and Register Capacities SYSTEM MEMORY SIZE MAXIMUM REAL I O CAPACITY NUMBER OF CONTROL RELAY ADDRESSES in addition to real I O 16 BIT REGISTERS 2K 192 bit addresses 576 bit addresses 256 Figure A 1 Register Memory Map for 620 06 LCs Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 149 A 2 System Status Information for 620 06 LC Continued System Status Table for 620 06 LC The 620 06 LC s System Status Table consists of memory locations 8 bits wide It stores processor system diagnostic information This information is accessed through the Loader Terminal by using a four digit decimal address and a PULL instruction in the control program The 620 06 LC instruction set includes the PULL instruction Three categories of information are stored in the System Status Table System Diagnostics System Hardware Status and System Identification Refer to Table A 2 for the more commonly used addresses and register contents Table A 2 620 06 LC System Status Table Decimal Address Register Contents 2432 Alternate Model Number in Hex 2431 Card fault address 1 2429 Card fault address 2 2427 Card fault address 3 2425 Card fault address 4 2423 Card fault address 5 2
482. scribed will appear It should be noted that the Edit Step operations work directly on processor memory and do not require the old version of the sequencer to be overwritten with the newly edited version Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 9 1 2 Software Mode Control Function F11 Continued ARMP programming rules Note the following programming rules when making Run mode changes in ARMP mode Set watchdog timer preset to allow for up to 20ms of extra scan time Take care when performing ARMP operations with subroutines and certain types of NSKR instructions When adding new subroutines add the SUB instruction first then the JSR likewise when adding new jumps add the EOS first then the NSKR When deleting subroutines delete the JSR first then the SUB when deleting jumps delete the NSKR first then the EOS Do not overwrite a SUB or EOS with another SUB or EOS the old instruction should be deleted before the new instruction is added Judge carefully the consequences of adding or deleting sequencer steps for example adding a step before the active step makes the sequencer appear to be moving back a step deleting a step before the active step makes the sequencer appear to be moving forward a step the step number register must be adjusted to agree with the new number of steps If Load or Unload Sequencer instructions are used take care if the target seque
483. se Documentation functions Table 2 5 Documentation Functions Menu Selections Key Selection Function F1 Printer Function Menu Enables selection of printout type ladder logic or documentation desired offers selection of various options formats and port parameters F2 Printer Characters Enables toggling between Standard and Graphic printer characters F7 Edit Default File Permits specifying pathname and file name where label descriptions and comments for ladder logic program are stored F8 Edit Title Block from 620 Permits changing title date and programmer s name in 620 LC title page Figure 2 5 Documentation Functions Menu 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 59 2 5 620 Diagnostics Menu F4 Accessing Display and Diagnostic Functions Menu Press F4 620 Diagnostics Menu from the Auxiliary Function Menu to access the Display and Diagnostic Functions Menu shown in Figure 2 6 below This menu accesses functions which are used to display system generated diagnostic information regarding the 620 LC s CPM It also provides a method of testing or displaying other system and program information Available functions include displaying hardware status information on CPM displaying results of systems self test diagnostics routine displaying most significant address of any failed system I O modules displaying current scan time while CPM is in Run mode of operation aut
484. sed to specify any valid path available on hard or floppy disk in PC pathname may consist of up to 30 characters and can specify disk drive A B C etc directory sub directory etc If you want to see a list of all ladder logic files stored under present pathname enter DIR space anytime software prompts you for a file name 3 Press ENTER to verify that entry is correct and complete 4 Choose any of the available functions F1 F2 F3 from the Register Table Functions Menu refer to subsequent subsections for appropriate procedures When any of these functions is selected a prompt appears requesting a file name of up to 8 characters enter the desired file name and press ENTER to verify that entry is correct and complete ladder logic is stored in file using pathname and file name specified Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 73 2 7 Register Table Functions F6 Continued Save from 620 to Disk F1 Press F1 to access the Save from 620 to Disk function This function is used to save specified 620 LC register table data values from the CPM s main memory to the PC s hard or floppy disk drive When initiated this function uses the current path to save the specified register table data values If a program file already exists at the destination specified by the pathname a message displays stating Overwrite Y N Select Y and press ENTER to overwrite the exis
485. sibility to keep track of addressing range and to make sure that each address is properly initialized before use most efficient way to address internal variables is to use same address locations for all internal addresses used with each different Function Block 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 27 F6 Parameter Inputs Allows specifying total number of addresses up to 45 processor dependent in 620 LC register table to be reserved for data associated with input parameters Select F6 enter desired number of input parameter addresses and press ENTER Pressing Spacebar clears F6 block Corresponding number displays on right hand side of F6 block on menu and corresponding input parameter address range based on starting address specified using F5 function displays in middle of F6 block After Function Block overhead is formally entered in step 5 of Table 3 1 or 3 3 procedure corresponding number of input parameter registers is entered into appropriate input parameter unloading FBU line inside Function Block When using F6 function refer to Section 2 Function Block Programming Theory of Operation for information regarding number of registers required for each specific parameter Table 3 2 is continued on next page 28 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 3 2 Defining Function Blocks Continued Defining a Function Block with new logic continued Table 3 2 Fu
486. signed numbers only unsigned 16 bit numbers 0 65535 are accepted as values to be written to processor F5 HEX Displays all data in four digit hexadecimal form this is indicated by letter h displayed to right of data value F6 DEL Deletes entry in data display at current position of highlighted area when used with F7 ALL function deletes all entries in data display F7 ALL When selected begins blinking to indicate software may perform F6 DEL delete function on all entries in data display being viewed you must then access the other format integer bit or floating point by paging up or down and perform delete operation again 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 81 2 10 DOS Shell F10 Accessing DOS Shell function Press F10 from the Auxiliary Function Menu to access the DOS Shell function This function permits you to temporarily go back to the DOS command level without exiting the WinLoader software where you may execute other programs and DOS commands This function is very useful for such instances as when you wish to save ladder logic or other data from the 620 LC to disk using a directory name or path that has yet to be constructed You will be required to enter your DOS access security code if not 0 when you attempt to shell to DOS from the WinLoader software program To return to the WinLoader software program from the DOS command level type EXIT at the DOS prompt
487. sing Force ON or Force OFF function you force only that instruction which is located to the right of the cursor all other program references to that specific address instruction or address and instruction are not affected Send Out instructions may be forced individually using either F1 or F2 functions a window display accepts data value to be forced into Send Out address Help screen is available for F4 Force function simply press Alt F10 Figure 1 4 Force Function Menu Continued on next page 20 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 1 5 Force Functions F14 Continued Force Functions Menu continued Table 1 11 Force Function Menu Selections Key Selection Function F1 ON Forces contact at present cursor position to ON or CLOSED state F2 OFF Forces condition of logic element at present cursor position to OFF or OPEN state F3 SEARCH Allows you to search for all occurrences of specified forced logic elements in program Each time forced logic element is found line of logic containing element is displayed with cursor immediately to left of forced element You then have opportunity to continue search by again pressing F3 Search key F4 CLEAR Clears any force function applied to logic element at present cursor position F5 ALL ADDR Allows you to force all occurrences of a specified address to a desired state When selected you are prompted to enter and ve
488. sk Operating System EOS End of Skip I O Input Output JSR Jump to Subroutine LAN Local Area Network LC Logic Controller MS MicroSoft NSKD Not Skip and Deenergize NSKR Not Skip and Retain OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer PC Personal Computer PID Proportional Integral and Derivative RTS
489. specifications Table 3 60 BCD to Binary Conversion Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 36 LCs Symbol Usage Converts a 4 digit BCD number from an integer data manipulation instruction obtained from a field device and within range of 0 to 9999 to a 16 bit binary format Characteristics Sign of resulting binary value is always positive therefore a coil programmed after conversion will always be off Optional error status word may be assigned to monitor for non BCD operands out of range invalid data when this occurs bit 11 of error status word is asserted set to 1 and 2048 is written to specified error address conversion result of zero is placed on stack Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a BCD to binary conversion instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F9 to select Operators Logic Group 2 Press F6 to select Conversion Operators Group 3 Press F2 to select BCD to binary conversion instruction 4 Enter optional error address Continued on next page 76 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 11 Data Conversion Instructions Continued BCD to binary conversion characteristics Figure 3 51 illustrates characteristics associated with the BCD to binary conversion instruction Discrete input module in 621 I O system constantly monitors on off signal lines from fi
490. ss Line comments are shown when Function Block is zoomed in as described in subsection 5 2 Displaying Function Blocks and when you page to the comment line Line comment numbers for example lt 26062 gt are shown in the bottom right hand corner of display screen Table 7 1 Loading Function Block Library Control Program Step Action 1 With relay ladder display shown on main screen display press F17 or SHIFT F7 to access Block Edit menu shown in Figure 7 1 below 2 Press F7 Path and proceed as appropriate If loading desired Function Block from 623 6050 disk insert 623 6050 disk into drive A on PC enter A as pathname and press ENTER proceed to step 3 If loading desired Function Block from PC s hard disk enter C FBLIBRY as pathname where FBLIBRY is directory where desired Function Block file resides and press ENTER proceed to step 3 3 Select F9 LOAD from Block Edit Menu Block Operations Menu appears with following selections F1 LDR and F2 FB 4 Select F2 FB from Block Operations Menu to indicate that Function Block file is to be loaded from disk to 620 LC s memory 5 When prompted enter line number where Function Block is to be inserted Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 65 Figure 7 1 Block Edit Menu Continued on next page 66 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 7
491. ss F6 to select Timer Counter Logic Group 2 Enter time delay in microseconds 3 Press F8 to select delay instruction Continued on next page 128 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 14 Miscellaneous Instructions Continued Delay characteristics Figure 3 66 illustrates characteristics associated with the delay instruction in this line of logic the math operation is delayed by 250 microseconds after the control logic goes True When contact 300 goes True delay instruction becomes active and begins timing from 0 to 250 microseconds When delay times outs reaches 250 microseconds it then goes True and passes logical current flow to remaining logic Floating point bring in reads value 1 79613 x 1004 from addresses 5001 and 5000 in Data Register Table and places value on stack Division instruction instructs processor to divide last word 1 79613 x 1004 written to stack by the next word written to stack Floating point constant places value 1 00 x 1002 on stack and division is immediately executed placing result 1 79613 x 1002 on stack 1 79613 x 1004 1 00 x 1002 1 79613 x 1002 Floating point send out writes last word placed on stack 1 79613 x 1002 to addresses 6001 and 6000 in Data Register Table Figure 3 66 Delay Characteristics Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 129 3 14 Miscellaneous Instructions Continued No operatio
492. ss Zoom In mode Zoom In mode is also enabled while displaying line internal to Function Block as result of Search operation When accessed Zoom In mode attempts to display first user entered line or if you are defining an empty Function Block displays warning that no user entered lines currently exist Once inside Function Block ladder logic may be monitored as desired refer to Table 5 2 for Zoom In Mode keystroke commands When in Zoom In mode all Block Edit functions copy move delete and Search functions may be used but can only act on those lines contained within Function Block body Line Up Line Down Ctrl Home and Ctrl End commands are also active and perform just as in standard Block Edit mode Corresponding Function Block number FL displays in lower right hand corner of screen when in Zoom In mode along with corresponding line number L of main ladder logic program Zoom In mode may be accessed at any time whether WinLoader is on line or off line When zooming back into Function Block WinLoader accesses last interior line displayed provided no other Function Block was zoomed into in which case first line of Function Block body displays Table 5 2 Function Block Zoom In Mode Keystroke Commands Keystroke Command Description Ctrl PgUp Returns cursor to external FBD line that is Zooms out Page Up Moves cursor to previous line if cursor is on FBI line i
493. ss reference Range 0 8191 Refer to subsequent subsection titled F7 F8 Cross Reference Range F9 Compressed Print Enables control codes to be sent to printer to change characters per line from 80 132 to 140 226 under the following circumstances AUTO ladder logic listing with descriptions and line has 7 or more series contacts ON entire listing is printed in compressed format Refer to subsequent subsection titled F9 Corresponding Print Mode Continued on next page 50 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 3 2 Printer Function Menu F1 Continued F1 Port Function When the F1 Port function is selected from the Printer Parameters Menu five different selections are available for use in directing the selected listing to the desired destination LPT1 is the first destination that is available It refers to the standard parallel printer output port When LPT1 is selected no further definition of the port is required NTWK option is the second destination that is available It refers to the Windows default printer which may be a serial parallel or a network printer Printing is routed through Notepad application NTWK option will not work if Notepad is not available Font type size and other attributes are applicable as configured in Notepad Font type Courier New with Font size 8 on Notepad and 132 columns Print Option in the Printer Function Menu of Loader fits the maxim
494. ssion command to end the UMS owned by another Loader by selecting Ctrl F4 Master Clear Program Session from the Mode Change Functions Menu Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 71 3 2 Main Screen Display Continued Periodic statuses The blank area to the right of the permanent status line information is used to periodically display active keystroke based actions when you are performing general editing of your ladder logic program Table 3 4 presents descriptions of the four basic messages that might be displayed Numeric data can also be displayed in the periodic status area if the number keys or the numeric keypad is used to input numeric data when a data entry window is not open the value displays at the right side of the blank area Table 3 4 Periodic Statuses Status Description Ins Indicates that Insert key has been pressed and that Insert Logic Function is enabled Del Indicates that Delete key has been pressed and that Delete Logic Function is enabled Num Indicates that Num Lock key has been pressed and that keyboard s numeric keypad can be used to enter numeric data Caps Indicates that the Caps Lock key has been pressed and that all alphabetic keystrokes will input capitalized characters Industrial Automation and Control Honeywell Inc 1100 Virginia Drive Fort Washington Pennsylvania 19034 620 WinLoader Version 5 4 User Manual 620 8983 4 05 620 WinLoa
495. ster location where sequencer reads step number that driver requests to be output System Status Table Stores processor diagnostic information that can be accessed by the WinLoader or by a Pull instruction in the control program consists of memory locations that are 8 bits wide table is divided into three sections System Identification System Hardware and System Diagnostics refer to subsection 2 3 for more information Up Count In a counter a request to increment or the actual incrementing of the accumulated value by one Industrial Automation and Control Honeywell Inc 1100 Virginia Drive Fort Washington Pennsylvania 19034 623 WinLoader Version 5 X User Manual 623 8983 623 WinLoader 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions LDR005 4 05 ii 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 Copyright Notices and Trademarks Printed in U S A Copyright 2005 by Honeywell Inc Revision 01 April 01 2005 While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in its written agreement with and for its customer In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect special or consequential damages The information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice This docu
496. structions Continued Load sequencer Refer to Table 3 69 for load sequencer specifications Table 3 69 Load Sequencer Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Used to write 16 bit data word to specified step in sequencer s data table see Figure 3 62 Characteristics Operates independently of sequencer it writes to that is it can load new data into any step in data table regardless of current step being output to sequencer itself Is entered as output instruction on formatted line of ladder logic which consists of contact instruction used to condition or control execution of line data manipulation instruction such as bring in that places a data value on stack to be loaded into specified step as new step value used by unload sequencer to identify step number to be read load sequencer instruction which reads value contained in register address and uses value to identify step number to be written to reads last value written to stack and uses value as new data value to be written to specified step loads writes data from stack to specified step number of next sequencer in control program Load sequencer line of logic MUST be programmed in control program BEFORE sequencer that is to be accessed and AFTER all previous sequencers Is essentially a specialized data man
497. t F3 Reg to indicate that Function Block input parameter register values are to be loaded into 620 LC s memory 4 Follow prompts as directed to complete load operation Load does not take place if number of registers doesn t match or if any register addresses is different Register data include timer counter presets or matrix presets only if they are accessed by Bring Ins or Indirect Bring Ins elsewhere in program 62 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 Section 7 Function Block Library 7 1 Overview Section contents These are the topics covered in this section Topic See Page 7 1 Overview 62 7 2 Function Block Library Control Programs 68 Purpose of this section This section presents general overview of 623 WinLoader s Function Block Library which is shipped with each 623 6010 and 623 6020 WinLoader software program detailed descriptions of the following four predefined Function Block Library control programs Single Loop PID Function Block Cascade Control Two Loop PID Function Block Ratio Control Single Loop PID Function Block and Split Range Time Proportioning Single Loop PID Function Block Refer to subsection 7 2 Function Block Library Control Programs for detailed descriptions of these predefined Funct
498. t amp Display Functions 4 05 Acronyms 620 LC 620 Logic Controller ABC Asynchronous Byte Count Protocol ARMP Augmented Run Mode Programming CIM Communication Interface Module CPM Control Processor Module DCM Data Collection Module DOS Disk Operating System EOS End of Subroutine FB Function Block FC Forced Closed FO Forced Open FP
499. t Function Allows you to automatically page through your ladder logic program Subsection 1 7 F17 Block Functions Allows you to perform cut and paste operations of blocks of ladder logic Subsection 1 8 F18 Clear Display Function Used to automatically clear the main screen display program area each time a line of logic is entered inserted or overwritten in the program Subsection 1 9 F19 Last Line Entered Function Used to repeat the last line of logic entered at any point in your program Subsection 1 10 F20 Search amp Exchange Functions Permit you to search for every occurrence of a specified address and instruction and exchange it with either a new address or a new instruction and address Subsection 1 11 4 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 1 2 Software Mode Control Function F11 Software Mode Control Function characteristics The WinLoader Software Mode Control function is used to toggle the Loader software between its two modes of operation these modes are Program mode used to program or edit ladder logic Monitor mode used to display lines of ladder logic while they are being executed in the CPM True False conditioning of each line s elements instructions can be observed while in Monitor mode Using Software Mode Control Function Press F11 or Shift F1 MODE from the Edit and Display Functions Menu to change the WinLoader software from
500. t functions such as TAB branch blank element DEL and INS elements are available it is not necessary to return to the main logic group menu to access these functions For a typical example perform the Table 1 14 procedure to program a line of ladder logic with one normally open element followed by two normally closed elements Table 1 14 Logic Group Hold Function Example Step Action 1 Proceed as appropriate Check that F9 Logic Group Hold in Configuration Menu is toggled to ON and then begin entering line of logic by selecting F1 CONTACT logic element group OR Press CTRL F1 Never leave the CONTACT menu while entering contacts but if Logic Group Hold function was not selected you will need to select F1 CONTACT each time before entering address of the element Logic Group Hold ON acts as a default operation the capability must be de selected to OFF if it is not desired Another way to enter consecutive elements from the same logic group without leaving the logic group menu is to select CTRL and either F1 F3 or F4 simultaneously then follow steps 2 through 7 as follows this also causes a hold type operation on the group selected but only until the Esc key is pressed 2 Enter address of first element normally open contact 3 Select F1 from CONTACT menu to enter normally open contact 4 Enter address for second element normally closed contact 5 S
501. t is moved to last line of Function Block Body Page Down Moves cursor to next line if cursor is on last line of Function Block body it moves to first line Ctrl Home Moves cursor to FBI line Ctrl End Moves cursor to last line of Function Block body Continued on next page 54 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 5 2 Displaying Function Blocks Continued Function Block printouts Refer to Section 3 of 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions for information on generating printouts of Function Block ladder logic and documentation using the WinLoader s auxiliary Documentation Functions Menu 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 55 5 3 On Line Monitoring of Function Block Parameters 3 procedures for on line monitoring of Function Block parameters Use any of the following three procedures to perform on line monitoring of Function Block parameters Perform multielement display refer to subsection 1 6 of 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions LDR005 for information on performing multielement display Program opcodes for monitoring purposes in Function Block conditioning logic refer to subsection 3 3 of this manual for guidelines on entering Function Block parameter opcodes Select parameters for display in one of the following ways Set up WinLoader to permanently monitor parameter in Data Display Mode by creating parameter name with an as first charac
502. t line at current line number 3 Write line to 620 LC by pressing Enter to insert a new line at end of program Ins PgDn to insert new line between two existing lines or Ins Enter to insert new line to overwrite an existing line 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 41 1 11 Search amp Exchange Function F20 Performing Search amp Exchange function Press F20 or Shift F10 EXCHG to access the Search and Exchange function This function permits you to search for every occurrence of a specific address and instruction in a ladder logic program and to exchange it with either a new address or a new instruction and address Items that may be searched for and exchanged include Address only can be used to search for and replace exchange all or selected references of a specified address with another specified address Instruction amp Address can be used to search for and replace exchange all or selected references of a specified instruction type and address with another specified address can be used to search for and replace exchange all or selected references of a specified instruction and address with another specified instruction type or can be used to search for and replace exchange all or selected references of a specified instruction type and address with another specified instruction type and address Continued on next page 4
503. ta Display Functions 75 79 Edit display 78 79 Update display 76 77 F10 DOS Shell 80 B Block Operations Function F17 32 38 Block Operations Functions Menu 32 Copying ladder logic blocks 35 Defining ladder logic blocks 33 Deleting ladder logic blocks 36 Editing ladder logic blocks 33 Loading ladder logic blocks 37 Moving ladder logic blocks 34 Saving ladder logic blocks 38 C Clear Display Function F18 39 D Data Change Function 45 E Edit and Display Functions Menu 2 3 F G H I J K Force Functions F14 19 22 Force Functions Menu 19 20 Force notification 22 Forcing all addresses 21 Function Block searching for 18 Function Block marker searching for 15 L Ladder Logic List Function F16 31 Last Line Entered Function F19 40 Line marker searching for 15 Line number searching for 14 Logic element searching for 16 M N Monitoring ladder logic 5 Multi element Display Function F15 23 30 Accessing Multi element Display 23 24 Displaying individual bits 29 30 Floating Point Data value display format 28 Integer data value display format 27 On Off condition display format 25 26 O P Q R On line programming 7 Opcode element searching for 17 S T U V W X Y Z Search amp Exchange Function F20 41 44 Search Functions F13 11 18 Search Menu 11 12 Software Mode Control Function F11 4 9 Industrial Automation and Control Honeywell Inc 1100 Virginia Drive Fort Washington Pennsylva
504. tact Specifications SPECIFICATIO N DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 10 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Examines Input and Output Status Tables at specified address for OFF condition in order to pass power to succeeding instructions Characteristics Examines specified address in I O Status Table see Figure 3 1 to determine CURRENT condition if ORed result of bits read from I O Status Table produces zero NC contact interpreted as being in normal position closed instruction considered ON or TRUE if ORed result of bits read from I O Status Table produces a one NC contact interpreted as being in abnormal position open instruction considered OFF or FALSE Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a normally closed NC contact in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F1 to select the Contact Logic Group 2 Enter desired address 3 Press F2 to select normally closed NC contact Continued on next page 44 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 2 Contact and Coil Instructions Continued Normally open closed contact characteristics As shown in Figure 3 1 normally open and normally closed contacts have similar characteristics regarding True False conditioning they differ only in their True False responses Input Status Table is updated by Input Status Scan ISS at beginning of scan Output Status Table is controll
505. ted iv 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming v Table of Contents SECTION 1 FUNCTION BLOCKS OVERVIEW 1 1 1 Overview 1 1 2 Function Blocks 2 SECTION 2 FUNCTION BLOCK PROGRAMMING THEORY OF OPERATION 5 1 2 Overview 5 2 2 Function Block Operation 6 2 3 Function Block Parameters 16 SECTION 3 FUNCTION BLOCK PROGRAMMING 21 3 1 Overview 21 3 2 Defining Function Blocks 22 3 3 Entering Function Block Parameters 30 3 4 Entering Function Block Conditioning Logic 34 SECTION 4 FUNCTION BLOCK EDITING
506. ted that each FBU line may accommodate up to 8 PUSH registers and as many FBU lines as are required may be used to accommodate up to 45 input parameters The number of registers PUSHed is user selectable using the Function Block Selections Menu key F6 and is not affected by the number of parameters chosen You should select a sufficiently large number of inputs to provide storage for all word type parameters chosen Refer to subsection 2 3 Function Block Parameters for information on the number of registers required for each specific input parameter Continued on next page 12 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 2 2 Function Block Operation Continued Line 4 Function Block Output Parameter FBO line The Function Block Output Parameter FBO line represents the output parameters of the Function Block which are opcodes selected by the programmer to represent specific output addresses of the control logic refer to Section 3 Function Block Programming for more information on entering output parameters For Function Block TSpindl1 the FBO line has the format presented in Figure 2 8 Figure 2 8 Function Block Output Parameter FBO Line for TSpindl1 Note that like the input parameters the number of output parameter spaces contained on the FBO line is based on the number of output parameters entered in the external Function Block Display line up to 45 output parameters may be entered and the param
507. ted using the Address Comment Editor from the Documentation Functions Menu selected from the Main Menu described in Section 2 of this manual or while editing or monitoring ladder logic The Address Comment Editor is not available in the Documentation Menu selected from the Auxiliary Function Menu described in Section 3 of this manual Perform the Table 1 2 procedure to display or edit an address comment Address comments may be displayed from Loader Monitor screen in either PROGRAM or MONITOR mode Table 1 2 Displaying or Editing an Address Comment Step Action 1 Press Shift 2 Press Shift again to display the address comment if it already exists 3 Press E to access edit function 4 Edit or create address comment as desired Refer to subsection 2 4 of this manual for additional information on editing address comments 5 Press F10 when editing is complete to store address comment into PC s memory If editing changes were made upon exit from 620 Loader Monitor or 620 Stand Alone Loader mode a SAVE Changes to Disk LABELS COMMENTS Y N Y prompt appears press Y to save changes to disk if file already exists an Overwrite Existing Files Y N N prompt appears enter Y to overwrite existing file enter N to abort function To create address comment from Documentation Menu of Main Menu refer to subsection 2 4 of this manual Continued on next page 4 05
508. tentive Timer Specifications 70 Table 3 19 Counter Specifications 73 Table 3 20 Skip Instructions 77 Table 3 21 Not Skip and Retain NSKR Specifications 81 Table 3 22 Not Skip and Deenergize NSKD Specifications 82 Table 3 23 End of Skip EOS Specifications 84 Table 3 24 Data Manipulation Instructions 85 Table 3 25 Bring In Specifications 90 Table 3 26 Indirect Bring In Specifications 93 Table 3 27 Floating Point Bring In Specifications 97 Table 3 28 Send Out Specifications 100 Table 3 29 Indirect Send Out Specifications 103 Table 3 30 Floating Point Send Out Specifications 107 Table 3 31 Constant Specifications
509. ter for example Param1 press Ctrl Right Arrow to select Data Display Mode Temporarily assign parameter to be monitored by positioning cursor on parameter or its parameter name and pressing ENTER parameter is monitored until either another Function Block of a different number is displayed WinLoader is exited or monitored parameter is unassigned by placing cursor on parameter or its parameter name and pressing ENTER To display data for a particular parameter at any time position cursor on either parameter name or parameter itself When 620 LC is in Run mode and connected WinLoader is monitoring a Function Block line True False status of enable line displays on screen if enable logic is true WinLoader highlights in red FBxxxx of enable section of Function Block Display box In general assigning multiple parameter monitoring may result in contradictory data since parameter data is compiled separately from line data a noticeable slowing of update time while monitoring multiple parameters may occur especially when long scan times are involved 56 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 Section 6 Uploading Downloading Function Blocks 6 1 Overview Section contents These are the topics covered in this section Topic See Page 6 1 Overview 56 6 2 Overview
510. teristics Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 85 3 11 Data Conversion Instructions Continued Absolute conversion Refer to Table 3 63 for absolute conversion specifications Table 3 63 Absolute Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 36 LCs Symbol Usage Converts negatively signed two s complement integer to absolute positive value Characteristics Absolute value of 32768 cannot be represented since greatest valid positively signed integer is 32767 optional error status word may be assigned to monitor for this occurrence when this occurs bits 0 1 and 4 of error status word are asserted set to 1 and 13 is written to specified error address 1 bit 0 4 bit 3 8 bit 4 13 saturated value 32767 is placed on stack Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a floating point to integer conversion instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F9 to select Operators Logic Group 2 Press F6 to select Conversion Operators Group 3 Press F5 to select the absolute conversion instruction 4 Enter optional error address Continued on next page 86 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 11 Data Conversion Instructions Continued Absolute conversion characteristics Figure 3 54 illustrates characteristics associated with the absolute conversio
511. tes all lines in subroutine block False SUB is false and operates as if it were a False not skip and retain NSKR instruction all lines of logic are read but not executed while current data values and on off conditions are retained Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program an end of jump instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F8 to select Subroutine Logic Group 2 Enter appropriate numeric label 0 to 255 3 Press F5 to select subroutine instruction Continued on next page 66 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 10 Memory Reference Instructions Continued Subroutine characteristics Figure 3 47 illustrates characteristics associated with a subroutine instruction Figure 3 47 Subroutine Characteristics Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 67 3 10 Memory Reference Instructions Continued Return to subroutine RTS Refer to Table 3 56 for return to subroutine specifications Table 3 56 Return to Subroutine Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Used as a line terminator to identify the end of a subroutine see Figure 3 48 Characteristics When enabled causes normal sequential scan to be redirected to specified subroutine block Includes a user defined numeric label 0 to 255 which is used to identify subrou
512. th instruction is most significant of the two registers and is specified when instruction is programmed least significant register is automatically allocated by system as next lower address when viewed through WinLoader data read from Register Function is displayed beneath instruction when True when False the message No Data appears indicating that currently no data is being read can be changed using data change function this technique is often called forcing data because you are placing specific value on CPM s stack regardless of data read from specified address perform the following steps to use data change function Step Action 1 Use cursor control keys to position cursor to immediate left of instruction 2 Press equal key 3 Enter numeric value to be forced into CPM 4 Press ENTER or RETURN key 98 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Floating point bring in continued Table 3 27 Floating Point Bring In Specifications Continued SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a floating point bring in instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F3 to select Bring In Logic Group 2 Enter desired most significant address 3 Press F7 to select Floating Point Bring In instruction Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader P
513. th was specified and the software uses its default pathname which is the same path used by the WinLoader software This means that your ladder logic files data files are saved to and loaded from the same directory as the WinLoader s application files Default pathnames and file names for ladder logic must be specified in the Upload Download Function Menu but default file names for documentation must be specified in the Documentation Functions Menu described in subsection 2 4 of this manual unless the WinLoader was started from the same directory that contains the ladder logic and documentation files to be used or these parameters are specified in the configuration file Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 53 2 3 Upload Download Functions F2 Continued Selecting Upload Download Functions Prior to selecting the desired Upload Download Function consider whether the pathname needs to be changed As mentioned previously the current pathname is shown on the display at the bottom of the menu and is initially read from the configuration file Perform the Table 2 4 procedure to change the pathname as desired note that changes made from the Upload Download Functions Menu will not change the contents of the configuration file Table 2 4 Changing the Pathname Step Action 1 Select F7 Enter Pathname from the Upload Download Functions Menu WinLoader software presents a 30 character
514. the WinLoader to automatically enter either Loader Monitor or Stand Alone mode Refer to subsection 2 2 for description of Loader Monitor mode and to subsection 2 3 for description of Stand Alone mode By using Table 1 4 or 1 5 procedure you may reduce number of keystrokes necessary to begin monitoring or editing ladder logic program and can specify working environment for those operations Loader software exits directly to operating system without passing through Main Menu this allows commands to be used in any batch files you create Unless error occurs such as missing documentation file only keystroke required to enter Loader Monitor or Stand Alone mode after commands are entered is ENTER to acknowledge proprietary information screen If communication is established Loader software examines configuration file specified by FILENAME parameter determines what line to display initially and if documentation files should be automatically loaded Perform the Table 1 3 procedure to enter the Loader Monitor mode Table 1 3 Entering Loader Monitor Mode Upon Start up Step Action 1 Perform Table 1 2 procedure steps 1 and 2 2 Press ENTER after reading to acknowledge and clear display a menu appears Select F1 in the menu options to enter the Loader Monitor mode and tries to establish communications with a 620 LC Perform the Table 1 5 procedure to enter the Stand Alone mode Table 1 5 Ent
515. thod used by 620 LC for handling floating point values follows ANSI IEEE specification 754 1985 single precision format which consists of the following three fields sign bit 8 bit biased exponent 23 bit fraction 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 89 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Floating point data manipulation instructions continued Figure 3 14 illustrates the structure of the 32 bit floating point value which is used by the 620 LC Figure 3 14 32 Bit Floating Point Structure floating point operands used by 620 LC are 32 bits in length and require two contiguous Data Table Registers for storage when executed Floating Point Data Manipulation instructions operate on two contiguous registers see Figure 3 15 Figure 3 15 32 Bit Floating Point Operand Specify the most significant register address N and system automatically allocates next lower register address N 1 bit 15 in register N provides sign bits 14 through 7 provide exponent and bits 6 through 0 provide upper seven bits of 23 bit floating point value register N 1 provides lower 16 bits of 23 bit floating point value advantages of floating point notation include eliminates rounding errors inherent to integer math reduces amount of ladder logic needed to structure math operations increases range of data values available to 1 175494 x 10 38 to 3 40282 x 1038 increases precision in c
516. tics 84 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 5 Skip Instructions Continued End of skip EOS Refer to Table 3 23 for end of skip EOS specifications Table 3 23 End of Skip EOS Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 10 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Used with either NSKR or NSKD instruction to mark end of skip block Characteristics Marks end of skip block which begins with NSKR or NSKD instruction bearing same numeric label Should not be preceded by conditioning logic cannot create a skip block with multiple EOS instructions when within active skip block CPM reads EOS instruction which carries same numeric label as active NSKR or NSKD program scan resumes executing logic at next word in memory conditioning EOS has no effect next word is always first word in next line of logic Cannot be forced to a desired True False state using Force function Acts as a line terminator see Figure 3 13 Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program an end of skip instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F5 to select Skip Logic Group 2 Enter desired numeric label 3 Press F3 to select EOS 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 85 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Data manipulation instruction types Table 3 24 presents the eleven types of data manipulation i
517. tine and links it to its SUB Can be controlled by conditioning logic such as a contact if conditioning logic is True RTS is true and program scan is redirected to first word after JSR which caused subroutine to be entered False RTS is false and processor continues to any remaining ladder logic lines of control program It may be desired to have no conditioning logic precede RTS so that RTS is always True note however that it is also possible to include multiple RTS instructions within one subroutine which permits creation of IF THEN ELSE like logic to exit the subroutine For example you may wish to enter a subroutine execute some logic test for a desired condition and then if True return to main program if False execute additional subroutine logic or any other desired logic Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a return to subroutine instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F8 to select Subroutine Logic Group 2 Enter appropriate numeric label 0 to 255 3 Press F6 to select return to subroutine instruction Continued on next page 68 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 10 Memory Reference Instructions Continued Return to subroutine characteristics Figure 3 48 illustrates characteristics associated with a return to subroutine instruction Figure 3 48 Return to Subroutine Characteristics Continued on n
518. ting file press any key other than Y to abort the save operation default is N Load from Disk to 620 F2 Press F2 to access the Load from Disk to 620 function This function is used to transfer the contents of a previously saved 620 LC register table from the PC to the CPM s Memory Function When initiated this function uses the current path to retrieve the specified register table data values file If the file cannot be located in the current path a message displays stating Error Unable to Open File If the file is found the CPM clears any existing register table data files from its Memory Function before the new program is written there Verify 620 to Disk F3 Press F3 to access the Verify 620 to Disk function This function permits you to compare the contents of a 620 LC register table to a disk containing a 620 LC register table file and indicates whether the comparison is valid Verifying 620 register table data values is useful in that it indicates whether or not the register table data values in the CPM s Memory Function have been changed from the original master program Press Ctrl NmLk if necessary to pause the error listing to examine miscompares Press Esc to exit Verify function note that there is a slight delay before exit occurs Note that miscompare file created uses name specified during Verify operation with a RVR extension this file may then be stored or printed as a record o
519. ting that the file does not exist to correct situation edit title block to remove or set last eight characters of title to default file name preferred if last eight characters are removed default file name for program documentation becomes same name selected in 623 60 configuration file from Main Menu Figure 3 10 Title Block Name Check Index 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 63 A B C Address comments 6 Displaying 6 Editing 6 Address descriptions 3 4 5 Creating 3 4 5 Address labels 3 4 5 Creating 3 4 5 D E F G H I J K Documentation Functions Menu from Auxiliary Menu 35 59 Accessing 36 F1 Printer Function Menu 37 54 Listing Queue Menu 42 43 Printer Initialization File Specification Menu 37 38 Printer Initialization File usage rules 39 40 Serial port configuration procedure 41 F2 Printer Characters 55 F7 Edit Default File 56 57 F8 Edit Title Block from 620 58 59 Edit Title Block Menu 58 Title Block Name Check 59 Selections 36 Documentation Functions Menu from Main Menu 11 34 Accessing 12 F1 Function Block Parameter Name Editor 14 17 Deleting parameter names 17 Entering parameter names 17 Entering parameter name detail 17 Inserting parameter names 17 F2 F5 F6 Label Description Editors 18 23 Accessing 18 Changing text 23 Deleting characters 23 Editing entries 23 Functions 19 22 F3 F4 Comment Editors 24 31 Accessing 24 Command Mode functions 26 29 Edit mode 30 31
520. tinued on next page 38 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 2 4 Comment Editors F3 F4 Continued Comment Editor Edit Mode continued Table 2 8 Comment Editor Functions Edit Mode Key Function Description F3 INSERT To insert blank line ahead of line presently being edited press F3 INSERT key line being edited moves down one line and cursor moves to beginning of newly created blank line F6 DELETE To delete an entire line of text Step Action 1 Place cursor on line to be deleted 2 Press F6 DELETE selected line is removed and following text moves up one line F7 CURSOR To edit comments that have a similar format press F7 CURSOR to place cursor at specific location in 20 line by 67 character field marker moves along bottom line of comment edit field to column position selected indicating that new cursor position has been stored from this point each time a new comment displays in the comment edit field cursor appears at specified position in edit field horizontal location of this position is indicated along bottom border of Edit field by a character this indicator points to column where cursor will return when new line is initiated by pressing ENTER key F10 STORE To store comment text press F10 STORE function updates temporary work file with comment in edit field reference number automaticall
521. tion Block Display box in any appropriate parameter position Input Parameter Functions Menu shown in Figure 3 4 appears at bottom of main screen display Refer to Table 3 6 for descriptions of each available selection from Input Parameter Functions Menu 2 Enter desired input parameter address and type in either order and press ENTER 3 If desired to add parameter names refer to 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions LDR007 for procedure for entering Function Block Parameter names Fb and Fk each require two parameter locations PULL parameters require as many parameter locations as number of registers selected Figure 3 4 Input Parameter Functions Menu Table 3 6 Input Parameter Functions Menu Selections Key Selection Function F1 Contact Used for input from real I O or for logical control input from external program F2 Indirect Bring In Used to vary data source address for Function Block F3 Bring In Used to bring in data external to Function Block F4 PULL Used to retrieve data from real I O or from one or more sequential registers a PULL of n registers 0 lt n lt 9 results in n pulls of 1 written to Function Block F5 Constant Used to set a constant value for Function Block F6 Floating Point Constant Used to set a floating point value for Function Block F7 Floating Point Bring In Used to bring in floating point data that is set up in external program Cont
522. tion with the cursor and all characters at or immediately to the right of the cursor being scrolled to the right After Edit mode is entered the menu shown in Figure 2 5 below appears at the bottom of the display screen Refer to Table 2 8 next page for descriptions of each available selection from this menu Note the following display control key functions Press Up Arrow Down Arrow Left Arrow and Right Arrow keys to place cursor at any desired location on display screen Press Home key to move cursor to beginning of line and press End key to move cursor to end of line Press Ctrl Home keys simultaneously to move cursor to upper left corner of edit field Press Ctrl End keys simultaneously to move cursor to upper right corner of edit field Press PgDn key to move cursor down five lines Press PgUp key to move cursor up five lines To delete characters from any position in the edit field Place cursor on character to be deleted press DEL key not F6 DELETE character at cursor position is removed from display and all characters to right are moved one space to left Another way to remove character from display is to place cursor immediately to right of character and press BACKSPACE key in this case display doesn t scroll and removed character is replaced by a space character 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 37 Figure 2 5 Edit Mode Menu Con
523. tional Modes Accesses Operational Modes Menu to set modes of operation for ladder logic display programming and printer options Subsequent subsection titled Operational Modes Menu F3 System Type and File Loads Accesses System Type and File Loads Menu to assign type of system being used and sets file load conditions Subsequent subsection titled System Type and File Loads Menu F4 Stand Alone Parameters Accesses Stand Alone Parameters Menu which enables you to set stand alone configuration options for stand alone operation Subsequent subsection titled Stand Alone Parameters Menu F5 Multidrop Node Names Accesses Multidrop Node Names Menu to assign a Multidrop node name and address for Multidrop Loader network operation Subsequent subsection titled Multidrop Node Names Menu F7 Load Configuration Loads a previously saved configuration file to your PC s RAM memory Subsequent subsection titled Load Configuration Example F8 Save Configuration Saves current configuration to a file on your PC Subsequent subsection titled Save Configuration Example F10 Exit Exits the application ESC Escape Returns to WinLoader software via Main Menu Loader Monitor or Stand Alone operation if Loader Monitor or Stand Alone are selected Continued on next page 32 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 2 7 620 60 Software Configuration F6 Continued Paths and Files Menu Press F1 Paths and Fi
524. tions Continued SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Characteristics continued Send out data can be changed using data change function this technique is often called forcing data because you are writing specific value through send out instruction to specified register function address regardless of value read from CPM s stack perform the following steps to use data change function Step Action 1 Use cursor control keys to position cursor to immediate left of instruction 2 Press equal key 3 Enter numeric value to be forced into CPM 4 Press ENTER or RETURN key Programming keystrokes Perform the following steps to program a floating point send out instruction in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F3 to select Bring In Logic Group 2 Enter desired most significant address 3 Press F8 to select Floating Point Send Out instruction Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 109 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Floating point send out characteristics Figure 3 23 Floating Point Send Out Characteristics Continued on next page 110 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Constant Refer to Table 3 31 for constant specifications Table 3 31 Constant Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol
525. tions dealing with various editing procedures for sequencers are also presented in this section see pages 202 209 Table 3 67 Sequencer Instructions Sequencer Instructions Refer to page Sequencer 97 Load Sequencer 101 Unload Sequencer 104 Sequencer instructions Sequencer instructions are ladder logic elements that simulate a mechanical drum sequencer see Figure 3 58 In the sequencer instruction a block of ladder logic is used to control the drum s rotation The drum or sequencer table is a listing of data words where the one bits represent ON conditions and the zero bits represent OFF conditions As the sequencer table data is rotated the different bit structures provide different ON OFF signals to the devices connected to the sequencer outputs The 620 LC instruction set s sequencer instruction can write its data to I O Status Table see Figure 3 59 to include discrete output field devices where bit pattern is written to real world range of I O Status Table and internal coils where bit pattern is written to internal range or real world addresses used as internal coils of I O Status Table Data Register Table see Figure 3 60 to include instances where bit pattern is written to Data Register Table for use in other ladder logic operations such as math timers counters data manipulation etc and analog output field devices where subsequent ladder logic lines re
526. to address 5200 Figure 3 36 Basic Subtraction Operation Continued on next page 38 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 8 Math Instructions Continued Multiplication Refer to Table 3 44 for multiplication specifications Table 3 44 Multiplication Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Used to calculate the product of two 16 bit data values obtained through data manipulation instructions the product is generated as a 32 bit data value as shown below Table 3 44 is continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 39 3 8 Math Instructions Continued Multiplication Table 3 44 Multiplication Specifications Continued SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Characteristics In general 620 LCs only provide for signed integer multiplication operations refer to last portion of this subsection for information on scaling unsigned integers for multiplication Values being multiplied can originate from I O Status or Data Register Table and can be obtained using any combination of following instructions bring in Pull of 1 indirect bring in constant Product can be output to I O Status or Data Register Table using any of following instructions Push of 2 indirect send out send out Send out and indirect send out use only least significant 16 bits of product and should not be
527. to enter default label file name to be used by LOADER and UTILITY to store all forms of documentation default filename 620 will be used if no other filename is specified this name will be overwritten if last 8 characters to title block are defined F5 Temp Path Enables you to set up pathname where all documentation files are to be stored temporarily for display purposes Because these temporary files are accessed repeatedly speed of storage media has significant effect on overall speed of software since these are temporary files data storage need not be permanent it is recommended that a RAM drive or RAM disk be created and specified as temporary path a RAM drive for this purpose should not use system main memory up to 400K and is recommended only if it can be established in expanded memory beyond the 400K used by system a temp directory may be created from root directory on a hard disk system to use a temp directory first create directory on hard disk then using configuration program insert full path and directory name Table 2 16 is continued on next page 34 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 2 7 620 60 Software Configuration F6 Continued Paths and Files Menu continued Parameters F6 F7 and F8 from the Paths and Files Menu described in Table 2 16 below allow you to control the amount of main memory used for documentation in your system if your system has limited available memory
528. to write the displayed line of logic to the end of the control program INS ENTER Press Insert Enter to overwrite the existing line of logic INS Press Insert Page Down to overwrite the PAGE DOWN displayed line of logic ahead of the current line Continued on next page 112 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 12 Sequencer Instructions Continued Insert new step in Run mode To insert a new step to the data table while the processor is in the Run mode with CPM keyswitch in Run Program position follow the steps presented in Table 3 75 Table 3 75 Insert a New Step While in Run Mode Step Action 1 PAGE UP or Move to the line of logic which contains the PAGE DOWN sequencer to be edited 2 M Press the down arrow key to display the first five lines of the data table and the Initial Edit Menu 3 F6 Press the F6 Edit Step to enter the Full Edit Menu 4 F1 Press F1 Goto to enter or use the Up Down Arrow Keys to select the step number where the new step is to be inserted All existing steps will be moved down one step and the total number of steps will increase by one for each new step inserted When using F1 Goto the ENTER key must be pressed after entering the step number 5 F2 Pressing F2 Value opens a data entry window where you can enter the new value in decimal F3 F4 Using the F3 ON and F4 OFF keys in conjunction with the left and right arrow keys you can
529. trol PROGRAM ENTER INSERT a LINE BETWEEN two existing LINES INS Page Down DELETE an existing LINE DEL Page Down OVERWRITE an EXISTING LINE INS ENTER CLEAR displayed LINE from view Alt F8 DATA CHANGE NUMBER SYSTEM CHANGE Shift EDIT LINE MARKER OR DISPLAY LINE COMMENT Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 7 1 3 General Editing Procedures Continued Move cursor within a line of ladder logic Perform the appropriate Table 1 3 procedure to move the cursor within a line of ladder logic Table 1 3 Moving Cursor Within a Line of Ladder Logic Procedure Actions 1 To move cursor within a line of ladder logic using arrow keys Use cursor arrow keys up down left or right as desired each time one of these keys is pressed cursor moves one logic element space in specified direction 2 To move cursor to home position Press HOME key to return cursor to home position in 9 x 5 ladder logic element array 3 To move cursor to end position Press END key to return cursor to line terminator position in 9 x 5 ladder logic element array Move cursor between lines of ladder logic Perform the appropriate Table 1 4 procedure to move the cursor between lines of ladder logic Table 1 4 Moving Cursor Between Lines of Ladder Logic Procedure Actions 1 To move from line to line while editing a ladder logic program Use PgUp and PgDn keys
530. ts and terminator without interference AUTO function of compressed print mode has no effect that is in 132 column format all comments still appear above or below line of ladder logic as previously described cross reference instruction is in 80 column compressed print format If 132 column printout format is selected with all possible options enabled and compressed print mode is selected to be in ON position printout appears as follows format is most space efficient of all printout formats it places terminator cross reference as well as all comments associated with line of ladder logic to right of ladder logic permits more lines of ladder logic to be printed per page Continued on next page 54 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 3 2 Printer Function Menu F1 Continued Documentation Listings F2 Press F2 Documentation Listings from the Listing Queue Menu to access the Documentation Listing Menu shown in Figure 3 8 below This menu is used to select various selections for documentation printouts Refer to Table 3 7 next two pages for descriptions of each available selection from this menu When referring to Table 3 7 note the following Select one desired listing from any of the six available types and enable or disable the desired options Press ENTER to install options once desired listing is selected If Function Blocks are used in ladder logic program and if either F7
531. ts that illustrate WinLoader cabling to typical RS232 serial printers the Figure 7 configuration uses a 25 pin female connector the Figure 8 configuration illustrates an IBM PC AT parallel serial adapter 9 pin female connector Figure 7 Cabling to RS232 Serial Printer Using 25 Pin Female Connector Figure 8 Cabling to RS232 Serial Printer Using Parallel Serial Adapter 9 Pin Female Connector 2 5 Cabling to Serial Link Selector in Redundant Applications Installing cabling to Serial Link Selector in a redundant control system Refer to Figure 9 for cable wiring to a Serial Link Selector SLS in a redundant control system The first cable wiring diagram next page shows cable wiring from the 620 6150A Loader Terminal to the 621 9928 SLS the second cable wiring diagram next page shows cable wiring from a 620 LC to an SLS required for redundant applications only 4 05 620 WinLoader Installation 13 Figure 9 Recommended WinLoader Installation in a 620 Redundant Control System 14 620 WinLoader Installation 4 05 2 5 Cabling to Serial Link Selector in Redundant Applications Continued Installing cabling to Serial Link Selector in a redundant control system continued Figure 10 Recommended WinLoader Installation in a 620 Redundant Control System 4 05 620 WinLoader Installation 15 16 620 WinLoader Installation 4 05 Section 3 Software Installation 3 1 Overview Section contents These are the
532. type of backplane determined to be in the system The least significant nibble specifies processor backplane functional type 00H Undefined unspecified X1H Full rack two SLM slots available X2H Full rack one SLM slot available X3H Half rack The most significant nibble specifies Slave backplane type 0XH No slave rack present 1XH Full slave rack 2XH Half slave rack The 620 36 platform can determine whether or not it resides in a four option slot two SLM backplane It will then write either a 00H or 01H code as appropriate All other backplane types as well as any backplane type specification for the 620 1633 platform are specified by the user and written in this location by either a Loader Terminal device or an option card This byte is initialized to 00H upon cold start The 620 1633 platform will not otherwise alter this byte unless commanded to do so by a peripheral device Loader Terminal or Host via a CIM The 620 36 platform will only alter this byte if a four option slot two SLM backplane is determined to be present or if commanded to do so by a peripheral device 28 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 2 3 System Status Information Continued For 620 12 1633 36 Models continued 0016 SLMSTAT2 SLM 1 Diagnostics Status Register see NOTE below 0014 SLMSTAT2 SLM 2 Diagnostics Status Register see NOTE below NOTE Registers 0014 and 0016 pass the most s
533. u shown in Figure 2 4 next page This menu is used to configure WinLoader to be part of a Multidrop Loader Network with any connected 620 LC devices Refer to Table 2 4 below for descriptions of each of the available selections from this menu Each 620 LC s CPM must be appropriately wired and configured using a standard point to point WinLoader connection to operate in Multidrop Loader Network mode and must be assigned a valid nodal address refer to 620 12 1633 36 Logic Controller User Manual Form 620 8964 for more information on Multidrop Loader Network Once Multidrop Loader Network has been set up and connected processors and WinLoader have been properly configured you can communicate to any particular 620 LC on the network through the WinLoader simply by specifying the appropriate nodal address Multidrop operation cannot be disabled while CPM is active if CPM s Multidrop nodal address is changed while Multidrop is active WinLoader will change its current nodal address at the same time so that communications are not lost Once configured for Multidrop operation CPM will support both point to point and Multidrop Loader Network communications this allows you to remove any 620 LC from the network and connect it to a local maintenance WinLoader Table 2 4 Multidrop Configuration Menu Selections Key Title Description F1 Multidrop ENABLE DISABLE Multidrop operation default is DISABLE F2 Nodal Addr
534. ular 620 LC processor type Logic inverter instruction The logic inverter instruction inverts the status of the result of all True False logic solved up to the point where the instruction is inserted in a given line of logic this permits creation of Boolean algebraic statements in ladder logic Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 55 3 3 Single Bit Instructions Continued Additional information Bit read and logic inverter instructions are similar to contact instructions in that bit read tests for a single True or False condition unlike contact instructions however bit read accesses a single specified bit position within a 16 bit word in Data Register Table logic inverter instruction inverts the result of all relay ladder logic that is in series with it and precedes it result of inversion is then used to condition any subsequent logic both instructions may be used in series or parallel logic Bit write instruction is similar to coil instructions in that bit write returns a single true or false condition to a specified location in the Data Register Table unlike coil instructions however bit write accesses writes to a single specified bit position within a 16 bit word in the Data Register Table Continued on next page 56 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 3 Single Bit Instructions Continued Bit read Refer to Table 3 11 for bit read spe
535. um sized ladder line the best Printer errors are reported through message box and will abort the print requests COM1 and COM2 are the third and the fourth destinations that are available They refer to the standard serial ports If either is selected the Serial Port Configuration Menu is displayed as shown in Figure 3 6 Refer to the subsequent subsection titled Serial Port Configuration Menu for more information DISK is the fifth possible destination this selection causes the specified listing to be printed to a file name and pathname that you specify you are prompted for a pathname and file name when you press ENTER file created has file name you specify with extension PRN after pathname and file name are specified you are prompted to Overwrite or Append select Overwrite to enable software to overwrite any existing PRN file with same name you specified select Append to enable software to expand existing file and append listing currently specified to listing already in file this feature permits multiple listings associated with a single ladder logic program or single project to be printed to same file The print to DISK capability enables you to create a file containing a listing or listings that may be transferred to a different personal computer for printing this might be desirable if a system with a printer does not have the WinLoader installed in addition the print to DISK is
536. unction Block Contents function is set to EXPAND Figure 3 4 Ladder Logic Listing Menu Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 47 3 2 Printer Function Menu F1 Continued Ladder Logic Listing F1 continued Table 3 4 Ladder Logic Listing Menu Selections Key Selection Function F1 Title Block If toggled ON prints title block F2 Labels If toggled ON prints address labels F3 Address Comments If toggled to ALL along with F6 prints comment for every logic element in line of ladder logic ON prints comments for addresses with comment associated with it but NOT used as output anywhere in program OFF no address comments are printed F4 Descriptions If toggled ON prints address descriptions F5 Line Comments If toggled ON prints line comments F6 In Line Cross Reference If toggled ON along with F3 prints comments for addresses not used as outputs also enables printing of coil X reference and X reference of each element in line of ladder logic to its corresponding coil F7 Right Hand Rail If toggled ON prints power rail on right hand side of ladder logic line F8 List Function Block Contents If toggled to EXPAND if any Function Blocks are included in program lists entire contents of each Function Block in printout in line number sequence COMPRESS only Function Block Define line of each Function Block is
537. unction Block number pressing any other key will terminate the search When the end of memory is encountered or no Function Block number is found the following message displays 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 19 1 5 Force Functions F14 Force Functions Menu Press F14 or Shift F4 FORCE from the Edit and Display Functions Menu to access the Force Functions Menu shown in Figure 1 4 below This menu which appears at the bottom of the main screen display is used to access force functions which provide a method of overriding the status of contacts and coils as they are input from field devices or solved by program logic Force functions are typically used to assist in troubleshooting and or maintaining both your ladder logic control program and any hardware associated with your application Refer to Table 1 11 next page for descriptions of each available selection from the Force Function Menu When referring to Table 1 11 note the following Force conditions are written to the 24 bit Memory Word s history bits bits 20 and 21 and are therefore saved to disk with your program s ladder logic If a coil is forced to a specific state using the Force ON or Force OFF function only that coil will indicate that the address has been forced any similarly addressed contacts located elsewhere in the program will respond to the coil s state but will not indicate that they are being forced When u
538. unction Blocks Function Block programming Function Block programming is a modular programming technique whereby user programmed ladder logic is handled as a single programming element or Function Block Function Block programming lets you easily segment your program into logical control functions for example you may program a motor shutdown sequence as a Function Block With Function Block programming you simply copy and paste your Function Blocks for reuse thereby minimizing the effort required to duplicate repeated program functions The 623 WinLoader package includes preconfigured Function Blocks and you may also create customized Function Blocks Function Block generation editing display and printing are performed through 623 WinLoader software version 5 x Function Block programming is compatible with all 620 LCs except the 620 10 LC which does not use the data handling instructions necessary for Function Block support Benefits of using Function Blocks Function Blocks are designed to assist you in creating modular ladder logic programs Inherent benefits of using Function Blocks include It takes less time to assemble a ladder logic program from existing Function Blocks as compared with standard programming Function Blocks are stored in a Function Block Library which provides an overview of all available Function Blocks in your system Since Honeywell provided Function Blocks are pretested prior to b
539. ure 3 1 Block Edit Menu 24 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 4 05 3 2 Defining Function Blocks Continued Defining a Function Block with new logic continued Table 3 1 Defining Function Block With New Logic Continued Step Action 11 After first line is entered use either INSERT PgDn to insert each new line at current line number INSERT ENTER to overwrite current line with new line or ENTER to load each line at end of Function Block All editing takes place within body of Function Block at this point when entering lines note that WinLoader only displays one line of logic at a time however other than physical limitations of processor s memory there is no limit on number of lines that may be written in a Function Block 12 After all lines of logic have been entered for Function Block press Ctrl Page Up to display external FBD line and then select F17 or Shift F7 to access Block Edit menu shown in Figure 3 1 13 Select F10 Save to save newly entered Function Block If save protection level is set for either USER or OEM you are required to enter your security code to save Function Block Refer to 623 WinLoader Implementation LDR003 for description of security coding which is accessed through WinLoader Main Menu 14 Select F2 FB to save Function Block to disk Function Block is saved to either default pathname as displayed or any file name specifi
540. ure 3 16 Bring In Characteristics 92 Figure 3 17 Indirect Bring In Characteristics 94 Figure 3 18 Indirect Bring In with Indexing Characteristics 96 Figure 3 19 Floating Point Bring In Characteristics 99 Figure 3 20 Send Out Characteristics 102 Figure 3 21 Indirect Send Out Characteristics 104 Figure 3 22 Indirect Send Out with Indexing Characteristics 106 Figure 3 23 Floating Point Send Out Characteristics 109 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference vii Tables Table 1 1 Three Methods for Entering Ladder Logic Instructions 2 Table 1 2 General Editing Instructions Keystroke Guide 6 Table 1 3 Moving Cursor Within a Line of Ladder Logic 7 Table 1 4 Moving Cursor Between Lines of Ladder Logic 7 Table 1 5 Entering a Down Branch in a Line of Ladder Logic 7 Table 1 7 Entering a Blank Logic Ele
541. ure 3 22 illustrates indexing used with indirect send out first line reads value from register address 5000 adds 1 to this value and places this new sum back into address 5000 in line two Pull of 1 instruction inputs a value from address 64 Pulls from real I O read 16 bit words from analog and special function I O modules this value is then transferred to register function using indirect send out when instruction executes it reads current value in Reference Address and uses this value as Effective Address processor then writes data obtained from address 64 to Effective Address line three resets value in address 5000 back to its original value after it has been incremented to 6010 Assuming address 5000 is preset to a value of 6000 this permits routine to cycle index through history table and record a current value from field in addresses 6001 through 6010 Continued on next page 106 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Indirect send out characteristics Figure 3 22 Indirect Send Out with Indexing Characteristics Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 107 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Floating point send out Refer to Table 3 30 for floating point send out specifications Table 3 30 Floating Point Send Out Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 11 12 14 1631
542. ure 3 26 Pull Characteristics Continued on next page 12 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Push Refer to Table 3 34 for Push specifications Table 3 34 Push Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION CPM Compatibility 620 06 11 12 14 15 1631 1633 25 35 36 LCs Symbol Usage Transfers one to eight 16 bit data words from CPM s stack to specified location this data word can be written to Register Function s data table or directly to analog or special function input modules Table 3 34 is continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 13 3 6 Data Manipulation Instructions Continued Push continued Table 3 34 Push Specifications Continued SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Characteristics Specific Push operations for each accessible location include Data Register Table writes one to eight 16 bit words using specified address as most significant register see Figure 3 27 analog and special function input modules instruction writes one 16 bit word to each specified address see Figure 3 27 not used to access I O Status Table address that does not contain analog or special function modules these inputs are written to module in real time Push data addressed to real I O is not written to I O Status Table specifying address 4096 and greater transfers data from data table real time acc
543. utput in a line of logic Step Action 1 Press F2 to select the Coil Logic Group 2 Enter desired address 3 Press F4 to select unlatch coil 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 53 3 2 Contact and Coil Instructions Continued Latch and unlatch coil characteristics As shown in Figure 3 4 latch and unlatch coils have similar characteristics regarding True False conditioning they are used as a pair to control the latched or unlatched on off state of the same field device or internal coil Figure 3 4 Latch and Unlatch Coil Characteristics 54 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 3 3 Single Bit Instructions Single bit instruction types Table 3 10 presents the three types of single bit instructions presented in this section Table 3 10 Single Bit Instructions Single Bit Instructions Refer to page Bit Read 54 55 Bit Write 56 57 Logic Inverter 58 59 Bit read bit write instructions Bit read and bit write instructions have similar uses and characteristics these instructions permit you to access a single bit within a 16 bit word which allows reading the state one zero of a particular bit position and controlling or writing to the state one zero of a particular bit position can be used to eliminate the more excessive scan time and register requirements needed to mask off bits extend number of single bit addresses beyond maximum for a partic
544. ware Status F2 620 Self Test F3 I O Module Status F4 SLM F5 PeerData Net F6 Multidrop Refer to Table 2 7 next page for descriptions of each of these available selections If selection for displayed screen is chosen data on that screen is updated if another screen is selected the chosen screen displays Continued on next page 62 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 2 5 620 Diagnostics Menu F4 Continued Diagnostics Status Screens and Functions continued Table 2 7 Diagnostic Status Screen Selections Selection Function F1 Hardware Status Indicates 620 firmware revision level processor configuration settings for force data change and on line program functions overall self test results scan time and number of forced logic elements Refer to subsequent subsection titled Hardware Status Display Screen F2 620 Self Test Indicates status and or self test results of 620 mother board CPM Memory Module Register Module System Control Module I O Control Module and any option modules Refer to subsequent subsection titled 620 Self Test Display Screen F3 I O Module Status Displays status screen which shows most significant address of any failed I O modules along with any assigned labels and descriptions Refer to subsequent subsection titled I O Module Status Display Screen F4 SLM Presents diagnostic display screen listing status of each
545. window permitting you to specify desired pathname 2 Enter desired pathname Pathname may be used to specify any valid path available on hard or floppy disk in PC pathname may consist of up to 30 characters and can specify disk drive A B C etc directory sub directory etc If you want to see a list of all ladder logic files stored under present pathname enter DIR space anytime software prompts you for a file name 3 Press ENTER to verify that entry is correct and complete 4 Choose any of the available functions F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 from the Upload Download Functions Menu refer to subsequent subsections for appropriate procedures When any of these functions is selected a prompt appears requesting a file name of up to 8 characters enter the desired file name and press ENTER to verify that entry is correct and complete ladder logic is stored in file using pathname and file name specified Continued on next page 54 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 2 3 Upload Download Functions F2 Continued Save from 620 to Disk F1 Press F1 to access the Save from 620 to Disk function This function is used to save a ladder logic program from the CPM s main memory to the PC s hard or floppy disk drive When initiated this function uses the current path to save the specified ladder logic program If a program file already exists at the destination specified by the pathname a message
546. wo keystroke functions are available ALT F10 HELP pressing Alt F10 calls up on line Help screen for current display refer to Subsection 2 12 Help Screens in Section 2 of this manual for complete coverage of Help screens ESC Exit pressing Esc brings up exit prompt to exit Main Screen Display and return to 620 Selection Menu Software Mode indicates either of the following modes PROGRAM mode MONITOR mode Ladder Logic Output Element Description area displays three 9 character lines that describe output type ladder logic elements if displayed line of ladder logic includes this form of documentation it is automatically displayed here refer to 620 WinLoader Documentation Functions LDR007 for more information on documentation functions Figure 3 5 Main Screen Display Banner Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 61 3 2 Main Screen Display Continued Program area The center portion of the Main Screen Display is the program area see Figure 3 6 this is where ladder logic and supporting information are displayed Figure 3 6 Main Screen Display Program Area Continued on next page 62 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 3 2 Main Screen Display Continued Program area continued The program area displays one line of ladder logic at a time as shown in Figure 3 7 below a ladder logic line has a maximum size matrix of 9 input t
547. x x x x Delay DLA x Not Skip and Retain NSKR x x x x Not Skip and De energize NSKD x x x x Jump labeled 8192 8447 NSKR x x x x Indirect Jump labeled 8448 NSKR x x x End of Skip EOS x x x x Return to Beginning of Program RBP x x x x No Operation NOP x x x x Input Status Scan ISS x x x x Sequencer x x x x Load Sequencer LS2 x x x Unload Sequencer US2 x x Bring In B2 x x x Indirect Bring In lt B2 gt x x x Floating Point Bring In FP x 18 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 2 2 Valid Ladder Logic Instructions Continued Table 2 2 620 LC Instruction Set Continued INSTRUCTION SYMBOL 620 06 15 620 10 620 11 12 14 1631 1633 36 620 25 35 Send Out S2 x x x Indirect Send Out I2 x x x Floating Point Send Out FP x Constant K2 x x x Floating Point Constant FPK x PULL PUL x x x PUSH PSH x x x PULL System Status Table PULS x Add x x x Subtract x x x Multiply x x x Divide x x x Equal To x x x Less Than lt x x x Greater Than gt x x x Test for Zero Z x x x Binary to BCD BCD to Binary Converter BCD BIN x Integer to Floating Point Floating Point to Integer FLT INT x AND amp
548. xchange function press N to skip current element instruction and search for next occurrence of specified address instruction 5D Continue searching to end of program or press Esc to terminate exchange function Continued on next page 44 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 1 11 Search amp Exchange Function F20 Continued Performing Search amp Exchange function continued Figure 1 15 Search amp Exchange Function Examples Cursor Positions 21264 Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 45 1 11 Search amp Exchange Function F20 Continued Performing Search amp Exchange function continued Figure 1 15 Search amp Exchange Function Examples Continued 21265 46 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 4 05 1 12 Data Change Function Using Data Change function Press at a particular register address to insert new data into a desired register Refer to Figure 1 15 for a typical illustration of how to use the Data Change function 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 47 Section 2 Auxiliary Function Menu 2 1 Overview Section contents These are the topics covered in this section Topic See Page 2 1 Overview 47 2 2 Clear 620 Memory F1
549. y 62 Programs 66 77 Cascade Control Two Loop PID Function Block 5 69 71 Ratio Control Single Loop PID Function Block 5 72 74 Single Loop PID Function Block 5 66 68 Split Range Time Proportioning Single Loop PID Function Block 5 75 77 Index 86 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 12 93 Function Block Parameters 17 19 29 32 35 37 53 57 Changing parameter address or type 36 Changing parameter data values for Bring In parameters 36 Cursor positions for editing parameters 37 Deleting parameters 38 Editing parameters 36 37 38 Editing parameter names 38 Entering input parameters 31 Entering output parameters 32 Entering parameters 29 32 Input and output parameter types 30 Input Parameter Functions Menu 31 Input parameter unloading guidelines 18 Inserting parameters 36 Inserting parameter names 38 Loading input parameter register values 60 On line monitoring of parameters 53 Output Parameter Functions Menu 32 Output parameter unloading guidelines 18 Parameter passing theory 19 Parameter unloading 17 Saving input parameter register values 57 Industrial Automation and Control Honeywell Inc 1100 Virginia Drive Fort Washington Pennsylvania 19034 623 WinLoader Version 5 X User Manual 623 8983 Rev D 623 WinLoader 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions LDR007 4 05 ii 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 Copyright Notices and Trademarks Printed in U S A Copyright 20
550. y increments and any text associated with new number displays in edit field 4 05 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 39 2 5 Bit Comment Editor F7 Accessing Bit Comment Editor Press F7 from the Documentation Functions Menu to access the Bit Comment Editor shown in Figure 2 6 below The Bit Comment Editor is identical to the F3 F4 Comment Editors described in subsection 2 4 except that it has a bit field as well as an address field see Figure 2 6 Bit comment addresses may be any register address 4096 8191 and any bit value 0 15 Bit comments have a file extension of BCE and have the same file format as address comment files ACE Refer to subsection 2 4 titled Comment Editors F3 F4 for editing instructions and descriptions of each function key Figure 2 6 Bit Comment Editor 40 623 WinLoader Documentation Functions 4 05 2 6 Bit Label Editor F8 Accessing Bit Label Editor Press F8 from the Documentation Functions Menu to access the Bit Label Editor shown in Figure 2 7 below The Bit Label Editor is identical to the F2 F5 F6 Label Description Editors described in subsection 2 3 except that it has a bit field as well as an address field see Figure 2 7 Bit label addresses may be any register address 4096 8191 and any bit value 0 15 Bit labels have a file extension of BLB and have the same file format as address label files LBL
551. y password or security codes previously stored in your system either edit the information as described in Table 2 13 or use the Table 2 14 procedure Select the folder where the WinLoader program is installed and delete passwd fil to disable all security codes directly 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 29 2 6 I O Configuration Utility F5 Accessing I O Configuration Utility Press F5 I O Configuration Utility from the WinLoader Main Menu to list any previously installed I O Configuration Utility programs which may be used to program and configure certain special function I O modules Configuration Utility programs available with the WinLoader include 620 0020 Configuration Utility for 621 0020R Universal Analog Input Module this software along with three jumpers on the 621 0020R Universal Analog Input Module UAIM provide the sole means for configuring the UAIM refer to the separate 621 0020R Universal Analog Input Module and 620 0020 Configuration Utility User Manual Form 621 8989 for more information on how to use this configuration utility 620 0025 Configuration Utility for 621 0025R Resistance Temperature Detector Module this software along with some external jumpers on the 621 0025R Resistance Temperature Detector Module RTDM provide the sole means for configuring the RTDM refer to the separate 621 0025R Resistance Temperature Detector Module and 620 0025 Configuration Utility User Manual
552. you to toggle the CPM between its Run and Program modes of operation as specified in Table 2 8 below The main benefit provided by these functions is in being able to control the CPM s mode of operation from the PC which is running the WinLoader software without having to go out to the system to toggle its keyswitch 620 LC Rev 65 or less keyswitch must be in Run Program position and 620 DIP switches or software configuration must be set to enable Software Program Mode SPM described in subsequent subsection titled Software Program Mode These functions may be protected by security code if desired refer to subsection 2 5 of 623 WinLoader Implementation LDR003 for security code configuration procedure Table 2 8 Mode Change Functions Menu Selections Selection Function F1 Clear S W Program Mode Changes 620 LC CPM mode of operation from Program to Run F2 Request S W Program Mode Changes 620 LC CPM mode of operation from Run to Program Figure 2 10 Mode Change Functions Menu L T Loader Terminal LP Loader Port FP Fixed Port OP Option Module 4 05 623 WinLoader Edit amp Display Functions 67 2 6 Program Mode Change Functions F5 Continued Software Program Mode Information presented here regarding Software Program Mode and Mode Change Function menu selections Ctrl F3 Override S W Program Mode and Ctrl F4 Master Clear Program Session as well as Request SPM Pending Dis
553. you want copied starting address to reside Note that any number between 0 and 8191 is valid entry for Start and End fields software automatically checks for overlap addresses that when converted would be the same and allows only those numbers that do not overlap to be legal entries if there is an address overlap or a calculation that exceeds a specified range an error message appears and overlapping offset or range is highlighted 6 Press F6 after range and New Start addresses are defined software prompts for a file name follow prompts as directed to complete load operation Figure 6 2 Block Addressing Screen Continued on next page 4 05 623 WinLoader Function Block Programming 61 6 3 Loading Function Blocks Continued Loading Function Block input parameter register values Perform the Table 6 4 procedure to load Function Block input parameter register values from disk to a designated 620 LC s memory Function Block register values may be loaded in Program mode registers may also be loaded in Run mode if processor is of rev 65 or higher and number of registers is less than 64 Table 6 4 Loading Function Block Input Parameter Register Values Step Action 1 Press F17 or SHIFT F7 to access Block Edit menu shown in Figure 6 1 2 Select F9 Load from Block Edit Menu Block Operations Menu appears with following selections F1 LDR F2 FB and F3 REG 3 Selec
554. ype logic elements in series 5 parallel branches and 1 output type logic element line terminator Some logic elements may require the display space of more than one typical element for example a counter instruction is 2 elements wide and 3 elements high in this case only 7 input type logic elements may be placed in series with the counter Figure 3 7 9 x 5 x 1 Ladder Logic Matrix Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Implementation 63 3 2 Main Screen Display Continued Program area continued In addition to ladder logic the program area is also capable of displaying the following types of support information Ladder logic documentation to include labels supplying a 7 character description of logic elements associated with an address detail providing an element s symbol address label and a 27 character description and comment markers indicating that ladder logic line includes a comment which is a page of text used to describe the line Current line number Execution status of ladder logic which are messages indicating that certain operations are taking place such as forced elements exist in program current line is being skipped and current line is not being scanned executed Continued on next page 64 620 WinLoader Implementation 4 05 3 2 Main Screen Display Continued Logic Group Selection Menu The Logic Group Selection Menu
555. ypical logic element For example a counter instruction is two elements wide and three elements high For this particular instance only seven input type logic elements may be placed in series with the counter Figure 1 1 WinLoader s 9 x 5 x 1 Ladder Logic Matrix Continued on next page 4 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 4 05 1 2 General Entry Procedures Continued Series and parallel logic Any line of ladder logic entered in the WinLoader will be either a series parallel or combination of both series and parallel line of logic refer to Figure 1 2 which illustrates a line of each of these types of logic Line 1 in Figure 1 2 illustrates a series only line of logic this line has three contact instructions addressed 10 12 and 15 in series as well as a serial output instruction coil addressed 500 also referred to as the line terminator Line 2 in Figure 1 2 illustrates a parallel line of logic in this example the serial contacts addressed 7 and 14 are in parallel with the serial contacts 10 and 12 the contact addressed 15 is in series with both contacts 10 and 12 as well as contacts 7 and 14 note that the output instruction coil addressed 500 also referred to as the line terminator is always in series with the other instructions in the 9 x 5 matrix Figure 1 2 Series and Parallel Lines of Logic Continued on next page 4 05 620 WinLoader Programming Reference 5 1 2 General

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Modelos de rabeta 3.0 MPI ECT e 3.0 TKS  Arctic Cove MAC520 Use and Care Manual  Elmira Stove Works Northstar 1951 User's Manual  GE-Z420129H  Mode d`Emploi Vol. 2  Smartnav User Manual  タイャ安全ニュース - 日本自動車タイヤ協会  ITGS Project Report - IGCSE-IBDP-IT-IIS  mode d`emploi  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file